X

Inspiring Ideas for Modern Home

If you have been searching for a miter saw, then you might have come across different variants. 

Due to the sheer number of choices, most beginners have difficulty choosing the correct power tools. The first hurdle is usually the name of these variants. 

Moreover, even professionals are sometimes confused about which miter saw would add value to their workshops. Also, the differences might be hard to understand for someone who isn't used to the jargon related to power tools. 

Hence, to make things a bit easier, we have come up with this guide about the two common miter saws available on the market. We’re sure it will come in handy to compare the variations and help you get a clear idea. 

So, without further delay, let's learn about the saws! 

Single Bevel Vs. Double Bevel Miter Saw

A man with a board and miter saw close up, concept building and repair.

Rather than immediately jumping into the comparison, let's take some time to understand the bevel miter saw. As a woodworker, you will need to understand the basic principles to make your choice easier. 

What Is A Bevel?

The word “bevel” in woodworking stands for a sloping cut made into wood. In this cut, the blade goes through the thickness of the wood plank. It's usually done at a 45-degree angle, but it can differ according to the model of the saw. 

This cut is usually needed to create small pieces. Also, bevel cuts are significant for creating aesthetic-looking pieces, like a doorstop. Moreover, this is also important to smooth the edges to prevent injuries.

However, other than this style of cut, the word “bevel” also represents mobility in a miter saw. A single bevel miter saw can cut the wood in only one direction. In comparison, the double bevel miter saw can cut the plank in both directions. 

Other Cuts That Miter Saws Can Make 

Rather than just creating bevels, miter saws are great for creating different types of angled cuts. The most common cut made with a miter saw is usually the cross-cut, where a plank is divided with a 90 degrees cut. 

Also, the miter saw enables you to create the “miter” cut. This is an angled cut usually at 45 degrees, but the angle stopper can help change it. In this case, the blade goes through the width of the plank to divide the pieces. 

Here, we would like to add that the only major cut that the miter saw cannot perform is the rip cut. The cut is made along the length of a plank in it, so it can't be done with a miter saw. 

What Is A Single Bevel Miter Saw?

Now, it's time to learn about each saw variant individually. The single bevel miter saw is a must-have power tool suggested for all beginner woodworkers. It helps you to get the most aesthetically pleasing angled cuts without needing to do much. 

If we start from the basics, it is one of the most inexpensive bevel miter saws found on the market. Yes, this statement may change according to the model, but still, it's a reasonably priced item. 

Even though other saws, such as the table saw, may help you perform rip cuts and cross-cuts, they aren't meant to create angled cuts. A single bevel miter saw helps to cut the wood both by its width and thickness. 

The "single" in this saw stand for its limited ability to move in only one direction. Hence, you would need to flip the wood plank to get an angular cut in the opposite direction.

How Does A Single Bevel Miter Saw Work?

We wouldn't go in-depth about how the saw works. But, we will give you a preliminary understanding of how this fabulous tool makes your job easier. 

The usual single-bevel miter saw looks like any other standard miter saw. There is a handle on the top of this machine that allows you to maneuver it during cutting. 

Like all other power tools, it derives power either from electricity or batteries. So, when you are ready to cut the plank, grab the handle and push the trigger. This would get the blade whirling, bringing it down at a 90 degrees angle to create a cross-cut. 

However, the same saw creates angled cuts if you push the handle towards its bevel or miter movement. You can decide on the angles from the angle stopper. 

Want a bit more insight? Check out the different parts shared by both miter saws.

What Is A Double Bevel Miter Saw?

Seldom would you be able to make a difference between the single or the double bevel miter saw at first glance? A slight variation is seen in the size, as the double bevel miter can be a bit heavier. 

When it comes to the main divergence, it is in the ability to "pivot." You can move the double, or dual bevel miter saw in both directions compared to the singular models. 

The single versions usually move in the left direction, whereas the double can move towards both the left and right. This provides you with the advantage of producing bevel cuts in both directions without rotating the plank. 

Professional woodworkers often find turning the plank tedious, especially during a deadline. Hence, a double bevel miter does help to ease the process. However, there is no job that it can do that can't be done with a single variant. 

How Does A Double Bevel Miter Saw Work?

When it comes to utilizing a double bevel miter saw, it's just like the single variant. The only difference lies in leading the handle in the right direction. With this saw, you can make the bevel cuts without rotating the plank. 

All that is required is to place the plank on the working area and bring down the blade at the desired angle. As you go to work without further rotation, keep the kerf in mind while dividing the plank. 

The word "kerf" stands for the amount of wood that is turned into sawdust. It usually depends on the thickness of the blade. 

Moreover, the moveable handle of miter saws usually has a mechanism to lock it in place. Always remember to read the user manual for a particular saw before you start to use it. 

Common Parts Of Bevel Miter Saws 

Even though we are comparing the two saws, they are actually quite similar to each other. Except for the pivoting capacity present in the double-bevel miter saw, equal parts and mechanisms are present in both variants. Hence, let us have a look at the standard features that make up these helpful power tools. 

  1. Sharp Blade

One of the foremost things to check in a miter saw is the blade. In both single and double saws, the typical blade size is around 10-12 inches. However, 8-inch blades are also available. 

The blade size determines the capacity of a saw. So, a bigger blade will be able to cut through a bigger plank. Before getting a miter saw, make sure to check the width of any commonly used plank. 

Another essential feature of the blade is the teeth. If it has more of them, you will probably end up getting a smoother and faster cut. However, some newer models also come with blades with wide apart teeth that are used to cut with woodgrain. 

  1. Powerful Motor

The saw gets its power through the motor, so it should have enough juice for you to cut the wood smoothly. A staggering or slow motor may give uneven cuts which look bad. 

Most miter saw motors fall within the range of 15 amps, which is enough power to make accurate cuts. Another determinant of good saws is the rotation speed. This is usually stated through a number like 5,000 RPM. More rotations ensure a faster speed of cutting. 

In general, the speed of miter saws is around 3,000 to 3,800 RPM. A higher speed availability also provides the option to use the miter saw for materials other than wood. 

  1. Sturdy Table And Miter Scale 

As a power tool, the miter saw strives to provide you with precision. Even though you can move miter saws around, it's best to place them on a stable elevated surface. Moreover, the saw comes attached to a surface or table that allows proper steering of the machine. 

This table might be a tad larger in the case of double bevel miter saws, as it requires more space to cut the plank. Also, the scale to properly align the plank is usually on the table. There is also an angle stop selector that allows the options for cutting the plank. 

  1. Handle And Trigger 

To cut a wood plank, you will need to lower the blade by operating the handle present on this miter saw. This also contains the trigger that gets the blade moving. Also, the handle usually has gripping to make holding it easier. 

You will need to push the trigger and then carefully lower the handle to cut the plank. In miter saws, locks are also present to help you create different types of cuts. 

The handle also allows you to cut at an angle. While the movement is restricted to one side in single-bevel miter saws, the dual models let you maneuver it in both directions. Moreover, in sliding miter saws, the handle allows you to bring forth the blade and then cut from back to front. 

  1. Safety Features 

Safety is a crucial aspect of all power tools, and it isn't different in miter saws. Several layers of safety are added to these saws, including a blade guard, handle locks, trigger, and brakes. 

There is a plastic guard placed in front of the blade. When you push down the handle, this guard rises to expose the blade to proceed with the cut. Moreover, this ensures that your hand and fingers remain safe while the blade is in motion. 

Additionally, the trigger is added to provide more control to the user. Earlier saws used to come with on and off switches, but those were quite hard to control. The presence of a trigger lets you start and stop the blade as per your liking. Also, this allows for making delicate cuts on wood. 

Most miter saws also come with emergency brakes to stop in a few seconds if there is a need. Even though this might not be available in each miter saw, we suggest you get one with it. 

Advantages Of A Single Bevel Miter Saw

When choosing a suitable power tool, it's vital to look at the plus points. So, let's have a look at the best aspects of single-bevel miter saws. 

  1. Lightweight And Compact

Even though we wouldn't call a single bevel miter saw the most portable power saw, it's still better than other options. Most models have a compact body that allows you to transfer it from one place to another. 

Moreover, this tool does take up little to no space in your workshop. You can easily keep it in a corner without paying much heed to it. Also, some contractors even like to carry it on their outdoor jobs. 

  1. Simple To Use 

Beginner woodworkers often fret about working with saws. Yes, you will still need to take accurate measurements, but using the single bevel miter saw is much simpler. 

Understanding how the saw works takes only a few minutes, and after that, you are good to go. Seldom do these variants have an elaborate mechanism, as it doesn't require anything fancy. 

However, the simplicity of this machine makes it the perfect initiation tool for DIY enthusiasts and beginners. Unlike other power saws that may have several steps, operating the single bevel miter saw is relatively simple. Also, a lot of information is available on the internet to help you use the tool in an effective way. 

  1. Versatility

Don't think that you are going to get anything less with this power saw. It's able to do almost everything that the other miter saws are also meant to do. You may need a bit more time to get used to rotating the wooden planks, but learning to use the machine is easy. 

Moreover, this power saw is perfect for those looking for a reasonably versatile tool as a beginner. Even many professionals swear by using single-bevel miter saws because of their uncomplicated nature. 

  1. Affordability

Let's be honest; no one wants to go broke after buying their first power tool. Hence, this variant of miter saws is suitable for taking baby steps towards growing in woodworking. It may not give you the fastest operation, but affordability makes up the gap. 

Moreover, it's also an excellent option for those woodworking enthusiasts who are infrequent with their projects. Hence, you don't really need to spend a lot on a fancy power saw if you are going to use it once a month.  

Disadvantages Of A Single Bevel Miter Saw

As a fairly basic power saw, the single bevel miter saw does have some drawbacks. Here are some of them to help you choose the right saw for your work. 

  1. Takes Up More Time 

With the single bevel, miter saw, you can cut angles in only one direction. Hence, you will need to reload the plank into the machine to produce a cut in the opposite direction. This will take away some of the precious time you might have spent finishing the project. 

Even though this might not seem like a big deal for a beginner, it's indeed a pain point for professionals. However, people who have been using these saws for a long time will have picked up some ways to speed up the process. 

  1. Lesser Uniformity

One of the most vital points in favor of double-bevel miter saws is uniformity. Because of the need to constantly flip the plank, some amount of uniformity is lost in the process. Unlike the advanced variant, you aren't able to perform the cuts in one go. 

Moreover, you will need to practice a lot before you get to a professional level of accuracy. On the brighter side, it can be a good opportunity for beginners to learn the skills of doing the most with a simple tool. 

  1. Not Great For Fancy Cuts 

There will be times when you need to add aesthetic cuts to make a project look better. This is primarily done with the help of different trims. However, the reduced capability of this variant will be a hindrance to creating those. 

We have seen that cutting and installing crown molding is time-consuming and inconvenient while using a single bevel miter saw. Also, making matching cuts takes a lot of patience with this tool. 

  1. Unsuitable For Long Planks 

Do you plan on working with long wood planks? Then, you may want to skip on getting a single bevel miter saw as it isn't equipped to work with very long pieces. 

Moreover, long pieces require a lot of table space which is missing in these saws. Always make sure to check the specifications of a power saw before placing it to avoid incompatibilities. 



Single Bevel Miter Saw: Pros

  • Versatility
  • Easy to operate
  • Lightweight and portable
  • Good for beginners
  • Affordable




Single Bevel Miter Saw: Cons

  • Time-consuming
  • Need to flip the piece
  • Incompatible with long planks
  • Less uniform



Advantages Of A Double Bevel Miter Saw

If you are a professional looking forward to investing in a brand-new power saw, these points will help you understand if the double bevel miter saw is the correct choice. So, let's have a look at its advantages. 

  1. Work Faster 

The foremost feature that stands out in the case of a double-bevel miter saw is its ability to work faster. There is no need to flip the plank to get the proper cuts. So, professionals who need to finish multiple projects at a time will find it extremely helpful. 

All one needs to do is pivot the angle in the right direction to get a better cut. This helps in reducing the time necessary to finish a single project. Moreover, it's great for professional workshops where multiple tools are required. 

  1. Enhanced Precision And Accuracy 

As there is no need to flip the work, this saw invariably produces much cleaner and uniform cuts. The handle can pivot towards either left or right depending on the cut being made. 

Apart from speeding up the whole process, this high precision and accuracy also let you work with smaller details. This is why many professionals go for a double bevel miter saw as they progress in their careers. 

If you are looking forward to setting up a woodworking workshop, especially in home improvement, then this is an item you must include. 

  1. No Need For Flipping 

Even though flipping wood planks may seem like a common thing, the extra chore can often be bothersome. Other than adding boredom to work, flipping can actually mess up calculations. Hence, if you don't like spending an eternity on one project, a double-bevel miter saw might be your best choice. 

  1. Lets You Work In Small Or Large Projects

The greater size of the double bevel miter saw allows you to include larger wood planks compared to the other variant. Moreover, the ability to pivot the handle in both directions lets you work with larger pieces. 

This doesn't mean that you cannot work with small pieces. Besides, this is actually the perfect tool for intricate woodwork like handcrafted trims. 

  1. Adds Professional Versatility 

This point is especially for those woodworkers who want to take their projects to the next level. Along with making the work easier, a double-bevel miter saw can also help you learn new skills. 

These often include the latest features to make the power saws useful for regular use of the machines. As the popularity of handmade items rises, having your double bevel miter saw lets you pick up the fancier cuts. 

Moreover, these saws may also come with combination blades that enable you to cut materials other than wood. Also, the added benefit of compound cuts and laser guides is available in the latest models.

Disadvantages Of A Double Bevel Miter Saw 

As no tool can be without its flaws, here are some drawbacks that we observed about double bevel miter saws: 

  1. Expensive 

After laying your eyes on a double-bevel miter saw you might not want to let it go. However, it does come with an added price point which is justified by its quality. But, this might make it an unreasonable purchase for amateur woodworkers. 

Hence, we do like to suggest this variant of saws, especially to professionals who will get the most use out of it. Also, more benefits are added to the machine because of the price hike from the standard variants. 

  1. Heavier And Requires More Space 

Unlike the single bevel variants, these are probably best when placed in a workshop. The table is larger because of the ability to pivot in both directions. Also, the machine does gain some extra weight from the added mechanisms, which provides its ability to pivot. So, you may not be able to move around this power saw as the single bevel variants. 



Double Bevel Miter Saw: Pros

  • Saves time
  • No need to flip the plank
  • Good for working with larger wood pieces
  • Highly accurate and precise
  • Add versatility to cuts




Double Bevel Miter Saw: Cons

  • Relatively expensive
  • Heavier



Similarities Between Single And Double Bevel Miter Saws

It's time to talk about some of the similarities seen in both products. This will actually help you to choose any one of them without compromising on similar aspects. As we mentioned before, there are many similarities shared by the two saws as they are mostly the same product. 

However, at times, people forget to look at the similarities and instead gravitate toward the differences. Having a better picture of the common aspects is especially important for beginners and DIY enthusiasts. These points can genuinely help them save a bit of money if they aren't ready to invest in something big. 

Hence, let's have a look at the identical aspects of the saws. 

  1. Cuts Made With The Saw

We would like to begin with the fact that both saws can make similar cuts. Using a single or double bevel miter saw, you can get cross-cuts, bevels, and miter cuts. Both are equally helpful for creating the precise angular cuts that you may need for different projects. 

Hence, if you are specifically looking for a saw to create angular cuts, you can choose either. Moreover, most miter saws come with the usual angle capacity of 45 degrees. However, it might be a bit more in the case of double saws. 

So, rather than looking at variants, you may also look for different models of the same saw to get better features. 

  1. Technique Of Usage 

One of the crucial things about using power saws is to master the skill to use them. Even though the double bevel miter saw may have a bit more learning curve, you will essentially use a similar technique in both of them. 

Other than some minute design aspects that differ between manufacturers, these saws need to be operated with a handle on the top. Both variants are also available in sliding or compound options if you are keen on getting them. 

Hence, if you are a professional, there won't be a need to learn something entirely new to use either of them. 

  1. Can't Perform Rips 

If you are looking for a tool that might help in ripping a plank, both of these options will disappoint you. Rather than working lengthwise, the miter saw is meant to cut by the width of a plank. This is also a reason for these being useful for making precise and clean bevel cuts. 

Other options like a circular saw, or a table saw might be better options for ripping wood. Those options are also preferred for working with large pieces of wood, unlike miter saws. 

  1. Blade Size 

A common aspect seen in both variants is the size of the blades. The standard options include a 10 or 12-inch blade, but 8-inch blades are also available. So, even though the double bevel miter may accommodate a longer piece of wood, it will still take a similar width. 

Moreover, the blades are pretty alike, and you may even find the same ones being used in the tools produced by a single manufacturer. Hence, someone who already owns a miter saw will find it much easier to get a new one. 

Differences Between Single And Double Bevel Miter Saws

Moving on, we would like to draw your attention to the differences present in the variants. Till now, we have discussed various aspects of these incredible power tools to give you a brief idea about each. Over here, we will chalk out the contrast present between the two products. 

So, without any delay, let us find out what makes the two distinct. 

  1. Speed 

Professional woodworkers need to have speed so that they can finish projects on the stipulated timeline. Even though they can get the work done with a single bevel saw, it may take them considerably more time. 

However, using a double or dual bevel saw for the same project may save a lot of time. This is primarily due to the ease of use presented with the double bevel saw, as there is no need to flip the wood. 

Also, manufacturers may even add a slightly powerful motor in the double bevel options to juice up the blades. 

  1. Precision And Accuracy

Even after being close contenders, the double bevel miter saw takes away the cake regarding precision and accuracy. As a person doesn't need to flip or rotate a plank, the cuts come out much smoother and even. Professionals love this quality as it helps them to do flawless projects. 

With that being said, we would also add the point that beginners don't need to go the extra mile to get the double bevel variant. A single bevel option works just as well and performs almost the same tasks as the other one. 

  1. Usage

In the earlier section, while discussing the similarities, we talked about how it's similar. Here, we would like to point out the slight difference present in the double-bevel variant. 

As this saw can pivot in both directions, you may need to spend some time getting used to the motion. However, this won't take much time if you are akin to using a miter saw. 

Also, as the double bevel variant tends to be a tad heavier, you may need to get used to lifting it or using it in a stationary spot. 

Compared to it, using the single bevel version is as easy as it can get. All you need to do is read the manual and watch some videos to get started on the saw. 

  1. Cost

A glaring difference seen between the variants is the cost. This is why the costlier option, which is the double-bevel miter saw, is usually recommended for professionals. 

The single-bevel version is a little less versatile than the former option, so it costs much less. However, manufacturers may charge a higher price by adding features like a laser guide or some extra angle stops. 

Hence, it's always good to compare separate models before purchasing a piece. 

  1. Portability

When it comes to portability, the single bevel miter saw stands out as the lighter variant. Hence, many professionals like to have both saws to use when the need arises. 

Also, it is easier to carry a single bevel miter saw to a job site as a lighter option. In comparison, the larger size and the heavier weight of the double-bevel version may make it impossible to do so. 

Therefore, woodworkers who work regularly may need access to both power saws to make their job easier. 

Single Bevel Vs. Double Bevel Miter Saw FAQ 

Is this your first time learning in-depth about miter saws? Here are some helpful answers to common queries that people have about single-bevel vs. double-bevel miter saws. 

Is A Miter Saw Worth It?

Yes, a miter saw is definitely worth your investment. It lets you make angled cuts which are crucial to finish different woodworking projects. Moreover, the miter saw can also perform bevel cuts that you cannot manage with a circular or table saw.

Can You Use A Miter Saw On A Regular Table?

To answer it simply, yes, you can use the miter saw on a regular table. However, it is always crucial to find a table that has enough stability to hold the miter saw in place. If you happen to have a double bevel miter saw that's heavier, you may want to place it on a fixed spot.

Can A 12-inch Miter Saw Blade Cut A 4x6 Board?

When a miter saw has larger blades, it suggests the width that it can handle. So, the 12-inch blade will cut the 4x6 board quite quickly. Moreover, the 12-inch blade will also cut 2x8 and 2x6 boards. Check out the guide of a miter saw before buying it to ensure that it supports a specific wood size.

Do I Need A Double Bevel Miter Saw?

If you are an amateur at woodworking, we will suggest you not to buy a double bevel miter saw. The reason being that it isn't starkly different from the single variant. It only makes cutting angles a tad easier.

However, you may get the same results with a single bevel miter saw with a bit of practice. But, if you are a professional who is thinking of upgrading to a better model, then you can invest in it.

Are Sliding Miter Saws Better?

We wouldn't categorize a sliding miter saw as a better saw. Instead, it is much easier to use and can provide cleaner cuts. However, it also costs a bit more compared to the usual models. If you have a reasonable budget, then a sliding miter saw might be an excellent first choice to make woodworking simpler.

Who Should Get The Single Bevel Miter Saw?

We would like to recommend the single bevel miter saw for beginners and amateur woodworkers. With this simple power saw, you will get perfect angular cuts to give your projects a professional look.

Initially, you may have to pick up the skill of proper measurement and rotating the plank with perfection. However, we are sure that you will be able to grasp it quickly. And, in the future, when you spend on a double bevel variant, using it will become much more manageable.

Moreover, we would also like to recommend the single variant to professionals who work on job sites. Keep it for the days when you need to carry a saw to avoid lugging the heavy double-bevel variant.

Who Should Get The Double Bevel Miter Saw?

We would like to recommend the double bevel miter saw to professionals and serious woodworkers. If you have been looking to make precise angular cuts, it will give you the perfect results.

Having a double bevel saw is a must for workshops as it hurries up the work process by cutting down the time you spend on each project. Also, if you have used a miter saw before, learning to use the variant won't take much time.

Moreover, it also helps to create great-looking handmade products with some of the best finishes. If you are into making bevel cuts, then look no further than the double bevel miter saw.

Wood cutting with circular saw. Closeup of mature man sawing lumber.

Verdict

We are coming to the end of comparing two great power tools that have managed to make woodworking a breeze. However, it's time to point out that there can never be a clear winner while comparing the two variants. 

On having a closer look, we found positives and negatives for both of them. Hence, the choice will rely on the expectations and requirements of the user. 

Moreover, you should keep your woodworking skills in mind before purchasing either the single-bevel variant or the double-bevel variant. If you are still curious, you can just visit a store to check out some of the top models. 

With that, we would like to say goodbye. Don't forget to let us know if you have any queries regarding single-bevel vs. double-bevel miter saws. 

Till then, take care and have a nice day!

Related Articles

Different Types of Saws & How to Use Them

Table Saw Vs. Circular Saw  

Reciprocating Saw vs. Jigsaw 

10 Inch Vs. 12 Inch Miter Saw 

DeWalt DW745 Vs DWE7480

7 Best Bandsaws for Resawing

5 Best Toe Kick Saws

13 Best Sliding Miter Saw 

13 Best Hybrid Table Saw  

11 Best Track Saws 

13 Best Hybrid Table Saw 

11 Best Belt Sanders Right Now

9 Best Spindle Sander

9 Best Hand Sanders  

13 Best Palm Sanders

Embarking on a home decor journey, this guide unveils 33 affordable DIY nightstand ideas, each marrying practicality with creative flair. It begins with transforming a basic table with a wooden top, a nod to elegance in simplicity, and progresses to up-cycling wooden beams into stunning nightstands, celebrating the beauty of reclaimed materials. The guide seamlessly integrates practical solutions, like building a nightstand full of drawers for those needing extra storage, with innovative twists, such as repurposing an IKEA Expedit shelf into a stylish bedside piece. Wooden crates, often underrated, are reimagined vertically to add rustic charm, while an old door finds new life as an eye-catching nightstand backdrop. Contemporary tastes are catered to with a floating nightstand adorned in teal accents, and salvaged wood takes on a new role in tailored designs. Each idea, from nightstands shaped around unique pieces of wood to those combining plywood with hairpin legs, is infused with simplicity and functionality. Greenery enters the scene with wooden crates on hairpin legs, while color and pattern find their way into minimalist designs. The guide also embraces industrial aesthetics with wood and pipe combinations, alongside rustic vibes from dual wooden box nightstands. For those with a penchant for customization, there's inspiration in revamping antique pieces, personalizing with stenciling, or opting for bold black and white stripes. Light-hearted designs include using a small IKEA ladder or building a mid-century piece, and for a touch of glamour, coral and gold nightstands make an appearance. The guide concludes with ingenious uses of pallet wood, suitcase side tables, and the understated charm of cinder-block nightstands, ensuring there's an idea for every taste and style.

1. Transform a simple table with a wooden top

1. TRANSFORM A SIMPLE TABLE WITH A WOODEN TOP

Pallets can offer you the wood needed for the craft, a spectacular way to revamp an old side-table or a mass produced one that you can buy with little costs but you don`t actually fancy. The wooden texture bring coziness and warmth and in airy interiors, Scandinavian decor this is definitely a recipe for success.

via welivedhappilyeverafter.com

2. Up-cycle wooden beams into epic diy wooden nightstands

2. UP-CYCLE WOODEN BEAMS INTO EPIC DIY WOODEN NIGHTSTANDS

The process itself is relatively simple if you are experienced with power tools yet the result is extraordinary rewardful, enough to invite a friend to help with the project, an exemplary nightstand will be born and a memorable experience between friends, forged.

via etsy.com

3. Build a nightstand full of drawers

3. BUILD A NIGHTSTAND FULL OF DRAWERS

A simple item can greatly enhance the storage in your home and the chest-like solution above is no exception. This shape can take any color, receive any finish you desire that might help you integrate it seamlessly into your decor.

via ana-white.com

4. Use an Expedit IKEA shelf as an epic nightstand

4. USE AN EXPEDIT IKEA SHELF AS AN EPIC NIGHTSTAND

A popular IKEA choice that can be transformed through the items planted in it. Combine silver and gold accents with warm textures like wood and paper on a white or black background piece.

via theeverygirl.com

5. Stack wooden crates vertically into an epic display

5. STACK WOODEN CRATES VERTICALLY INTO AN EPIC DISPLAY

The back and forth crates offer a space to place your watch and multiple shelves to store your nightstand book.

via alvhem.com

6. Up-cycle a door into an epic background for your nightstand

6. UP-CYCLE A DOOR INTO AN EPIC BACKGROUND FOR YOUR NIGHTSTAND

via polkapics.net

7. Floating diy nightstand with teal color accents

DIY Table de nuit graphique 13 7. FLOATING DIY NIGHTSTAND WITH TEAL COLOR ACCENTS

DIY Table de nuit graphique 2

DIY Table de nuit graphique 3

A pretty brilliant craft with a complete tutorial that one ought to consider for a modern vibe in the household, the look is exemplary, the colors can be changed to match any design line and the floating nightstand emphasizing the feeling of space, by freeing floor space.

via paris-lareunion.blogspot.ro

8. Tailor a diy nightstand with salvaged wood

8. TAILOR A DIY NIGHTSTAND WITH SALVAGED WOOD

http%3A%2F%2F4.bp.blogspot.com%2F-HMxwvXZr84k%2FUjN8kLZ3WaI%2FAAAAAAAABSg%2FYneyPD3LUjA%2Fs640%2FIMG_2109

http%3A%2F%2F4.bp.blogspot.com%2F-1FcwH6Spadc%2FUjN811coT4I%2FAAAAAAAABSs%2FTQ9qjC9Rs84%2Fs640%2FUntitled-1

The craft uses salvaged wood in a simple rectangular shape with inexpensive legs to form a modern nightstand.

via ceebeeandj.com

9. Nightstand shaped around a brilliant piece of wood

9. NIGHTSTAND SHAPED AROUND A BRILLIANT PIECE OF WOOD

If you are to find the right piece of wood in the recycling yard it is your responsibility to put it to good use, to bring that legendary texture forward. A simple open-shelve nightstand might be the answer.

via Pinterest

10. Plywood and hairpin legs nightstand

DIY MID CENTURY TABLE 10. PLYWOOD AND HAIRPIN LEGS NIGHTSTAND

The hairpin legs  known to be a blessing to most crafts as their look emphasizes the feeling of space a great deal, combine that with plywood in light tones and the airy ambiance will give the craft wings. Simple yet brilliant, very much appreciated in design.

via burkatron.com

11. Plant a wooden crate on hairpin legs

 11. PLANT A WOODEN CRATE ON HAIRPIN LEGS

One could use only two hairpin legs and mount the wooden crate on the wall properly or none at all to further emphasize the feeling of space

via dwellbeautiful.com

12. Simple elements can bring color and pattern

12. SIMPLE ELEMENTS CAN BRING COLOR AND PATTERN

Mix and match colors and patterns to boost comfort and graphic aesthetics alike.

Source Unknown

13. Create an nightstand with wood and pipes

13. CREATE AN NIGHTSTAND WITH WOOD AND PIPES

Use the industrial decor to your advantage through inexpensive means at the expense of a fun craft.

via The Golden Sycamore

14. Design Brilliance - X DIY Nightstand

14. DESIGN BRILLIANCE - X DIY NIGHTSTAND

Coziness and warmth in a powerful wooden texture combined with an impeccable stark white support. Brilliant design piece, easy to realize at home.

via My Daily Randomness

15. Two wooden boxes shaping a rustic nightstand

15. TWO WOODEN BOXES SHAPING A RUSTIC NIGHTSTAND

The simplest diy nightstand in our guide probably, the craft presents two wooden boxes in a great shape on top of each other, coziness and warmth in a simple package.

via Simply Real Moms

16. Simple layout nightstand with immense storage space

16. SIMPLE LAYOUT NIGHTSTAND WITH IMMENSE STORAGE SPACE

A compact unit can shelter a great amount of storage, insanely simple craft that can contribute to a clutter free home a great deal.

via Shanty 2 Chic

17. Teal rebuilding a nightstand

17. TEAL REBUILDING A NIGHTSTAND

Powerful colors can be bold enough to change a setting. Pick up an old nightstand from the flea market and rebuild it with color; side-tables can be transformed with ease as well.

via Craft Habit

18. Revamp an antique nightstand

18. REVAMP AN ANTIQUE NIGHTSTAND

via Sew Woodsy

19. Custom stenciling and color

19. CUSTOM STENCILING AND COLOR

Invite a new vibe in your decor; create custom stencils to feature the pattern of your choosing and match with bold colors. You are to tailor your own future, start with a furniture piece.

via Doodle Craft

20. Black and white stripped nightstand

19 Simply Brilliant Cheap DIY Nightstand Idea 20. BLACK AND WHITE STRIPPED NIGHTSTANDs homesthetics decor (6)

via See Kate Sew

22. White withered wooden boxes

22. WHITE WITHERED WOODEN BOXES

Two crate are enough to shape a nightstand. You can color them, leave them bare or create that withered look, a look very much appreciated by the DIY community.

via Learning Creating Living

23. Use a small ikea ladder as a nightstand

23. USE A SMALL IKEA LADDER AS A NIGHTSTAND

Very simple, inexpensive and versatile, you can customize it a great deal it goes without saying that multi-purpose furniture pieces are a very good addition to any home.

via Everything Emily

24. Build a mid-century nightstand

24. BUILD A MID-CENTURY NIGHTSTAND

A guided tutorial is able to aid you in your endeavor, craft the perfect solution, shape your dream decor.

via Build Basic

25. Nestle a coral and gold nightstand in your decor

25. NESTLE A CORAL AND GOLD NIGHTSTAND IN YOUR DECOR

Revamp timeless shapes with color, they`re able to rebuild your present beautifully.

via The Happy Housie

26. Create a petite rustic nightstand

26. CREATE A PETITE RUSTIC NIGHTSTAND

The full plans and tutorial will make this plan easy to realize and extraordinary fast to build. Shape your decor.

via Shanty 2 Chic

27. Coral nightstand nestling intricate textures

27. CORAL NIGHTSTAND NESTLING INTRICATE TEXTURES

A nightstand picked up for little to no costs that can be transformed inexpensively into a very powerful accent in your home.

via brepurposed

28. Nestle color indoors in airy ambiance

28. NESTLE COLOR INDOORS IN AIRY AMBIANCE

via The Hunt

29. Emphasize a piece of furniture with a mirror-chromed finish

29. EMPHASIZE A PIECE OF FURNITURE WITH A MIRROR-CHROMED FINISH

via The Steen Style

30. Create a cool petite floating nightstand

30. CREATE A COOL PETITE FLOATING NIGHTSTAND

A brilliant nightstand can be realized within minutes, a very simple, fresh look worth pursuing.

via Monsters Circus

31. Create brilliant pallet wood nightstand

31. CREATE BRILLIANT PALLET WOOD NIGHTSTAND

An experienced diy enthusiast that knows his power tools can create the craft with absolutely no costs and the result is extraordinary. Having crafter-friends might be considered a great asset from this point of view.

via Instructables

32. Build a diy suitcase side table

32. BUILD A DIY SUITCASE SIDE TABLE

The side-table can be built with any legs and thus the possibilities are endless. Get creative!

via The Weathered Door

33. Simple cinder-block nightstand

33. SIMPLE CINDER-BLOCK NIGHTSTAND

Three cinder-blocks properly cleaned can aid your decor in minutes. The storage, shelving options are built in and the exposed concrete can look interesting. Simple and efficient way to intervene in your decor.

Source Unknown

The nightstand is very important even though it is often overlooked, one should ensure that this item resides in the bedroom as it can be "built" with absolutely no costs. Shape your home beautifully, forge the epic nightstand that will literally be by your side for hours and hours.

What do you think?

We would love to hear your opinion on the subject in the comment section below.

Basketball is a very popular theme for either a children’s room or for that man-cave sanctuary. The good news is that it doesn't cost much to create this environment and many of the products are available online for minimal cost. Some wall art, a few items of memorabilia, and of course that wall-hoop is all it takes to turn a hum-drum room into a fun, sport’s themed environment.

Inspiring Basketball Themed Bedroom

Simple Steps to Consider For an Inspiring Basketball Themed Bedroom homesthetics decor (4)

Start with the art

The first thing that attracts the eye when walking into a room is the wall art and there’s a range of prints and framed art available on the market. The brightly-colored ball itself will be one of the main features but there are plenty of vintage prints available, which look great when hung above a bed. The larger prints will make an impact but use a little imagination and consider hanging team vests along one wall and consider items such as basketball-shaped clocks. Using a stencil to print team names directly onto a blank wall can also be very effective and you can buy large 2D team figures to hang on the walls.

Simple Steps to Consider For an Inspiring Basketball Themed Bedroom homesthetics decor (5)

Create your court

If you’re someone who likes to take it one step further then why not create your own indoor basketball mini-court? If your room already has varnished or hardwood floors then you’re ahead of the game and all that’s required is some floor markings and a hoop attached to the wall. Of course, this isn’t going to be a full-sized court but more likely just a corner of the room where you can throw a few slam-dunks. Paint the walls in your team colors and stencil up a few inspirational Michael Jordan quotes onto the court area.

Simple Steps to Consider For an Inspiring Basketball Themed Bedroom homesthetics decor (6)

Team memorabilia

Collecting sports memorabilia is a fascinating past-time and vintage finds can look great on walls or shelves. Check out those auction websites for framed prints, autographed posters, and even ‘signed by the team’ vests and balls. If you can get your hands on some authentic items then this will make a great display when collected together and will definitely impress visitors. Look out for game tickets that can be framed and search out those vintage magazines that can be fanned out on table tops.

You should be able to pick these things up easily at your nearest superstore or, if you’re a British reader, in your local Tesco. Don’t forget those themed bedspreads, pillowcases, the best in-ground basketball hoop you can find, and even rugs with court designs.

Get creative and experiment a lot with your ideas until you finally achieve that perfect look.

Considering Acoustics for Your Indoor Court

In creating a basketball-themed bedroom, one important aspect often overlooked is the acoustic properties of the room. Particularly in a residential setting, soundproofing becomes a necessary consideration to prevent noise disturbances to other members of the household or neighbors. One can achieve this through various methods. For instance, introducing sound barriers or absorbent materials, like foam panels or heavy curtains, can significantly reduce the noise generated in the room. Additionally, opting for sound-absorbent flooring materials instead of hard surfaces can dampen the sound of bouncing basketballs. Considering these measures not only ensures a serene household environment but also enhances the overall comfort and usability of the basketball-themed bedroom. For more in-depth guidance on how to soundproof your room, there are dedicated resources available that detail proven methods for reducing noise in your home.

Simple Steps to Consider For an Inspiring Basketball Themed Bedroom homesthetics decor (7) Simple Steps to Consider For an Inspiring Basketball Themed Bedroom homesthetics decor (8) Simple Steps to Consider For an Inspiring Basketball Themed Bedroom homesthetics decor (1) Simple Steps to Consider For an Inspiring Basketball Themed Bedroom homesthetics decor (2) Simple Steps to Consider For an Inspiring Basketball Themed Bedroom homesthetics decor (3)

 

What do you think? We would love to hear your opinion on Basketball Themed Bedrooms in the comment section below.

Related Articles

12 Ways To Put Your Bedroom Corner Space To Good Use

29 Brilliant Easy-to-Build DIY Platform Bed

21 Mindbogglingly Beautiful Fairy Tale Bedrooms for Kids

21 Super Small Nightstands Ready to Fit in Petite Bedrooms

37 Simply Spectacular Tree Bed Designs to Pursue

Recycled Pallet Bed Frames – DIY Pallet Collection

15 Creative Small Beds Ideas For Small Spaces

30 Small Bedroom Interior Designs Created to Enlargen Your Space

37 Smart DIY Hanging Bed Tutorials and Ideas to Do

Bedroom Christmas Lights Ideas For A Cozy Atmosphere

32 Dreamy Bedroom Designs For Your Little Princess

100 Inexpensive DIY Headboard Ideas for Your Bedroom Design

47 Stylish Floating Bed Design Ideas

53 Incredible Hanging Beds to Float in Peace

33 Epic Navy Blue Bedroom Design Ideas to Inspire You

33 Simply Brilliant Cheap DIY Nightstand Ideas

A garden is a place in which we find refugee at the end of a long day, we soothe our nerves, and we find peace nestled between greenery; as the snow slowly starts to melt and the gardening activities start to occupy our minds we too start searching diy projects that can change our garden for the better. A selection of crafts that beautifully recycles items into cheap diy garden art flower yard projects has been curated to creatively showcase the immense possibilities brought forward by recycling and up-cycling.

Any item that we discard can be recycled and the vast majority can be up-cycled as well, you can repurpose them creatively thus saving a great amount of energy from hitting the landfill. Cast a glance below and surge inspiration.

Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (1)

One could use old plates in a painting session with friends and family only to proudly prepare them for an artistic installation. The plates ought to become flowers in a beautiful recycled field of color on your fence, shed or garage. The craft can become a really educative group lesson for children on recycling and up-cycling.

Tutorial here

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (2)

The individual able to work with metal could use old kitchen utensils to shape graphic flowers; the possibilities are limitless as any piece can change the dynamic of the composition greatly.

Tutorial available here

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (3)

Tin cans can be opened up and creatively painted to create beautiful flower compositions; they can become great planters too in no less than 30 seconds.

Source

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (4)

The garden hoses are now inactive and it will be time till your first crop will need heavy watering but for the time being, one could get creative and arrange the hoses into flower installations that foretell the coming of spring.

Source

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (5)

Use simple bottle caps to create simple garden art with the little ones. A glue gun, paint, and bamboo skewers are all you might need to get these crafts ready for a colorful spring.

Source

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (6)

Following the same concept above the flowers here will require your pliers rather than your paint.

Tutorial here

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (7)

Recycling glass items into complex flower installation requires the enthusiast in you but the results can be quite impressive; always take all the safety precautions when working with glass.

Source

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (8)

A collection of number plates can bring great color and variety to one`s front yard. Use them to your advantage.

 

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (9)

Scaled or not painted tires can become extraordinary raised planters with little to no effort.

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (10)

Turn old glass dishes and plates into beautiful art flowers – Tutorial

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (11)

Bicycle rims can be re-purposed with ease with little paint.

Tutorial here

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (12)

Source Unknown

Flowers can change a setting regardless of materiality.

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (13)

Source Unknown

Thousands of glass bottle crafts have inspired the DIY community for a good reason, the craft above highlights the immense possibilities.

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (14)

Intricate details can be obtained by scaling the right elements.

Source

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (15)

A temporary solution that can capture joy from pedestrians till greenery surfaces.

Source

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (16)

Every now and then wheel protection falls off and every now and then three others happen to hit the landfill as a result. Bring your contribution and attempt to recycle or up-cycle them.

Tutorial here

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (17)

A horseshoe can bring luck and joy at the same time.

Source

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (18)

Colorful and joyful plastic windmills.

 

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (19)

Scaling the right element creates both rhythm and depth, use simple practice to your advantage.

Source

Simple Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do homesthetics (20)

Chicken wire carefully tailored to assemble a bulb that receives color can stun the pedestrian and upon scaling the installation simply becomes extraordinary.

The low-budget DIY garden art flower projects below might be considered unusual but they`re definitely graphic. What do you think? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below!

Related Articles

53 of the Best GreenHouse Plants for Happy Gardeners and Gardens

72 DIY Greenhouse Plans to Build Easily in Your Own Garden

5 Best Weed Barriers and Landscape Fabric for Happy Gardeners

The 5 Best Lawn Mowers for St Augustine Grass Right Now

53 of the Best GreenHouse Plants for Happy Gardeners and Gardens

72 DIY Greenhouse Plans to Build Easily in Your Own Garden

5 Best Weed Barriers and Landscape Fabric for Happy Gardeners

7 Best Greenhouse Plastic | Buyer's Guide and Reviews

13 Best Trimmer Lines | Multi-Sided, Round, Square, Twisted & Serrated

8 Best Dump Carts for Lawn Tractors & ATVs | Buyer’s Guide and Reviews

7 Best Shoes for Cutting Grass Comfortably | Buyer’s Guide

13 Best Fertilizer Spreaders

13 Best Weed Eaters

11 Best Fertilizers for Citrus Trees Right Now

13 Best Fertilizers for Blueberries 

13 Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer

11 Best Fertilizer for Trees  

13 Best Fertilizer for Hibiscus

13 Best Greenhouse Kits

Have you been searching for a good-quality air purifier that would improve your room air quality like a pro? 

In all probability, you might have come across the SilverOnyx air purifier while searching online, as it has garnered lots of positive reviews lately. But, are you totally sure that it’s the best option for you? 

Well, getting the answer to that question is important before deciding to buy it. And that requires considering a lot of factors, including its features, advantages, and disadvantages. 

However, we can confidently say that you’ll be impressed with the user-friendly features on offer once you’ve used this air purifier. That’s because we have used it extensively for quite a few months. 

So, based on our experience, we’ve documented this review to help you form a clearer idea about the essential facets of the product. 

Let’s start, then! 

Why Buy This Product?

air purifier a living room, air cleaner removing fine dust in house. protect PM 2.5 dust and air pollution concept

Sale
Air Purifier for Home Large Room – 5-in-1 HEPA Filter...
  • AIR PURIFIERS FOR HOME: Our powerful 5-in-1 filtration, HEPA...
  • INCREDIBLE FOR LARGE ROOMS: Breathe easier with this...

Most of you might have heard of SilverOnyx as it is a quite popular brand across the country for its range of superb electronic devices. But as far as air purifiers are concerned, this is the first model that the brand has brought forth in the market. 

In case you are wondering whether it would perform as effectively as some of its competitors, we can assure you that it does well to uphold the reputation of the brand. So, let’s find out how. 

  1. Filtering System

Filtering is undoubtedly the most crucial factor in deciding the performance of air purifiers. Now, since the SilverOnyx air purifier comes at a very budget-friendly rate, you might doubt the quality and efficiency of the integrated air filters. But let us tell you that the filters offer more than what the price point suggests!

A five-stage cleaning system takes its performance to a different level altogether. On that note, let’s have a look at how this system works. 

  •  Pre-Filter- At the onset, a mesh pre-filter helps capture the larger particles such as pet dander and hair. This part is attached to the primary HEPA filter. 
  •  HEPA Filter- The super-efficient H13 True HEPA filter in this unit eliminates up to 99.97% dust, and allergens sized up to 0.3 microns. It comes with 60% more surface area than some more flat varieties used in models of the same weight. As a result, the cleaning capacity of the SilverOnyx air purifier is enhanced to a great extent. 
  •  Activated Carbon Filter- This layer effectively neutralizes any smoke and odor indoors. 
  •  UV-C Light Filter- Contaminants such as germs and mold are destroyed with the help of this filter. This is achieved by the UV-C photocatalyst and bulb. 

These four filters are the basic types that you’ll find in most air purifiers. Long story short, the combined power of these ‘Fabulous 4’ makes the SilverOnyx air purifier really powerful. Apart from that, it comes with an ionizer (5th stage), which destroys airborne allergens detrimental to health and can be switched on or off as required. 

  1. Size And Design

When it comes to electronic appliances, both performance, and design draw a lot of attention. And you would surely agree that it’s difficult to get the best of both worlds. 

However, you’re in for a surprise here as well. This air purifier comes in a more popular cylindrical shape, which is different from the typical tower-shaped models.

It has quite a sleek construction, which makes for an attractive appearance and also convenient handling of the unit. Moreover, it’s safe to use around children since the shape renders a strong footprint for an air purifier. 

Furthermore, it’s height is shorter than many other cylindrical models, which makes it a reasonably-sized air purifier for bedrooms. Simply put it on a side table, and you’re good to go!

Another great feature we observed was that the air intake grill is positioned under the power switch while the outlet grill is at the top. As such, it uses the concept of “bottom-to-top” airflow, which is the best way to circulate indoor air with a cylindrical design. 

On a side note, here’s a small tip to ensure the purifier functions properly. You should always keep the top and side outlet grill unblocked to ensure 360-degree air distribution. Avoid putting the purifier against the wall, as it will restrict proper airflow, thereby reducing its efficiency. 

  1. Fan Speed

Filters may be the most crucial for air purifiers, but they are incomplete without a fan. That’s because a fan forces air at high speeds into the filter to effectively remove the contaminants from the incoming airflow. 

Generally, purifiers come with 2 or 3 adjustable fan speeds to suit your needs. This SilverOnyx purifier, however, is a step ahead in this regard too, since it comes with 5 fan speeds. 

Thus, you get more flexibility to choose the ideal setting according to the air quality and room size. For instance, if the air is polluted by litter smell or dust, you can increase the speed to the top-most level for a quicker action. 

  1. Quieter Performance

A noisy air purifier is a nuisance to any room, but that’s not a concern if you have this SilverOnyx air purifier at home. Despite having five different fan speeds, we found that it generates significantly less noise than many other models. 

In fact, while using the product, we decided to measure the noise level on a typical day. And it was a mere 25 decibel, which is exactly that of a whisper-like sound. Almost too great to be true, we’d say!

[easyazon_image align="center" height="500" identifier="B06XG4Z87P" locale="US" src="https://m.media-amazon.com/images/I/51yFYERbQcL._SL500_.jpg" tag="homesthetics0a-20" width="500"]

  1. Power Consumption

This unit ranks high in terms of energy efficiency as well. You’ll be happy to hear that the maximum power consumption that it records is a mere 24watts. What does the trick is the low-voltage DC and brushless DC motor of this air purifier. This feature becomes beneficial in the long run when you need to use it for more than 8 hours without racking up the electric bill.

  1. Advanced Features

On top of the benefits we’ve talked about till now, this purifier offers quite a few more, thanks to the availability of some superior-grade features. So, let’s quickly dive into them: 

a) Auto-Mode- This feature can be of great help if you’re not sure about the best fan speed. It uses an integrated sensor that determines the air quality to set the ideal fan speed automatically. This is an effective way to regulate the overall power consumption while ensuring good air quality. 

b) Timer- You also get to schedule the time when your air purifier has to be turned off. The working time can be adjusted anywhere between 30 minutes and 24 hours. 

b) Sleep Mode- Activating this mode dims the light above the control panel instantly. Such a feature can be found only in a select few models. 

c) Indicator For Filter Replacement- This is yet another rare feature, lighting up on time to alert you that a filter replacement is due. 

  1. Customer Service

While maintaining top-notch quality in all its products, SilverOnyx also takes care of customer satisfaction quite well. 

This is one of the primary reasons for which we would highly recommend this brand. Interestingly, it offers the much sought-after free shipping facility, unlike lots of other reputed brands. 

Besides, the customer helpline is much more effective with its prompt response to almost any query. And a 30-day return policy is also offered in case you are not satisfied with the product. 

  1. Maintenance

We were glad to find that unlike several other models, this unit didn’t need much maintenance. Sure cleaning the filters is necessary, but you can simply rinse them lightly or clean with a vacuum. 

Filter replacements are a major concern for most people. But in the case of the SilverOnyx purifier, some of the long-lasting filters don’t require the usual 2-time replacement per year. 

What Could've Been Better?

Although this SilverOnyx unit is among the most high-performing air purifiers available currently, it does have some minor disadvantages. But from our experience, we can assure you that these won’t make much difference in its efficiency. 

Firstly, it takes a bit longer to purify the air in very large rooms. For a surface area of 500 sq ft., the unit may take around 7 or 8 hours to effectively eliminate up to 99% airborne particles, due to a slightly lower CADR value. The CADR (Clean Air Delivery Rate) is a measure of the rate at which an air purifier can remove a specific contaminant from the air. 

Apart from this, we found the warranty of 1 year to be a bit disappointing. In comparison, other models like the Levoit LV-H132 allow you to extend the warranty period by an additional one year. 



Pros

  • Impressive 5-stage filtration process
  • Comes with smart sensor
  • Produces less sound
  • Attractive design
  • Timer function




Cons

  • Takes longer to work in larger rooms
  • Short warranty period



[easyazon_image align="center" height="496" identifier="B06XG4Z87P" locale="US" src="https://m.media-amazon.com/images/I/51ydOAHn+oL._SL500_.jpg" tag="homesthetics0a-20" width="500"]

SilverOnyx Air Purifier Buyer’s Guide 

The air quality in your room will directly affect your health and well-being. So, if you decide to go for an air purifier, you should choose the one that does its job really well. 

As such, considering some key features becomes important, as is keeping in mind your needs. Hence, in this section, we’ve listed some essential points that you should look for before buying a suitable air purifier. 

  1. Types

Different categories of air purifiers tackle air pollution using various methods, which vary according to their power source. As such, you can choose between the kinds that are available as per your preferences. 

One such type is a mechanical purifier, which comes with a web of fibers to trap particles. On the other hand, electronic models like the SilverOnyx purifier use ionizers and electrostatic precipitators to charge and filter them. Another well-known type is the activated carbon method to adsorb molecules that produce bad odors. 

  1. Air Purifying Capacity

Not all electronic purifiers use the same technology, which is why their air-purifying capacity is different. In this regard, the filtering system becomes significant. So, make sure you check the information on the number and types of filters while going through the details of a product. 

Notably, the SilverOnyx purifier offers a superior filtering system that consistently works to remove the majority of harmful particles from the air. 

Apart from this, checking the fan speed adjustability is also important. This will allow you to regulate its functioning as per your needs. For regions with higher pollution rates, greater adjustability is a must. 

  1. Noise Level

The level of noise produced by purifiers is another key factor to take into account. In particular situations (for example, if you are using it in a baby’s room or a bedroom), a quiet operation even at high fan speeds will be more suitable. 

Noise from purifiers originates from the filtering system working continuously. However, in good-quality models such as the Silveronyx purifier, it is almost inaudible. This is because they incorporate sound-dampening mechanisms, thereby enhancing the utility of the product. 

Note that inferior air purifiers might produce a steady humming noise similar to that produced by an AC unit. So, do remember to go through the information on the noise level while considering any unit. 

  1. CADR Rating

Choosing a model with a standard CDR rating is important to ensure that it can efficiently work in average-sized rooms. This rating is a way to estimate the coverage of an air purifier. 

As we mentioned earlier, the SilverOnyx purifier comes with a slightly lower CADR count but is sufficient to maintain the air quality in average-sized rooms. Do keep in mind that a CADR count of below 80 implies the purifier might not be ideal for even medium-sized rooms. 

  1. Design And Portability

By design, we are not just referring to the external design and look of the purifier here, but also to an intrinsic aspect. The purifier should have the controls positioned conveniently and should have an overall compact design. 

But the position of the inlet and outlet grills is also important since it determines the direction of air circulation. Keep in mind that a “bottom-to-top” airflow through the purifier enables a more efficient performance. 

In addition to this, portability is a significant factor to consider when buying air purifiers. Small and lightweight models can be kept on a shelf or desk and can also be moved easily from one room to another. Hence, it might be better to go for a smaller size. 

As for the larger models, they are usually much heavier, making them more suitable for use in a single room. However, some larger purifiers do come with casters to facilitate partial portability. 

To make an efficient choice, consider the size and number of the rooms you’ll be using the air purifier in. 

  1. Extra Features

Purifiers that come with additional features on top of the regular controls are always better since they provide more flexibility and convenience. These include indicators for filter replacement, timers, and auto modes. Some even come with a remote to enhance user convenience further. 

So, if you are not faced with a tight budget, going for a purifier that offers additional features and is priced just slightly higher is beneficial. 

As we have discussed earlier, the SilverOnyx does come with quite a few additional features,  making it a great choice if the flexibility of use is a primary lookout for you. 

  1. Impurities That Purifiers Deal With

Air purifiers eliminate various substances from the air, contrary to the common belief that they only act on dust particles. The air we breathe consists of pollens, smoke, and other various harmful allergens, which are acted upon by good-quality air purifiers. 

Thus, they render your home safe from the risk of most airborne diseases. The risk of such diseases is greater in certain regions across the country, so it becomes all the more essential to go for a super-efficient air purifier.  

Brands like SilverOnyx provide the protection that you desire, as their air purifiers come with sound filtering systems. 

SilverOnyx Air Purifier Review

  • Are Air Purifiers Safe For Small Children?

    Yes, most modern air purifiers are designed to ensure the safety of kids. The use of good-quality filters enhances safety, so the ones like this SilverOnyx model consists of a HEPA filter are a step ahead of others. 

    As we discussed earlier, the safety of use around kids depends on the design too, as it should make a strong footprint. The SilverOnyx qualifies as a great one in that regard. 

  • Do All Air Purifiers Remove Odors?

    Well, this largely varies from one model to another, as not all purifiers have efficient odor-removing filters. Those like SilverOnyx incorporate activated carbon filters. Hence, they successfully remove most types of odors from the air. 

  • Do All Air Purifiers Remove Pet Hair?

    This would depend on the availability of a pre-filter in the purifier, which is capable of removing larger particles like pet hair and dander. The SilverOnyx does come with that feature, so you don’t need to worry about this if you go for it. 

  • Are Air Purifiers Effective On Viruses?

    Viruses causing airborne diseases cling to dust particles or droplets easily and air purifiers can capture such substances, thereby eliminating these viruses effectively. The common types of air-born diseases include influenza, common cold, and respiratory ailments such as asthma. 

  • Can Air Purifiers Cool Down A Room?

    Air purifiers can’t alter the temperature of a room directly. However, they come with fans that blow or circulate the air, so the procedure of moving air would make a room cooler. Note that a purifier with a higher airflow can blow out more air, which may reduce the air temperature slightly. 

  • How Long Should I Use An Air Purifier?

    If you didn’t know this till now, purifiers are designed to be used 24/7. Those with smart-sensors can adjust the speed of the fan automatically, so you can run them all day long without worrying about power consumption. 

  • [easyazon_image align="center" height="500" identifier="B06XG4Z87P" locale="US" src="https://m.media-amazon.com/images/I/51RSUAjYbpL._SL500_.jpg" tag="homesthetics0a-20" width="500"]

    SilverOnyx Air Purifier Verdict

    So, here was our guide on all the essentials regarding the SilverOnyx air purifier. We hope you’ll find it helpful. 

    In our opinion, this product is a must-buy for those in search of a convenient and truly effective air purifier. The low noise level and power consumption only add to its usefulness. And the best part is that you get all these benefits at a quite budget-friendly price. 

    So, go ahead and try out the SilverOnyx air purifier. And when you do, let us know in the comments section about your experience- we’ll be glad to know about it all! 

    Till the next time, adios! 

    Related Articles

    13 Quietest Portable Air Conditioners

    Coway AP-1512HH Mighty Air Purifier

    Honeywell True HEPA HPA300 Air Purifier

    9 Best Personal Air Purifiers

    One of the vital components of your home is the gutter, which is also one of the most neglected.

    While you may invest heavily in other aspects of your home, we suggest you don't compromise with the gutters. In that regard, one of the top products for you to try out is the Shur Flo Gutter, which comes with a state-of-the-art design.

    But considering the many top-notch units available, you might be confused if Shur Flo is the right choice. To help you, we've narrowed down our argument into individual sections to highlight the critical components and ensure that you can make an informed decision.

    We talk about various aspects from its durability to its patented filtration system, all of which contribute to its exceptional performance. Moreover, it's suitable for different climates and situations to offer much-needed reliability.

    So, let's not waste any more time and get down to the details.

    Shur Flo Gutter Review

    Why Buy This Product?

    Let's begin with the good points and what essential facets make the Shur Flo Gutter stand out. There are several critical features that we've highlighted below to provide a clear idea of the model.

    1. Patented Perf-Flow Filtration System

    We start with the most crucial aspect of the product: the patented perf-flow filtration system. Like most gutters, it prevents the system from clogging, but it tops other brands when it comes to efficiency. We loved the exceptional performance you’re guaranteed to get, thanks to the innovative design.

    The designers have added a panel system for the gutter to ensure that it covers the entry point while maintaining the structure at ground level. The panels also have an X-wave pattern to enhance ventilation, thanks to the numerous tiny holes lining the body.

    For those of you who are worried, let us tell you that it's incredibly useful to stop twigs, leaves, snow, and other objects from falling in. As a result, the gutter is well protected, and even if you can't clean it up, the ventilation system allows water to seep through unhindered.

    You'll notice that rainwater gets a clear passage irrespective of what's on the surface. Moreover, there's another benefit of the perforated holes, allowing air to blow in from above and below. It helps to blow away the debris and keeps the structure clean, making it low maintenance.

    1. Sturdy Construction

    For the gutter to produce fantastic output, it's natural that it must last a long time. Likewise, the Shur Flo Gutter comes in a high-tempered aluminum construction to withstand natural elements and deliver a power-packed performance. It protects against stuff that may fall into the gutter along with the objects flowing through it.

    The last thing you need is for the structure to burst, and in that regard, the durable nature complements the other functions. Moreover, you get to choose the width of your unit – 5-inch or 6-inch – while the machine screws ensure that it stays in place irrespective of unpredictable weather conditions.

    You can choose the color as well, which plays a vital part in making the unit rust-resistant. Therefore, it's the perfect product to have if you experience frequent rainy or snowy conditions.

    What we particularly liked is the attention to detail, which allows the gutter to control heavy run-off. It redirects the debris-laden water away from your home, permitting you to keep your house nice and dry.

    People who live close to nature or find themselves surrounded by trees will love all it offers, given its incredible load-bearing capacity. However, despite having a sturdy build, it's not difficult to move around, which comes in handy during installation.

    So, let's discuss that next.

    1. Easy Installation

    Straight off the bat, a tool must have all the components to ensure that you get through the installation without any hassle. Similarly, the Shur Flo Gutter is the ideal unit for first-timers or DIY professionals, and you won't need to spend additional money to call for help.

    The only caveat is that it takes considerable time, but with a little patience, you can get it done. Furthermore, it comes with three different versions to cater to most types of situations. If you're worried about the clearance or causing damage to your roof shingles, try the step-down version.

    It's ideal for gutters that need speed-screw or quick-screw hangers, and you can install the panels over the hangers for sufficient clearance. Moreover, it comes with relevant instructions, which detail the steps in an uncomplicated manner, thereby making it highly convenient.

    We recommend that you don't rush but instead focus on being thorough. One way to check whether you've followed the procedure correctly is to see if it forms a snug fit with the roofline. Besides, even if you've got a gutter, the Shur Flo model can be effectively attached without damaging the existing structure.

    1. Affordable

    Next, we come to the price, and you'll be pleased to know it's a highly affordable unit that falls within most budgets. Bearing in mind the incredible features, the manufacturers have done well to keep it within reasonable limits, leading to its popularity.

    You can purchase the guards in individual pieces measuring 4 feet, making it ideal for cutting it down to size. Consequently, it's customizable, and you won't have to make any further expenditures. We suggest you buy in bundles of 50, which proves highly convenient and lowers the cost.

    It's important to remember that you may have to purchase from private dealers, meaning the cost might vary. However, the average price is around $1 per linear foot, so keep that in mind when making your purchase. Moreover, all the components, such as coloring screws and hangers, are included with the unit to reduce overall expenditure.

    1. Warranty

    Finally, you get an extended warranty spanning 20 to 25 years, which covers the entire lifespan of the model. It highlights the exceptional quality on offer, and the company quickly solves any problem related to performance, durability, or rusting.

    Interestingly, even if you change your property, the warranty is transferable, meaning the new owners will reap the rewards. There's no cause for concern, and it is the excellent reliability that has endeared the Shur Flo Gutter to users.

    For all that's good, there are a few downsides to the unit. Firstly, the design of the Step-down model keeps the roof shingles intact, but it also leads to a lot of debris gathering.

    While most leaves and twigs can be blown away, some materials may get stuck under the ridges. It's not a significant issue, but you'll need to spend a little longer than usual to get it cleaned. Secondly, the designers have made the mistake of not including additional screws, which is an inconvenience.

    You need to be very careful lest you lose one, meaning the installation will be incomplete. Therefore, you'll have to go out and purchase a similar type of screw, which isn't easy. Meanwhile, the soft side of the guard needs to be trimmed to match the front edge of the product.

    Shur Flo Gutter Buyer's Guide

    Before you venture into the market, we would like to give you a couple of pointers to help you pick the right unit. The Shur Flo Gutter has many components that could make it difficult for you to distinguish between it and other top products.

    We are here to discuss the essential aspects of the model apart from the advantages based on which we have formulated our list. A piece of knowledge about these functions will place you in good stead and help you make an informed choice.

    1. Durability

    Your tool must be durable to handle the wear and tear of daily use. As a gutter guard, it will have to deal with all types of tasks, from blocking debris to guaranteeing smooth water flow. It shouldn't be any surprise that only quality materials must be used for construction to ensure it doesn't break down.

    Buying any merchandise is an investment, and so you cannot afford to spend time or money ever so often on a new one. You must enjoy both the product and the components that come with it for a long time.

    In that regard, the manufacturers cannot afford to make any compromises. So, just having a steel or metal construction is not enough. It must be rust-resistant as well to deliver faultless output.

    1. Ease of Use

    The Shur Flo Gutter comes in various sizes to handle an array of tasks, but that shouldn't mean the designers have to compromise with user-friendliness. The primary objective of the unit is to reduce your workload, and therefore you must be able to employ it effectively to get the best results.

    All the components and functions must be understandable, almost at a glance. You should know what each part does rather than pondering over how to get it right. Plus, the installation process and the disassembly must be written clearly to ensure that it is uncomplicated.

    There is no point in having a plethora of functions if the users find it challenging to use. Rather any good model must keep the basics right and then add the necessary features to deliver a better performance.

    1. Environment

    The area in which you live plays a vital role in determining the model you choose to purchase. In that regard, the Shur Flo Gutter stands out because of its versatile nature and ability to handle various conditions.

    While choosing a gutter, you mustn't focus on the drainage but preferably on the debris that the channel will have to deal with. If it can handle the objects falling into the drainpipe, it'll automatically provide a much more efficient drainage system.

    You need to look for an all-around unit that first and foremost stops stuff from falling in. However, on the off chance that some debris does manage to get through, it must withstand the extra weight and provide a safe passage.

    It should be able to provide a secure exit point so that your home remains dry. As a result, the perforated design of the Shur Flo Gutter comes in handy, leading to a positive response.

    Conclusions

    We've reached the end of our guide, and hopefully, you've got a better idea regarding the Shur Flo Gutter.

    To clear any lingering doubts about the performance, we've decided to assist you a bit more before signing off. Please remember to scan the area around your house to get a better idea of the prevalent conditions.

    Next, compare the different situations you're likely to encounter and check whether the gutter has the features to take care of the issues. As long as you do that. you won't be disappointed.

    That's all for now. Take care and see you soon.

    Related Articles

    23 Hip Roof Types & Styles for Your Future Home

    Learn About the 20 Most Popular Roof Types for Your Future Home

    What is the Mansard Roof, Advantages and Disadvantages Sheltered

    6 Eco-Friendly Roofing Materials and Why You Need Them

    13 Best Roofing Nailers

    How To Clean Gutter Guards Efficiently

    EasyOn Gutter Guard Review 101

    5 Best Foam Gutter Guard

    10 Best Solar Gutter Lights

    Do Sheds Need Gutters?

    23 Extraordinary Beautiful Ways to Repurpose Rain Gutters in Your Household

    LeafGuard Review | Everything You Need to Know

    Storing shoes in a shoe rack is one of the most common practices many follow. 

    But what makes the shoe storage bench so versatile? This functional piece of furniture works both as a seat and convenient storage for your favorite footwear. And while they’re most commonly found in garages or entryways, you can conveniently place one in your bedroom as well. 

    Keeping your shoes organized ensures that your hallways or entryways don’t look like a mess, and it is the perfect spot to protect and store shoes to maintain their quality. Besides, you wouldn’t have to scramble to look for your shoes in a hurry. 

    But there are various options on the market, so we wanted to help find the perfect storage bench for your needs. That’s why we have reviewed the top 6 models in the following sections. So, let’s begin! 

    Best Shoe Rack Benches

    Shoe rack in the hallway of house is made of wood and metal. Best Shoe Rack Benches

     1. SONGMICS

    Sale
    SONGMICS Shoe Rack Bench, 3-Tier Bamboo Shoe Storage...
    • 【SPACIOUS STORAGE】This shoe bench features 2 wide...
    • 【VERSATILE】You can also use this entryway bench as a...

    This natural bamboo shoe rack does a lot more than just store shoes. It can work as a versatile piece of furniture, perfect for any room in your living space. You can also use this 2-tier benchtop as a seat or to display items. 

    Why Did We Like It?

    If you’re looking for something compact to occupy your narrow entryway, hallways, or doorways, then this can be the ideal storage bench. Measuring 70 x 28 x 45 cm, this shoe organizer can hold up shoes while accommodating items like your handbags, plants, and other accessories. 

    You receive an accessory bag, instructions, and the contents to assemble your bamboo storage bench. And the installation is pretty easy, so it shouldn’t take more than an hour if you follow the provided instructions correctly. 

    The 100% natural bamboo plank comes with stripe patterns on it. This makes it more durable, as it maximizes the stability of the shoe rack. Moreover, it’s designed to have smooth edges, and the sunken screws prevent snagging. This means you can place it anywhere in the house. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    It may be helpful to know that due to the size of the racks, we couldn’t store more than 3-4 pairs of shoes. But then again, it’s meant for storage in compact corners of the house. Other than that, there was a creaking sound every time we sat on it, although we didn’t notice any cracks or damage.



    Pros

    • Easy to assemble
    • Durable shoe rack
    • Multi-purpose storage bench
    • Ideal size for little space in your homes




    Cons

    • Doesn’t store more than 3 pairs of shoes



    2. VASAGLE

    VASAGLE Coat Rack, Hall Tree with Shoe Bench for Entryway,...
    • [4-in-1 Hall Tree] Combining a hanging rod, a shoe bench, a...
    • [Practical Hanging Rod] The sturdy and stable top bar of...

    A functional piece of furniture is an essential part of small living spaces. And this coat rack with a bench top gives you the best of both worlds without taking up too much space. It’s a 2-in-1 solution that gives your home a unique decorative look with adequate storage. 

    Why Did We Like It?

    This unit contains a shoe bench, shoe rack, hanging hooks in one, and an anti-tip kit to ensure a safe home. And to ensure installation doesn’t take up too much of our time, the instructions are easy to follow, and the parts are numbered. 

    The shoe storage bench top has a sturdy rustic brown shelf and a strong steel frame that makes it highly durable. Besides, each hook has a load capacity of 66 lbs, while the engineered wood shelf has a load capacity of 176 lbs. 

    This is a practical piece of furniture to have in a small house, thanks to the dual utility on offer. And it can accommodate your shoes along with items like coats, scarves, and gym bags. The bench top comes in handy when you need to put on your accessories, especially in a hurry. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    Some of the areas to screw in on the bench were set a little too deep. And because of this, we couldn’t tighten the bench, making it slightly unstable to sit on. Aside from that, a couple of metal parts had chipped portions of paint on them. 



    Pros

    • Easy installation
    • Sturdy shelf
    • Strong steel frame
    • Has a hook load capacity of 66lbs




    Cons

    • Bench maybe a little unstable



     3. Homemaid Living Bamboo Shoe Rack Bench

    Homemaid Living Bamboo 3 Tier Shoe Rack Bench, Premium Shoe...
    • Sturdy, durable and built to last - Heavy-duty bench top is...
    • Shoe bench and storage - Each shoe rack shelf accommodates...

    A shoe storage bench doesn’t have to be the most extravagant accessory in your house. And while this bamboo shoe rack bench is a little on the minimalist side, its 2-in-1 design gives you the perfect blend of accessibility and style. 

    Why Did We Like It?

    Honestly, we weren’t sure whether assembling this unit would be easy. But thankfully, the package came with all the required tools and parts to put it together, and the instructions are just as easy to follow. It took us a little under an hour, which is reasonably quick.

    The 100% bamboo benchtop has a smooth finish, is sturdy, and is long-lasting. It is also water-resistant and can be wiped down with a damp cloth after every use. Hence, you can place this benchtop in your bathroom, patio, bedroom, entryway, and practically anywhere. 

    When we found out this 3-tier shoe rack bench could hold up to 300 lbs easily, we were skeptical. But it has been able to hold the weight incredibly well. And there hasn’t been any creaking either, which usually is the norm with bamboo products. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    The unit is pretty compact and slightly smaller than we had expected. While that isn’t a big issue, it would’ve been nicer if the bottom rack was a bit higher because all we could fit were flip-flops under there.



    Pros

    • Easy to install
    • Smooth finish and sturdy
    • Water-resistant
    • Multi-purpose use




    Cons

    • A little smaller than expected



     4. VASAGLE Cubbie Shoe Cabinet Storage Bench

    Sale
    VASAGLE CUSTOS Collection - Shoe Bench, Storage Bench with...
    • 【COMPARTMENT DESIGN MEETS OPEN STORAGE】This shoe bench...
    • 【EVERYTHING IN ORDER】End entryway messes with this shoe...

    Finding the perfect shoe storage bench for a small space may not seem as easy, but this cubby shoe storage bench is the perfect combination of style and convenience. The structure and design add a touch of chic to your living space. And you get all of this at a great price! 

    Why Did We Like It?

    A shoe storage rack would often sport same-sized cubbies ideal for someone who owns flip-flops, sneakers, or flat sandals. But that wouldn’t be able to store boots or high heels. With this shoe storage bench, not only do you have more space to store shoes, the shelves are adjustable. That means you can move them around to create extra storage for your shoes. 

    This shoe storage rack is constructed of particleboard, making it sturdy enough to sit two adults. And the cushioned top elevates the comfort factor and offers great support. 

    If you’re looking for a functional, compact piece of furniture, then this shoe storage bench would make a great addition to your living space. You can display this in the entryway or your hallway and can store as many as 10 shoes in one go, regardless of the kind. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    The product looks and functions the way it’s supposed to, but that’s about it. The shelves have scratches on them and chip easily, even though it isn’t adjusted as much. And they look and feel brittle too, almost like they might break at any point. 



    Pros

    • Adjustable shelves
    • Sturdy
    • Compact – ideal for small spaces
    • Stores up to 10 shoes




    Cons

    • Looks and feels brittle



     5. Rolanstar 3-Tier Shoe Bench

    Rolanstar Shoe Bench, 3-Tier Shoe Rack, 40” Storage Entry...
    • Dimension -40" L x 12" W x 18" H; Load capacity: 198 lbs
    • Space Saving & Large Capacity - Each storage mesh shelf...

    This Rolanstar shoe rack bench gives your house a rich, rustic vibe. It may be a large-capacity shoe storage bench, but it works incredibly well for small spaces too. On top of that, the solid wood has a smooth finish, elevating the aesthetics even further. 

     Why Did We Like It?

    One of the things we have to compromise with when it comes to small living spaces is getting a storage unit that either doesn’t fit well enough or function enough. But this solid wood shoe rack bench serves both of these purposes. It is compact enough to fit small entryways or hallways but large enough to store your shoes comfortably. 

    Since you might end up placing this in the corner of your entryway, it comes with 5 corner protectors. It’s also accompanied by all the tools and instructions you’d need to assemble this shoe rack bench. 

    Furthermore, this shoe rack bench is constructed of solid wood and has a durable metal frame. The wood is water-resistant, easy to clean, and has a smooth finish, giving your room the perfect rustic look while maximizing its stability on different types of floors. 

    Why Didn’t We Like It?

    Even though this unit is easy to install, we struggled with it for a bit due to the screw holes being slightly smaller. While we did manage to get them pushed in, it wasn’t deep enough, making the bench slightly unstable. 



    Pros

    • Large capacity
    • Easy to install
    • Water-resistant build
    • Durable




    Cons

    • Screw holes weren’t big enough



     6. Pipishell

    Pipishell Bamboo Shoe Rack Bench, 3 Tier Sturdy Shoe Bench,...
    • Organize Your Entryway: The shoe rack for entryway is a...
    • Space-Saving Shoe Rack: A combination of a shoe rack and...

    Without a shoe rack, you tend to have a messier hallway or entryway because of your shoes. And it doesn’t matter if they’re scattered or placed neatly. But it will still feel messy. But with this 3-Tier bamboo shoe rack bench, you get to keep your shoes protected and the floors clean. 

    Why Did We Like It?

    If you’re looking for a compact shoe rack bench that is aesthetically pleasing but does the job well, then this 3-tier bamboo shoe rack bench is the perfect product for you. It is made out of 100% natural bamboo, and is eco-friendly and water-resistant, making it the ideal product to use outside your bathroom, your bedroom, or the obvious place being the entryway. 

    This shoe storage bench is perfectly functional and helps save space by offering 3 racks to store your shoes, sit on, or display your pictures, plants, toiletries, and more. You might even have enough space under the last rack to store your flip-flops easily. 

    It is just as easy to assemble this simple shoe storage bench. You receive illustrated instructions, along with all the required parts and tools. And if you follow the instructions correctly, installation shouldn’t take you more than a few minutes. 

    Why Didn’t We Like It?

    Even after being handed the required tools to assemble this shoe rack with ease, there were still a few hardships. The wood had a few scratches on it, and some panels didn’t even have screw holes on them. We had to push them a little harder to get the screws in, making the bench unstable. 



    Pros

    • Compact yet large capacity
    • Multi-purpose use
    • Easy to install
    • Space-efficient design




    Cons

    • Screw holes were missing



    Shoe Rack Bench Buying Guide

    Shoe rack benches offer the dual function of storing your shoes while also allowing you to either display other items or use the top as a seat. And while this feels like it is reason enough to purchase a storage bench, there are various factors to consider before making that decision. So, we listed down a few for you.

        1. Storage Capacity

    No two-shoe rack benches are the same. While some shoe racks can hold only 8 pairs of shoes, others can hold anywhere close to 20-30. The bigger racks would make sense if you had as many shoes or were a collector. But purchasing a big rack for 10 pairs of shoes isn’t the most practical thing for you.

    So, take your time and look into a shoe rack that’s more practical and convenient based on the number of shoes you own.

        2. Shoe Rack Bench Material

    Just like with their storage capacities, the materials used to construct them differ too. It ranges over a bunch of materials like wood, metal, fabrics, and more. If you’re looking for a portable, durable shoe rack, then fabric shoe racks are the ideal product and come at a great price too.

    However, they trap dust a lot easier compared to other materials, so you will spend a lot more time regularly cleaning these shoe racks up. Similarly, while you wouldn’t have to clean as regularly with wood or metal-based shoe rack benches, they do happen to be on the pricey side. 

        3. Easy Installation

    Many often opt to make DIY shoe racks due to them being cost-effective and creative. However, if they don’t work out the way they should, then things can be frustrating. So, to avoid this from happening, it is essential to look for racks that are easy to assemble or construct. While you don’t have to do it yourself, hiring someone else just adds up more to the cost.

    Best Shoe Rack Bench Final Words

    Best Shoe Rack Bench Final Words

    It is essential to have functional furniture around your house, even if you DIY it! Along with being aesthetically pleasing, they should also conveniently do the task it was meant to do. Shoe rack benches are simplistic, 2-in-1 functional pieces of furniture that allow you to easily save space in your home.

    And we have a few favorites that make a perfect shoe organizer based on the points we’ve made above. Our first choice would be SONGMICS sturdy shoe rack bench because of its multi-purpose uses. The coat rack bench from VASAGLE comes next due to the 2-in-1 function of a shoe and a coat rack. And lastly, the bamboo shoe rack bench from Homemaid because it is water-resistant and durable.

    We’re aware of the various options on the market depending on the few factors that we earlier mentioned. So, if you’re looking for the ideal shoe storage bench, then we hope this list helps narrow it down for you. 

    Until next time! 

    Related Articles

    9 Best Plastic Storage Cabinets

    10 Genius DIY Shoe Storage Ideas That Will Impress You

    18 Smart Examples of Shoe Storage DIY Projects For Your Home

    41 Beautifully Inspiring Laundry Room Cabinet Ideas

    14 Best Shoe Cabinet Ideas

    No one wants to deal with a pile of shoes every time they’re looking for something to wear! 

    Shoes aren’t only a necessity, but they also always make the perfect accessories to pair with all of your outfits. And just like your clothing has an allotted space to be stored neatly, all of the shoes should have one too. 

    Regardless of the occasion, we wear shoes more often than most of our clothes. So keeping them out in the open to collect dust or just leaving them scattered around isn’t the best for your footwear.

    Not only does this affect the quality of your shoes, but it also clutters the wardrobe or space in the house, making it look messy. Hence, we have curated a list of the best shoe cabinets that will come to your recuse.

    Shoe Cabinet Ideas

    Woman opening wooden shoes storage cabinet for keep her shoes.

    1. Small Fold-down Door Shoe Storage Cabinet

    Small Fold-down Door Shoe Storage Cabinet

    Image Source

    Shoe racks tend to make a small space look a lot more compact, which is why many opt for leaving their shoes out in the open. But why do that when you can instead look into a small chic fold-down doors shoe storage cabinet? 

    It gives the cabinet an illusion of being slimmer and is perfect for narrow hallways and compact spaces. Hence, you can store footwear in style and wouldn’t have to worry about a bulky structure taking up all your space.

    1. Shoe Cabinet With Compartments

    Shoe Cabinet With Compartments

    Image Source

    If you’re looking for a cabinet that not only has enough room but also looks good storing all of your shoes, then something like this will be ideal. You can neatly store them, without taking any extra space. 

    Additionally, you can customize it by using decals or paint over it. This way, it won’t look like a shoe storage space per se and would blend with your furniture well. 

    1. Wall Shoe Cabinet

    A lot of shoe cabinets tend to take up even more space in your houses and end up looking bulky and awkward. But what if you could mount it on a wall? Aside from providing enough space to store shoes, it will free more floor space to either occupy or leave it as is. 

    1. Shoe Storage Shelf

    Image Source

    A shoe rack often doesn’t do more than storing your shoe collection, which leaves many wary of investing in one. However, this shoe cabinet comes with a shelf space that allows you to store little knick-knacks - a plant, a bowl for keys, and more. It allows you to use up the extra space on shoe storage without having it look bland and empty. 

    1. Shoe Cabinet With Drawers

    Shoe Cabinet With Drawers

    Image Source

    A shoe storage is a lot more than just the perfect place to store your shoes. What if there’s some extra space to store the rest of your accessories? Storing sneakers and a pair of socks in the same space with this shoe cabinet makes it a lot more convenient. 

    The drawers can hold anything from keys, socks, and other accessories to pair with your shoes, preventing panic and scrambling around to look for them if you’re in a hurry. And the space-efficient design ensures that it makes the room look and feel a lot bigger. 

    1. Shoe Storage Rack

    Shoe Storage Rack

    Image Source

    It is always the hardest to accommodate large pieces of furniture like shoe cabinets in hallways, an entryway, or vertical spaces. They’re either too wide or not tall enough. But with a shoe storage rack closet, your room receives a massive boost. 

    Moreover, it can store more than just your shoes. For instance, converting it into a coat rack will make for the perfect accessory to keep in the hallway or entryway. 

    1. Shoe Storage Cabinet And Accessory Organizer

    Shoe Storage Cabinet And Accessory Organizer

    Image Source

    If you want to opt for something more accessible that can easily fit in the closet, then this shoe storage cabinet would be ideal. Regardless of whether you live in a small or spacious living space, optimizing and organizing your room will be easier with this shoe cabinet. You can even have some fun with it and match the aesthetic of your cabinet with the rest of the room.

    1. Compact Shoe Closet With Cabinet Doors

    Compact Shoe Closet With Cabinet Doors

    Image Source

    Shoe racks with cabinet doors tend to add a lot more to your living spaces aesthetically. They also help keep the materials of the shoes dust-proof, ensuring that they stay in pristine condition for prolonged periods. 

    Besides, you can customize these shoe cabinets to match the rest of your furniture to avoid making it look too small or lived-in.

    1. Shoe Storage Bench

    Shoe Storage Bench

    Shoe cabinets don’t always have to be boring or stick out from the rest of the furniture. If you’re looking for something that stores shoes while adding something to the interior, this product would be ideal for you.

    This chic bench shoe cabinet features a large space to store shoes and keep them out of the way. It would be perfect for the entryway allowing your guests to use the bench whenever they visit. 

    1. Shoe Storage Cabinet With Cubicles

    Shoe Storage Cabinet With Cubicles

    Image Source

    If you’re looking for something simple yet versatile, this cabinet with cubicles would be perfect. It is easy to clean and would fit perfectly well in the entryways or hallways. Aside from being easy to clean, it can double up as a piece of furniture. 

    It protects your shoes from dust and any other factors that could affect their quality. Plus, the air circulation on offer will prevent the formation of mold.

    1. Narrow Shoe Rack

    Narrow Shoe Rack

    Shoe cabinets don’t always have to be placed in the entryway. You can place them next to the closet in the bedroom to make mornings more convenient. However, no one wants a bulky storage cabinet taking up even more space in their sleeping quarters. It would make the room feel smaller. 

    But a narrow shoe rack would be able to accommodate all your shoes without taking up too much space in the room. You can also make the best use of the open shelf on the left by storing miscellaneous accessories, while the shelves on the right store all the shoes. 

    1. Rustic Shoe Racks

    Rustic Shoe Racks

    Image Source

    Shoe cabinets don’t always have to be bulky, over the top, or have multiple compartments. Sometimes, simple A-Line shoe rack styles can do wonders, especially if you don’t have a large shoe collection. This shoe storage is low maintenance but also adds a touch of rustic charm to your room. And all of this can be done without having to compromise on quality or space. 

    1. Shoe Storage Cabinets With Doors

    Shoe Storage Cabinets With Doors

    If you have a large shoe collection and have been collecting dust and boxes over the years, it’s time for a change. This shoe storage with cabinet doors neatly stores your shoes and keeps them looking and feeling fresh. Easy, convenient, and neat. That is what you can expect with cabinets like this. 

    1. Cane-Front Shoe Racks

    Cane-Front Shoe Racks

    Image Source

    Most racks tend to be very simplistic, rustic and give your room a contemporary vibe. But it doesn’t always have to be the same thing over and over. This shoe cabinet with a cane front is perfect for giving that vertical space in your home some much-needed sprucing up. 

    The pull-down doors are easy to operate, and they can easily store shoes while oozing some retro charm. 

    Why Should You Own A Shoe Cabinet?

    It doesn’t matter if you have 20 shoes or 4, but keeping them unorganized would invariably result in a messy doorway. 

    Daily-wear shoes need proper air-circulation, while all of your shoes need to be kept away from dust and any other factors that would ruin their quality. And to further elaborate our point, we have listed a few more reasons you should own a shoe storage cabinet. 

           1. Keeping Your Shoes In Prime Condition

    Certain shoes need to be stored in a specific way to ensure that they remain in good condition. 

    Moreover, no one would want to leave their fancy dress shoes out in the open, especially when they’re likely to step on them accidentally and damage them. Shoes go through a lot during the day, especially if you’ve got them wet. So, leaving them in a cluttered closet or a damp, cold corner can lead to odors and mold.

    It may seem like getting a shoe closet would be an unnecessary expense, especially if you don’t have as many shoes. But this one-time investment will ensure that regardless of how many pairs you have, they will still look and feel new. 

           2. You Know Where To Look 

    Have you ever wanted to find a specific pair for an event, meeting, or just a casual meetup with friends? You might think having your shoes laid out would be convenient, but it isn’t the best thing to do. 

    If you live in a small space and are concerned about shoe cabinets taking up all of it, a shoe rack in the coat closet would be the perfect solution. Not only will it stay hidden away from your view, but it will also help neatly stack your shoes. As a result, you won’t have to conduct raids all over the place when it’s time to step out. 

         3. Your Floor Won’t Look Like A Mess

    A busy house can make it nearly impossible to keep your floors clean, and shoes tend to bring in more dirt from activities that involve mud and more. Besides, they make your carpets prone to dirt, which can be a health hazard for anyone that suffers from allergies. 

    However, the right shoe cabinet will solve these problems and make your hallway or other spaces look less cramped up. This way, your shoes can avoid taking more space on the floor and will always be neatly stacked, regardless of how big the collection is. 

    Things To Consider

    While it may be convenient to let your sneakers, slippers, and heels pile up next to the front door, doing this will only further damage them. Piling your slippers up can make the straps give away a lot quicker. The heels could get damaged due to being stored incorrectly or have scuff marks due to another shoe being on or around it. 

    Apart from this, there is dust, mold, and other factors that could affect the shelf life of your shoes. But by investing in a good, sturdy shoe cabinet, shoe rack, or more, avoiding this gets a lot easier. So, what’s the difference?

    A shoe rack is more open and convenient, while a shoe cabinet is a closed shelf that helps with keeping them dust-proof and more. Since picking the ideal shoe rack can be a difficult decision, seeing how there are so many options on the market, we’ve curated this concise list to help narrow down your choices.

    1. How Much Space Do You Have?

    There are various factors to consider before investing in a shoe storage cabinet for you. However, one of the most important criteria would be to check the dimensions and availability of the space you’re looking to place it in. 

    If you’re looking to place it in the hallways or entryways, you’d most likely opt for a small, narrow shoe cabinet. However, if you’re looking to place it in the bedroom, it could be compact or large and spacious with added features like drawers or shelves. 

    This would partially depend on how many shoes you have as well. If it’s a shoe collection consisting of sneakers, heels, flats, and more, opting for a small, compact shoe rack wouldn’t be ideal. 

    1. Lifestyle And Storage Requirement

    Another essential factor would be the kind of shoes you own. If you often wear heels and boots, the shoe cabinet would need to have wider or larger racks, but if you’re just a sneakers and flats person, getting away with a compact shoe storage cabinet is easier.

    You also need to assess where to place the shoe rack as well. It needs to be accessible and shouldn’t result in wasting as much time looking for the right pair. And if you’re on a tight budget or just don’t want to invest in a shoe cabinet, DIY is the way to go. By constructing an easy shoe rack using materials from around the house. 

    1. Aesthetic And Functionality

    Just because you’re looking for a functional piece of furniture, it doesn’t mean that the shoe cabinet shouldn’t look as good as it functions. And look for something that not only accommodates the different types of shoes you own but should also save space and be high on functionality. 

    So, if you have tall boots, opting for storage units with hooks or even a shoe storage cabinet with a bench would be preferable. If they double up as a bench and store all the shoes easily, they will fit in with the rest of the furniture.

    1. Features And Styles

    It is essential to consider your lifestyle, personal style, space availability, and more while looking for the ideal shoe rack. A smaller house would accommodate compact shoe storage cabinets with drawers that store shoes and the rest of the accessories. However, if you wear boots or sneakers, a shoe cabinet with a seat could be the best bet. 

    Shoe cabinets are supposed to make it easy to store shoes while maintaining their quality. However, having a few features like drawers, glass doors, shelves, and more will add a little more charm to your living space. 

    Man opening black steel shoes storage cabinet for keep her shoes.

    Final Words

    Regardless of how many shoes you have, a shoe cabinet should help protect and display your footwear without having to worry about any damage. Adding an aesthetically pleasing shoe storage cabinet to your living space helps elevate the look of the room. 

    But if you’re someone who merely collects sneakers, heels, or boots, a shoe cabinet is the most convenient and safest way to showcase your entire collection. And all of this can be done without having to stack on boxes. It would, otherwise, only continue collecting dust without showing off any of your shoes. 

    If you’re looking to invest in a shoe cabinet, we hope this list narrows down the options and helps find the best shoe cabinet for you!

    Related Articles

    9 Best Plastic Storage Cabinets Right Now

    10 Genius DIY Shoe Storage Ideas That Will Impress You

    41 Beautifully Inspiring Laundry Room Cabinets Ideas to Consider

    18 Smart Examples of Shoe Storage DIY Projects For Your Home

    6 Best Shoe Rack Bench

    When it comes to cleaning your home, not a lot of tools can compare to the effectiveness of the steam mop. A steam mop utilizes the power of hot water in the form of steam to help you break apart dirt and grease, allowing you to clean it all up with a lot more ease than with a regular mop.

    There are many steam mop manufacturers out there who claim to provide products of the highest standards. Bissell is a well-known brand when it comes to steam mops. Considered to be the top dog, it came out with the Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop Model 1940 as one of the best products it has ever produced.

    The innovative Shark brand is a relatively new entry to the industry, but one that is definitely capable of taking on Bissell. Their Shark Steam Pocket Mop Model S3501 is a product touted to be their top product yet.

    If you are considering buying the best steam mop for yourself, the choice is going to be between these two. Both of them heat up the water pretty fast; they boast long power cords, a large reservoir of water, and a swiveling floor head. The question is: which one will suit yours needs the best?

    Luckily, you will not have to spend money on both to test which one is right for you. We have used and reviewed both of these products so that you can get the information you need to make the best decision. We have also included an additional guide that will tell you all the factors you need to consider when you are buying a steam mop.

    Shark S3501 Vs Bissell 1940 | A Steam Mop Comparison

    Bissell Power Fresh Steam Mop with Natural Sanitization,...
    • Clean and sanitize sealed hard floors without the use of...
    • Power through tough, sticky messes with the flip down easy...

    Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop has a large capacity tank that allows you to detach it from the unit to fill it up. Its handle is ergonomically designed for better handling and comfort during use. The floor head on this steam mop features an integrated scrubbing brush. The standard and scrub microfiber pads are both pretty easy to secure to the mop head and remove when you need to clean them up. The steam mop also gives you the option of using three different levels of steam.

    Sale
    Shark Steam Pocket Mop with 2 Washable Double-sided Pads,...
    • SUPER-HEATED STEAM: The Shark Steam Pocket Mop turns...
    • QUICK & EFFORTLESS: Get on-demand steam ready in just 30...

    Shark S3501 Steam Pocket Mop also has a swiveling head. It is a lot lighter on the back side, which makes it easier to handle in hands during use. The reservoir on this steam mop is also quite large and integrated into the steam mop. The container has viewing windows that allow you to check the water level. The microfiber pads have areas that capture particles instead of spreading them around the floor.

    Let’s see how these two compare with each other in various aspects as we used them.

    Reservoir Comparison

    Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop 1940

    Whether you are looking for a slight bit of steam for gentle cleaning of a wooden surface or a powerful burst of steam to get the grime off of the kitchen floor, the Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop has you covered. There are three different steam power settings on this mop that you can control using a digital control panel near the handle of the steam mop.

    The reservoir holding all the water in the PowerFresh is a removable unit. This means you no longer need to worry about being careful while filling the steam mop’s reservoir. All you have to do is detach it and refill it with ease. A capacity of 16 ounces means that you will not have to bother refilling the reservoir frequently. You can get through your work quite fast.

    Shark Steam Pocket Mop S3501

    If you are facing a big cleaning job but you do not have a lot of time for it, the Shark Steam Mop has you covered. In a matter of 30 seconds, the steam mop will heat up the water within the reservoir to bring it up to steam that you can use to clean up the mess in little to no time.

    The main body of the Shark Steam Pocket Mop has a window that allows you to see how much water remains in the reservoir. You will know when to refill it when the water level has started to run low. Adding more water is a matter of laying the mop flat out and filling it up using a measuring cup. At a 15-ounce capacity, you will not need to worry about a lot of refills stopping the progress of your work.

    Resolution

    When it comes to the time taken for heating water, both the Shark and Bissell steam mops stand at the same level. Bissell PowerFresh can hold an ounce of water more than the Shark S3501 and it allows you to adjust the steam output based on the application you need it for.

    The refilling process for both of them is different. The Shark has a built-in reservoir that takes slightly more time to fill up as compared to the Bissell, which has a refillable and detachable water tank.

    Handling Comparison

    Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop 1940

    Bissell PowerFresh has a swiveling floor head that allows you to weave in between a lot of different areas with relative ease. You can move it the furniture in your home without bumping into them and the long power cord allows you to get the kind of room you need to move around.

    One thing in particular about Bissell PowerFresh that we really liked was the fact that it has an ergonomically-designed handle. The problem with straight handles is that they can tire out your hand and even cause you to lose your grip. While the Bissell is not as lightweight as the Shark model, it will not be too heavy for you to handle.

    Shark Steam Pocket Mop S3501

    One of the winning qualities of the Shark Steam Pocket Mop is the fact that it is light. This makes maneuvering the mop around quite easy for anyone. The floor head on this steam mop is also able to swivel, which means getting to all the difficult areas is a lot easier while cleaning a home. The power cord is a substantial 20 feet long that allows you more than enough freedom to move around without the need to change electrical outlets.

    It is important to understand that 4.9 pounds of weight are an industry-leading feature. The circular handle on the Shark Steam Pocket Mop has a very soft grip that combines with the lightweight to make it very easy for you to maneuver it.

    Resolution

    Both of these steam mop models offer you a lot of convenience with the swivel mop heads. Their power cords are around the same length (with the PowerFresh around 3 inches longer). Steam Pocket is a little over a pound lighter than PowerFresh. That being said, PowerFresh does boast an ergonomically-designed handle.

    Floor Head Comparison

    Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop 1940[

    The floor mop head is one of the best features of the Bissell PowerFresh. The scrub brush on it is built into the mop head, which allows you to flip it down whenever you need an extra bit of help to remove problematic grime and dirt. The floor head offers you two viewing windows that let you see whether the scrubbing has cleared out the dirt accumulated in the area you’re working on.

    PowerFresh also comes with a microfiber scrub pad along with a soft one. This enables you to change out the mop pads based on the application you need it for. There is also a bit of room on both mop pads where you can insert fragrance disks. An integrated elastic band secures both the microfiber pads in place with a quick release action, which allows you to make the switch or take them out instantly.

    Shark Steam Pocket Mop S3501

    The Shark Steam Pocket Mop features a rectangular mop floor head. With the straight-line design of the floor head and its ability to pivot on the joint, you can easily take care of the build-up dirt along the corners and edges, which are always left wanting with rounded floor heads. You will not have to make extra scrubbing efforts on those areas again.

    Resolution

    The Shark Steam Pocket Mop and the Bissell PowerFresh both have two microfiber pads, but PowerFresh is the one that gives you two options in terms of scrubbing power. The Steam Pocket’s scrubbing pads, on the other hand, are quilted. Bissell also allows you to see through to the floor using its floor-head windows and the attachment mechanism for its microfiber pads is faster to operate.

    Both Steam Mops Offer You Great Value

    As you can clearly see, both of these steam mop models offer you a lot of value. They heat up quickly to produce the steam you need for cleaning properly. Both of them have large reservoirs that can reduce the number of refills and have long power cords as well.

    Steam Pocket Mop by Shark has an integrated reservoir while the Bissell has a detachable one, which you can remove to fill up. The Bissell PowerFresh offers a few more features than the Steam Pocket Mop like the three separate steam output settings and an integrated brush.

    The Steam Pocket Mop has quilted microfiber pads, but the Bissell Steam Mop has two different types of pads that offer the option of using a scented disk as well. Choosing between the feature-rich Bissell PowerFresh and the streamlined Shark Steam Pocket Mop is a matter of personal preference.

    [easyazon_image align="center" height="500" identifier="B0028MB3HM" locale="US" src="https://m.media-amazon.com/images/I/31p63-6d9OL._SL500_.jpg" tag="homesthetics0a-20" width="226"]

    Shark S3501 Vs Bissell 1940 Steam Mop Buying Guide

    We have put together a concise steam mop buying guide. It highlights all the qualities that the best steam mops are supposed to have. This will help you make a better decision based on your needs and the qualities that both these models have.

    Large Water Tank

    The more water the steam mop can hold, the longer you can use it to clean without running out of steam. In that respect, both of these models happen to have substantial reservoirs with the PowerFresh just edging past the Steam Pocket by an ounce.

    Easy Fill Design

    A steam mop that is easier to refill is more convenient. An integrated reservoir means using a funnel or a measuring cup to refill the mop’s water tank. In this department, the Bissell PowerFresh one-ups the Shark Steam Pocket with its removable reservoir.

    Variable Steam Control

    Another area that the feature-laden Bissell PowerFresh takes away, is a steam mop that offers variable steam output options gives you better control in terms of the intensity you need for different cleaning applications for varying surfaces.

    Easy Handling

    Steam mops that are lightweight and have swiveling floor mop heads are ideal. Both of these models are light and they have excellent pivoting floor heads, but the Steam Pocket is a little over a pound lighter than the PowerFresh.

    Long Power Cord

    Power cords can vary from 16 to 30 feet for steam mops. The steam mop you should go for needs to have a long power cord. A longer power cord allows you the freedom to move around an area while you clean it without the need to change power outlets.

    Both the Steam Pocket and PowerFresh offer pretty long power cords at around 20 feet with the PowerFresh featuring a 3-inch longer cord.

    Built-in Power Switch

    Steam mops that allow you to turn them on or off using a switch on the mop itself rather than relying on the outlet are much safer to handle. You can turn it on whenever you are ready to use it. Both of the models feature built-in power switches.

    Fast Heating

    Generally, steam mops can take up to quite a few minutes to heat up the water in the reservoir to bring it up to steam. You need to get a steam mop capable of quickly producing the steam you need to effectively clean around your house.

    Both the Steam Pocket Mop and the PowerFresh can quickly heat up the water and make the steam ready for use within a matter of around 30 seconds.

    Final Thoughts on Shark S3501 Vs Bissell 1940

    Based on our experience of using the Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop 1940 and the Shark Steam Pocket Mop S3501, we feel that both of them are pretty capable machines, which offer a lot of solid value for someone who likes to keep busy cleaning the house.

    There are some areas where the Bissell PowerFresh definitely overtakes the Shark Steam Pocket Mop, but the Steam Pocket Mop is lighter and pretty convenient to use. Choosing between the two is a matter of how you feel their qualities suit your needs.

    We hope that the reviews, comparison, and buying guide will help you make the best possible decision for the best steam mop you can invest in for your home.

    Related Articles

    55 Best Robot Vacuum Names For Your Little One

    Bissell Crosswave 1785A vs. 2306A

    Bissell 3624 Vs. 2694 [SpotClean Portable Cleaners Compared]

    Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe Vs. Hoover Turbo Scrub

    Roborock H7 Vacuum Cleaner

    10 Best Shop Vacs For Dust Collection

    13 Best Vacuum for Stairs

    13 Best Non-Electric Vacuum Sweepers

    6 Best Vacuum Cleaners for Mattress That Promote Healthy Sleeping

    Bissell BigGreen 86T3 vs. BG10 | Carpet Cleaner Comparison

    With this as an icebreaker, we are starting a series, that will guide and advice you in backyard landscaping design. After reading the last article , hopefully you will be able to use this in order to design your dream backyard using the information. An important item in backyard landscaping ideas and probably a must have is the fireplace…In this article we are going to see the different types, sizes, shapes and solutions for every situation and.

    The awesomeness of fireplaces has made them a hugely desirable item. The great part about this is that the options are virtually endless. You can have basically anything you can imagine from a traditional design to a 100% custom one.

    Exterior Fireplaces Meant to Enhance Your Living Quality

    Traditional design

    Recognizable arched shape and brick or stone finishing , this model will fit right in your rustic backyard.

    Southwestern design

    Most often than not finished in stucco, an outdoor southwestern style fireplace can be decorated with colored ceramic tiles. Also , for authenticity , the chimney structure would be a stair step one instead of a straight or slope one.

    Modern design

    Featuring clean-cut lines and industrial materials, this design looks great in the modern backyard garden setting. The best materials for it include stainless steel and/or concrete. The shapes fall into the rectangular, monolithic design category.

    Mediterranean Design

    Using a simple structure and colored ceramic tiles decorating the firebox are the defining features of the popular Mediterranean design originated in Morocco.

    These are just a few examples of fireplaces that can transform your backyard into the little corner of heaven you always dreamt it could be. But you are in no way limited to popular tendencies. Adding a nice cozy fire , improves any moment, whether it`s scary story time, a special moment with your significant other, a relaxing read, or a drink with your friends. So having established that , let`s look into some other options of `firing things up `.

    Portable Fire Pit

    A portable fire pit gives you versatility. Because of the circular shape and portability, it`s ideal for when your friends come over and it`s a guaranteed cozy , homey atmosphere which everyone will enjoy. Here too you can choose from an entire array of stiles, shapes and whatnot. If you don`t like the hassle of making your own wood fire, some high end portable fire pit models come with a natural gas source, but nothing compares with a wood fire when enjoying some outdoor moments watching the sun slowly set in the summer evening.   Mobility means that you can change the design of your backyard if you want to experiment, without having the constraint of the fixed fireplace, also if you decided to sell your house it can make it more appealing to a buyer that may not want a fire pit.

    Built-In Fireplace

    The epitome of outdoor home features, a built-in fireplace, preserves and matches the overall look of your outdoor home design and adding to your real estate value. A great enhancement to your patio , the built-in fireplace also provides additional comfort by being protected from wind which can turn your relaxing evening into a chaos of flying ash, smoke and ember. The choice in furniture for the fireplace-patio ensemble should be oriented towards low , deep comfy chairs, with soft cushions that maintain the homey relaxed atmosphere around the fireplace , placed around a coffee table. Bare metal should be avoided as it can get hot to an uncomfortable level due to high heat conductivity. Another great option for the seating arrangements is the usage of built-in seating. It can be designed as an extension of the fireplace and finished in accordance. Also the sky is the limit when it comes to layouts, style, shapes. The ideal dimension should be the same as above with low height and comfortable cushion, especially as the seats themselves would be made out of concrete , brick or stone, depending on the fireplace design. The height should be around 20 inches. Commonly known as seat walls, this seating arrangement is not a thing you should disregard when you decide what suits your case best.

    We are continuing our Backyard Landscaping Ideas series with detailed and necessary information that will help you make the best and most suitable choice of the outdoor fireplace you always wanted. In this article of the Backyard Landscaping Ideas series we will go through placing, dimension, materials, finishing and more crucial points you need to go over when you decide to take your backyard to the next level.

    Outdoor Fireplace Kit

    Due to the fact that building a fireplace from scratch can be challenging, time consuming, and requires a certain level of masonry skill, a lot of manufacturers offer the option to buy a kit which contains all the tricky structural parts of the fireplace already prefabricated. This allows you to put together your fireplace on site easily.

    The main components in the kit are the firebox and the chimney and it is crucial that they are manufactured with quality materials. Opposed to the classic brick and mortar which will degrade structurally in time due to cycles of contraction/expansion, composites like pumice and refractory cement radiate heat instead of absorbing it, which drastically improves durability.

    A premium quality outdoor fireplace kit should incorporate a few important characteristics like : Interlocking joints which are important for structural durability, lightweight composite materials which improve durability and will be easy to put together also,a chimney manufactured out of refractory material with a proper throat design that guarantees it draws good, a good angle on the back wall to improve heat radiation.

    Another advantage of the outdoor fireplace kit option is that all the kits in the market are properly tested and approved to standards similar to indoor units in order to ensure proper functionality.

    Also , the variety of designs, sizes, shapes that you can find is practically limitless, and you can choose the one that suits your taste the best. One thing you have to do yourself though is have a foundation in place made to match the manufacturers specifications. This is of utmost importance especially if the model you chose has a larger height which makes it vulnerable high speed wind.

    The finishing should be chosen in order to perfectly match the environment you picked.

    Another option is to buy the fireplace fully finished and all you need to do is set in in place, anchor it and if desired connect it to a gas line. This option has a few disadvantages like the need of a crane or other type of heavy equipment do to increased weight, not finding a finishing that perfectly matches the surroundings, which is a must if you want your backyard landscaping ideas to come to life like you dreamed.

    Outdoor fireplace design

    When brainstorming with the family for backyard landscaping ideas , one thing should definitely not be underestimated. That is the location of your outdoor fireplace. The position you choose will have a great impact on the whole atmosphere that the scenery you create will induce to the observer. It will also establish how often will you use that outdoor fireplace. Keeping in mind that and outdoor fireplace becomes an important focal point in your backyard landscape should help you find an ideal position which will also not distract any attention from other focal points or zones that you consider of interest.

    Ideal dimensions for an Outdoor fireplace patio

    Due to the obvious fact that the functionality of a fireplace is concentrated at the front side, it can be located against any kind of wall, fence or corner whilst making sure it has the right amount of space in front of it to be enjoyed as it was meant to.

    What does this mean in actual dimensions? Well, for a small fireplace you will be wanting about 12 by 12 foot (that is about 3.65 by 3.65 meters) while for a larger one you will need at least 18 by 18 foot (which amounts to 5.4 by 5.4 meters).

    Local Construction Codes

    This an aspect of utmost importance and it should not be overlooked, as it might cause a rebuild of your chimney due to wrong positioning or wrong dimensioning. Zoning regulation can and probably will include things such as minimum distance to an existing structure, property line etc. , height of the chimney and so on. The first thing you should do when and outdoor chimney appears on your backyard landscaping ideas list, should be contacting your local city planning office.

    Privacy

    Another thing you shouldn`t take lightly is privacy. Ideal for setting an intimate atmosphere, and outdoor fireplace should be placed away from prying eyes. Do your best to ensure that the front of your fireplace is out of sight while also taking into account that you shouldn`t block a potential view you might enjoy from your back windows like a beautiful lake scenery, a skyline or what have you.

    Wind Direction

    This can turn your calm relaxing atmosphere next to your outdoor fireplace into the hell on earth of backyard landscaping ideas. Predominant wind direction is a very important factor when deciding placing and orientation of your outdoor fireplace.

    Make sure it will act like a wind breaker, which will create a sea of silence(well maybe a small lake) in front of it, allowing you to relax and have a good time.
    stone fireplace Backyard-Lanscaping-Ideas-Fireplaces-homesthetics

    brick Backyard-Lanscaping-Ideas-Fireplaces-homesthetics

    brick fireplace by the swimming pool Backyard-Lanscaping-Ideas-Fireplaces-homesthetics

    patio design by the firepleace Backyard-Lanscaping-Ideas-Fireplaces-homesthetics

    fireplace by the swimming pool Backyard-Lanscaping-Ideas-Fireplaces-homesthetics

    traditional brick fireplace Backyard-Lanscaping-Ideas-Fireplaces-homesthetics

    circular round stone fireplace by the swimming pool Backyard-Lanscaping-Ideas-Fireplaces-homesthetics

    simple circular round fireplace Backyard-Lanscaping-Ideas-Fireplaces-homesthetics

    modern minimalist fireplace Backyard-Lanscaping-Ideas-Fireplaces-homesthetics

    stone fireplace Backyard-Lanscaping-Ideas-Fireplaces-homesthetics

    Backyard-Lanscaping-Ideas-Fireplaces-homesthetics

    Related Articles

    6 Best Wood Stove Fans in 2022 | Buyer’s Guide

    19 Types of Fireplaces for Your Home

    To Mount or Not to Mount a TV Over The Fireplace – Pros & Cons

    Learn What the Malm Fireplace Is, Timeless Design Explained

    Backyard Landscaping Design Ideas-Amazing Near Swimming Pool Fireplaces

    10 Best Gas Logs of 2022 Reviewed

    17 Small Front Yard Landscaping Ideas To Define Your Curb Appeal

    Any door, be it in a commercial or residential place, is not complete without a door closer to make sure the door closes smoothly.

    While a sliding door may not need such an attachment, any standard door that opens inwards or outwards is susceptible to slamming shut. This is where a reliable door closer comes in to help extend the lifespan of your door frames.

    However, finding the best screen door closer can be challenging. After all, there are so many types of doors; aluminum, wood, and metal doors have many differences in construction and quality. To help narrow down your search for the perfect closer, we have gathered the best models on the market as well as a guide to aid you in making the most informed decision.

    With that being said, let's get right into it!

    Listed below are the Best Screen Door Closers:

    • Hampton Products: Hampton Products V150WH Door Closer stands out with a heavy-duty design, compatibility with thick doors, and easy installation. Its one key drawback is a rapid latching speed that could lead to abrupt closing.
    • Ideal Security: Ideal Security Pneumatic Storm and Screen Door Closer offers adjustable closing speeds and versatile installation options. A minor issue is a creaking noise it may produce while closing.
    • Greenstar Door Closer: Greenstar Touch ‘n Hold Smooth Door Closer, with its unique touch 'n hold feature and smooth closing technology, offers convenience and safety. Limited wind resistance could lead to premature closing in high-wind areas.
    • National Hardware: The main strength of National Hardware's closer is a user-friendly top button that makes locking up easy. Being awkward as a top jamb is a drawback.
    • Greenstar Touch ‘n Hold: Strongly built for heavy-duty doors, this Greenstar closer excels in wind resistance and durability. Its hands-free operation is a plus, but the hold button is only available on one of the closers.

    1. Hampton Products

    The Hampton Products V150WH door closer has a heavy-duty pneumatic design to catch the door from slamming shut. It is compatible with a wood or metal door that swings outward. With the adjustable closing speed and easy installation, it is an excellent option for beginners and experts alike.

    What makes the V150WH so great as a door closer is the durability it offers to protect the hinges and frame of the door. It is built for heavy doors, so the door's weight can be supported by the patented pneumatic system. What's more, it is compatible with Storm doors that are 3/4th of an inch to two inches in thickness.

    Additionally, the door closer has an effective opening of 90 degrees for doors that open outward. This gives a set area that keeps the storm door from suddenly banging open, even in strong and high wind.

    Whether it is wood or metal heavy-duty doors, attaching it to the door is a simple matter of screwing in the mounting brackets to the frame. The closing speed of the door closer can then be adjusted to close as slowly or quickly as you need.

    One minor inconvenience that we found while testing out the V150WH was the sudden closing of the door towards the end of the closing motion. This made the frame suddenly slam shut, no matter how slowly the pneumatic system was adjusted.

    Material: Aluminum | Dimensions: ‎15.75 x 1.81 x 3.75 inches | Weight: ‎1.08 pounds | Color: ‎‎White | Smooth Closing: Yes | Heavy Duty: Yes

    2. Ideal Security

    This pneumatic storm and screen door closer to Ideal Security has a tough yet flexible design that is perfect for any heavy door. It can be adjusted for having the right closing speed and can be used while replacing screens and door panels, which are a few of its user-friendly features.

    Ideal Security has prioritized versatility in the installation of the SK1730B as it is possible to attach the jamb bracket on the top, middle, or bottom of the door. There is no loss of latching power no matter the location of installation, allowing the door closer to adjust to the design of any door.

    Furthermore, this door closer is compatible with aluminum, steel, and wooden doors that are 1.25 to 2 inches thick. It is easy to say that no matter the door weight, the SK1730B is able to support the entire door.

    Of course, being a pneumatic door closer, adjustment to the closing speed is possible via the end of the cylinder with an air screw. These adjustments also allow for changing out the screen doors or panels on a storm door for a seamless maintenance experience.

    Although it may not be as big of an issue, we noticed that the parallel arm gave off quite a few creaks as compared to other standard-duty door closers. Thankfully, it is an easy fix by applying a few drops of lubricant to allow for smoother travel regardless of how many positions the door is opened at.

    Material: Aluminum | Dimensions: 16 x 6 x 9 inches | Weight: ‎‎1.14 pounds | Color: ‎‎Brown | Smooth Closing: Yes | Heavy Duty: No

    3. Greenstar Touch ‘n Hold Smooth Door Closer

    Sporting patented smooth closing technology; this Greenstar door closer has a touch 'n hold feature for ultimate convenience and safety. At the push of a button, the door closer will remain open, a valuable ability for any residential or commercial door closer. With an easy installation to boot, this Greenstar door closer is a solid choice for medium doors.

    Obviously, the standout feature of this Greenstar automatic door closer is the touch 'n hold design. Being able to keep the door open at the push of a button makes moving in and out much easier, especially when your hands are full with groceries or other items. To get the screen door closer to resume its closing motion, simply open it a bit more, and it will slowly shut by itself.

    Greenstar has made its own patented closing technology to make a smooth path that has reliable latching power when closed. Once released from the locked position, the parallel arm glides into the cylinder and seals shut.

    Furthermore, this Greenstar closer is able to be installed where other parallel arm closers have been used. It has a straightforward installation, making it compatible with other brackets from various manufacturers.

    While this Greenstar pneumatic door closer has a useful halting feature, this makes it vulnerable to high winds. These winds can compromise the structural integrity of the closer and prematurely close it, which should be taken into account if you live in a particularly windy area.

    Material: Aluminum | Dimensions: ‎13.9 x 2.5 x 1.7 inches | Weight: ‎0.9 pounds | Color: Black | Smooth Closing: Yes | Heavy Duty: Yes

    4. National Hardware

    Gone are the days of struggling against a closing screen door, thanks to this National Hardware door closer. A top button allows for the closer to lock up and keep the screen door opened at any position you need—definitely a handy feature for any lightweight doors that need an extra bit of support.

    National Hardware has taken convenience and the user experience as the priority with their door closed. As far as screen door closers go, the ergonomic button is a rare but welcome feature. It is located on the top of the closet, making it easily accessible and comfortable to use.

    Additionally, when released, the closer has a slow path, allowing the more delicate door frame of lightweight doors to be held intact for longer. This slower path is achieved by adjusting the closing speed during installation.

    What makes this screen door closer a delight to use is the easy auto-release function. Simply pushing the door a bit more open will unlock the mechanism and free the door to gradually shut at the speed you set.

    If there were one caveat to getting the National Hardware screen door closer, it would be the inability to use it as a top jamb. Putting it at the top of a door frame can leave the button beyond arm's length and make the hold-open feature obsolete.

    Material: Steel | Dimensions: ‎2 x 4 x 4 inches | Weight: ‎‎1.03 pounds | Color: White | Smooth Closing: Yes | Heavy Duty: No

    5. Greenstar Touch ‘n Hold Smooth Dual Door Closer System

    Another offering from Greenstar, this particular model is designed as a dual storm door closer. It can withstand exposure and weight from wind, making it a heavy-duty attachment to keep doors secured. What's more, it also features the trademark hands-free open design for convenience.

    What makes this storm door closer so unique is the dual design that is able to withstand the heavy weight of storm doors. It does not compromise on its durability, having an all-metal body that can replace a number of other door closers.

    Furthermore, this dual storm door closer has a simple installation and features the patented smooth closing that Greenstar is known for. There are no unexpectedly fast or slower closing speeds; it moves at the rate you set it as while installing.

    Of course, the highlight feature has to be the button that can be tapped to keep the door propped open. This feature works at any position and can be released by pushing the door slightly more open and allowing it to close. Truly, an easy-to-use design that comes in handy when you need it.

    While it is not a dealbreaker, one minor inconvenience to this Greenstar dual storm door closer is the placement of the door hold button. They have only included it on one closer, meaning having the feature on both doors will require an additional purchase to get closer with the button.

    Material: Steel | Dimensions: ‎‎15.9 x 3.6 x 1.6 inches | Weight: ‎‎‎2.14 pounds | Color: Bronze | Smooth Closing: Yes | Heavy Duty: Yes

    6. Onarway Automatic Door Closer

    The Onarway automatic closer is an incredibly heavy-duty option if you need the absolute best in top jamb closers. With the opportunity to keep the door open past 90 degrees, it is a one-of-a-kind opener that keeps heavy doors from closing too fast.

    Right off the bat, this door closer stands out as a versatile attachment for any medium-sized door, whether they are indoor or outdoor. Material and right or left orientation is also not a factor; the door closer can be applied regardless.

    With such a broad scope of applicable contexts, it is surprising to see that the closer is able to support the entire weight of the door in an open state. When opened past 90 degrees, the door will remain open at the position you leave it at. To close it, simply return it to any angle lower than 90 degrees, and it will softly close itself.

    Furthermore, it has a durable build of antioxidative and non-corrosive aluminum alloy. This material also has the benefit of being resistant to rust and weather conditions while giving a steady, silent operation.

    As this door closer is meant for heavier doors, it does have a heftier weight than other door closers. Young children and older people may find opening or closing the door to be challenging; more force is required to get the door to the locked open position.

    Material: Aluminum | Dimensions: 7 x 1.57 x 2.4 inches | Weight: 3 pounds | Color: Silver | Smooth Closing: Yes | Heavy Duty: No

    7. FORTSTRONG Door Closer

    A high-quality piece of hardware, the Fortstrong commercial door closer is a seamless way to slowly and smoothly close doors. With two independent adjustment levels, there are a number of customizations in terms of closing speed that can be made.

    One feature that came especially in handy was the option to adjust the sweeping motion and catch mechanism of the closer. The sweeping motion ensures the door doesn't open too fast, while the catch will limit the closing speed to the desired level. Each of these parameters together makes for a fully custom motion for the door to work precisely the way you want.

    As the FORTSTRONG door closer has an aluminum housing, it is relatively lightweight and ideal for many residential doors. There is also a steel-encased body that brings an extra layer of durability to the entire construction.

    For an added touch of convenience in the installation process, FORTSTRONG includes a full fitting template to follow in case you are drilling into a new frame. This cuts down on figuring out the correct measurements, allowing for a seamless installation process.

    Similar to many other hydraulic closers, the FORTSTRONG door closer has a tendency to squeak when being opened or closed. While the noise level is not at a considerable level, it is still notable when compared to other door closers.

    Material: Aluminum | Dimensions: 10.2 x 3.2 x 2.8 inches | Weight: 3.15 pounds | Color: Silver | Smooth Closing: Yes | Heavy Duty: No

    What Are the Best Screen Door Closers?

    Product Material Dimensions Weight Color Smooth Closing Heavy Duty
    Hampton Products Aluminum 15.75 x 1.81 x 3.75 inches ‎1.08 pounds White Yes Yes
    Ideal Security Aluminum 16 x 6 x 9 inches ‎1.14 pounds ‎‎Brown Yes No
    Greenstar Touch ‘n Hold Smooth Door Closer Aluminum 13.9 x 2.5 x 1.7 inches 0.9 pounds Black Yes Yes
    National Hardware Steel 2 x 4 x 4 inches ‎1.03 pounds White Yes No
    Greenstar Touch ‘n Hold Smooth Dual Door Closer System Steel 15.9 x 3.6 x 1.6 inches ‎2.14 pounds Bronze Yes Yes
    Onarway Automatic Door Closer Aluminum 7 x 1.57 x 2.4 inches ‎3 pounds Silver Yes No
    FORTSTRONG Door Closer Aluminum 10.2 x 3.2 x 2.8 inches ‎3.15 pounds Silver Yes No

    Buying Guide For The Best Screen Door Closer

    Among door closers, there are specialized types for external and internal doors that can significantly affect performance. Knowing the types and various features in these types of attachments can be the difference between a successful installation or not.

    Keep the following factors and features in mind when looking for a door closer in order to get the best performance possible.

    1. Closing Method

    Depending on the type and weight of the door being supported, the closing mechanism is one of the crucial factors to be considered. There are two main camps when it comes to door-closing methods to soften the motion before it hits the frame.

    A. Hydraulic Door Closer

    One of the most popular methods used, the hydraulic door closer uses a system of air in pipes to open and close the door as smoothly as possible. Opening a standard door with this type of mechanism attached will result in the cylinder being compressed with air and then released when closed.

    By making adjustments to the amount of air being used in each motion, the closing force can be altered. More or less air in the cylinder will equate to a faster or slower movement. Depending on the weight of the door, these adjustments can help make opening and closing the door more manageable and safer.

    B. Spring Mechanism

    A spring mechanism door closer is similar to a hydraulic system, save for the fact that instead of air, it uses a spring box. This spring box has an adjustable spring that is used to control how taut the door will open or shut.

    Usually, a spring box mechanism will allow the closer to remain open until 90 degrees from the frame. As such, a spring box method is a popular option for household doors that need to be easily kept open with one hand.

    2. Types Of Overhead Door Closers

    Just as there is a selection of closing mechanisms to choose from, the installation and design of the door closer is another factor to consider. Below are a few of the most common overhead ones used in both commercial and residential doors. Each closer type has its own unique benefits and drawbacks, so look for the one with all the qualities you are looking for in a closer.

    A. Standard Arm Closer

    One of the most basic designs of door closers, this regular arm closer uses two arms to ease the door closed. While one arm is anchored to the frame, the other is attached to a spring box. Where this design falls short is that it sticks out perpendicularly from the door, which is not the sleekest design.

    B. Top Jamb Closer

    Seen as one of the best storm door closers in terms of design, a top jamb design is incredibly robust. Storm doors require substantial support to remain closed, which is why a top jamb is perfect, with its spring-loaded box that is mounted on the face of the frame of the door.

    C. Parallel Arm Closer

    Commonly seen in residential doors and other types of lightweight doors, a parallel arm closer is used for its clean aesthetic. Although its closing speed is not as strong as the other types of overhead closers, it is valued as it is not damaged easily. This makes using it on light doors like screen doors more feasible in the long run.

    3. Types Of Concealed Closers

    On the other end of the spectrum of door closers, there are concealed closers that can not be visibly seen when the door is closed. There are two types of concealed closers that can be used in place of an overhead design to give a cleaner, more polished look to the frame.

    A. Surface Mount Closers

    A surface-mounted door closer is placed on the back of a door frame to add support and act as a buffer. Typically, it is used for automatic doors that close autonomously. Additionally, they are available in a wide range of colors, so matching them to the finish of the frame and door is quite easy.

    B. Floor Spring Closers

    One of the most high-quality door closers in terms of design and budget, a floor spring is incredibly difficult to identify. Of course, this is the primary goal of a concealed closer, an illusion that is achieved by keeping the mechanism buried in the floor. Underneath the floor, these closers control how fast or slow a door moves.

    As these types of closers are pretty costly to install, they are not always seen in residential doors. Commercial applications are more common for a concealed floor spring closer.

    With that, we will wrap up our review and guide for door closers; hopefully, you were able to find what you were looking for.

    All that's left now is selecting a model; our top choice has to be Hampton Products for its incredible durability. However, we would give the best storm door closer to the Ideal Security as it has a number of installation possibilities. As for the best screen door closer, the Greenstar Touch ‘n Hold Smooth Door Closer has a handy halted opening design.

    Regardless of what door closer you decide to go with, one thing is clear. No longer will you have to worry about the doors catching you off guard and slamming on any heels with a closer installed. A door closer is a small step in the right direction to a higher quality of living; treat yourself today!

    There are a lot of jobs that can be done from home nowadays. Usually, people working online, musicians, painters, but also accountants and lawyers could in theory work from home. It all depends on a lot of factors of course.

    If you are lucky enough to have the chance to work from home, then you will need a place to work in. That is why we are going to show you designs of Scandinavian home offices that you can consider building in your home.

    Don't get scared of the word "building" because building a home office, especially in the Scandi style, is usually placing a desk in the corner of an existing room in your home. Of course, this is a simple explanation. If you actually want to have a beautiful home office that will motivate you to work more, then you need to tailor it to your needs.

    First off, we should make it clear that Scandinavian home offices are a very functional addition to your home even if you don't have the ability to work from home. It will prove useful to you anyway because you will have a space in which you can read, do some research, take care of the bills, or most importantly, practice your hobbies without anyone bothering you, or you bothering anyone.

    So, now that we have that cleared up, what makes a home office a good home office? What's the most important thing to you when it comes to working and when it comes to home? Comfort. That is one of the biggest reasons a home office beats a regular office. You can do your job while enjoying the comfort of your home. No dress codes, and no generic furniture. Brew a fresh cup of your favorite coffee in your favorite mug and start working in your pajamas. Okay, maybe not in pajamas, but you get the idea.
    Check out the designs of Scandinavian home offices that we have displayed in this collection and you will find plenty of awesome ideas!

    1. Combine the study with the bedroom if space is limited

    Source

    2. Whitewashed Scandinavian Home Office interior design

    Source

    3. You can combine the home office with anything, including the staircase and hallway

    Source

    4. But it is best if it stands alone to achieve peace and serenity while working

    Source

    5. Black and white contrasts in the office are typical for the Scandinavian style

    Source

    6. Make sure your Scandinavian Home Offices have plenty of storage

    Source

    7. And never forget the natural light when picking the Scandi style

    Source

    8. Make use of the extra space in your attic as a home office

    Source

    9. Customize your Scandi home office with furniture that fits your style

    Source

    10. Natural light is extremely important in workspaces, so make sure you have plenty of it

    Source

    11. If space is limited, then a corner desk should suffice

    Source

    12. Tuck away your home office desk in an empty corner

    Source

    13. Minimalist interior decor works well if applied correctly in the home office

    Source

    14. Light colors with stark contrasts make the Scandinavian style unique

    Source

    15. Use a corner of a hallway as a home office

    16. Put an emphasis on your decor through Contrast

    Dark or black furniture and brightly colored or even better, white walls, will do the trick beautifully.

    Source

    17. You can use any available corner in your home as a home office

    18. It can also be in the hallway, right next to the staircase

    19. an attic home desk would be splendid

    Source

    20. Make sure it doesn't feel too cluttered

    Source

    To work from home should be a treat and it surely needs to feel like it. Make sure you are comfortable, that you have everything that you need at your grasp, and that it defines you.

    How do you like the stunning Scandinavian Home Offices above? How does yours look? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below! Also, if you want to learn about the four variables of professional task supervision, check out the AtTrack Blog website.

    In order to give your epoxy resin workpieces a finished look after curing, you need to sand the surfaces to make them even.

    Since you have looked up this guide, we are pretty sure that you take a keen interest in creating workpieces. Today, we are going to learn about the things you need to take care of while sanding.

    We will also be taking a close look at the materials that you will be needing. Be assured that by the end of this article, you will have a firm knowledge of the different kinds of sanding and their pros and cons.

    So, without any further ado, let us learn how to properly sand epoxy resin!

    Sanding Epoxy Resin 

    Modern handmade table made from walnut tree

    We bet you know how hard the liquid-casting resin turns during curing; this makes it pretty hard for us to sand the surfaces of the workpiece. The main reason why it becomes so hard is that the abrasive paper used often gets dull almost immediately.

    Furthermore, the hard resin totally deteriorates the quality of the sandpaper, which leads us to buy a new one. So, to use the sandpaper well and avoid clogging, we strongly advise you to wet sand epoxy resin surfaces.

    Epoxy Resin Crystal Clear Kit for Art, Jewelry, Crafts,...
    • ▶ PREFECT FOR ANY ARTIST’S PROJECT - Puduo Clear Epoxy...
    • ▶ EASY TO USE - Straightforward and no confusion, just mix...

    Wet Sanding vs. Dry Sanding

    There are essentially two kinds of sanding - wet and dry. Now, you might be wondering, which one is better? We have found out that wet sanding does a better job when compared to dry sanding.

    There are a good number of reasons for backing this method. For starters, the abrasive paper employed during wet sanding tends to last longer than the material used while dry sanding.

    Also, when you wet sand, you get rid of the unevenness almost immediately, and this process produces less dust because of the moisture. Another important benefit of wet sanding is that the surface of the workpiece becomes much more visible, so it can be taken care of anytime.

    But, there are several occasions where dry sanding proves to be more beneficial. For instance, dry sanding works best on materials that are partially made of wood or other similar materials that are moisture sensitive. If you wet sand wooden materials, it would cause the wood to swell up and may also cause hideous stains on the surface.

    Apart from this reason, wet sanding always ends up beating dry sanding in most cases. Dry sanding requires a lot of physical effort, and it also creates a good amount of frictional heat and dust. This heat may loosen the resin surface, which might give a matt shine to the surface.

    Once the shine is gone, it is very difficult to have it back. Also, wear a mask if you do intend to dry sand as the resin dust is carcinogenic.

    Advantages Of Wet Sanding Epoxy Resin

    There are quite a few advantages of wet sanding epoxy resin, so let’s take a look at them now.

    1. It Offers Better Results

    Wet sanding offers significantly better results than dry sanding. The water cleanses the abrasive particles off the surface, which prevents the sandpaper from clogging, so it can be used for a long period.

    1. No Risk Of Breathing In Dust

    There is no dust involved in wet sanding, so it saves you from the dangers of inhaling carcinogenic dust. This is one of the biggest advantages of using wet sanding over dry sanding.

    Disadvantages of Wet Sanding Epoxy Resin

    Wet sanding comes with its fair share of disadvantages as well. We’ll take a look at them in this section.

    1. The Dust Is Absorbed By The Water Used

    The dust generated makes the water used dirty. Often, this contaminated water causes damage to the material, so you must ensure that you cover the materials with a well-built trampoline.

    If you do not have access to a trampoline, make sure to cover it with a protective plastic sheet.

    1. The Water Used Leads To the Swelling Of Wooden Parts

    While wet sanding, the water can lead to the wooden parts swelling up. So, you must ensure that the wooden parts of the workpieces are not exposed during wet sanding. Other materials similar to wood that are prone to swelling should not be exposed to wet sanding either.

    Waterproof Sandpaper | Explained

    In order to conduct the process of sand resin by wet sanding in an efficient manner, it is important to get hold of water-resistant sandpaper. It is nothing but sandpaper that is made of silicon carbide.

    These special kinds of sandpapers are available in grits ranging between 60 and 4000. Keep in mind that the coarser your water-resistant sandpaper is, the harsher it is for your workpiece material. Coarse water-resistant sandpapers can leave deep starches, which may be very difficult to get rid of.

    So, while sanding epoxy resin, ensure that you start with a grit ranging near 120. And after getting the hang of it, you can steadily work up to a finer grit.

    Wet Sanding Epoxy Resin 101 - A Beginner's Guide

    In this part, we are going to take a look at how you can efficiently perform the process of wet sanding epoxy resin. Wet sanding is mainly performed by hand. We strongly advise you against using electrical equipment as it can give out electric shock because of the water used. You can consider using an air-power sander to work on large surfaces.

    Furthermore, you can use a rubber sanding block to ensure that your abrasive paper remains flat during wet sanding. If you are going to sand on a curved surface, we recommend you use a suitable alternative.

    If you do not want the hassle of using a sand block or pad, simply use your hand to keep the abrasive paper in a comfortable position before moistening it.

    That being said, the downside is that waterproof sandpaper does not bend quite easily. This becomes a problem when you want to use it on uneven surfaces of workpieces or complicatedly shaped epoxy resin pieces. It is very difficult to bend the abrasive paper on these kinds of surfaces.

    But, do not worry as there are several alternatives out there for such occurrences; one such alternative is using a Scotch Brite.

    During wet sanding, you must ensure that you keep a large water tank nearby. If the ambient temperature is cold, you must use hot water. Always scrub the sandpaper in a regular circular motion while wet sanding epoxy resin, and do not forget to dip the waterproof sandpaper in the water frequently.

    Furthermore, you should make it a point to only change the grit to a finer version when there are no traces visible of the older grit on the resin surface.

    Tips For Wet Sanding Epoxy Resin

    In this section, we’ll discuss some tips that will help achieve better results while wet sanding epoxy resin.

    1. Wet The Surface Instead Of Wetting The Sandpaper

    It is always better to wet the surface of your workpiece instead of continuously wetting the sandpaper. We recommend that you consider using a spray bottle to spray water on your workpiece frequently.

    1. Use A Cloth To Remove The Existing Sand Residue

    By removing the existing sand residue, you can keep track of how much you are sanding. If you do intend to change to a grain that is finer, ensure that the surface of your workpiece must be cleaned before.

    Doing so will prevent your workpiece from sustaining scratches from coarse sand grains.

    1. Use An Electrostatic Dust Cloth

    You must use an electrostatic dust cloth if you consider painting right after you finish sanding. Using an electrostatic dust cloth will eliminate the smallest dust particles from the surface so that it does not affect the painting.

    Epoxy Resin Crystal Clear Kit for Art, Jewelry, Crafts,...
    • ▶ PREFECT FOR ANY ARTIST’S PROJECT - Puduo Clear Epoxy...
    • ▶ EASY TO USE - Straightforward and no confusion, just mix...

    Dry Sanding Epoxy Resin 101 - A Beginner's Guide

    Dry sanding is a better option when you are sanding a large area and when time and effort are your prime concerns. While dry sanding, there is going to be a lot of dust involved. So, we strongly suggest you wear a respiratory mask while you are dry sanding. As we have already mentioned before, you must work in an open area or at least in a well-ventilated room.

    Keep in mind that these dust are highly toxic, so you must take all the required measures to protect yourself. While dry sanding epoxy, ensure that you start with 200 grit and then slowly make up to 1000 grits.

    The sandpaper will likely clog during dry sanding, so we advise you to use a rubber stick to remove all the resin residue from the sandpaper's surface. Another important thing to keep in mind is that you should remove any visible sanding traces from your workpiece before changing the grit size.

    Tips for Dry Sanding Epoxy Resin

    Now, let’s talk about some of the key tips that will help you get better results while dry sanding epoxy resin.

    1. Do Not Apply Too Much Pressure

    It is recommended that you do not apply too much pressure while dry sanding epoxy resin. You must keep the pressure from moderate to light. Also, do not sand the same spot over and over again, as it will leave a depression that could show up while you paint your workpiece.

    1. Use A Headlamp While Sanding

    If you use a headlamp, it will help you locate spots that need more attention, such as scratches, dings, gouges, etc. If you do find out any of these, make sure that you re-sand them to get better results.

    1. Be Attentive While Cleaning Up

    You must be very attentive when you are cleaning up the dust after you are done dry sanding. Keep in mind that this dust is highly toxic to the lungs, and it can mess up the paint's adhesion to your workpiece. The sooner you remove the dust, the better it is for your workpiece.

    Epoxy Resin Crystal Clear Kit for Art, Jewelry, Crafts,...
    • ▶ PREFECT FOR ANY ARTIST’S PROJECT - Puduo Clear Epoxy...
    • ▶ EASY TO USE - Straightforward and no confusion, just mix...

    Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

    In this part, we have tried to answer some of the frequently asked questions. We strongly recommend that you read these questions and answers.

    1. What is amine redness?

    Anime redness is a sticky layer that gets formed on your workpiece during the process of curing. This mainly happens when there is a consequential fluctuation in temperature in the course of drying.

    Sometimes the amine redness is not visible to the eyes since its appearance may alternate, but it can be seen and felt as a dull layer in cold and humid temperatures.

    The resin under amine redness is usually damaged, but you should remove it right away as the sandpaper will clog due to the malleable and sticky surface.

    1. How to remove amine redness?

    You can remove amine redness by using the following agents

      • Use soapy water and a sponge
      • Use a commercial spirit and a cloth
      • It can also be removed by wet sanding

    Even though anime redness is not harmful, it should be removed immediately, if you are interested in giving an extra touch to your workpiece with special paint or epoxy resin. If you do not remove the anime redness, these materials will not be able to bond successfully with the resin.

    1. How to smoothen the resin surface?

    The resin surface can be easily smoothened by sanding it. We would recommend you gather all the necessary supplies. You will need sandpaper with a grit size between 400 grits and 1000 grits.

    Place the resin on a hard surface and then start applying the sandpaper to it. Keep doing this until you flatten the resin surface.

    1. Can I use a Dremel for sanding resin?

    Yes, you can very well use a Dremel instead of sandpaper to sand resin. However, there is one problem, a Dremel does not sand as straight as sandpaper. If you use a Dremel to sand resin, it will leave a lot of gouges that you will have to deal with.

    Another problem is that a Dremel is prone to peeling off resins very quickly. Be extra careful; otherwise, there will be depression in your resins that will have to be filled with more resins.

    So, if you are hell-bent on using a Dremel, we suggest getting a pair of safety glasses for your own good.

    1. What is the process of sanding resin art?

    For sanding resin art, you need to first buy sanding blocks, wet them, and only then use them for sanding resin art. We strongly advise you to pay full attention during the entire process.

    Ensure that you do not take much off; only cover the area by 1/8 inch since artwork resins have a self-leveling depth of 1/8. Keep sanding until you get the desired results.

    Texture of a wooden table with epoxy resin. nobody.

    Final Thoughts

    There you have it! That was pretty much everything you needed to know about sanding epoxy resin. Sanding epoxy resin is very important in order to give your workpieces a finished look.

    Wet and dry sanding have their fair share of pros and cons, with each meant to be done in different conditions and on different materials.

    We hope you found this article informative and that it has provided you with some valuable information regarding wet sanding and dry sanding of epoxy resin.

    With that, we wish to take your leave. For further queries or suggestions, kindly leave a comment down below.

    Till next time, Adios!

    Related Articles

    5 Best Orbital Sander With Vacuum Attachments

    11 Best Polyurethane Protective Coatings

    5 Epic Face Painting Supplies That Will Improve Your Designs

    6 Best Body Paint For Cosplay Reviewed

    Learn How to Body Paint With Brilliant Results Right Now

    5 Best Airbrush for Body Painting Reviewed

    16 Brilliant Face Painting Techniques to Feed Your Imagination

    11 Best Face Painting Kits 

    13 Best Paint for Furniture

    13 Best Paints for Bathroom Ceilings

    13 Best Concrete Paints

    11 Best Paint Primers

    13 Best Spray Paints For Metal

    7 Best Airbrush for Miniatures & Models 

    How to Make Resin Jewelry 101 

    11 Best Epoxy Resin For Crafts

    9 Best LVLP Spray Guns 

    5 Best Epoxy Resin for Tumblers

    9 Best Exterior Wood Stains Today 

    9 Best Varnishes for Wood

    Acrylic Pouring Medium Guide [All You Need to Know]

    9 Best Primer for Bare Wood

    Food Safe Epoxy Guide 101 [All You Need To Know]

    Acrylic Pour Painting [All You Need To Know]

    13 Best Epoxy Spray Paint Resins

    Epoxy Paint For Wood 101

    11 Best Bar Top Epoxy [Reviews & Buyer’s Guide]

    Waterproof Epoxy 101 [Is Epoxy Waterproof?]

    5 Best Epoxy Wood Filler

    What is Resin and How It’s Used

    10 Best Epoxy for Plastic Today

    Totalboat Resin Epoxy 101 | Reviews + Buyer’s Guide

    How To Make Resin Dice 101 [All You Need to Know]

    How To Make A Resin Geode [Complete Guide]

    Art n Glow Resin Review [All You Need to Know & Buyer’s Guide]

    Alcohol Ink and Epoxy Resin 101 [All You Need to Know]

    7 Best Resin 3D Printer 

    How to Color Clear Epoxy Resin [Coloring Resin

    How To Fix Radiator Leak With Epoxy+ Best Radiator Repair Epoxy

    Epoxy Garage Floor 101 [All You Need to Know]

    Mold Release Guide + Best Epoxy Release Agents

    Surfaces Resin Won’t Stick to [All You Need to Know]

    Heat Resistant Epoxy 101 [A Guide for High Temperatures]

    Epoxy Cement Guide 101 [How to Repair Concrete with Epoxy]

    How To Mix Epoxy 101 [Measuring & Mixing Epoxy Resin Guide]

    How To Harden Sticky Resin [Uncured Epoxy Solutions]

    How To Fix Epoxy Mistakes [Tackling Common Epoxy Problems]

    6 Best Pressure Pot For Resin Casting Right Now

    Are you concerned about your impact on the environment? Then one of the most significant steps you can take is to minimize plastic usage. 

    Plastic is a versatile material, which is not only easy to manufacture but is also quite durable and flexible compared to others. However, most plastics are harmful to the environment and your health due to the toxicity of the chemicals. 

    So, how can you switch from using plastic to more sustainable materials? We suggest that you start by taking some small steps. For starters, how about switching to an electric tea kettle made of food-grade safe stainless steel?

    But then there are numerous options for electric kettles, so how do you choose? That’s why we have done the research and compiled this list of the top 10 electric kettles without plastic. 

    So, without wasting any more time, let’s cut to the chase! 

    Best Options For Electric Kettles Without Plastic

    Using an electric kettle for brewing tea at home at kitchen. Electric Kettles Without Plastic .

    1. Mueller Ultra Kettle

    Mueller is a pretty well-known brand that manufactures a wide range of home and kitchen accessories known for being efficient. And its range of kettles is made from durable, high-quality materials. That is why we have picked the M99S Ultra Kettle as one of our top picks.  

    Mueller Living Electric Kettle, Electric Tea Kettle for...
    • Fast Boiling – Quickly heat hot water with our 1.8 L...
    • Enjoy Hot Water – Attractive Borosilicate glass kettle...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The M99S features a body made from borosilicate glass and high-grade 304 stainless steel. And the BPA-free, heat-resistant copolyester used for its making is not as toxic or harmful to the environment as conventional plastics. 

    For starters, the kettle’s borosilicate glass body can last for a long time. In addition, its 360-degree rotational body helps in measuring the amount of fluid in the kettle. 

    As an important safety measure, it has an inbuilt thermostat that automatically shuts it off after 30 seconds once the temperature reaches 212 degrees Fahrenheit. It has boil-dry protection technology as well and, therefore, does not function if there is no fluid in it. 

    Furthermore, Mueller’s proprietary SpeedBoil circuitry can quickly boil 1.8 liters of water, tea, or coffee, which amounts to roughly 7 cups. The jug itself has a convenient cordless design, which makes it easy to carry and operate. It also has a nifty LED indicator that lights up when the kettle is in use. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    The Mueller M99S is a solid option for a plastic-free electric kettle. However, one minor issue that we noticed while using it was that it had developed a dark heat stain on the stainless steel underside. While it does not affect the quality or performance of this electric kettle, it can be visually unappealing. 



    Pros

    • Water, tea, or coffee can be boiled very quickly
    • All the materials are food-grade and non-toxic
    • Convenient and portable design
    • Lasts for a long time




    Cons

    • The stainless steel underside can develop heat stains



    2. Hamilton Beach Electric Tea Kettle

    Hamilton Beach is another well-known brand when it comes to high-quality kitchenware. And true to the brand value, the Hamilton Beach 40880 is a solid plastic-free electric tea kettle. Besides tea, you can use it for boiling water or coffee as well. 

    Sale
    Hamilton Beach Electric Tea Kettle, Water Boiler & Heater,...
    • FAST BOILING WITH 1500 WATTS: This electric kettle boils up...
    • PEACE OF MIND WITH AUTO SHUTOFF: The automatic shutoff...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The Hamilton 40880 comes with a fully stainless steel body that is entirely food-safe and grants higher durability to the kettle. It can be used for quickly boiling water, a cup of tea, French press coffee, or hot cocoa. This is possible thanks to its 1,500-watt heat output, which can promptly heat 1.7 liters of any of the mentioned beverages. 

    In addition, it comes with an auto-shutoff function which provides boil-dry protection in the absence of fluids. And, thanks to the convenient water level window, you can monitor how much water there is inside the kettle. 

    This electric kettle is pretty easy to use as well, thanks to the cordless design, easy on/off switch, and easy pour spout. Moreover, you can easily remove the mesh filter, which makes cleaning this kettle effortless and convenient. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    The Hamilton Beach 40880 is a pretty good option for a stainless steel electric kettle. However, the body is not heat-insulated, and since it is made from stainless steel, you should be careful while using it. Even a slight touch can cause a nasty and painful skin burn.



    Pros

    • Can boil water, tea or coffee very quickly
    • Easy to maintain
    • Durable build
    • The usage is very convenient




    Cons

    • The body is not heat insulated



    3. Cuisinart PerfecTemp Electric Kettle

    For our next review, we have considered the CPK-17 PerfecTemp electric kettle by the home and kitchenware manufacturer Cuisinart. This is another high-quality, plastic-free electric kettle made from stainless steel. Consequently, it is both durable and convenient to use.

    Sale
    Cuisinart PerfecTemp 1.7-Liter Electric Kettle, Cordless...
    • FAST HEAT-UP: The Cuisinart Electric Kettle features...
    • 6 PRESET HEAT SETTINGS: With 6 preset temperatures ranging...

    Why Did We Like It?

    An exciting feature of the CPK-17 is the 30-minute keep-warm functionality, which increases the convenience of using this electric kettle. You can set a temperature, and it will automatically maintain that temperature for the required time. This eliminates the need for you to regulate the temperature manually. 

    The convenience is further enhanced by the one-touch heating controls and the 6 different heating settings. These features also make the kettle versatile in heating tea, coffee, water, or cocoa. Besides, the heating is pretty quick, thanks to its 1,500-watt output, and a memory feature retains the heat even after shutting it off. 

    In addition, it has a LED-backlit window that allows for measuring the level of fluid in the kettle. Its 360-degree swiveling base and cordless interface make it highly portable as well. Moreover, the removable scale filter makes it convenient to clean. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    This electric kettle really shines due to its host of features. However, because of those same features, it comes with a pretty hefty price tag. So, if you are looking for a more budget-friendly option, this kettle may not be a very feasible choice.



    Pros

    • Highly versatile for heating and boiling purposes
    • Very convenient to use
    • Can be cleaned without any hassle
    • Prevents the buildup of minerals




    Cons

    • Relatively expensive



    4. COSORI Electric Kettle

    When it comes to electronic kitchen essentials, COSORI is a brand that is readily recognizable. Likewise, the GK172-CO electric kettle is also a pretty popular product. If you are looking for a reliable and affordable alternative to plastic kettles, this is a worthy option to consider. 

    Sale
    Cosori Electric Kettle, No Plastic Contact With Water, Wide...
    • No Plastic Contact with Your Water——With no plastic...
    • Faster Than a Stovetop Kettle——Boils a full cup of water...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The GK172-CO is a high-quality electric glass kettle with a power output of 1,500 watts. As a result, it can heat up 1.7 liters of water in a relatively short time of 3 to 7 minutes. Besides boiling water, it can be used for boiling tea, coffee, or cocoa, so it is relatively versatile. 

    In addition, the borosilicate glass and 304 stainless steel used in the body make it durable and resistant to any type of damage. The handle is made from BPA-free material, which further makes it safe and non-toxic. 

    Moreover, the crystal clear glass body makes it easy to monitor the water levels. It comes with an auto shut-off feature that shuts it down after 30 seconds and boil-dry protection, which makes it highly convenient to use. 

    On top of that, it can be cleaned pretty easily, thanks to the wide mouth opening. As a bonus, it comes with LED indicators so that you can use it in the dark as well. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    While using this electric kettle, we noticed that the temperature controls are somewhat erratic and inconsistent. As a result, this impacted the auto shut-off feature, failing to shut the kettle off after it reached boiling temperatures. So, you might need to keep an eye out while using it, which can be a little inconvenient.



    Pros

    • Pretty durable build
    • It is a very fast boiling electric kettle
    • Can be cleaned easily
    • Affordable




    Cons

    • Temperature controls are somewhat erratic



    5. Amazon Basics Electric Kettle

    If you have ever used Amazon before, then you have most likely stumbled across the Amazon Basics brand. It is Amazon’s in-house brand for electronics, household, and kitchen appliances that are often sold at low cost. Consequently, the Amazon Basics F-265C electric kettle is another affordable option. 

    Amazon Basics Electric Kettle with Glass Carafe for Tea and...
    • RAPID HEATING: Powerful 1500W heating element brings water...
    • SAFETY FEATURES: The electric kettle features both automatic...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The F-265C is another electric kettle that incorporates glass and stainless steel in its build. It has a 1,500-watt heating element that can quickly boil water, tea, coffee, or cocoa. The maximum volume of fluids that can be boiled is 1.7 liters. 

    However, despite its relatively high capacity, it has a pretty compact design and can easily fit in the small spaces of your kitchen. It comes with a cordless design and can be easily detached from its base for easy serving. 

    This electric kettle is also equipped with safety features, such as auto shut-off and boil-dry protection. Furthermore, the cool touch handle makes it safe to hold at boiling temperatures, while its LED indicator conveniently lights up when it’s in use. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    Despite being a highly affordable and convenient option, we found that it is prone to scratches and damage. This can be primarily attributed to the quality of materials used to coat it, which might raise questions about its durability in the long run. 



    Pros

    • Highly compact design
    • Comes with in-built safety features for enhanced convenience
    • Relatively safe and easy to use
    • Comes at a very affordable price




    Cons

    • May not be durable



    6. COMFEE Glass Electric Kettle

    When it comes to household and kitchen appliances, COMFEE is a pretty underrated brand. But its CEKG001 electric kettle is a high-quality model that uses very minimal plastic. In addition, it is affordable, which makes it a worthwhile option. 

    COMFEE' Glass Electric Tea Kettle & Hot Water...
    • BPA FREE GLASS - Made from high quality Heat Tempered...
    • FAST BOIL - This 1500W electric kettle has concealed heating...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The CEKG001 is made from high-quality borosilicate glass and stainless steel in the interior lining. All of the materials are food-grade and BPA-free, and there is no plastic in the kettle’s interior. 

    Furthermore, the glass is fully heat-tempered and resistant to scratches and stains. There is a gauge on the clear glass body for measuring the level of fluid in the kettle. 

    This large, 1.7-liter kettle can quickly boil water, tea, coffee, or instant soup within 5 to 7 minutes, thanks to its 1,500-watt output. It comes with an auto shut-off function and prevents dry boiling of the kettle. 

    Moreover, the pop-up inner lid is attached to a cool-touch handle, which prevents any accidental burns. It also has a cordless design, and the 360-degree swiveling base can be easily detached to make serving easier. On top of that, it is pretty easy to clean, and a blue LED light acts as a visual indicator. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    The CEKG001 is a pretty good option that is almost entirely made without plastic. However, there was one issue that we noticed with this electric kettle. The stainless steel base can become easily discolored due to heat stains and scale buildup. So, that can be somewhat of an inconvenience. 



    Pros

    • Highly versatile electric kettle
    • Can boil any liquid quickly
    • Relatively safe to use
    • Easy to clean




    Cons

    • The stainless steel base becomes easily discolored



    7. Fellow Stagg Electric Gooseneck Kettle

    The fellow is a brand that makes stylish and appealing kitchenware that comes with an equally admirable performance. The Stagg EKG electric kettle is also no different from this tradition. It is a stainless steel kettle that has a visually aesthetic design. 

    Fellow Stagg EKG Electric Gooseneck Kettle - Pour-Over...
    • STAGG EKG ELECTRIC KETTLE: Simple aesthetic meets powerful...
    • PRECISION POUR: Stagg EKG's sleek pointed spout is designed...

    Why Did We Like It?

    When it comes to style, there are only a few electric kettles that can outperform the Fellow Stagg EKG. It features a unique, minimalistic design that is both aesthetically pleasing and efficient. 

    The gooseneck kettle design prevents spilling, thereby making it easy to pour from the kettle. Furthermore, the sleek handle provides an effective counterbalance and firm grip, which allows you to control the pouring speed. 

    In addition, the 1,200-watt output can quickly boil 0.9 liters of water, tea, or coffee. Moreover, it comes with a hold option that maintains the temperature within the kettle for 60 minutes. 

    You can also set the temperature quite easily, and an LCD display shows you the current temperature and the target temperature. This provides added convenience to the usage of this kettle. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    While it is a very sleek and stylish stainless steel kettle, we found the capacity to be comparatively less. This means that you can boil limited amounts of water, coffee, or tea at a time. Also, it is relatively more expensive than most of our previous options. 



    Pros

    • Sleek and stylish looks
    • The gooseneck design makes it easy to pour from
    • Can retain the heat for an hour
    • Easy to monitor and control the temperature
    • Extremely durable build




    Cons

    • Very expensive
    • Low capacity



    8. Dezin Electric Kettle

    The DZ380 is an electric glass kettle by the kitchen accessories brand Dezin. It is a high-capacity and versatile electric kettle, which you can use to boil water, coffee, tea, soups, or any other similar foods. 

    Dezin Electric Kettle, BPA-Free 2L Electric Water Heater,...
    • Borosilicate Glass Body - The main body of the kettle was...
    • 304 Stainless Steel - To make sure every cup of water you...

    Why Did We Like It?

    This is a BPA-free electric kettle that has a body made from high-quality borosilicate glass and food-grade 304 stainless steel. In addition to enhancing its durability, the stainless steel accents provide a visually aesthetic design, which makes it a pretty elegant option for your kitchen. 

    Besides, the kettle has a pretty high capacity of 1.8 liters, which is sufficient for 7 glasses of water, tea, or coffee. The crystal clear body helps you to measure the water quantity, as well as monitor the boiling process. Furthermore, a rounded, heat-resistant handle ensures that you don’t suffer any accidental burns. 

    Moreover, the 360-degree swiveling base makes it even more convenient for everyone to use. As an inbuilt safety measure, this kettle is equipped with an auto shut-off function to optimize the boiling process, as well as prevent dry boiling. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    Despite its sleek looks and high-quality build, the DZ380 falls short in one significant aspect. It has a power output of 1,000 watts, which we found to be relatively insufficient for boiling water, tea, or coffee quickly. As a result, it is comparatively slower than many of our previous choices. 



    Pros

    • Sleek and modern design
    • Highly durable build
    • It has a high enough capacity to fill 7 cups
    • Very convenient to use




    Cons

    • Low heat output



    9. Pukomc Retro Electric Kettle

    Pukomc is not as big or famous as some of the previous brands we have considered. But its kettles are known for being reliable and high-quality that can compete with any of the known brands. The same goes for the retro electric kettle, which has a highly favorable reputation among its users. 

    Pukomc Retro Electric Kettle Stainless Steel 1.7L Tea...
    • HIGH-QUALITY MATERIALS - The double-layer kettle liner,...
    • FAST BOILING - 1.7L / 1500W, one touch switch operation with...

    Why Did We Like It?

    One of the most striking features of the Pukomc retro electric kettle is its design. True to its name, this kettle gives off a retro vibe, which is a nice throwback to the kettles used in the old days. 

    However, do not be fooled by its design, as it is entirely made from food-grade stainless steel, which is not only safe but durable. It also comes with a unique 45-degree angle circular spout, which makes it easy to pour its contents. 

    Besides, it comes with 1,500-watt heating elements, which can quickly boil up to 1.8 liters of water, tea, or coffee. You can easily monitor the temperature, thanks to the thermometer on its side. 

    It also comes with auto shut-off and protection against boil drying, which makes it convenient to use. The convenience is further enhanced by its 360-degree detachable swiveling base, ergonomic handle design, and a glass window for monitoring water levels. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    If you want a kettle that reminds you of the old days but comes with the performance of modern electric kettles, then this is an obvious choice. However, the paint has a tendency to peel off after a few days of usage. While it does not affect its performance, it can ruin the looks of the kettle. 



    Pros

    • Unique retro design
    • Convenient to use
    • The design is highly durable
    • Can heat up the content very quickly




    Cons

    • The paint can peel off after a few days



    10. Secura Electric Kettle

    Secura is a brand best known for manufacturing a wide range of home, bathroom, and kitchen appliances. Likewise, their electric kettles are also quite popular for their reliability and efficiency. That is why we have included their K15-F1E electric kettle, which is a safe and durable option for your kitchen. 

    No products found.

    Why Did We Like It?

    The K15-F1E has a stainless steel body that makes it highly durable and resistant to rust and corrosion. In addition, the kettle body is entirely food-safe, so you don’t need to worry about contamination. 

    One compelling aspect of this kettle is its double-wall construction, which makes it safe to touch while using, despite being made of stainless steel. It provides sufficient insulation from the heat so that you do not get accidentally burned. 

    Conversely, it helps to keep the contents of the kettle warmer for a long time. In addition, thanks to the British Strix temperature control system, it can auto-shut off to prevent excessive heating or dry boiling. 

    The kettle comes with a 1,350-watt heating output, which can boil 1.5 liters of water within 6 to 7 minutes. Additionally, it has a wide mouth opening, which makes it relatively easy to clean as well. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    While it is claimed to be a plastic-free electric kettle, we observed that the interior of the lid has some plastic lining. So, that can affect the flavor of the water slightly. This is the only potential issue that we noticed for this otherwise great kettle.



    Pros

    • Safe to use, despite having a stainless steel body
    • Highly durable and resistant to rust and corrosion
    • Highly convenient to clean
    • The contents remain hot for a long time




    Cons

    • There is some plastic lining that can affect the water flavor



    Electric Kettles Without Plastic Buying Guide

    We hope that by now, you have gone through our list of the top 10 plastic-free electric kettles. So, have you decided on which one you want to buy yet?

    Choosing the proper electric kettle can be challenging, especially if there are so many options available on the market. So, if you are still confused about which one is suitable for you, then you are not alone. We faced a similar problem when we went looking.

    That is why, through some research, we have listed some of the most pertinent factors that you need to consider before buying an electric kettle. We hope that these factors will help you decide better.

    So, without any further ado, let’s see what these factors are.

    1. Materials Used

    If you are looking for an electric kettle without plastic, the obvious factor for consideration is the materials used for its construction. Most plastic-free kettles use borosilicate glass and stainless steel, so you should get those kettles that are made from these two materials.

    1. Durability

    Durability is almost complementary to the above factor of materials used. This is because some materials, such as stainless steel, are more durable than borosilicate glass. 

    However, it doesn’t imply that glass kettles are not durable. The glass used in these kettles is pretty tough and is accented by stainless steel, which makes them almost equally durable. In any case, before making the purchase, ensure that the kettle is durable enough to handle your requirements.

    1. Ease Of Use

    Another critical factor that you should consider is the ease of use. This includes the design, safety measures, and convenience features included with the kettle. 

    Look for features such as ergonomic designs, a double-walled body, and other similar aspects that make the kettle easy to use. In addition, you should ensure that the kettle is easy to clean as well.

    1. Heating

    If your kettle has low heating output, you won’t find it very useful. In such cases, either it will take a long time to boil, or it won’t be able to heat the contents adequately. 

    So ideally, you should look for an electric kettle that has high power output. That will ensure that it can effectively heat tea, water, or any liquids in a short time.

    1. Capacity

    Before making a purchase, you should check the capacity of the kettle you are buying. A large-capacity kettle will save you a lot of time and will also allow you to serve a lot more cups each time. 

    Or, if you wish, you can fill it partially if you do not have that many family members. Such flexibility will not be possible for lower-capacity kettles, and thus, you should ensure that the kettle you want has a decent capacity.

    Silver metal electric kettle for boiling water and making tea on a table in the kitchen interior. Household kitchen appliances for makes hot drinks. Top Electric Kettles Without Plastic Verdict

    Top Electric Kettles Without Plastic Verdict

    With so many options, it is easy to get confused when looking for the most suitable plastic-free electric kettle. That’s why we have prepared this detailed review-based guide. And now that we have arrived at the end of this article, we hope that you find this insightful.

    Before we conclude, let us reiterate our top picks once more. The Mueller is pretty convenient and relatively affordable, which makes it the best choice overall.

    However, if you have a tighter budget, then we suggest Hamilton Beach since it’s cheaper. And if your top priority is convenience and quality, and you are not afraid to lay down a few more bucks for that, then you should get the Cuisinart PerfecTemp.

    Now, with that out of our way, it is time to bid farewell. Take care!

    Related Articles

    11 Best Portable Pizza Oven

    5 Best 24-Inch Gas Range

    Vitamix 5200 vs Vitamix 5300

    7 Best Spice Grinder

    11 Best Small Crock Pot

    9 Best Smokeless Fire Pit

    13 Best Electric Kettles

    13 Best Mini Freezers

    13 Best Cappuccino Makers

    7 Best Hand Crank Ice Cream Makers

    11 Best Broiler Pan

    13 Best Molcajete

    It’s a common belief that all cutting tools are the same, but the real picture is different! 

    Although their basic purpose is, of course, the same, each tool is made to suit different cutting needs. That’s where all the difference between sabre saws and jigsaws, two very efficient cutting tools, lies! 

    Both the saws run on either battery or electric power, but each type has different features. Plus, there are hundreds of models available for you to choose from. So, choosing the most suitable product might seem complicated. 

    Hence, we try to make things simpler for you by putting forward this guide on sabre saws and jigsaws. We’ve selected the best models in the market for each type and have also included a detailed buyer’s guide to help you make the right decision. 

    Do give it a read. 

    Sabre Saw Vs. Jigsaw

    the process of sawing plywood with an electric jigsaw, a man holds a tool in his hand

    If versatility is one of your major lookouts, going for this product would be a great decision. It is equipped with technology that is patent to DEWALT and offers other efficient features that make it one of our top recommendations. So, let’s find out about all the exciting features that this tool offers.

    Sale
    DEWALT 20V MAX Reciprocating Saw, 3,000 Strokes Per Minute,...
    • Drill set in the cordless power tool set features high speed...
    • Impact driver in the drill and impact driver combo provides...

    Why Did We Like It?

    As we mentioned earlier, high versatility is one of the most compelling features of this product. And behind this magic is the blade clamp that allows you to adjust the blade in 4 different positions and facilitates flush cutting. In addition to this, the blade can reach tight places, thereby improving the performance manifold. 

    Now, performance ultimately matters the most when it comes to any tool, and this DEWALT saw ranks pretty high in that parameter as well. It is armed with a 1 ⅛-inch long stroke, which delivers an incredibly fast cutting speed. 

    Plus, a trigger with a variable-speed feature is offered, that provides a maximum of 3,000 strokes per minute, allowing greater blade control. 

    Also, a 3-year warranty is included with the product. So, you need not worry about extra expenses due to any issue that you might face with the tool within that period. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    The only downside of this product is that it vibrates a bit and produces noise that may become disturbing sometimes. You can deal with this problem by replacing the cutting blade with a better-quality one. That said, the noise might disappear after a few months of use. 



    Pros

    • The blade can be adjusted in 4 positions
    • Can reach tight places
    • Delivers incredibly fast-cutting speed
    • Includes beneficial 3-year warranty




    Cons

    • Vibration and noise



      1. BLACK+DECKER BDCR20C

    This BLACK+DECKER sabre saw can give tough competition to our previous pick. Its high-quality build and super-efficient features work to deliver a superb performance that anyone would love. Thus, be it any household task or DIY project, you can complete all the cutting work effortlessly with this tool.

    Sale
    BLACK+DECKER 20V MAX* Cordless Reciprocating Saw Kit...
    • Cordless reciprocating saw features tool-free blade change
    • Pivoting shoe for increased control

    Why Did We Like It?

    The first feature of this product that caught our attention was its blade shoe. That’s because it provided us with greater control while turning or adjusting the angle. This in turn helps make the cutting more accurate. 

    The interchangeable battery of this sabre saw another feature that we loved. Its powerful 20-Volt lithium-ion battery system helps the saw deliver consistent service for the years to come. So, you are less likely to need any major replacement or repair work. 

    Staying safe during the task is also equally important, and to ensure that, this saw includes an effective electric brake, providing the necessary control and safety. Finally, you can change the blade very simply without any tools so that you can quickly get back to work.

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    If you order the product online, sometimes the saw blade might be missing from the package. So, do make sure you check it carefully as soon as it arrives. Also, you will have to pay a delivery charge for getting the saw blades after requesting for an exchange from the manufacturer. 



    Pros

    • Provides greater control over the blade
    • Delivers a consistent service for years
    • Break ensures safety while in use
    • Blade change is tool-less




    Cons

    • The Saw blade might be missing from the package



      1. WORX WX550L

    Worx is one of the frontrunners when it comes to DIY, gardening, and lawn care products, thanks to its reputation of offering high-precision and powerful tools. And this convertible saw from the brand is one of its best products to date, coming with a range of incredible features. So, let’s move on and find out what it offers.

    Sale
    WORX Cordless Reciprocating Saw&Jigsaw, 20V ¾" 2-in-1 Saw,...
    • PowerShare battery system: Combine 20V batteries to power...
    • [2-in-1 functions] Jigsaw and reciprocating saw mode

    Why Did We Like It?

    For those who want the job to be done faster, this is among the best saws you’ll ever find. What does the trick is the circular motion of the blades, which is much more efficient than the usual back-and-forth action. Also, this doesn’t cause as much strain as the latter system of blade movement. 

    What’s more, this saw offers you the convertibility that very few cutting tools would. By just pressing the push-button head, you can turn a jigsaw into a sabre saw and vice-versa as per your needs. 

    Yet another beneficial feature of this product is the dust blower integrated into it. As such, debris and dust are always kept away from the surface of each cut, providing better visibility and a cleaner working environment. 

    Lastly, the lightweight and compact design lets you maneuver easily to make more detailed cuts and doesn’t cause too much fatigue.

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    The only thing that disappointed us a bit was the battery since it was not as long-lasting as other high-quality products. As such, you may need to replace it within a year of regular use. Hence, you would have to put in the effort to get hold of a new battery, besides having to spend more money. 



    Pros

    • The circular motion does the job faster
    • 2-in1 convertible saw
    • Keeps away dirt and debris from the cut
    • Easy to maneuver and make detailed cuts




    Cons

    • Battery not long-lasting enough



    • Jigsaws

      1. BLACK+DECKER BDEJS600C

    When it comes to precision, there are very few tools that can compete with this jigsaw from BLACK+DECKER. It uses highly advanced technology to work out perfect cuts for different purposes, which makes it fairly versatile. Note that this model comes in dimensions of 11.75 x 4.38 x 9.25 inches and weighs 4.6 lbs.

    Sale
    BLACK+DECKER Jig Saw, 5-Amp, 3,000 Blade Speed, 45 Degree...
    • HIGH PERFORMANCE ELECTRIC JIG SAW - 5 amp electric jig saw...
    • CURVE CONTROL TECHNOLOGY - Four curve settings for maximum...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Not all projects require the same type of cuts, which is why a tool with customized settings can be of great help. And this jigsaw is just the right product to go for, as the curve control feature offers four different customized settings to adjust the orbit of the saw for different projects. 

    Along with that, the powerful motor with variable speed can generate a cutting power of at most 3,000 Strokes Per Minute (SPM). An improved Wire Guard is another great feature of this jigsaw that makes for a perfectly clear line of sight for all precise cuts. 

    Working with this saw is also very comfortable, thanks to its compact rubber handle, which has a dust blower built into it. Note to forget the rare bevel-cutting feature that lets you make such cuts by an angle of up to 45°. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    The lock ring of the wheel which keeps the blade centered may fall off sometimes, and you have to fix it in the right place each time. If this issue is faced too often, it becomes a hassle, so it will be best to request a replacement for such a lock ring. 



    Pros

    • Lets you adjust the orbit for different projects
    • Generates a very fast-cutting power
    • Makes for a clear line of sight
    • Compact rubber handle reduces fatigue




    Cons

    • The lock ring of the wheel holding the blade may fall off



      1. DEWALT DCS331B

    Another impressive jigsaw we came across was this product from DEWALT, which makes all your cutting work a breeze. It is packed with a set of excellent features that work to deliver highly efficient performance for a long time. Note that this product comes with a beneficial 3-year limited warranty and weighs 5.54 lbs.

    Sale
    DEWALT 20V MAX Jig Saw, Tool Only (DCS331B)
    • All-metal, lever-action, keyless blade change allows for...
    • All-metal, keyless shoe bevel with detents at 0 degree, 15...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Changing the blade becomes effortless and quicker with the keyless lever-action blade clamp of this jigsaw. Plus, the all-metal shoe bevel, which is keyless, has four dents at 30°, 45°, 0°, and 15° to enable easy bevel adjustments. 

    You also get an orbital action feature for cutting wood, which can be adjusted by 4 positions to suit different projects. And the variable speed trigger lets you adjust the cutting speed as well. Additionally, there is a shoe cover provided with the tool that protects the blade shoe from any scratches. 

    Furthermore, users can clearly see the cuts that they made, thanks to the dust blower built into the tool. As for blade compatibility, this saw can be used with all T-shank blades to facilitate optimal holding power and professional results.

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    Though the product offers a quite satisfying performance, the metal pins provided for fixing the battery are not efficient and durable enough. Thus, you might not be able to fix it properly with those and may have to buy additional pins. 



    Pros

    • Lets you change blades effortlessly
    • Enables easy bevel adjustments
    • Blade shoe is protected from scratches
    • Can be used with all T-shank blades




    Cons

    • Inferior-quality metal pins for batteries



    Jigsaw vs Sabre Saw Buyer’s Guide 

    Jigsaw vs Sabre Saw Buyer’s Guide 

    Now, even though you’ve looked at some of the best sabre saws and jigsaws on the market, we understand that it isn’t enough to make a choice. 

    So, to have a clearer idea, you’ll need the answers to a few important questions, such as, ‘Which saw would suit your needs?’ or ‘How are jigsaws and sabre saws different?’. So, here’s a guide on the key points that you need to consider. These include their most important features and the various purposes they can be used for.

    1. Precision

    This is definitely an important parameter to consider when it comes to using saws. But note that the required precision may vary with the project that you’re working on. 

    As such, the two types of saws don’t provide equally precise cuts. The jigsaw is more accurate in this regard and includes a handy guide to using it for creating different shapes or cutting along different lines. Thus, you can easily handle tasks where making intricate cuts is absolutely necessary.  

    On the other hand, when using a sabre saw, the accuracy depends on how you would direct the blade through the material. As such, it is suitable for tasks that just require you to make rough cuts.

    1. Power Source

    Tools running on power would need a battery or a motor as the source, so it’s a crucial factor when choosing a jigsaw or sabre saw. Though electric power is channeled from a power outlet or a battery in both cases, the way it is distributed across the two saws. 

    While the power is distributed to the blade of the jigsaw, in the case of the sabre saw it is transmitted throughout the entire tool. Thus, the concentration of power in the jigsaw blade helps deliver more power cuts. Also, the motors of sabre saws are comparatively smaller than that of jigsaws and may have a lesser speed too. 

    1. Stroke Length 

    The stroke length is the distance by which the saw blade moves up and down with each stroke. Thus, the higher the stroke rate, the more is distance the blade covers while cutting any material. So ultimately, the work is finished faster. 

    Generally, sabre saws have greater stroke length, meaning that the job gets done quicker. On the other hand, jigsaws take a relatively longer time to complete the task. Note that jigsaws are used for more careful work such as cutting semi-circles or corners, so the shorter stroke length is also more favorable for them. 

    1. Blade

    The cutting work, of course, depends primarily on the blade quality. Note that though the blades of these two tools might look the same, they are not entirely so. There are a number of differences, including the length and thickness. However, each type includes products of varying length. 

    As for sabre saws, the blade is more exposed in the front portion, since they need more area for cutting than jigsaws. And their length varies between 3 to 12 inches, though the majority of users go for 7 to 8-inch-long blades. Plus, the blade of a sabre saw is relatively thicker, which makes them more sturdy, thereby ensuring that they can tolerate more abuse during rough cutting. 

    Talking about jigsaws, they have typically shorter blades in comparison to sabre saws. These saws have an average blade-length of 3 to 9 inches. Another vital point to remember is that blades of jigsaws have different TPI count, which ranges from 7 to 25. It is this feature that makes jigsaws suitable for different uses. 

    1. Best Use

    Since both these saws make cuts through a reciprocating motion, many people are likely to assume that their application will also be the same. But the reality is different, as there are major differences in features such as design and blade size. 

    Sabre saws are best for making rough cuts since it doesn’t give you as much control over the cuts as jigsaws. So, they can be helpful during demolition work or for ripping through large lumber pieces. You can also use them for sizing PVC pipes, making cuts in overhead positions, and cutting screws that are difficult to pull out. 

    Making more delicate and intricate cuts is what jigsaws are meant for. Furthermore, they let you make the compound, beveled, and effortless straight cuts. 

    As such, they can be used for other applications such as cutting laminate for home improvement or cutting ceramic tiles. In addition to this, craftsmen use these saws to make patterns in workpieces of wood. 

    1. Who is it for? 

    This will vary with the specific projects that you engage in, and some people may need both for different kinds of work. However, generally, sabre saws are more useful for hobbyists, home remodelers, and DIY enthusiasts since they often need to make rough cuts. Regular homeowners will also find this tool to be quite beneficial for purposes such as pruning trees. 

    Coming to the jigsaw, the greater versatility and accuracy makes it fit for professionals who engage in woodwork. It will be a very useful tool in their workshop. Plus, a professional craftsperson will find this saw really beneficial. 

    1. Cost 

    Note that you’ll get both high-end and budget-friendly options for each of the types. Thus, there is something available for every user. 

    However, while basic models of both saws can be found at lesser prices, the medium and high-tier jigsaws are slightly more expensive. Top-notch sabre saws with superb features and powerful motors wouldn’t generally need spending very high amounts. 

    1. Portability 

    You may have to use the power saw in different places, and thus portability is also a vital point to consider. 

    As a matter of fact, both the jigsaw and sabre saw will be sufficiently portable, considering that they are smaller than other types such as circular saws. 

    Though, sabre saws can be bulkier and larger than jigsaws, which are more compact and lightweight. Hence, a jigsaw can be considered a more portable option. 

    1. Shoe Length

    The shoe of a saw protects the blade and hence is important for maintaining a consistent performance. As for jigsaws, the shoe is adjustable, which makes it useful for cutting tricky materials or for angled cuts. Sabre saws are relatively less flexible since they can’t be used as tabletop tools. 

    Choosing The Best Tool For Yourself

    This would depend on the projects you would generally utilize the tool for. Say, for instance, if you need to cut through materials but don’t need absolute accuracy, the sabre saw would be worth purchasing. 

    But if you prefer to use the saw as a tabletop tool and engage in DIY projects that require accurate work, you can go for a jigsaw. With this tool, you can produce various types of cuts at a slower speed. 

    A point to note here is that sabre saws are often confused with tools such as scroll saws and reciprocating saws. But the latter are different since they are suitable for more heavy-duty tasks and have much longer blades. 

    Also, a sabre saw can be described as a combination of a reciprocating saw and a handheld jigsaw. That’s because many jigsaws can make cuts similar to their reciprocating saw alternatives.

    Man holds an orange reciprocating saw for repair work against the backdrop of showcases in a hardware store

    Sabre Saw Vs. Jigsaw  Verdict

    With that, we reach the end of our guide. We hope now you’ll have a better understanding of what jigsaws and sabre saws offer. As such, choosing the best saw for yourself won’t be difficult now. 

    But before we bring down the curtains, let’s take you through our favorites from the list. If you need a jigsaw for intricate cutting work for DIY projects but also have a tight budget, the BLACK+DECKER BDEJS600C will be the perfect tool to go for. 

    However, the WORX WX550L Convertible Saw is ideal for those who engage in a variety of projects with different cutting needs. As for the price, it is more affordable than many other convertible saws in the market.  

    Related Articles

    9 Best Benchtop Jointer for Woodworking 

    Simply the Best Stained Glass Ring Saws 

    49 FREE DIY Router Table Plans For an Epic Home Workshop

    10 Best Shop Vacs For Dust Collection 

    Top 10 Longest Pole Saws For Tree Pruning

    Different Types of Saws & How to Use Them

    13 Best Sliding Miter Saw

    13 Best Hybrid Table Saw  

    11 Best Track Saw

    13 Best Hybrid Table Saw  

    5 Best Toe Kick Saws 

    11 Best Bow Saw | Reviews + Buyer’s Guide

    9 Best Pond Skimmers Reviewed

    11 Best Table Saw [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]

    7 Best Cabinet Table Saws [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]

    9 Best Band Saw [Reviews & Buyer’s Guide]

    7 Best 12-inch Miter Saw Reviews [Buyer’s Guide]

    13 Best Contractor Table Saws [Reviews & Buyer’s Guide]

    Best 20″ Chainsaw [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]

    9 Best Manual Pole Saw 

    Radial Arm Saw vs Miter Saw [Differences & Winner]

    ROCKWELL VersaCut RK3440K Mini Circular Saw [Review]

    Not many things can match the joy of a warm American summer. The ideal weather, the longer days, and the perfect blend of family, friends, and food make it the most exciting time in the year. 

    Whether it is an intimate gathering of close friends or family, or an expansive get together featuring distant friends and relatives, the backyard of an American household becomes the center stage of games, fun, and activities. 

    A gas grill is the pivot of these gatherings, acting as a force that reunites all friends and family over the love for food. The long stories that Uncle Jim tells or the details of the funny events that older cousin witnessed in his time in Europe become more meaningful and exciting around the gas grill.

    Since a gas grill plays a critical role in shaping a fun-filled night and ensuring that our friends and family have a great time, it is only essential to ensure that you get the best of the product. 

    Saber Grills R50SC1417 Elite 3-Burner Grill Review

    Saber Grills R50SC1417 Elite 3-Burner Grill, Stainless
    • SABER's cooking system allows for even temperature, no...
    • All stainless steel construction - firebox and internal...

    Renowned for their gas grills, Saber prides itself on mixing the right dose of both innovation and entrepreneurship. With a reputation formed mainly based on the company's quest for quality, value, and integrity, Saber has become the frontrunner in providing popular leisure lifestyle brands. 

    Saber

    As a premium grill company, Saber is responsible for the creation of various gas grill models to aid a family in living the exciting American Summer. Taking advantage of the infrared technology, Saber launched new products using an superior version of Quantum Infrared technology which increased the BTU output.

    However, of all the models offered by the brand, the one that stands out for providing premium technology is the R50SC1417. The product from the model that catches attention instantly and is often presented by Saber as premier of the Elite series is the Saber 3-Burner Infrared gas grill.

    Saber Elite Series

    The Saber elite series has caught the attention of critics and users alike. With polished edges and a body made of stainless steel, the elite series presents a luxurious and stylish look, justifying the name it has. In addition to the sophisticated look, the elite series features LED lighting over the knob.

    Easy to use design and texture and the addition of accessories in the grill make the use of the grill easier in comparison to other series and models.

    [easyazon_image align="center" height="500" identifier="B0742L2VL2" locale="US" src="https://m.media-amazon.com/images/I/61D0pBXJdoL._SL500_.jpg" tag="homesthetics0a-20" width="500"]

    Saber R50SC1417 3-Burner Infrared Gas Grill

    One thing that Saber claims and boasts about is their uncompromising attitude towards the quality of their products, regardless of the price they have to charge for it. The design and quality of the Saber gas grill is a testament of their ambitions because we all know that for most users looks do matter.

    In addition to the looks, the significance of the design rests on the ease of use it brings to the customer. What good is a gas grill if the design that adds to the beauty of the product also acts as a hindrance and barrier in using the product.

    Made entirely of stainless steel, the Saber Grills R50SC1417 , unlike some other gas grills, is easy to clean. Consequently, the sound cleaning features add to the longevity of the product, making it a long lasting appliance.

    You can clean the bright annealed stainless steel by just using a damp cloth. It is not only the cleaning that makes the product easy to use. The presence of sufficient storage cabinet with two stainless steel doors gives the users the option of storing refreshments and condiments. The material used in the formation of the gas grill makes the product considerably heavy, which is why at the base there are gliding caster wheels that aid in the movement of the appliance.

    The creativity of the makers is at full display in the form of a systematic control panel. Made of stainless steel, the panel has three knobs in the front and two separate knobs in the left. To aid the use of the gas grill, the Saber Grills R50SC1417  has tables on both sides of the device. The knobs lead to an opening on both side of the gas grill, resulting in a burner on one side and a table on the other.

    Features

    Like all other gas grills, the Saber Grills R50SC1417  has three stainless-steel tubular at the base. However, a separate compartment for each ensures that the burners have a heat zone of their own. The division of the burners in boxes of their own adds an element of safety to a burner.

    At the bottom of the gas grill lays a stainless-steel sheet of perforated metal, the sheet lies just under the cooking grate. The perforated metal is the source where the heat of all the components of the gas grills accumulates. The heat that radiates from the cooking grate and the perforated metal ensures that the food is ready.

    Studying and comparing the design of gas grills, you will realize how close you are to an accident when using the products. The grease that is common in all other gas grills does not reach the burner in the Saber patented cooking system; this prevents the risk of a flare-up. The Saber Grills R50SC1417  is one of the few gas grills that don't have any flare up.

    The grilling system ensures that there is even heating throughout the gas grill. In addition to eliminating the risk of a flare-up in the system, the Saber R50SC1417  is cheaper to use. The reduced propane consumption limits the operating cost. According to an estimate, the reduction in the consumption of propane in the gas grill is by 30%, making the change a welcome one.

    Moreover, just like any other gas grill, the distribution of heat and airflow in the system plays a crucial role in ensuring that there are no or limited chances of food burning in the system. Although the design and the mechanism of the grill ensure the supply of heat and air to all parts of the gas grill, the appliance still able to save gas by giving you the option of heating only the space you need for cooking.

    A significant upgrade from the previous installments is the space available. The 675 square inches of grilling space constitutes of 500 square inches of primary cooking area. The abundance of cooking space, the unique cooking grate, and flame tamer design provide an even surface ideal for cooking.

    Given above are some of the standard features found in the Saber Grills R50SC1417 . However, before we study the pros and limitations of the gas grill, it is imperative to be aware of the standard specifications found in all Saber Grills model.

    Complete awareness of the standard specifications will help us in determining whether the producers of the gas grill have made an effort to go an extra mile with the innovation of the product. 

    Common Features

    Since the primary motif of the different gas grill models is the same, there are bound to be some similarities in all the products.

    1. Mirror Polished Edges

    Since the Saber Grills R50SC1417  belongs to the elite series, it takes advantage of what is usually considered an exclusively elite feature.

    The mirror polished edges along the lid, control panel, shelves, and doors is a feature that is common amongst all elite gas grills by Saber

    2. Stainless Steel

    Another factor that adds to the luxury and sophistication of the product is stainless steel. However, it is not the factor that is found exclusively in the product we are reviewing. Stainless steel plays a huge role in the formation of many products that don’t fall under the domain of an elite gas grill.

    The 304 stainless steel burners, the emitters, and the grate systems are examples of some of the features that are common in other gas grills too.

    3. Simple Cleanup

    This is another feature that all of the products of Saber can boast about. The front access ease tray found in Saber aids the cleaning of the grill while ensuring the safety of the user and the environment.

    Burning off and brushing away are some of the common ways to clean all of the products from Saber. However, in the case of Saber Grills R50SC1417 , a damp rug will be enough to clean the outer body of the product.

    4. Safe to Use

    In addition to the quality and reliability of another feature that the makers of the elite series pay special attention to is safety. With the use of the exclusive EZ NG technology the makers ensure that the product is safe to use, the ease of natural gas conversion is another aspect of the technology that makes products from Saber stand out.

    An idea of the common standard features found in all gas grill models from Saber will help us in identifying the special features found exclusively in Saber. Giving a positive or negative review solely based on the standard features is unjust, as reviewers, it is imperative for us to assess the product through all aspects and give our feedback once we have developed a conclusive opinion about the product.

    Special Features

    Some of the special features that differentiate the Saber from other products are as follows. 

    1. Dual Control Side Burner

    The Saber Grills R50SC1417  has two separate side burners which give the users a remarkable heat output of 18,000 BTUs per hour. The main three burners provide a heat output accumulating to 24,000 BTUs. The side burners aid in warming, boiling, and cooking. 

    2. Cooking Zones

    As discussed earlier, the Saber Grills  R50SC1417  has three cooking zones. The presence of the three zones gives the user ample space to work with, unlike the other gas grills. A user can now use one, two, or three zones all at once. 

    3. Halogen Lights Under the Lid

    Although there are LED lights already present in the gas grill, the addition of two halogen lights under the lid is another feature adding to the ease of use of the product. The halogen lights make it easier to use the product, especially in the dark outdoors when there is not much light around. 

    4. Stainless Shelf Inside the Cabinet

    To add to the storage capacity of the gas grill, the producers have enhanced the storage options allowing customers to store more than they did before. 

    5. Reliable Ignition System

    With an electrode at every burner, it is safe to say that the ignition of the system is not as dangerous as it once was. The spark or heat generated by the ignition system heats the electrode to a high temperature resulting in the flow of current in the entire gas grill. 

    As a whole, the advent of Saber Grills R50SC1417  provides users with innovative solutions to fundamental problems. The storage system and the halogen lights are examples of the convenience the product adds to the lives of the users. 

    People can do without both extra storage and light, but it is only when you use the product, the realization of the significance of these factors dawns on you. Similarly, the cooking zones and the reliable ignition system add to the Saber a perfect blend of both creativity and innovation. 

    In short, the new product stays true to the identity of Saber gas grills, while experimenting with innovation and making the lives of the user more comfortable. 

    [easyazon_image align="center" height="500" identifier="B0742L2VL2" locale="US" src="https://m.media-amazon.com/images/I/514Lv6W+toL._SL500_.jpg" tag="homesthetics0a-20" width="500"]

    Specifications

    Now that we have an idea of the proportion of standard features and new innovative features in the Saber Grills R50SC1417 , we move on to the specifications of the product. An idea of the specs and the dimensions of a product are enough for the user to decide whether the product suits their needs or not. 

    The presence of heavy-duty nylon casters makes it easier to shift the 193.12 kg gas grill around the yard. Propane is the fuel source of the product, rendering all other fuel types ineffective on the product.

    The broad dimensions of the product (56.5L X 25.0W X 48.4H) are again a testament of the excess available to a user. To adjust for the large size, the gas grill comes with a large carton size. 

    The three burners and the varieties of cooking surfaces available are all part of the specifications the product has. 

    Warranty

    The most important part of the discussion for all electronic appliances is the warranty. Studies and reviews of electric and gas products are incomplete without the mention of the warranty. Similarly, no brand today is foolish enough to launch and offer products without providing for the warranty. 

    As consumers, we want to ensure that the money we are investing in a product has a good value for return and that we can use the product without any difficulty or damage. Similarly, companies offer a warranty as a show of confidence, warranty on a product indicates that a company has full faith on its production methods and there are very low likelihoods of the product not functioning properly after purchase. 

    The Saber Grills R50SC1417  offers a warranty on the parts and components of the product. Since there are products which are critical to the proper functioning of the product, they have a higher warranty attached. 

    The burner tubes and the carryover tubes responsible for sustaining the flow of heat and air in the grill have a warranty of 10 years attached to them. 

    The components found at the base of the grill have a five-year warranty. These components include the cooking grates, warming rack, and emitter and burner box. 

    The whole grill, however, has a two years warranty including the painted and other remaining parts. 

    Pros and Cons

    A detailed analysis of the benefits and limitations of the product always help a user in choosing the best. While the exercise of jotting down the pros and cons of the products is ideal for comparison, it still helps in giving the reader a more profound insight into the brand. 



    Pros

    • Made entirely out of stainless steel
    • Product comes with a lot of new accessories; the grill has a rotisserie kit and a cover standard
    • Fuel efficient 




    Cons

    • Water from a leaking pipe may enter the grill and the drip pan
    • According to many consumers, the product is a little overpriced, the accessories and the material of the product contribute to the high price the product has



    [easyazon_image align="center" height="500" identifier="B0742L2VL2" locale="US" src="https://m.media-amazon.com/images/I/61yX7USNqKL._SL500_.jpg" tag="homesthetics0a-20" width="500"]

    Accessories

    Like any other appliance, the gas grill also has its fair share of accessories that add to the experience you have when using the product. 

    Unfortunately, the accessories are not part of the deal, and if you are looking for the ideal barbecue experience, you will have to purchase the accessories separately. 

    1. Premium 3-Piece Tool Set

    The toolset is fully equipped with all that you need for making your favorite meals while using the gas grill. The soft grip handles ensure that the user is comfortable while using the tools. The set comes with a stainless steel spatula and fork. Plus locking tongs are also part of the set to aid you in the challenge of locking and releasing grilled items. 

    2. Dual Skewers

    The 14-inch tine and flat handles of the accessory keep the hands of the user away from the heat and make it easier to turn and flip the product. 

    The dual skewers have dual tines that keep the food from rotating too much and falling off. 

    3. EZ NG Conversion Kit

    The kit helps in converting the Saber Grills R50SC1417  from EZ to Natural Gas. The conversion kit can turn any propane grill that has a model number in 17 or higher.

    The Saber has so far received positive reviews; there are doubts over the price of the product, and some users have also raised question marks on the flames which, according to them die down easily.

    Apart from the one odd poor review, customers are satisfied with the performance of the product and are specifically pleased with the easy-to-use nature of the gas grill.

    Related Articles

    Traeger Renegade Pro Review – Traeger Pellet Grills

    Blackstone 28” Griddle Review – One of the Best Flat Top Grill Today

    Weber Spirit E-330 Review – Handpicked Gas Grills Reviewed

    Napoleon Prestige Pro 500 Under Review

    Weber Summit S-470 Gas Grill Under the Microscope

    Nexgrill vs. Weber | Budget Grills Product Comparison

    Broil King vs. Weber Grills | Two of the Best Compared

    13 Best Grills For Apartment Balcony at Tasty Prices

    5 Best Small Traeger Grill For Backyard & RV BBQs

    Rec Tec vs. Traeger

    Every woodworker needs a router. Without one, it isn’t easy to do a lot of finishing work, like cutting the angles of the wood, shaping and molding and other things that are required to give your woodwork a neat finish. But, even though a router is usually used by hand, having it installed on a table makes it a lot better because you have a better angle to work on and it isn’t taxing on your back as lumbar support is important in the long run. Plus, a handheld router can be hazardous if you lose focus as opposed to a mounted router.

    But, router tables can be quite costly. So, what if you could make one for yourself? These DIY router table plans will help you do just that. With these 49 designs, you can easily build a router table on your own, for less than half the price of a manufactured router table.

    If you`ve found the router table plans below interesting we invite you to check various other free woodworking plans, we have curated lists that will show you how to build a duck housedeer standbat house, tiny houserocket stovediy tree housecat towergaragefire pitporch swinggreenhousesmall cabinfarmhouse tablepole barn, rabbit hutchdiy dog beda playhouse, a chicken coop, or a a coffee table.

    FREE DIY Router Table Plans

    1. Patrick’s Router Table

    This large router table looks fantastic and is very practical. Not only does it give you a big working space, but it also enables you with enough storage space. It resembles an old-school television stand and has four wheels to move it around. There are four drawers, with two small and vertical and two very large and horizontal ones. It is easy to make and looks great! So, why wait? Go create this table by following these easy steps.

    PATRICK’S ROUTER TABLE plan

    More details at ana-white.com

    1. One Project Closer Router Table

    This lovely and petite router table falls into the category of router tables that have no add-ons and are just meant for you to do what you’re going to woodworking. It has four neat wheels to move it around and a lovely white finish on the top with blue accents. You can set up this rig in a short time following this very visual how-to guide.

    ONE PROJECT CLOSER ROUTER TABLE plan

    More details at oneprojectcloser.com

    1. Wall Mounted Router Table

    Wall-mounted router tables are great for lumbar support. You don’t have to bend too much to work on the wood. Plus, they are great space savers and also look lovely installed on the wall. This router table is very functional and even though it is wall mounted, provides enough storage space with four large shelves to keep the tools in.

    WALL MOUNTED ROUTER TABLE plans

    More details at rockler.com

    1. Table Saw Router Fence

    This is a very compact and comprehensive router table that can be created from a pre-existing table saw. By following the guide, you can fix the table saw to the router fence to create a table saw and router table, thus providing you with two options to work rather than just one. Plus, it looks very neat and has generous storage space for all your tools.

    TABLE SAW ROUTER FENCE

    More details at jeffbranch.files.wordpress.com

    1. The DIY Router Table

    This is a very neat-looking router table with some lovely accentuated edges to appeal to your aesthetic sense. Thanks to the plans provided, you can not only build this router table with ease but also give it the finish that will make it look more like decor and less like a tool kit. It isn’t elaborate and doesn’t have cabinets, but is still efficient and great to look at.

    THE DIY ROUTER TABLE

    More details at dowelmax.com

    1. Trash Can Router Table

    This is the most do-it-yourself and cheapest of the router table idea on the list. Trash cans are used for pretty much a lot of things other than storing trash, but using a trash can as the base for a router table? Who would’ve thought that? By drilling a hole at the bottom of the trash can to pass the cord, and putting a sandbag at the bottom for dust collection and for the stability of the can while you work at the top. You can attach the router top to the trash can by fixing it to the holders and voila! Your router table is ready.

    TRASH CAN ROUTER TABLE

    More details at woodworkingtips.com

    1. The Family Handy Man’s Router Table Plans

    The family handyman always has great designs. This route table is another one of a list of lovely DIY appliances. It is a little more elaborate than other tables on the list and can cost you up to 500 dollars, but the result is fantastic and very satisfying. It has a large storage space and a single cabinet, with the option of making multiple ones inside.

    THE FAMILY HANDY MAN’S ROUTER TABLE PLANS

    More details at familyhandyman.com

    1. Bench-Mounted Router Table

    This bench-mounted router table has more space than you can ask for. It is installed over a workbench and hence doesn’t require you to set up a separate router table and waste both your time and space. It is a neat design, and the workbench already covers your requirement for storage space.

    BENCH-MOUNTED ROUTER TABLE

    More details at instructables.com

    1. The Rolling Router Table

    Wire spools look cool, but they can be put to use for many creative projects once they don’t have a wire wrapped around them. So, if you do have one in your store room that’s waiting to rot and invite termites, then take it out of its misery and put it to use by turning it into a router table. It is sleek and looks unique and offers the table enough base to sit on. Plus, this is quite simple to build.

    THE ROLLING ROUTER TABLE

    More details at motherearthnews.com

    1. Simple Router Table

    This is a rectangular router table that is long rather than tall, and it is pretty simple in its design. It has a pretty thick working table and a long drawer right below it. There is extra space at the bottom to keep more tools, and the height is right enough for good lumbar support.

    SIMPLE ROUTER TABLE

    More details at sawdustmaking.com

    1. Stow-And-Go Router Table

    This portable router table is lightweight and looks great. Because it is portable, you can shift the router from one place to another in case you feel like you've worked enough in a single spot and the monotony is creeping upon you.

    Another plus point of building this DIY router is that it is very affordable to make. Just for less than a hundred dollars. Moreover, the instructions are detailed and quite simple, so it shouldn't be difficult for you to follow them.

    STOW-AND-GO ROUTER TABLE

    More details at finewoodworking.com

    1. Creston Wood Router Table Plans

    This is a beautiful and vintage-looking router table. It has enough space for your router to be mounted on and also has three large drawers and eight small drawers for you to keep little and medium-sized tools and other miscellaneous stuff in. It has four standard wheels to move the table around. I like the vintage knobs and holders for the drawers and the color scheme of it. You can make this router table on your own with as little money spent as possible and then you can get onto shaping and molding wood for more elaborate woodworking endeavors.

    CRESTON WOOD ROUTER TABLE PLANS

     

    1. Quick and Easy Router Table

    This is a box-shaped router table with an enormous space underneath and a drawer to keep your tools in. This is installed on a metal stand which you will most likely need to purchase. Nevertheless, the storage space and the space on the surface are enough to provide you with the requirements you need to get working on wood shaping.

    QUICK AND EASY ROUTER TABLE

    More details at woodsmith.com

    1. Wood Smith Router Table

    This is a pretty simple and standard router table that does the job it is meant to without providing you with any extra options. You have no drawers in this nor do you have any place to store your tools, but if you are new to carpentry, this build is just right for you.

    WOOD SMITH ROUTER TABLE

     

    1. The All Around Router Table

    If you have a router table that is basic and doesn’t have a cabinet, then you might think of going for this one. It is not too different from the standard router table design but it is tall and thus provides good lumbar support and has a large cabinet space that utilizes everything from the table for your storage needs. This way you won’t need to keep your tools elsewhere and pack up everything neatly at the end of the day.

    THE ALL AROUND ROUTER TABLE

    More details at woodtools.nov.ru

    1. Router Table and Organizer

    It isn’t a basic model, and so it might be a little difficult for someone who isn’t a bit experienced on the carpentry side, but the plans are detailed enough for you to get a good grip on the make of it and give it a shot. It has a rectangular shape with six drawers, and two cabinets, one open and one lidded. The space on the top is pretty standard. If you want to organize all the tools and essentials properly, you ought to try this one out.

    ROUTER TABLE AND ORGANIZER plans

    More details at images.meredith.com

    1. $100 Router Table

    If you’re really short on budget and want to build something that won’t cost you much, then this router table is for you. It can be made for just $100, and it still looks uber cool. It also has a single storage space, big enough to store the tools yet not compartmentalize them. The paint job on this router table makes it look neat and furnished. It is also pretty space-saving.

    free $100 ROUTER TABLE plan

    More details at popularwoodworking.com 

    1. The Ultimate Router Table

    This is the router table that will satisfy your every woodworking and routing need. It has such a large storage space, with drawers and cabinets ample enough to keep every tool on the table at the end of the day or to access them easily. It’s easy to make and looks pretty great.

    THE ULTIMATE ROUTER TABLE

    More details at lakewoodies.asn.au

    1. Garbage Can Dremel Router Table

    The trash can router table idea has been discussed before in this list, but this one is even simpler than the previously mentioned idea. All you need to do is place the router table top onto a trash can, even one that is presently in use for its actual purpose.

    GARBAGE CAN DREMEL ROUTER TABLE

    More details at instructables.com

    1. The Country Classic Router Table

    This router table also works as a decorative piece, in case you plan to retire it someday and still don’t want to discard it. It resembles a vintage dresser, and the cabinet is pretty stylized and great to look at. Not only can you build this but you can also give it a neat finish and a polish with a paint job to make it look more appealing. It has enough storage space apart from giving you a big enough space to woodwork at the top.

    THE COUNTRY CLASSIC ROUTER TABLE

    More details at popularwoodworking.com

    1. Jane’s Router Table

    This is a very stylish router table. Its white color and blue accents are a standout. It is tall and with a big space on the top. Containing four drawers and two uncovered large cabinets, it provides enough space under the table to keep all your essentials. This router table was made by Jane, a blogger, and you can make it too.

    JANE’S ROUTER TABLE

    More details at scottmoore.net

    1. American Woodworker Router Table

    This DIY router table is out to prove a point. It intentionally resembles a readymade router table, and once you go into the details, you will see the resemblance is very intricate indeed. It has a neat fence, a large cabinet, and a sag-free top and it is something you can create for far less than what you’d spend at a store.

    AMERICAN WOODWORKER ROUTER TABLE

    More details at popularwoodworking.com

    1. The Ultimate Router Table #2

    This router table looks beautiful. It has an H-shaped design and has three drawers installed at the bottom, painted white, contrasting the lovely orange on the sides. It also has a protruding space on the top which is both functional and decorative. I would love to have this router table in my workshop and especially because, for all its polished appeal, it is easy to make on my own.

    THE ULTIMATE ROUTER TABLE #2

    More details at sawdustmaking.com

    1. Fold Away Router Table

    I love foldable furniture. There is something very clever about it, and it also feels good just to fold up and hide away something that was just the past moment standing out. This foldable router table helps you save on storage space. At the end of the day, once you’re done with creating amazing wood stuff, you can just fold up the table and retire for the night.

    FOLD AWAY ROUTER TABLE

    More details at woodsmith.com

    1. Router Table Pressure Jig

    You can create stopped cuts on this router table because of the adjustable pressure option provided by the pressure jig. So, when the wood is routed at the edge of the table, the cuts are easy to make. Even though it is a DIY, it resembles an IKEA build due to how neat it looks. There is ample space to set up your woodworking rig.

    ROUTER TABLE PRESSURE JIG

     

    1. Cheap and Easy Storage Router Table

    This one’s for you if you are short on storage space and also short on budget. This is a small router table that can be mounted on another table and yet does its job well. Even though it does not provide you with extra space for storing tools and isn’t as movable as other router tables, when it comes to the platform, it has more than enough space for woodworking.

    CHEAP AND EASY STORAGE ROUTER TABLE

    More details at instructables.com

    1. Router Table-Mate

    A table mate is a friend whose router table needs to have its back and keep it clean. This dust-collecting appliance is also easy to make and can be built for as cheap as fifty dollars. This guide will show you how to make it in simple steps.

    ROUTER TABLE-MATE

    More details at popularwoodworking.com

    1. Quick and Easy Router Table

    On the outset, it looks like a TV table or a clock table, but this different-looking router table also has a very special and convenient function, one that will help you with your lumbar comfort. It had an adjustable height option, so you can determine its height and set it according to your preference. Plus, it offers a lot of cabinets and shelves so that you don't need to put your tools and other essentials elsewhere and can access them anytime.

    QUICK AND EASY ROUTER TABLE

    More details at shopnotes.com

    1. Router Table Cabinet

    This is a gorgeous router table. It also has a very organized cabinet space that will come really handy for you. The instruction manual is far too detailed and covers every single aspect of building this router table, mentioning every cabinet space utilization separately. Give this one a try.

    ROUTER TABLE CABINET

    More details at sommerfeldtools.com

    1. Woodworker Router Table

    I love this router table. It looks like a perfect piece of furniture to have in my home. Its finishing and its design afford it the luxury to be of use even after retirement as it can work as a lovely table in the house outside the workshop. It is delightful to look at and offers a lot of storage space and crafting it with the guide is not that difficult a task.

    WOODWORKER ROUTER TABLE

    More details at woodworking.org

    1. Mounted Router Table

    Wall-mounted router tables are extremely convenient. As is known, even though they are fixed to a wall, they provide you with some moving space around it and help you work with a correct posture. Lumbar support is really important. Otherwise, spasms and exhaustion can cause a lot of back aches and other back issues.

    Plus, a wall-mounted router table can be folded and closed off when not in use and hence save space for you.

    But, this one might require more experienced carpentry know-how, so be wary.

    MOUNTED ROUTER TABLE

     

    1. The 3-in-1 Router Table

    This one’s made for more than just routing. This advanced router table does a far more intricate job for you, and if you are a carpenter with some pretty elaborate woodworking methods and ideas, then you will absolutely adore this one. It has a circular saw and a jigsaw installed into it apart from the router, and that is a big plus. Moreover, it has a pretty standard design and has no drawers but does have enough storage space below.

    THE 3-IN-1 ROUTER TABLE

    More details at thinkingwood.blogspot.com

    1. Another Ultimate Router Table

    A woodworker's friend, this router table has so much to offer to you, given that you decide to build it first. Not only does this router table have a big working space for you to dremel, shape, and chisel away your wood easily, it also offers a lot of additional storage space with multiple cabinets and tool storage shelves, including shelves for keeping small tools.

    ANOTHER ULTIMATE ROUTER TABLE

    More details at here.

    1. Router Table Plans with Storage

    This is a solid wood router table with a very retro design. It has a large working surface area, and it can also be used to lay out, and design plans when you're not working on wood. But, apart from the working area, it also has abundant storage space and will help you store all the essential tools and miscellaneous stuff with ease. And though it looks pretty complex, building it should not be a tough task once you follow the guide.

    ROUTER TABLE PLANS WITH STORAGE plans

    More details at woodgears.ca

    1. Almost Free Router Table

    This one's a pretty ingenious way to build a router table. Not only does it save you a whole lot of man hours and a lot of dollars, but it also makes your work incredibly easier. All that you need to do is take a wardrobe base that is out of use and retrofit a cupboard door with it to build this beautifully vintage router table.

    With this table, you get a working area that is bigger than usual, and you also get cabinets to store your tools. Sounds like something I would go for.

    ALMOST FREE ROUTER TABLE

    More details at instructables.com

    1. One Project Closer Router Table

    This is a very simple router table plan that won’t burden your pocket all that much. It’s quite a basic design really. Just a square-shaped table with a router installed in the center. So, it won’t really need an expert hand to build. It does compromise a bit on the space side, and also doesn’t really provide you with any actual storage space for your tools, but its minimalistic design fits budget constraints, and its size saves space in your workshop.

    ONE PROJECT CLOSER ROUTER TABLE

    More details at oneprojectcloser.com 

    1. Router Table from A Reclaimed Desk

    You don't always have to start from scratch. Sometimes you can just recycle and make use of something that you already have. In this case. An old study or work desk will work best for your workshop. Even if you aren't experienced in carpentry, you can retrofit your desk into a router table with a big working area, just by following these easy plans. What you get in the end is a lot of saved time, a lot of saved wood and a lot of saved money, and a fully furnished router table.

    ROUTER TABLE FROM A RECLAIMED DESK

    More details at instructables.com

    1. A Shop-Made Router Table

    This router table looks like it was sold in a shop and made professionally. But, it is actually a DIY project in its finished state. That’s the advantage of having a highly detailed and orderly how-to guide. What’s more? The finished product will cost you half of what you’d spend on buying the same in a shop. Of course, you could just buy the thing in the first place, but where’s the fun in that when you’re venturing into carpentry?

    A SHOP-MADE ROUTER TABLE

    More details at rockler.com

    1. Horizontal Router Table for the Slot Mortise

    This DIY router table is incredible in its shape and design. It has some complex mechanisms, and the build looks more like a miniature futuristic industrial complex and less of a router table. So, it’s safe to say that this will require an above-average carpentry skills to construct. But, the plans have a lot of images for visual reference, and the instructions are comprehensive and yet easy to understand. So, you won’t be struggling with the understanding part.

    If you do build it, the result will be fantastic!

    HORIZONTAL ROUTER TABLE FOR THE SLOT MORTISE

    More details at woodgears.ca

    1. Quick and Easy Router Table

    This is a box-shaped router table with a large woodworking area on the top and ample space on the bottom for keeping your tools. There is a large space and below it a slim and retractable drawer. This is mounted on a metal stand, the height of which can be adjusted as per your requirements. It is pretty simple in design and won’t be difficult for even a beginner to make. Plus, it won’t cost you much to create.

    QUICK AND EASY ROUTER TABLE

    More details at woodsmith.com

    1. Basic Router Table Plans

    I love that this tabletop look alike a router table. It is small, accentuated, and adorable to look at. It does provide space to keep your tools, even though it isn't enough for a lot of them. But it does not compromise the working space. The how-to guide is very helpful too and will show you how to build this pretty router table in the best and easiest way possible.

    BASIC ROUTER TABLE PLANS

    More details at bobsplans.com

    1. Fence Router Table

    This is a router that becomes easier to make if you already have a table at your place. What’s more amazing is that it also works as a table saw, and not only as a router table. By building a two-in-one router and saw table, you’re saving on money, time, and on space, and your work becomes more efficient as you don’t have to work on separate tables for sawing and shaping. Moreover, the plans are pretty comprehensive and easy to understand, with a simple language and mode of instruction.

    FENCE ROUTER TABLE

    More details at jeffbranch.files.wordpress.com

    1. Simple Router Table Plans

    This is as simple as it gets. This is a router table that does not offer you any storage area, no cabinets, no compartments, no drawers, or shelves. It is just a table with a router set up installed at the top. But if it is something that you want, then it does its job quite efficiently. Plus, it has a decent size for you to work on. And because it is simple in its make, it is as easy to create. So, you'll be done making it before long.

    SIMPLE ROUTER TABLE PLANS

    More details at ourhomefromscratch.com

    1. Utilitarian CNC Router Table

    This particular router table looks extremely hi-tech but isn’t too difficult to make. What I really love about it is how different it looks. A very modern and mechanical design, but also efficient, it looks professional and readymade. Because it is mostly made out of materials that aren’t wood, it does come on the costly side of DIY options for you. But, ultimately, the price and effort are worth the finished product.

    UTILITARIAN CNC ROUTER TABLE

    via pinterest

     

    1. Dan’s Benchtop Router Table

    This a stunning DIY router table plan. It looks fantastic and has such a steampunk appearance to it. But, it is not really difficult to make. Plus, it won’t cost you a lot of money to make because it can be made for less than fifty dollars. It’s installed on a table stand that has a height adjustment option, and it is quite lightweight, so you can carry it around if you plan to work on the go. It’s also pretty small, so it will save on your space and the plans to construct it are easy to follow.

    DAN’S BENCHTOP ROUTER TABLE

    More details at thewoodwhisperer.com

    1. The John Heisz Router Table

    There is a unique component in this particular router table. At the outset, it looks like a standard router table with its vintage design and a few cabinets, but it has a router lift built into it, and that helps you with wood processing. This does require an adept carpentry skill level, but you can give it a shot even if you’re a beginner. That’s because the how-to guide for this has extensive plans that are easy to follow and will help you not only with detailed steps but also with reference images. Though not super cheap on the cost side, the finished product is satisfying.

    THE JOHN HEISZ ROUTER TABLE

    More details at woodgears.ca

    1. Three Shop Built Router Tables

    Instead of giving you a single option to go with, this how-to DIY guide gives you three lovely options to choose from. These router table designs are fantastic and have unique design elements that make them look appealing.

    THREE SHOP BUILT ROUTER TABLES

    More details at popularwoodworking.com

    So, what DIY router table plans impressed you the most, and which one did you find the easiest to make? Is budget a constraint for you or the skill required? Do share the design you ultimately choose to build!

    Related Articles

    53 100% FREE DIY Farmhouse Table Plans for Your Rustic Dining Room

    13 Best Portable Table Saws for Fine Woodworking | Buyer’s Guide

    11 Best Budget Bandsaw Reviews 

    13 Best Drill Press Vises

    9 Best Benchtop Jointer for Woodworking

    7 Best Concrete Grinders, Planers, and Scarifiers Reviewed

    9 Best Pond Skimmers Reviewed

    11 Best Table Saw Fences [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]

    DeWalt DW735X Planer Review [Should You?]

    Bosch 4100-10 Jobsite Table Saw [Reviewed]

    Hack Saw Vs Bow Saw [All You Need to Know] [Explained]

    9 Best Compact Circular Saws Of 2022 [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]

    How To Sharpen A Bow Saw And Bow Saw Maintenance

    7 Best Budget Miter Saw

    7 Best Dado Blade Sets  

    Radial Arm Saw vs Miter Saw [Differences & Winner]

    ROCKWELL VersaCut RK3440K Mini Circular Saw [Review]

    23 FREE Detailed DIY Garage Plans With Instructions To Actually Build

    11 Best CNC Routers

    If the interior of your home is analogous to the brain, then that would make the roof comparable to a skull. In other words, it protects the delicate interior of your home from the outside elements. However, despite its importance, the roof accounts for only 3% of the total house construction cost and sadly the right roof types are not adapted to one`s architectural solution, roofs are are often simply overlooked. That is mainly due to the ignorance of people. While an inexpensive Gable roof might save you some cash, it might end up doing irreparable damage in case you live in an area prone to cyclones or tornadoes. On the flip-side, if your area is far from windy, a Gable roof will definitely be more fitting. In fact, it will be more useful compared to a hip roof.

    Why you ask? Well, to find the answer to that question and more, you need to go through this article first.

    What are you waiting for?

    Read along to find out everything you need to know about various roof structures.


    via homesthetics

    1. Open Gable Roof

    What better way to start our extensive roof guide than with the highly popular Open Gable Roof? But, before we get into the details, let us first explore Gable Roofs in general. Gable roofs have been used for time immemorial. In fact, they were used quite generously in ancient Roman and Greek architecture. What makes them so popular?

    Well, for starters, they are comparatively inexpensive and also have a wide range of versatility when it comes to the design. Moreover, gabled roofs have a simple design principle which makes working on them quite easy when compared to the other complex roof structures in this article. However, that is not all; gabled roofs are also incredibly weather resistant and offer great protection from rain and snow.

    Now that you have a clearer picture of what a gabled roof is, let us explore Open Gable Roof structures. Open gabled roofs are possibly the most common gabled roof structures used in the US. The main distinguishing feature of this structure is that the triangular extension at each end of the house is open.

    The following are the two types of Open Gable Roofs based on the direction the Gable is facing:

    • Front Gable Roof. In this structure, the front-gabled building faces the street with its gable. Buildings with this type of roof were extremely common in the medieval Gothic period. You can still find buildings with this type of roof structure in many German city streets. The image that follows shows a building with a front gabled roof.

     via Pinterest

    • Side Gable Roof. In this case, the sloping side of the Gable faces the streets. Buildings that came up in the later Renaissance period were influenced by this structure. The next image illustrates a building with a side-gabled roof.


    via Adrian Architecture

    2. Box Gable Roof

    Box gabled roofs are extremely similar to open Gable roofs, with one small exception. On box-gabled roofs, the triangular extension at each end of the house is closed off instead of being opened. That is the only difference between these two structures.

    Whether you want the triangular extension at each end to be closed or open is more of a personal choice than a practical one. However, we can tell you that the use of extra materials in the case of box-gabled roofs will definitely make it a little more expensive than open-gabled roofs. If you are on a tight budget, we suggest you go for the open gabled roof structure for your house. Below an image illustrates a standard building with a box-gabled roof structure.


    via Wikipedia

    3. Skillion and Lean-to Roof

    The Skillion and Lean-to-Roof structures are quite commonly used in modern homes. A standalone skillion roof has a single slope which resembles the roof of a shed. When the Skillion Roof is combined with a lean-to roof, it results in a sleek and modern look as seen in the illustration below.

    Combining these different roof structures together has an aesthetic benefit. It allows you to build walls of varying heights, just like the house featured in the illustration below. Interestingly, this roof structure does not have a roof ridge like every other roof. That is primarily because of the varying elevation level of the sloping structures.

     via houzz

    4. Dormer Roof

    Next up on our list is the Dormer Roof. Now, the Dormer Roof isn't a completely different roof structure, rather it features an additional structure on top of an existing roof structure. This roofed structure usually contains a window and it projects vertically outwards beyond the plane of a pitched roof. The photo below shows a standard Gable Roof house with two Gable Dormer structures.

    While dormers can drastically improve the aesthetics of the building, they are also extremely practical as they can be used to extend the interior space whilst inviting additional light inside.


    via The Family Handyman

    Various types of dormer structures that are commonly used in buildings follow.

    • Gable Fronted Dormer. Gable Fronted Dormers have protruding windows with gabled roofs. This type of dormer is by far the most common as it is comparatively less expensive to build compared to the other dormers on this list.
    • Hip Roof Dormer. Hip Roof Dormers are also quite commonly used in buildings. While a standard Gable Fronted Dormer has two sloping sides, this dormer structure has an additional sloping structure in the front.
      Whether hip-roof dormers are more attractive than Gable fronted dormers is up for debate. However, this type of dormer structure is generally more expensive compared to a simple Gable Fronted Dormer.
    • Flat Roof Dormer. As its name suggests, the roofed structure of this dormer is flat and does not have any ridges. However, for practical purposes, sometimes the flat roof is slightly inclined to let rainwater slide off. In case you live in an area with heavy rainfall, we suggest you go for sloping roofed dormers instead of flat ones.
    • Shed Dormer. Shed dormers are quite similar to flat-roof dormers and do not have any ridges. However, unlike flat roof dormers, shed dormers have a greater level of inclination for the roofed structure. This is certainly more practical in case you live in an area with high rainfall.
    • Wall Dormer. Now, a Wall Dormer is not an entirely different dormer structure. Rather it is a dormer that is positioned in such a way that it rises vertically with the wall of the building. In other words, the face of this dormer is co-planar with the face of the wall below it. These Wall Dormers usually feature a gabled roof structure on top.
    • Eyebrow or Eyelid Dormer. This type of Dormer places more importance on the design rather than the functionality. As its name suggests, this low and wide dormer has a curved roof that resembles an eyelid.
    • Link Dormer. There can essentially be two types of link dormers; one which connects one part of the roof with another or another which houses the chimney. The latter is similar to a wall dormer, with the addition of a chimney.
    • Bonneted Dormer. Also known as a segmental dormer, this type of arched roof dormer is commonly found in Victorian structures. They are mainly built for improved aesthetics and not for practicality.
    • Nantucket Dormer. These are possibly the largest type of dormers. The entire structure can be broken down into three segments, out of which the outer two segments are simply gable dormers. The middle segment features a shed dormer and it connects both the gable dormers together.
    • Lucarne. This type of dormer usually appears on the slope of a Gothic spire. These dormers are usually slender and gable-fronted.
    • Blind or False Dormer. As its name suggests, these dormers aren't built with functionality in mind. These dormers are used purely to improve the aesthetics of a building and they are not accessible from the interior. In fact, these false dormers can be an afterthought.

    5. Hip Roof

    If there was a major flaw with the structural design of gable roofs, then that would be the fact that the triangular extensions at each end do not provide the side walls with sufficient protection from the rain. One way to solve the problem would be to make the roofs protrude further.

    However, if you have limited horizontal space, then that would not be advisable. In that case, you will require a Hipped roof for your building. So, what exactly is a hipped roof? In comparison to simple gabled roofs which do not have sloping structures on 2 sides of the building, hipped roofs have slopes on all sides. Other than additional protection from the rain, hipped roofs are also better suited in windy environments.

    But, there is a downside to installing hipped roofs, and that is the cost. They are more expensive compared to a simple Gable Roof. Moreover, the sloping sides mean that there will be less usable attic space, as illustrated by the image below.

    6. Hip and Valley Roof

    You can think of a hip and value roof as a modified or an extended version of a simple hipped roof. However, the difference in the roof structure is due to the shape of the building. If the building is not rectangular and is either T or L-shaped, then the hipped roof structure used for this building will be a Hip and Valley roof.

    We understand that the explanation is a bit complicated, so we have also featured an illustration below to make things simpler. If you are interested in constructing a Hip and Valley roof for your building, then we suggest you take a look at this detailed guide.


    via JW Roofing

    7. Gambrel Roof

    The Gambrel Roof is very similar to a standard gabled roof, however, instead of a single slope on each side, Gambrel roofs feature two slopes. This type of structure is commonly noticed in barn houses. The illustration presents a barn house-like structure with a standard gambrel roof.

    In the case of gambrel roofs, the bottom slopes are more steeply raked compared to the top ones. This design philosophy results in increased attic space compared to a similarly sized building with a Gable roof.

    However, there are some downsides to this design choice as well. The most obvious one is the price as gambrel roofs are usually more expensive to construct compared to a simple gabled roof. Moreover, gambrel roofs are less weather resistant compared to a Gable or hipped roof structure.

    8. Mansard Roof

    You can think of the Mansard roof as a mixture between a hipped roof and a gambrel roof. Why do you ask? Well, unlike a standard gambrel roof which has sloping edges on two sides of the building instead of all four, a Mansard roof has sloping edges on all sides. The sloping edges are exactly like that of a gambrel roof. In other words, each side of a Mansard roof has two slopes, out of which the bottom slope is steeper than the top one.

    Mansard roofs also go by the name French roofs as this style was popularized in France by architect François Mansart.  You can see buildings sporting the Mansard roof commonly in many European countries, including France.

    Despite its usage in many aristocratic buildings,  Mansard roofs are not that popularly used in normal homes. Not only are they much more expensive compared to the more popular roof structures, they are also quite complicated to construct. If you are looking to install a Mansard room in your building, then we suggest you consult with an experienced professional first.


    Source Unknown

    9. Butterfly Roof

    Simply put, a Butterfly roof is nothing but an inverted Gable roof. This type of roof structure is quite new compared to other roof structures featured on this list and was popularized by William Krisel and Dan Palmer in the late 1950s. The first Butterfly roof was created by a Swiss-French architect named Le Corbusier, who used it for a vacation house in Chile in 1930.

    While beauty lies in the eye of the beholder, the practicality of the Butterfly roof's design cannot be questioned. This roof structure allows more natural light to enter the house and results in greater interior space well, moreover, it is also effective in collecting rainwater.


    via hunker

    10. Dutch Gable Roof

    A Dutch Gable roof or a Gablet is a fusion between a hipped roof and a Gable roof. As you can see in the illustration below, the Gable portion sits on top of the Hip Roof. Now, there are quite a few advantages to this design philosophy.

    Since a standard Hip Roof offers less attic space, the gable portion makes sure that the house has comparatively greater attic space. Moreover, the Hip structure on the bottom gives the entire roof more rigidity and that results in greater weather resistance. On top of that, the hipped part of this roof creates a covered porch area, as observed in the image below. In other words, a Dutch Gable roof combines the strength of both gable roofs and hip roofs and eliminates most of the drawbacks as well.


    via houzz

    11. Hexagonal Gazebo Roof

    Hexagonal Roofs are not fit for every house. In fact, they are mainly designed for improved aesthetics rather than practicality. One of the most common places you will see a hexagonal roof is in a pavilion structure like a Gazebo. The illustration below shows us a beautiful Gazebo with a Hexagonal roof on top.

     via Living Outfitters

    12. Jerkinhead Roof

    The Jerkinhead Roof is a mash-up between a Gable roof and a Hip Roof. However, unlike the Dutch Gable, which is also a fusion of the same, Jerkinhead roofs have a large gable with clipped edges. These clipped edges resemble a hipped roof structure.

    Now, the benefits of this design are increased attic space compared to a standard Hip roof and greater wind stability due to the Hip roof structure. However, as you can see from the illustration, Jerkinhead roofs have a complicated design and that makes it much more expensive to construct compared to a standalone Gable roof or a Hip roof.


    via Memphite

    13. Clerestory Roof

    The Clerestory roof is quite similar to the Skillion and Lean-to Roof we covered earlier. However, unlike a standard Skillion and Lean-to Roof, the Clerestory roof features a row of windows on the top as you can see in the illustration below. Since the windows of a Clerestory roof are placed very high up, they do not invade your privacy by any means.

    So, what is the function of the windows? Well, they are there to fulfill a single purpose, and - you guessed it - it is to let a ton of natural light into the building. Moreover, as a result of the excess natural light, the room stays warm during winter months as well.

     via Pinterest

    14. Saw-tooth Roof

    Although Saw-tooth roofs were usually used in industrial buildings, this design philosophy has slowly trickled down into eco-friendly homes. By definition, a saw-tooth roof is comprised of a series of ridges with vertical glass windows that meets a pitched roof.  So, what are the benefits of this roof design?

    Well, just like Clerestory roofs, Saw-tooth roofs are also built with natural light in mind. However, unlike Clerestory roofs which have only one set of windows, Saw-tooth roofs feature vertical windows on each segment.

    If you are deciding between a Clerestory roof and a Saw-tooth roof, we would suggest going for the latter only if your house is extremely wide. Otherwise, a Clerestory roof will be better suited. Plus, you will also save some cash.


    via Pinterest

    15. Flat Roof

    Although flat roofs are quite commonly used in commercial and other industrial buildings, they are also used in many residential houses. Surprisingly, they are installed in both high and low-rainfall areas. However, if you live in an area with heavy rainfall and snowfall, we would advise you against it. Instead, you should go for a Hip roof or any of the other weatherproof roofs featured on our list.

    Another interesting fact about flat roofs is that they are not completely flat. In fact, they have a slight incline to not allow water to collect on it. In case you live in an area that is free from harsh weather conditions, then you can definitely install a flat roof. Moreover, you can use the flat space on top to make your house even more practical.  For example, you can install PV Solar Panels on top of your flat roof to make your house energy efficient or even energy independent.


    via Pinterest

    16. M Shaped Roof

    As its name suggests, M Shaped Roofs resemble the letter M. Well, not exactly a vertical M, but it is more akin to a flattened M. In other words, M-shaped roofs are nothing but two connected gable roofs.  Now, the design of the M-shaped roofs leads to an obvious downfall which would be the meeting point of the two gables.

    Needless to say, snow and rain will definitely build up in this area. Although, that can be countered to some extent with the use of a central gutter. In areas of high rainfall and snowfall, the pitch of M-shaped roofs is usually much steeper and this ensures that it catches less rain and snow.


    via inhabitat

    17. Saltbox Roof

    Saltbox roofs are quite common in New England. In fact, the first Saltbox house originated in New England and is an example of American colonial architecture. Saltbox roofs are quite similar to Gable roofs, however, unlike Gable roofs which have symmetrical slopes on either side, these roofs have asymmetrical slopes. Take a look at the illustration below, the right slope is much longer than the left one.

    This design philosophy leads to a few problems. The interior space on the back side of the house is quite limited due to the roof almost extending to the ground. Moreover, the tricky design also leads to increased costs.

    However, there are a few redeeming qualities that make this roof style desirable. Saltbox roofs are usually more durable than standard gable roofs owing to their asymmetrical design. On top of that, the large slope makes it easy for water to run off and you can collect a lot of rainwater if you live in an area with heavy rainfall.


    via Wikipedia

    18. Shed Roof or Skillion Roofs

    Shed roofs, also known as Skillion roofs, have a single slope, as you can see in the illustration below. Many modern homes prefer to have this kind of roof style as it not only offers more interior space as opposed to a gable roof or a hip roof, but it can look quite sophisticated as well. Moreover, shed roofs allow more natural light inside compared to pitched roofs.

    Another benefit of installing Skillion roofs is simplicity. These roofs are easy to assemble and do not need as many building materials as some of the other roof styles. However, if you live in an area prone to tornadoes or hurricanes, we would suggest you go for a more windproof roofing style like a hip roof.


    via BuildLLC

    19. Combination Roofs

    As its name suggests, combination roofs are an amalgamation of simpler roofing styles. Take a look at the illustration below, for example, it incorporates multiple gable roofs along with a hip roof for the front porch. Combination roofs are more suitable for complex architecture.

    However, the complexity of the roof structure leads to an obvious downside: the cost. Moreover, building such roofs requires roofing experts and cannot be attempted by an amateur. On top of that, if there are multiple valleys in the roof, it can lead to water damage through those weak points.


    via Roofing Calculator

    20. Pyramid Hip Roof

    Last but not least, is the Pyramid Hip Roof, and as its name suggests this roof closely resembles a pyramid structure. You can think of this roof as a special case of a standard hip roof. Normally, in the case of hip roof, the four sides of the roof converge in the center thus creating a ridge. However, in the case of a Pyramid Hip roof, the four sides converge to a single point, as you can see in the illustration below.

    If you live in an area with harsh environmental conditions, then Pyramid roofs will have you covered. They are extremely resistant to strong winds. However, the downside of a Pyramid Hip roof is the complexity of the design which leads to increased costs over a standard Hip roof or a Gable roof.


    via Lapp Structures

    With that, our article has come to an end. Now that you have read through this article you ought to be better prepared to choose the correct roofing structure for your home. Before we bid adieu, remember that roofs are extremely important, they`re not there just to improve the aesthetics of a building. It is highly recommended to go the extra mile and splurge on the roof best suited to your needs.

    What roof types you`ve noticed in your area and what roof types do you think you actually need?

    Related Articles

    23 Hip Roof Types & Styles for Your Future Home

    What is the Mansard Roof, Advantages and Disadvantages Sheltered

    6 Eco-Friendly Roofing Materials and Why You Need Them

    13 Best Roofing Nailers

    How To Clean Gutter Guards Efficiently

    Shur Flo Gutter Review | All You Need to Know

    EasyOn Gutter Guard Review 101 | All You Need to Know

    5 Best Foam Gutter Guards [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]

    10 Best Solar Gutter Lights

    Do Sheds Need Gutters?

    23 Extraordinary Beautiful Ways to Repurpose Rain Gutters in Your Household

    LeafGuard Review | Everything You Need to Know

    There’s no denying that an effective circular saw is integral to any workshop.

    And if you’re into different DIY construction projects, you’ve surely heard praises about the Rockwell Versacut RK3440K mini circular saw by now. But that doesn’t guarantee that this tool is most suitable for your needs, does it?

    For this purpose, you need to look at many different facets of the product, including its benefits and downsides. And having used this circular saw for an entire month, we can confidently say that its range of advantageous features does make up for the few faults.

    So, to help you figure out whether it’s the ideal tool to go for, we’ve written this detailed review based on our experience. Read on to know more.

    ROCKWELL VersaCut Review

    Circular saw on wooden background. ROCKWELL VersaCut

    ROCKWELL / WORX Rockwell Versacut 4.0 Amp Ultra-Compact...
    • Powerful, 4.0 amp, multi-functional, ultra-compact circular...
    • Cuts wide variety of materials such as tile, wood, sheet...

    Why Buy This Product?

    Rockwell may be a relatively newer brand on the market for power tools, but it has come up with a range of innovative tools since its inception. Each of these offers ultimate efficiency and durability despite being available at a budget-friendly rate. 

    And the ROCKWELL VersaCut saw is definitely among the best products put forward by the brand till date. So, to help you understand its benefits better, let’s start our discussion with a brief explanation of each of its positive features. 

    1. Motor

    Since this circular saw comes in a relatively smaller size, you might be wondering whether that would affect its motor power and speed in any way. But rest assured that you won’t face any such issues with this tool as its motor is strong enough to handle cuts of professional standard comfortably. 

    Coming with a motor of 4 amps, it lets you rip through most materials at a rotational speed of 3500 RPM. In fact, its sheer power will save you much more time on large-scale projects, which is why it can give tough competition to many regular saws. Using this power, it can precisely cut cabinet plywood having a thickness of ¾ inches with little force and effort. 

    Note that most handheld saws barely work at 2,500 RPM, so the Versacut RK3440K will indeed be of great help to any DIY enthusiast. 

    1. Cutting Power

    This saw also ranks high in terms of cutting efficiency, thanks to the use of a superior-grade Laser guide functionality that helps define the cutting lines precisely. This proprietary technology ensures that you get the desired accuracy with each cut on any material, be it ceramic tiles, metal, flooring, or wood. 

    For this purpose, it consists of a light source that projects a triangular light ray on the surface of the material. Even an adapter for dust extraction is included with the saw to clean the laser-guided cutting lines and increase the visibility further. As such, this saw is an ideal fit for people engaged in heavy-duty woodworking projects. 

    Coupled with this is the cutting depth of 1-1/16 inches, which boosts its versatility further. So, you can make a variety of cuts, including crosscuts, plunge cuts, straight cuts, angular cuts, and bevel cuts, quite easily using this power-packed tool. There is also a lever for depth adjustment on one side, which allows you to quickly change the cutting depth to suit your needs. 

    At this point, here’s a side note; always make sure that you’re using the right blades for your projects. Choosing an inefficient blade may lead to rough cuts, cause them to get stuck, and even result in kickbacks, which are very dangerous. 

    1. Safety Features

    Safety is a key factor when it comes to cutting tools though many DIYers often overlook it. Hence, the presence of adequate safety features is a must.

    And you’ll be glad to know that the Rockwell Versacut doesn’t disappoint since it comes with an emergency lock-off switch. This switch prevents any accidental start and thereby rules out any injury.

    1. Design And Build Quality

    Its lightweight and streamlined design is another great benefit, which provides users with much greater control while working. Also, this ensures you don’t have to drag the saw around the workstation or your home. 

    Coming in a compact size, it is easy to store and doesn’t occupy too much space in the room. And that’s not all; you get a sturdy carrying bag in the package which can be used to store the saw.

    Furthermore, the small size of the Rockwell Versacut RK3440K makes it perfect for working in tight spaces with equal power and accuracy. Keep in mind that this would be impossible to achieve if you use a larger saw in place of this model.

    The user convenience on offer is also commendable, as the design is ergonomic and balanced. In addition, the motor is fitted in the rear portion of the saw, which enhances comfort and helps reduce fatigue. 

    By incorporating such a feature, not only is the weight of the saw disseminated but the cutting vibrations are also minimized. This ensures the muscles in the hands are never strained. All in all, such features make it simple to use for beginners as well as pros in DIY construction projects. 

    Coming to durability, the inner and outer body of the saw is entirely made of metal, which enhances its sturdiness and extends its service life considerably. 

    1. Warranty And Price

    This Rockwell circular saw comes with a limited warranty of 2 years, which is quite appreciable. This naturally makes the product more reliable and also ensures that you don’t incur any additional expenses on the tool for two years. 

    Notably, most other circular saws you’ll find on the market offer either a warranty of 1 year or just a money-back guarantee of 30 days. This also puts the model a step ahead of all those products. 

    Moreover, it is also priced reasonably considering all its capabilities, thereby providing you the ideal value for your money. This is something you get only in products manufactured by top-rated tool brands. 

    1. Accessories

    Another impressive aspect of the Rockwell VErsacut RK3440K is the assortment of essential tools and accessories that comes with it. Sounds exciting, doesn’t it? 

    So, let’s get to the point. The contents of the package (other than the saw) include three blades, an edge guide, a base plate, a plastic cover to protect the base, a few wrenches, and a blade guard. 

    And let us tell you that the blades that you get are designed to work with different materials. While the 24-tooth carbide blade is suitable for wood, there’s a diamond blade to rip through cement and also an HSS blade for aluminum items. 

    Long story short, you get pretty much everything you need to start working with this advanced tool. 

    What Could’ve Been Better? 

    Although the Rockwell Versacut RK3440K mini circular saw delivers a seamless performance and gets the job done with ease, there are a few shortcomings. But we assure you that these won’t affect its overall efficiency as such. 

    Firstly, finding replacement blades for this saw can be difficult since they are sparsely available on the market. If you manage to get your hands on one of those, they might turn out to be a bit expensive. But a way out of this problem is to contact the manufacturer and inquire about replacement blades, as they might sell these blades at a relatively cheaper rate. 

    Also, the spring in this mini circular saw may be somewhat stiffer than that found in other models. Owing to this, you may have to apply some amount of pressure to overcome the plunging action while making plunge cuts. 

    But note that this issue may not be faced by all users. And thanks to the availability of a two-year warranty, you can always get in touch with the manufacturer for a solution. 



    Pros

    • Laser-guide functionality provides greater control
    • Lightweight and streamlined design
    • Effective two-year warranty
    • Value for money
    • Long-lasting




    Cons

    • Replacement blades might not be easily available
    • Spring for plunge cuts might be stiffer in some cases



    [easyazon_image align="center" height="500" identifier="B0052EK78O" locale="US" src="https://m.media-amazon.com/images/I/41Sp426X0PL._SL500_.jpg" tag="homesthetics0a-20" width="500"]

    Rockwell Versacut Buyer’s Guide

    Whether you consider purchasing the Rockwell Versacut RK3440K or any other circular saw for that matter, taking into account some key factors is a must. These would ultimately determine the performance of the tool and its durability in the long run. On that note, we’ve listed some important points that you need to keep in mind before choosing a suitable circular saw. 

    1. No-Load Speed

    Having adequate control over the tool while you’re working with it is of prime importance. This is largely determined by the speed at which the motor rotates the blades of the saw. Notably, the free-load speed indicates the raw sawing power, so a higher number of revolutions per minute will facilitate a better work efficiency. 

    This speed generally varies based on the model, but it’s typically anywhere between 2,700 to 5,000+ RPM. 

    1. Bevel Capacity

    Good-quality circular saws are not just capable of making simple cuts perpendicularly but can also make bevel cuts at different angles up to 55°. What makes this possible is an adjustable base plate. So, remember to check whether the circular saw has a bevel capability, determine its maximum angle, and figure out the cutting depth at a 45° angle. 

    1. Cutting Depth And Capacity

    A greater cutting capacity gives a circular saw the power to handle thicker wood pieces and complete more cutting tasks. This capacity is determined by the maximum cut at a 90° angle and would range between 35mm and 70mm. 

    ROCKWELL VersaCut RK3440K FAQ

  • How Do You Choose A Blade For A Circular Saw?

    To select the right blade for your circular saw, you must consider the number of teeth provided in it, its gullet size, the hook angles, and bevel angles. 

  • How Will You Use The Rockwell Versacut RK3440K?

    To use this mini circular saw, turn it on and move the blade slowly through the material. You can use it with one hand and also apply it for overhead operation owing to its ergonomic design. 

  • How To Cut Plywood With A Circular Saw Without Splintering?

    While cutting plywood, there is a high probability that the wood may be splintered or torn. Hence, you should follow some simple steps to avoid any such possibilities. Firstly, make sure you use the appropriate blade to get the best results. 

    Another step is to keep the outer portion of the blade close to the face of the piece of plywood. Lastly, you should always cover the cutting line with some masking tape. 

  • What Should You Do If Your Circular Saw Goes Backward?

    A circular saw going backward implies that there might be an electrical fault in the tool. So, you should immediately stop using that saw as your safety might be at risk. Wait until the saw is fixed by a reliable technician. 

  • [easyazon_image align="center" height="500" identifier="B0052EK78O" locale="US" src="https://m.media-amazon.com/images/I/619mB5iDZvL._SL500_.jpg" tag="homesthetics0a-20" width="500"]

    ROCKWELL VersaCut RK3440K Verdict

    That brings us to the end of our review, and we hope you’ve developed a clear idea about this mini circular saw by now. 

    From our experience with this tool, we think the Rockwell VersaCut RK3440K a must-have for all DIY enthusiasts in their workshop. It would offer much greater accuracy and consistency than many other circular saws priced considerably higher. 

    Nonetheless, don’t forget to consider your needs and preferences and go through the buyer’s guide before the purchase; this will surely clear any doubts in your mind. And let us know about your experience after using the product in the comments section below. We’ll be glad to hear about it!

    Related Articles

    9 Best Benchtop Jointer for Woodworking

    Simply the Best Stained Glass Ring Saws

    49 FREE DIY Router Table Plans For an Epic Home Workshop

    10 Best Shop Vacs For Dust Collection

    Top 10 Longest Pole Saws For Tree Pruning

    Different Types of Saws & How to Use Them

    13 Best Sliding Miter Saw

    13 Best Hybrid Table Saw

    11 Best Track Saw

    13 Best Hybrid Table Saw

    5 Best Toe Kick Saws

    11 Best Bow Saw

    9 Best Pond Skimmer

    11 Best Table Saw

    7 Best Cabinet Table Saws

    9 Best Band Saw

    7 Best 12-inch Miter Saw

    13 Best Contractor Table Saws

    Best 20″ Chainsaw

    6 Sabre Saw Vs. Jigsaw

    Radial Arm Saw vs Miter Saw

    Rocket stoves are no rocket science, but there is still a science to how they work. Luckily, they do not require elaborate mechanics, and they surely aren’t dependent on either gas or electricity to cook you a delicious meal and satiate your hunger.

    So, what’s a rocket stove exactly and how does it work? A rocket stove works chiefly on wood fuel. Creating a simple exoskeleton for the stove, you insert a piece of wood to burn in the combustion chamber and let the flame and smoke rise through the chimney which is vertical and insulated. This makes the combustion to be complete even before the fire reaches the top cooking area.

    Not only are rocket stoves simple in mechanics, but they are also extremely feasible for a traveler’s life, with their usually small size and easy portability. And yes, they are cheap on the pocket too. In fact, you can make them on your own, in a shape, you deem best. Rocket stoves can be created using scrap and recyclable materials. They are also used for heating homes or small spaces. Once you have a decent idea of how to make one, you can build a rocket stove in emergency situations too with no elaborate list of materials required.

    To help you with the process, here are some easy-to-make DIY rocket stove plans.

    If you`ve found the rocket stove plans below interesting we invite you to check various other free woodworking plans, we have curated lists that will show you how to build a tiny houseduck housedeer standbat house, diy tree housecat towergaragefire pitporch swinggreenhousesmall cabinfarmhouse tablepole barn, rabbit hutchdiy dog beda playhouse, a chicken coop.

    DIY Rocket Stove Plans for Cooking With Wood

    1. Recycle

    Recycling is the best way to arrange materials for your stove. Take three tin cans to make this amazing rocket stove and cook delicious food in the middle of nowhere. Always remember to use gloves while making this, and tin cutters and snips for cutting through the tin, and heat insulation for keeping the stove insulated. It’s not tough to make this, is it?

    DIY ROCKET STOVE PLANS FOR COOKING WITH WOODMore details at rootsimple.com 

    2. Using a Metal Bucket

    Instead of tin cans, we are using a  metal bucket here. But, in spite of the big surface for cooking, there is no fuel efficiency reduction. Take a metal bucket that can hold five gallons, two metal pipes, a grill rack for the surface, and some clay dirt. Voila. Use twigs for fuel and cook to your heart’s delight.

    USING A METAL BUCKETMore details at rootsimple.com

    3. Stove Out of a Trash Can?

    Trash cans are usually known for dumpster diving and foraging food by stray animals, but you can use a metal trash can to do wonders for your outdoor kitchen or inside a cabin in the woods. You can always paint the stove not to make it look like a trash can and decorate it whichever way you deem fit.

    STOVE OUT OF A TRASH CAN?
    More details at instructables.com 

    4. "The Tubes are Tied"

    This is as handy as it gets. All you need is a tubular piece of steel with a three-inch section and a cross on the top made of steel again for the surface. Very easy to carry and extremely efficient, you can cook outdoors in the simplest of ways.

    "THE TUBES ARE TIED"More details at gunsamerica.com

    5. Building it Up, Bring by Brick

    I understand you don’t want to always carry a rocket stove around and perhaps just want a gas-free, electricity-free stove out in the backyard for outdoor cooking. For this, creating a permanent stove using stacked bricks is a great way to do it.
    BUILDING IT UP, BRING BY BRICKMore details at onegreenplanet.org

    6. Bricks, but More Suave This Time

    If you want neater finishing and more permanence for your brick stove, go for this red brick-and-mortar stove that looks as neat as a fireplace in an old country house. You can, of course, paint the bricks or add more touch-ups to them to make them look more appealing.
    BRICKS, BUT MORE SUAVE THIS TIMEMore details at rootsimple.com

    7. A Small Tin Can And a Whole Lotta Fun 

    This is a tin can again, but one that is comparatively much smaller than others yet equally efficient in its cooking abilities. All you need are a bunch of twigs and some leaves to fuel it up.
    A SMALL TIN CAN AND A WHOLE LOTTA FUN More details at treehugger.com

    8. Heating With a Rocket

    Rocket stoves can be used for more than just cooking. You can create a rocket stove to custom use it as a house heater. Trust me. This is far cheaper than using a gas or electricity-based heater and warms up the house as cozily as possible. Here, a water heater was used to heat the house instead.
    HEATING WITH A ROCKET

    More details at streetjesus.blogspot.com

    9. A Small Heater for Big Heating

    This is a smaller heater and more open on the top, but actually manages to heat up big open indoor spaces. Easy on the money and easy on the building side, yet more heating for the winters to be tolerable.
     A SMALL HEATER FOR BIG HEATING

    More details at instructables.com

    10. A Thing Outta Nuthin'

    This one is amazing to look at and is amazing at work too. This particular design makes the stove run for 4 hours once loaded and lit. It is a long burner and helps save resources, even if those resources have been rummaged from the garden.
     A THING OUTTA NUTHIN'

    More details at instructables.com 

    11. Rocket Stove Using a Can

    You can create a rocket stove that runs on twigs to fuel your cooking. Simple, right? A rocket stove created by using #10 Can and other scrap material makes it easy for you to build one. Take one #10 Can, and two cans that can store 28oz each, and add another can to it for the shelf section. Get some thermal insulation. Get a tin cutter to cut through metal and heavy-duty gloves for your safety. Use a wire hanger to make the handle and a can of spray paint that is heat resistant if you want to paint the stove.

    ROCKET STOVE USING A CAN

    More details at prepared-housewives.com

    12. Tough as Nails!

    This is a tough-skinned stove. It is robust and does not look like it will falter. Neatly welded, it is meant to last long. You will require an extra helping hand if you want to cut and weld it as neatly and tightly as it looks. You might also want to paint it to make it look fancier.
    TOUGH AS NAILS!More details at instructables.com 

    13. Utility and Aesthetics Rolled into One 

    This rocket stove is very steampunk in its appearance and looks more complete than others, with a full stand for support. It is portable and is sort of a centerpiece wherever you install it. You can paint it or spend a little more and get extra finishing on it, like the ones you have for malm fireplaces.
    UTILITY AND AESTHETICS ROLLED INTO ONE More details at instructables.com

    14. Small, Yet Efficient

    This is an adorably small rocket stove that once again uses a #10 can for its main body, and four soup cans for the rest. If you already have such material lying in your garage or your kitchen, you are spending nothing on making this. It is easy to use and easy to make, and as a bonus looks cute while you cook.
    SMALL, YET EFFICIENTMore details at instructables.com

    15. The Tiki Stove With Magical Powers

    This one adds a very ethereal element to your stove. It perfectly complements the look and feel of nature and blends with its natural environment. Moreover, its relic-like appearance makes it a great decorative piece too.

    But, making a tiki stove isn’t as simple as making a #10 can stove. This one’s a heavy stove that isn’t easy to move around. Why? Because it is made out of concrete. It doesn’t mean you cannot take it camping, it just means you need a good number of hands to transport it.
    THE TIKI STOVE WITH MAGICAL POWERSMore details at instructables.com

    16. The Hobos

    It doesn’t sound all that fashionable, and the name comes from the ever-cliched yet never-old shot in films of people cooking in the underpasses and at stations with small stoves. These people are called Hobos usually, and so is the stove after them. But, hey, it isn’t bad at all in functionality. It is small, lightweight, and can be carried around very easily for your camping trips or even when you’re out of gas or electricity.
    THE HOBOSMore details at logcabincooking.com 

    17. Stove Out of Cinderblocks

    Cinder blocks look cool. Cinder blocks are also robust. Cinder blocks come with readymade compartments, and they are adequately heavy-duty. Moreover, they are big enough for you to use bigger-sized pots for cooking and with enough blocks, cook with more than one pot. And yes, they are easy on the pocket and easy on the make.
     STOVE OUT OF CINDERBLOCKSMore details at attainable-sustainable.net

    18. Steampunk for the Win!

    The steampunk appeal never goes, and heaters like these just bring that nostalgia to your rocket stove idea. It is heavy-duty and is more equipped for heating up your home than for making a meal. And because of how it looks, it clearly isn’t simple to make. But, once you figure out the mechanics of it, you won’t need to feel guilty for using stuff that adds to environmental degradation.
    STEAMPUNK FOR THE WIN!

     

    More details at alt-nrg.org

    19. Stove From The Future

    This looks like something out of dystopian concept art. And not only is it great to look at, but it is very functional in use. This is complete with two sets of trays and platforms for keeping stuff. It also looks like a robot is serving you food with plates held high. You can, of course, add to that effect by crafting or drawing a face for this stove. This grill is also big enough to cook a lot and won’t cost you much.
    STOVE FROM THE FUTUREMore details at instructables.com

    20. The Easiest Thing to Make Ever!

    This is by far the simplest and most cost-efficient rocket stove on this list, but it is only mostly possible if you are a seaside dweller. Even if you aren’t one, there is no harm to learn how to make it. All you really require for this is a lot of sand. The other materials used here are again scraps that can be rummaged through and customized for the stove.
    THE EASIEST THING TO MAKE EVER!More details at instructables.com

    21. A Portable Stove- Hell Yeah!

    This one’s a winner. It is small enough to fit anywhere in your house or car, or even on the back of your bike, and it not only helps you efficiently cook food, but it also heats better than it looks it can. Moreover, it is lightweight and easy to carry, and needless to say easy on the pocket. Also, just for gags, you can call it your pocket rocket. Funny, I know.
    . A PORTABLE STOVE- HELL YEAH!More details at instructables.com

    22. Homemade Stove Perfect for Camping and Backyard Picnics

    Neat in design and resembling something out of War of the Worlds or Star Wars, this rocket stove is meant to last. It appears to be industry-grade and readymade but is really homemade. And no, it is not difficult to make. In a few easy steps, you can have this stove in your backyard or on your camping trips.
     HOMEMADE STOVE PERFECT FOR CAMPING AND BACKYARD PICNICSMore details at instructables.com

    23. Another Easy-to-Make

    This is very easy to make, and once you have a detailed list of instructions on how to make it step by step, your job gets so much easier than before. It isn’t expensive either, as is usually the nature of a rocket stove. Plus, it looks very tidy and appealing and easy to carry around.
     ANOTHER EASY-TO-MAKEMore details at rootsimple.com 

    24. A Few Tin Cans And Some Other Stuff

    Yes, this one does make use of rummaged material mostly and isn’t too pretty to look at, but at the same time, it is time-saving, effort-saving, and money-saving to make. Just by using a couple of big tin cans and some bent tin for the handles, this rocket stove does its job efficiently and helps you prepare a delicious meal on the go.
    A FEW TIN CANS AND SOME OTHER STUFFMore details at instructables.com 

    25. 'Style' is Its Middle Name

    This rocket stove looks very chic in design and is sleek and neat to look at it. It has three small pieces of a rod at the bottom for legs and a symmetrically asymmetrical design with two nozzles for the firebrand and four steel rods at the surface for keeping the cooking pan. Moreover, it seems to have welded the cooking pan to the stove, but that doesn’t seem necessary to do. It is easy to carry and can be used in your backyard and on camping trips.
    'STYLE' IS IT'S MIDDLE NAMEMore details on Pinterest

    26. An Industrial Model

    Very industrial in design and resembling something of a locomotive, this stove, instead of being tall or broad, is long in shape and uses iron blocks and plates to cut and weld them together in the most efficient way. It has a support on the surface for placing the pots, and in the ignition area, it compartmentalizes the wood, twig, or leaf stuffing area. The two rectangular pipes at the bottom for support can be custom fitted with wheels to move around.
    AN INDUSTRIAL MODEL rocket stoveMore details on Pinterest

    27. A Stove on Wheels? What!

    Speaking of wheels, this rocket stove cum full-fledged cooking grill is welded into the back of a trailer truck, complete with a long, rectangular, and spacious grill and a deep area for the firebrand. It also has handles on the side to hold it and lid to cover the grill. Very neatly cut and welded, with this portable yet fixed grill you can have well-done steak in the middle of the forest. Extremely efficient for people who like to be on the go as often as possible, this heavy-duty grill is meant to last long.
    27 Insanely Cool DIY Rocket Stove plans WHEELS More details on Pinterest

    Which DIY Rocket stove plan is your favorite?

    Now that we've given you some top ideas for DIY oven stoves, when do you intend to get your hands dirty? Worry not; these extreme tips should give you the ability to make Stoves out of scraps in no time!

    Related Articles

    30 Portable Chicken Coop Plans You Can Easily Move

    Barndominium 101 | Floor Plans, Pricing Guide & Pictures

    57 DIY Chicken Coop Plans in Easy to Build Tutorials – 100% FREE

    47 Free DIY Swing Set Plans for a Happy Playing Area in Your Backyard

    49 FREE DIY Router Table Plans For an Epic Home Workshop

    43 DIY Duck Houses Plans and Duck Coop Plans to Build Now

    57 DIY Bookshelf Plans and Ideas For Healthy Home Libraries

    163 Free DIY Pole Barn Plans and Designs That You Can Build Easily

    37 Free DIY Tiny House Plans for a Happy & Peaceful Life In Nature

    39 FREE DIY Bat House Plans to Shelter the Natural Pest Control

    19 Adorable Free Cat Tower Plans For Your Furry Friend

    23 Awesome Free Deer Stand Plans You Can Start Right Now

    23 FREE Detailed DIY Garage Plans With Instructions To Actually Build

    13 Epic Free Rabbit Hutch Plans You Can Download & Build Today

    101 Simple Free DIY Coffee Table Plans

    11 Best Rocket Stoves for Camping and Survival Enthusiasts

    The 10 Most Efficient Wood Stoves For Home Heating

    10 Best Small Pellet Stoves | RV & Tiny House Compatible

    Roborock has been making vacuum cleaners for many years, and this cordless version is indeed a superb creation. So, it is time to say goodbye to the wires! This product is currently discontinued, and no such updated products available from the maker.

    The Roborock H7 vacuum cleaner comes with a wide range of features and is an upgraded version compared to the H6 model, which was released in 2023. And with this unit, Roborock offers a lot of competition to the top vacuum cleaning brands like Samsung, Shark, and Dyson. 

    If you are looking for a vacuum cleaner that can be easily taken around tight spaces, this one can easily serve the purpose. Plus, people of all age groups can easily operate it because of the lightweight design. 

    And so that our readers can have a better understanding of the Roborock H7, we have penned down some of its main features in detail below.

    Now, dive in! 

    Roborock H7 Vacuum Cleaner Review

    Roborock H7 Vacuum Cleaner Review

    About the Brand

    Beijing Roborock Technology Co., Ltd. or Roborock was founded way back in 2014, and it has been striving to make life easier for its customers. It has its headquarters in Beijing, and there are a number of scientists, designers, experts, manufacturers, and engineers who work closely to come up with the products. They have been designing different kinds of vacuums, and the cordless variant has been a huge success. 

    Furthermore, the team members come from reputed companies including Huawei, Microsoft, and Foxconn, and they have diverse experience in various fields such as electronic engineering, manufacturing, machine structure design, and development of algorithms. 

    The main motto of Roborock is to ensure that it uses the latest technologies to manufacture its vacuum cleaners so that people can leave the job to these machines. They believe in creating smart products that will make life easier and ensure that you can focus on other important activities. 

    Product Review

    1. Features And Specifications

    First of all, the H7 vacuum cleaner comes with a 1.3-inch OLED screen that will help you understand the remaining time, battery percentage and display the mode that is currently selected. It initially shows the battery percentage, but on selecting a mode, the display will tell you the remaining time that you have while working with that specific mode. 

    There is a button just beside the screen, which will help in changing the mode, and it is easily accessible while working. You can reach out to it at any time by just moving a finger. 

    The package includes a set of accessories that include a multi-surface brush, dusting brush, MagBase, crevice tool, and a motorized mini-brush. 

    They all are magnetic and can easily stick onto the MagBase easily. Besides, the MagBase can be mounted on a wall so that you can keep all the brushes in one place without worrying about misplacing or losing them. 

    We also loved how the vacuum cleaner can be used as a mop as well, but you will need to buy a separate accessory for this purpose, which can be ordered while purchasing the device.

    However, there are some drawbacks that caught our eye. Firstly, this vacuum cleaner doesn’t come with a roller, which buyers will generally expect from a premium brand like Roborock.

    And although the brushes function well, we were not able to remove the brush bar from the casing that it came in. This makes maintaining it slightly difficult, as you will not be able to reach the inner corners of the brush. 

    1. Design And Build

    If you are specifically looking for a vacuum cleaner that can be operated easily around furniture, then the H7 is a great option. Its lightweight design weighs only 1.5 kgs, which makes it easy to take around and maneuver near the corners of your home. 

    Plus, you won’t have to strain your hands while working with it in handheld mode, especially while cleaning stairs or car seats. This is a huge bonus for elderly people or users who may not have much strength in their arms.

    Apart from that, it’s accompanied by a dirt bin, which has a considerable capacity of 0.5 liters so that it can hold a lot of dirt and debris. However, there is no mechanism that automatically pushes out the dirt from the bin, so you will need to clean its insides manually. 

    Now, this can be prevented if you line it with a plastic bag, which makes it easier to remove all the debris at once. However, if you plan on using the vacuum regularly, you’re likely to use removable dirt bags, and the package comes with two of these.  But if you have dirt allergy or other issues with dust, we will recommend that you purchase more such bags. 

    1. Performance

    This unit ranks pretty high when it comes to performance, thanks to the 480-watt motor, which can create powerful suction to remove a lot of dust and dirt at one go. Hence, it will cut down on your maintenance efforts and time.

    Additionally, you can toggle among 3 different modes, namely max mode, standard mode, and eco. 

    The max mode should be switched on when you need to clean dirt that is clinging to the fabrics of the sofa or carpets. However, it’s extremely powerful and can pull almost anything out. Hence, be very careful while operating the device in this mode to ensure that you don’t cause any unnecessary damages.

    Next is the standard mode, which provides ample suction power but also consumes a lot of energy. Hence, we will recommend using this once in a while to do a thorough cleaning of the place. 

    Lastly, the eco mode is the most power-friendly operation option that you will find on this device. It is perfect for everyday use without racking up the power bills. 

    Besides, you do not have to keep the trigger pressed at all times. You can switch on the sustain mode, and the vacuum will operate smoothly. After the work is done, just turn this mode off, and you are good to go. 

    Furthermore, this machine is known to perform really well when it comes to tiny dust and dirt particles. It also works well with hair, and it will pick hair and fur that is scattered around the floor. You can keep using eco mode for all of it. However, if you need to pick up larger particles, then the standard mode may be required. The max mode is generally not used at all in practice as it is too strong. 

    1. Battery

    As with all vacuums, the battery life differs depending on the mode you use, and you can recharge it once the power drops. You will be getting an 80Wh Li-Po or a lithium polymer battery, which takes around 2 and a half hours to charge completely. The battery cannot be removed, and hence, you cannot keep a spare battery and charge it. 

    If you are using the standard mode, then the vacuum will function for around 40 minutes. On the other hand, if you are using the max mode, then it will function for 8 minutes. The eco mode is the most long-lasting, and in this case, the battery lasts for 90 minutes. 

    We will recommend switching on the max mode rarely for a half-yearly sofa and carpet cleaning, and then you would not be consuming too much power. 

    1. Pricing

    The price is on the higher side, and you will have to pay $500 for it. This may require you to go over the budget, so we will ask you to consider all the features before purchasing. 

    1. Return Policy And Warranty

    There’s no doubt that the Roborock H7 is a powerful and efficient device that will work well for many years if you maintain it properly. Ensure that you keep charging the battery and do not let it drain out completely. The company offers a 1-year warranty on the product, and you can always contact customer care in case of any issues. 

    Moreover, you can return the product within 30 days of getting it delivered for any reason. If there is a fault with the product, then the shipping charges will be paid by the company. 

    Otherwise, you will have to pay the charges yourself while the rest of the money will be returned back. Just remember to double-check and see if all the accessories are returned along with the product. Else the product will not be eligible for return. 

    The company uses trusted shipping services, which include UPS, FedEx, USPS, and Amazon Logistics, and you should receive the product within 3 to 5 days of placing the order. 



    Pros

    • Charges quickly
    • Known for powerful suction capacity
    • Efficient air filtration
    • Easy to store
    • Lightweight and easy to maneuver
    • Comes with multiple brushes




    Cons

    • No roller is provided
    • Requires manual removal of dirt and debris



    Roborock H7 Vacuum Cleaner Verdict 

    We believe that this is a very powerful and cost-effective option to choose among the other competitors in the market. It may not stand out too much considering the price is high, but the price is well justified with the huge number of features and accessories that come along. 

    However, there are some disadvantages like the absence of a roller and the fact that one has to put their hand in the bin to get the dust out. But since it allows users to add disposable dirtbags, the problem is taken care of to some extent. 

    Also, the attachments have built-in magnets, and you will not lose them easily as they can all stay attached to one base. 

    With this, we have reached the end of this review, and we are sure that you have enough information about the H7 vacuum cleaner. If there is something more you would want to know, leave a comment in the section below, and we will try to answer it. 

    See you another day!

    Related Articles

    55 Best Robot Vacuum Names For Your Little One

    Bissell Crosswave 1785A vs. 2306A

    Bissell 1806 vs. Bissell 1940

    Bissell 3624 Vs. 2694

    Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe Vs. Hoover Turbo Scrub

    6 Best Vacuum Cleaners for Mattress That Promote Healthy Sleeping

    iRobot Roomba 675 vs. 680 vs. 690

    The Ring doorbells have gained attention among homeowners, as currently, the brand produces some of the best doorbells on the market. Apart from easy installation and added security, these doorbells are quite easy on the pocket. 

    A smart wireless doorbell is an essential addition to all homes. It is important to ensure that your home is safe and secure and your time away is not full of worry and anxiety. 

    Thus, investing in smart video doorbells - wired or wireless - is a smart decision you can make for your home. 

    So, package thieves, intruders, or your prom date - you will not have to wait for the door to open to find out! You can use your mobile device to access the doorbell cameras and talk to them using its intercom systems. 

    Ring Video Doorbell Pro and Basic

    an intercom on the door of a private house, an intercom panel with a video camera on a brick beige fence post of a private house. Ring Video Doorbell Pro and Basic.

    Ring is a home security company that specializes in smart doorbells and various other equipment that can guarantee safety for your home. It has manufactured video doorbells that come with the option of wired or wireless. Ring Pro is one of their most popular video doorbells. 

    Common Features

    Before we compare the two best Ring doorbells, wired vs. wireless, let us look at the common features of these doorbells. 

    1. Ease Of Installation

    Both the Ring video doorbells, wired and wireless, aka Ring and Ring Pro, are very easy to install, thus, enabling homeowners to save time as well as money. As such, setting these Ring doorbells themselves will help them cut the cost of installation. This DIY installation feature makes these doorbells an appealing choice. 

    1. Reliable

    Irrespective of wired or wireless doorbells, one thing you can be sure of is the reliability of Ring video doorbells. It will provide you with the same security as that of all their models. They last quite a long time as well. 

    Apart from the hardware reliability, the software has been appreciated by homeowners as they report little to no bugs while using it. 

    1. App-friendly

    The best feature of the Ring video doorbell is the fact that they are compatible with mobile devices. So, you won’t have to worry while going out for a nice vacation or doing your everyday routine. You can always access the footage of these video doorbells on your phone and keep a check on arriving guests using the Ring app. 

    1. Night Vision

    Since most crimes happen after dark, the Ring video doorbell having improved night vision is definitely a plus. They allow the user to access videos and download them in high quality, even in night mode. So, wired or wireless ones, both doorbells ensure your home is protected. 

    1. Motion Detection

    As the name suggests, Ring video doorbell has advanced motion detection facilities that help alert the user when someone is at their door. This prevents trespassing, break-in attempts, and other sorts of notorious activities in the vicinity. 

    1. High-definition Videos

    The whole point of Ring video doorbell is to record intrusion or unlawful entry. If the quality of the video is questionable and the perpetrators’ faces remain unclear, it is pointless and no different from a traditional doorbell. 

    Hence, Ring doorbells have high-quality videos that capture everything crisp and clear and record arriving guests at your doorstep. 

    1. Two-way Communication

    If someone’s at the front door and you don’t want to bother opening it, you can always talk to them using a smartphone or Ring’s intercom system. Ring video doorbell wireless and Ring doorbell Pro boast a two-way audio system that enables you to converse with high-quality sound without being exposed. They also provide you with an audio recording of events outside your door. 

    1. Affordable

    Both the Ring devices are priced reasonably. So, homeowners on a budget can definitely check them out. Note that most wired or wireless doorbells from other brands are on the pricier side. 

    Differences

    As similar as they seem to be, the Ring video doorbell and the Ring Pro video doorbell have some key differences. The main difference is that one is a traditional wired doorbell system or a purely hardwired Ring doorbell (Ring Pro), and the other isn’t, making it a wireless doorbell (Ring). Other differences include: 

    1. Field Of View

    The field of view for the Ring video doorbell is 155 degrees, and 160 degrees for the Ring video doorbell Pro. This makes the Pro version comparatively better, as it can capture more in one frame. This wide-angle can record more of your surroundings, thus giving you a better idea of what’s going on. 

    1. Cost

    The Ring video doorbell Pro is more expensive than the Ring video doorbell. Though both are affordable, the availability of more features makes the Ring Pro model slightly more expensive. 

    So, if you’re willing to spend a little more, the Ring video doorbell Pro is a good option. 

    1. Installation

    The Ring doorbell is a wireless system, and the Ring video doorbell Pro is a purely wired system. They are both easy to install, even though the wired doorbell may take slightly longer than the wireless one as it may require wiring. Yet, they don't have complex wiring systems, which makes installation easier compared to other wired doorbells. 

    Moreover, the Ring doorbell device has a rechargeable battery and has to be taken out to recharge, and you would have to keep in check with their wireless transmitter as well as the wireless receiver. However, traditional wired systems are more reliable than wireless doorbells as you don’t have to keep changing the batteries. 

    1. Lighting

    When it comes to lighting, The Ring doorbell Pro uses LED lights for a better image while in night vision mode. However, the Ring video doorbell lacks this feature. If security at night is important to you, we suggest opting for the Ring pro video doorbell, as it makes night vision footage clearer. 

    1. Alert

    Another minute difference would be that Ring doorbell Pro offers customization of alerts and the Ring chime. Ring video doorbell, however, does not offer this feature. 

    FAQs Regarding Ring Video Doorbell Wired And Wireless

  • Do You Need The Ring Subscription?

    The Ring doorbell offers a subscription service called Ring Protect. Though not mandatory to own, the plan comes with its own advantages. The prices can range from $4 to $20 per month. 

    Without a Ring Protect plan, you can have the following:

    • Live video footage of your home
    • Motion detection notifications from the camera 
    • Two-way communication system with the doorbell

    Whereas with a Ring Protect plan, you get

    • Ability to save recorded videos and share them if necessary 
    • Snapshots from the camera during the day
    • Extended warranty for your device
    • Some discounts for your next Ring device purchase
  • Does Ring Doorbells Work With Alexa?

    The Ring doorbell has recently been given an upgrade, so it can now be connected to your Amazon Alexa. Connecting your doorbell to Alexa will enable you to access the doorbell through voice commands. All you have to do is set up your Amazon Alexa account and allow it to detect the Ring doorbell. 

    This will also enable Alexa to notify you when you have a visitor or if someone is at your front door. If you do not wish to get up and check who is at your door, you can just ask Alexa to do so for you, and it will be displayed on your Ring app.

    Apart from Ring, even Google’s Nest doorbells wired and wireless security cameras can work with your home system.

  • Do Ring Doorbells Record?

    Yes, the Ring video doorbell, both wired and wireless, does record footage of your porch. Once the camera in the doorbell detects motion at the front door, it will start recording.

    When someone alerts the doorbell by either moving around or directly pressing the doorbell button, it sends a notification to your Ring app that someone is present at your front door. Once you open the app, it turns into a live stream, allowing you to talk to the person at the door through the two-way communication system of the doorbell.

    With the Ring Protect subscription, you will be able to hold on to the recorded videos for a longer period of time.

  • How Do Video Doorbells Work?

    These video doorbells, as the name suggests, enable you to be aware of who is at your door without stepping out. They are not full-fledged home security systems but rather an addition to them. It can be classified as a mix of a CCTV camera and a smart doorbell. It alerts you when someone is at your door and helps you gain visual and audio access to the person. 

    As soon as the doorbell camera captures someone outside the door, you instantly get an alert on your mobile device. This helps you get an idea of arriving guests and take action in case of an intruder. 

    These smart doorbells also integrate well with other home security systems and other smart home devices. These work together to help make your home a safe and secure place to live in without any worry.

  • Are They Worth The Price?

    One popular query is if these smart doorbells are actually worth their cost. And the answer is a resounding “yes!” 

    Video doorbells are a great addition to the security of your home. It is important to know what is happening outside without putting yourself in a vulnerable position, and video doorbells help you do just that. Be it a family or a bachelor – safety is of utmost priority to all.

    From people stealing that pizza you just got delivered to attempts to break into your home – everything can be recorded in these video doorbells. This helps you to take necessary action for the same. 

    So, investing in a gadget that helps you feel more safe and sound in your home is definitely worth it.  

  • Delivery man in protective mask holding paper bag with food in the entrance. The courier stands at the door and rings the customer's doorbell. He brought a box of fresh vegetables and fruits. Ring Doorbell Wired VS Wireless Final Thoughts.

    Ring Doorbell Wired VS Wireless Final Thoughts

    If you’re looking for a smart doorbell for your new home, the Ring video doorbell wired is ideal. It has various features that enable the user to feel safe and secure in their own home. Since it does not need any electrician to install it, you will be saving up on installation charges. Not to forget, the Ring mobile app makes it a user-friendly device. 

    Lastly, it provides high-definition videos with night mode and advanced motion sensors. 

    However, if you want to avoid taking down the drywall and would like an easy change from your old doorbell to a newer one, the Ring wireless doorbell is ideal. It comes with the exact set of features that makes it a suitable choice for your home's security. It is also extremely easy to install and avoids the hassle of wiring. It can also be deemed safer in certain ways as it avoids the risk of fire due to faulty or exposed wiring. 

    The Revive Organic Soil Treatment Granules have been making a lot of waves recently, and we decided to check it out. 

    Just like any other soil treatment product, this too contains a list of different ingredients; only, in this case, there are no artificial fillers. Since labeling something as 'organic' or 'natural' is more often than not considered a marketing gimmick, we tested it to assess the quality and results. 

    Even though the product seemed lacking in some areas, we discovered a host of benefits that can truly nourish your lawn. However, to learn more about its individual properties, you must dig deeper, starting with the positives. 

    Let's begin. 

    Revive Organic Soil Treatment Granules Review 

    Green different shape chemical fertilizer granules on the ground. High quality photo. Revive Organic Soil Treatment Granules Review

    No products found.

    Why Buy This Product?

    The brand Revive has been delivering top-notch lawn care treatment since 1972, and as such, their product line-up includes different soil solutions that are considered effective by many. So, let's start our review with the benefits of this organic product. 

    1. 5-1-1 NPK

    This is a product information you'll find in every bag of fertilizer or soil treatment grains available on the market. Here's what NPK signifies: nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), and potassium (K). Therefore, this measurement essentially denotes the ratio in which each of these minerals is available in the product. 

    As you can already figure out, nitrogen has the highest concentration compared to other minerals. This is mainly because your lawn depends on nitrogen to grow and thrive. Apart from that, phosphorus is included to promote root growth essential for better establishment of the grass. Meanwhile, potassium has a positive impact on the overall condition of your green pad. 

    While the phosphorus and potassium content is remarkably low, there's enough for your lawn to reach optimal growth. However, if you have just seeded the lawn area, you may not be able to discern the favorable impacts of these minerals. 

    That said, the overall NPK level is relatively low in this product. Therefore, you cannot expect rapid growth or instant greenery within some time of application. Regardless, if you use it every 6 weeks like clockwork (in spring, summer, and fall), you can keep your lawn healthy around the year. 

    1. Contains Iron

    Nowadays, most fertilizers contain iron, and the Revive Soil Treatment is not far from this trend. However, it's more than a bandwagon effect, considering that iron has a range of tangible benefits that cannot be ignored. 

    For starters, iron can render your grass greener, making it more vibrant and lush. While nitrogen also has a similar impact, iron supplements enhance the effect and give your lawn grass a bluish-green tone. However, the color shift won't be that drastic as the product contains only 2% iron. 

    That said, the presence of iron can have other undesirable effects if you fail to apply the fertilizer accurately. For instance, if the granules spill over onto the sidewalk or driveway, it could come in contact with water and stain the concrete. So, make sure to follow all the instructions to the T, and as a precaution, sweep off the granules that have escaped from the lawn. 

    However, if the iron has already developed stains, you can use a rust remover to eliminate the marks. 

    1. Labeled Organic

    Like we mentioned before, several big-box companies drive the 'organic' narrative to push their products to customers. However, not all organic fertilizer brands can deliver on their tall claims. Before we discuss how Revive's natural composition benefits your soil, let's learn a little more about what 'organic' essentially means.  

    Simply put, organic fertilizers comprise plant or animal-based ingredients and are hence labeled so. Also, they contain low amounts of naturally-occurring minerals that foster healthy growth. However, the Revive Soil Treatment Granule is not rated safe for use around children or pets.  

    You still have to undertake all the necessary precautions before and after administering this lawn food. This bit is critical to the majority of such applications, as you'd want to offset any hazardous consequences altogether. For instance, the iron content in the fertilizer is considered toxic for aquatic beings. 

    As a rule of thumb, keep your pets and children away from the site of application. That aside, don't forget to protect yourself; wear gloves to avoid direct contact with the grains. Furthermore, you should, at all costs, avoid inhaling or ingesting the product. 

    1. Conserves Water

    If you live in the Southwestern region of the United States, you're already familiar with the clay problem. High clay content in soil is one of the biggest barriers to a lush, green lawn. Given its volatile nature, clay becomes rock hard when dry and sticky when wet.  

    Either way, high amounts of clay can impede root growth and adequate soil draining. The latter leads to root decay, which can eventually rob the grass of its vitality. To resolve this issue from scratch, you'll have to manually turn the soil. However, that sort of preparation needs to be undertaken before planting the grass seeds.  

    So, in case you're trying to change things in a full-grown lawn, high chances it wouldn't work, and you'd end up doing more damage than good. On that note, the Revive Soil Treatment Granules can help in breaking up the soil over time.

    With regular application, you can ensure that the grass roots grow deeper and at the same time have access to sufficient water. So, skip the hard work and use these grains to deal with your soil drainage issues. 

    The best part about it is that you don't have to water your lawn often. Honestly, this is great news for lawn owners who live in states or cities with water conservation mandates. That said, even if your area does not have a shortage of water, you can always reduce the overall consumption.

    1. Greener Grass

    By now, you already know that nitrogen, along with iron has a pivotal role in maintaining the greenness of your lawn. That said, if your grass shows signs of premature yellowing, chances are that your soil lacks these essential minerals. 

    However, you can reclaim your grass with the timely application of this fertilizer. While there won't be a dramatic change from yellow to green, the transformation will eventually lead to taller and high-quality grass. 

    Furthermore, we'd suggest supplementing the treatment with other natural ingredients that are known to enhance the grass texture and size. However, the key to a gorgeous green lawn is regular feeding and timely watering. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    The product benefits an established lawn more compared to newly seeded areas. For instance, if your pet has done the deed on your grass pad and you're looking for a patch repair, this Revive Soil Treatment will hardly make a difference. 

    Also, it's highly hazardous for pets and aquatic life, so you may want to weigh-in that bit before buying this. For more information, you should read the Safety Data Sheet on their website to apply the product in the safest way possible. However, that aside, it's still an excellent solution to revitalize your lawn. 



    Pros

    • Breaks down soil and improves water drainage
    • Contains nitrogen and iron for greener grass
    • Suitable for places with high clay content in the soil
    • Conserves water and helps to grow healthier roots
    • Reverses premature yellowing in lawn grass




    Cons

    • Not as effective on newly seeded areas
    • Highly toxic for pets and aquatic life



    Alternatives To Consider

    Here are some of the alternatives to the Revive Organic Soil Treatment Granules. 

    1. Simple Lawn Solutions 16-4-8 Lawn Food

    Advanced 16-4-8 Lawn Fertilizer - Liquid Lawn Food Spring &...
    • Complete NPK Lawn Food: 16-4-8 is the perfect blend of key...
    • 16-4-8 Liquid Lawn Food is best to be used to maintain and...

    If you'd rather use a water-soluble lawn treatment than deal with grains, the Simple Lawn Solutions 16-4-8 Lawn Food is a superb option. All you need to do is prepare a batch and use a sprinkler or a hose to spray the solution. 

    Besides, the NPK ratio is clearly stated in the name itself, so you can rest assured that your lawn is getting a wholesome top-up of all three important minerals. One container of this is good enough to cover an area of 3200 sq. ft. So, if your lawn is bigger than that, you may need to purchase more than one unit. 

    However, it's half the price of this Revive product, so you would end up saving a lot more.

    1. Safer Brand Lawn Restore

    Sale
    Safer Brand Lawn Restore Natural Lawn Fertilizer - 9335SR -...
    • REVIVE GRASS ROOTS: Safer Brand Lawn Restore revitalizes...
    • WORKS FAST: Lawns start to green up within 3 to 5 days of...

    When you make it a point to buy 100% organic lawn fertilizers, you get to choose from a very limited selection of brands. That said, the Safer Brand Lawn Restore is one such reliable name that contains only plant-based ingredients along with a higher concentration of minerals. 

    Since it does not contain any animal-based ingredients, you can altogether avoid the smell of manure. As for the NPK ratio, it's 10-0-6, meaning it can't do much in newly-seeded lawns. However, it can substantially enhance the green pigment in the grass, and you can see the results in less than a week.  

    Coverage-wise, it's comparable to the Revive lawn food; however, it's less expensive and just as beneficial. 

    1. Aerify PLUS Liquid Soil Aerator

    The Aerify PLUS Liquid Soil Aerator is another alternative option that can work wonders for your lawn. For starters, it can effectively break down clay and loosen compacted soil to facilitate proper root aeration and downward movement of water. 

    Other than that, it contains seaweed and humic acid, which promotes much-needed bioactivity in the soil. Therefore, this product is truly one of a kind that can replenish the soil nutrients and breathe new life into your lawn. Plus, it's rated children and pet-safe, which is a life-saver for most homeowners.   

    Price-wise, it's much cheaper than the Revive Soil Treatment, and in terms of the application, a little bit of the Aerator goes a long way.

    Young agronomist holding bottle in hand at greenhouse. Revive Organic Soil Treatment Granules Buyers' Guide

    Revive Organic Soil Treatment Granules Buyers' Guide  

    Buying a lawn fertilizer wouldn't be so complicated if you could randomly pick one and get the desired results. Since that's not the case, you need to have enough insight to choose the right product. 

    While you could go down the trial and error route, it may end up causing more damage to your lawn. Therefore, we've put together this brief buyers' guide to help you make an informed choice. Read on to know more. 

    1. Plant Or Animal-Based Content 

    Organic fertilizers contain either plant-based or animal-based substances. However, some like the Revive Treatment Granules comprise both. Regardless, you must carefully read the list of ingredients as each of them can individually impact your soil. 

    Some users intentionally opt for vegan choices, so their pets are not attracted to the lawn food. Also, many customers feel icky about the manure smell, and hence, it's best to opt for plant-based varieties in that case. 

    On the other hand, several lawn enthusiasts believe that animal-based ingredients offer more nourishment and a steady supply of lawn food. So, ultimately it comes down to your requirements and expectations. 

    1. Mineral Content 

    Now, this is another essential factor that you must weigh-in before buying a lawn treatment product. The NPK measurement on the product label will give you a clear idea about the mineral concentration in a fertilizer.

    Typically, the amount of nitrogen is always much higher than phosphorus and potassium. Therefore, depending on your lawn needs, you can decide on the appropriate NPK ratio. 

    For instance, if you're looking for better root development, get something with a higher level of phosphorus. Likewise, a substantial amount of potassium can promote healthier and greener leaves. 

    1. Children And Pet-Safe

    Now, we cannot stress how important this is, especially if you want to avoid dealing with any side-effects post-application. When something is labeled 'organic', it does not mean that all its ingredients are safe for humans or pets. 

    Iron in such fertilizers poses a threat to aquatic life and, as such, can even cause property damage. Furthermore, accidental ingestion or inhaling of these products can have a detrimental effect on humans and pets. 

    If you have never used lawn food or fertilizers before, you may want to buy something that's rated safe for pets and children. 

    1. Cost Per Square Foot

    Last but not least, the coverage of the product matters. After all, you don't want to spend an exorbitant amount only to treat a fraction of your lawn. Do that math and figure out which one gives a better yield in terms of cost per square foot.

    The soil is rich in minerals and various nutrients for cultivation. Verdict On Revive Organic Soil Treatment Granules

    Verdict On Revive Organic Soil Treatment Granules

    Despite a few shortcomings, the Revive Organic Soil Treatment Granules is an excellent product, in our opinion. In short, it does what it's supposed to do - nourish your soil and revitalize your lawn. 

    We understand, it might seem a tad on the pricier side, but it's more cost-effective in the long run. Meaning, you can stick to one product and depend on it to meet most of your soil requirements. 

    Frankly, that sounds like a win-win situation to us. So, just go ahead and give this a shot, and don't forget to share your experience in the comments section below.  

    Till next time!

    Related Articles

    Epsom Salt In Gardening

    Two tone kitchen cabinets have become a trend that swept hundreds of homeowners off their feet. The idea is to have a lighter base and darker shades or tones for the cabinets, usually a combination of gray, blue, black and white. The combinations of such colors bring out a classical look for any kitchen, eliminating the dull component of one tone cabinet designs. If the kitchen needs a little revamp, here is a pool of sensational two tone kitchen cabinets for inspiration, enjoy!

    1 .cream and Coventry gray cabinets perfect for a classic look

    Light and dark tones are a classic combination that never gets old. This simple combination of cream and gray cabinets creates a stunning look that fits just right for the classic French country kitchen look.

    7a1adbe709e246ea0d5f3f5e00a72979

    Source

    2 .a soft touch of teal in a dainty kitchen

    Small kitchen areas can look all wrong or smaller when darker colors are used. These light colors used for this two tone kitchen cabinet design makes the kitchen airy and spacious especially with the bright lighting inserted.

    7643a91f1b794dce30f4987916166381

    Source

    3. perfect sapphire blue and white combination for a lovely kitchen

    The usual modern kitchen need not have strong colors to be on point. The white tones used for the kitchen cabinets bring out an exquisite look while the sapphire blue gives emphasis on the modish edge that complements all the other elements and colors of the kitchen.

    9d0d5c24e3d923ceac8ebd6eaea8f127

    4. stimulating mix of white and gray

    This combination of color is simply invigorating for the eyes. Both colors are light and act as great backgrounds for the other items and decorations of the kitchen. The natural light and white washed back splash illuminate the whole kitchen effortlessly.

    12d6257e08ae11833200b99b68f1cd08

    5. a vibrant tone with a clean background

    Vibrant colors are perfect for the kitchen as they create and stimulate a merry cheerful mood. The sky blue toned cabinets get enough intensity because of the lighter white shade.

    83e0607a4b65f7aaf5b8c1e588b514bb

    6.the natural color of wood looks majestic

    Gray, blue and black are the common choices for the darker tones, but the natural colors of wood are not to be excluded. One of the most natural earthy tones, wood acts as a perfect darker tone for both modern and classic kitchens. Not only is it refreshing, it also creates a warm ambiance in the kitchen area.

    7462b27aaf7c5a2e66cf94f9f3160032

    Source

    7. the lovely ocean blue and white kitchen cabinets

    Ocean blue is relaxing for the eyes and the white cabinets amplify this relaxing vibe.

    e151c0308c3f77064040b04f1bf66fda

    Source

    8. perfect burlap and dark blue for the modern kitchen

    While cream and white are lovely light tones, the light burlap color gives a perfect texture against a darker tone. The dark blue looks edgier, older, more powerful against its complementary.

    8fbdffb4e9d76a52e9fe83b93e23319c

    Source

    9. simple but awe-inspiring white and gray kitchen cabinets

    This two tone kitchen cabinet inspiration is truly amazing whether it is used for a large or small kitchen. The gray tone is perfect for the modern oven and kitchen utensils. The white tone is a lovely background for the classic chandelier, making the whole look chic.

    67a54361f38bd4988fa59253bd360116

    Source

    10. light gray on white is never a wrong choice

    This design may not look like a two tone kitchen cabinet design on a first glance, but the lower cabinets have the gray that still looks amazing against the white background. Anyone who wants to maintain a clean look on their kitchens but still wants the two tone cabinets will find this an ideal choice.

    65adfed037e6fffa79e04f702b0a8582

    Source

    11. dark wood in perfect blend with cream tones

    Dark brown or mahogany is a lovely tone that can look even more gorgeous in combination with a lighter tone. White is a common option, going for cream can make the whole look better and give more texture.

    f1bdf7db14b84ac4b7e3c503707bf9fc

    12. two toned cabinets face to face

    These cabinets in two different tones facing each other is another wonderful option of inviting contrast into your kitchen. It is a balanced look, like a yin yang that has the stunning dark tone and an incredibly immaculate lighter tone.

    1827a75ed1d1bfffe5b01a593aec9d72

    Source

    13. simple, elegant and refreshing white and brown cabinets

    The kitchen needs to look fresh and clean everyday, and the design below is the epiphany of minimal elegant pure design.

    cc9d5cea4cceb2e8e1be4ce605b53d6d

    Source

    14. two tone cabinets for a spacier look

    The illusion of having more space can be achieved with the right colors and organization of items inside a kitchen. The darker gray cabinets along with the black floor tiles make a stunning background, allowing the lighter toned cabinets and kitchen wall pop. The wooden items and chairs bring the country kitchen feel to the whole design of the kitchen.

    27c1daea51cb367aaaaa7d37961763c6

    15. clean white and majestic Navy blue

    Blue is a color that works well in any kitchen because of how intense or soft it can look depending on tone. This majestic navy blue tone sets a great contrast on the white cabinets and on the vintage looking back splash. The result is a striking kitchen fit for any home.

    18de5ee89fb1fbcd74c46af3167c2e56

    Source

    16. a subtle blend of white and gray for a simple kitchen

    There are more people who choose to have little to no decorations or visible utensils in a kitchen- a clean, simple look. The same simplicity is present in this two tone kitchen cabinet design. The combination still has an impeccable look that can rival more complicated and well decorated kitchens.

    0db8484d21e95a66d17b6ec986e4ce70

    Source

    17. glimpse of how a simple change of color makes a kitchen stunning

    When a revamp in the kitchen is needed, a change of color can be a foolproof choice. With the right combination of colors, two tone kitchen cabinets will surely create a stunning result and bring out the beauty of a kitchen once more.

    79ecbb334a5e5371761c1d0ee74895df

    What do you think about the idea of two tone kitchen cabinets? Is it something you would consider? Feel free to share your opinions in the comment section below.

    We all know that Christmas comes in a great package from all kind of decorations to specific table menus, music and a much happier attitude overall, it`s something magic and a great part of the decorations are based on candles or they include candles. Further on we will specify some reasons for which the candles are used for Christmas and also further bellow you`ll see a careful selected gallery meant to inspire you in your decorations.

    There are many different reasons why candles are associated with Christmas, although no one knows when they first became connected, thing that makes the mystery even more interesting.

    They were used during ancient winter solstice celebrations as a way of remembering that spring would soon come,also one of the earliest records of candles being used at Christmas is from the middle ages, where a huge candle was used to represent the star of Bethlehem. Jesus is sometimes called ‘the Light of the World’ by Christians. This might have started the custom of the Advent Crown and Advent Candles.
    Candles are also used during Hanukkah, the Jewish Festival of light which is also celebrated during winter. During the eight nights of Hanukkah, a candle is lit in a special menorah (candelabra) called a ‘hanukkiyah’.
    Candles are also used in the modern winter festival Kwanzaa, where a special candle holder called a kinara, that holds seven candles is used.
    Perhaps the most famous use of candles at Christmas are Carols by Candlelight Services. These are services when the church is only lit by candles.

    Candles were also originally used to decorate Christmas Trees, until safer electric lights were invented and saved many life's of both humans and Christmas trees.

    In Southern India, Christians often put small oil burning clay lamps on the flat roofs of their homes to celebrate Christmas. Christians in China use paper lanterns to decorate their Christmas trees. Candles are also used as part of the St. Lucia’s or St. Lucy’s day celebrations in Sweden.

    From all that we can keep in mind that there`re lots of reasons to use this amazing things when decorating, the light of a candle inspires warmth and peace along with the great smell that sends our thoughts to Christmas instantly.

    Happy Holidays !

    Christmas candles-homesthetics (1)

    Christmas candles-homesthetics (2)

    Christmas candles-homesthetics (3)

    Christmas candles-homesthetics (4)

    Christmas candles-homesthetics (5)

    Christmas candles-homesthetics (6)

    Christmas candles-homesthetics (7) Christmas candles-homesthetics (8) Christmas candles-homesthetics (9) Christmas candles-homesthetics (10) Christmas candles-homesthetics (11) Christmas candles-homesthetics (12) Christmas candles-homesthetics (13) Christmas candles-homesthetics (14) Christmas candles-homesthetics (15) Christmas candles-homesthetics (16) Christmas candles-homesthetics (17) Christmas candles-homesthetics (18) Christmas candles-homesthetics (19) Christmas candles-homesthetics (20) Christmas candles-homesthetics (21) Christmas candles-homesthetics (22) Christmas candles-homesthetics (23) Christmas candles-homesthetics (24) Christmas candles-homesthetics (25) Christmas candles-homesthetics (26) Christmas candles-homesthetics (27) Christmas candles-homesthetics (28) Christmas candles-homesthetics (29) Christmas candles-homesthetics (30) Christmas candles-homesthetics (31) Christmas candles-homesthetics (32)

     

    oranges and candles Creative&Inspiring Modern Christmas Candles Decorations (1)

    grey red and white Creative&Inspiring Modern Christmas Candles Decorations (1)

    white grey and gold Creative&Inspiring Modern Christmas Candles Decorations (1)

    red candle gold globes Creative&Inspiring Modern Christmas Candles Decorations (1)

    red joy Creative&Inspiring Modern Christmas Candles Decorations (1)

    flowers and candles Creative&Inspiring Modern Christmas Candles Decorations (1)

    white candles Creative&Inspiring Modern Christmas Candles Decorations (1)

    simple Creative&Inspiring Modern Christmas Candles Decorations (1)

    creative Creative&Inspiring Modern Christmas Candles Decorations (1)

    red Creative&Inspiring Modern Christmas Candles Decorations (1)

    white gold and red Creative&Inspiring Modern Christmas Candles Decorations (1)

    Related Articles

    14 Awe-Inspiring Ceramic Christmas Decorations

    19 Christmas Tree Paper Decorations for a Delicate Look

    14 Best Christmas Tree Lights to Consider This Year

    Learn How to Store Icicle Lights After Christmas

    17 Burlap Ribbon & Wreath Options

    Many like to mark essential items in the kitchen or office with a sharpie. But, a sharpie stain can be a nuisance. 

    Permanent markers have become a must-have in any domestic household or office. That said, you must have used sharpies to label spice containers in your kitchen cabinet. 

    But, what happens when you want a clean plastic surface so you can relabel them? Indeed, you must first remove the existing permanent marker stains. 

    On that note, it is best to have some easy cleaning hacks up your sleeve to get rid of any blemishes and streaks. 

    And that's where we come in. This article will list 15 methods to clean permanent marker stains from plastic surfaces. So, without further ado, let's begin! 

    Ways To Clean Permanent Marker From Plastics 

    Unwanted scribble stains on a plastic surface can be a real headache, and to remove them, you will need to use the best cleaning agents. So, before you try and clean that stubborn permanent marker stain off plastic surfaces, it is best to know what cleaning agents are ideal for removing such stains. 

    In this section, we've highlighted the best ways to clean permanent marker stains from plastic containers with the help of 15 effective cleaning agents. Take a look at how you can use them: 

    1. Rubbing Alcohol

    Rubbing alcohol is probably the most effective cleaning agent when it comes to getting rid of stubborn stains. It is more potent than many industry-grade cleaning agents that are available on the market. So, if you want to relabel the plastic container, you can rub some alcohol on the existing permanent marker stain.

    For effective results, we will suggest pouring some rubbing alcohol solution directly on the plastic surface and letting the market ink soak in the alcohol for a while. Then, use a cotton ball, clean cloth, or paper towel to wipe off the marker stain from the plastic. It will also remove all the remaining residue of the permanent ink stain. 

    2. Applying Bathroom Soap

    If you do not have any alcohol in the house, you can always go for any good ol’ bathroom soap. Indeed, ordinary bathroom soaps used for washing our hands can efficiently work to remove persistent, permanent marker stains from any plastic surface. 

    To do this, you must first apply the soap generously on the stained area and scrub it thoroughly. After you are done scrubbing, rinse the lather off with some warm water. Finally, wipe the container with a clean cloth to check the results. 

    If the stain is only partially removed, you can repeat the process until it is thoroughly clean. 

    3. Using Vinegar

    Vinegar can work wonders when it comes to removing persistent stains. So, head to the kitchen and find a bottle of vinegar to get rid of a stubborn permanent marker stain that has ruined your favorite plastic bowl. White vinegar is the ideal option under such circumstances. 

    Also, using baking soda and white vinegar is one of the oldest deep-cleaning tricks to exist in the book. That said, you can sprinkle baking soda on the stained plastic surface and gently pour a small amount of white vinegar on the baking soda. 

    Let the mixture sit for a few minutes before wiping it off with a clean paper towel. We promise that the results will surely amaze you. 

    4. Applying Baking Soda With Toothpaste 

    Although it is a bit unconventional, applying a mixture of toothpaste and baking soda can help remove permanent marker stains from plastic. But, you need to be careful while measuring out the proportions of these two items before preparing the mixture.

    Moreover, based on the size of the stain, the amount can also vary. Anyhow, it is best to maintain a ratio of 1:1 for the toothpaste and baking soda. Here, you can use a fork to mix the two items in a cup until it forms a jelly-like texture. 

    Apply this paste on the plastic surface generously and scrub it thoroughly using an old toothbrush. If the plastic container has a textured surface, make sure that the mixture covers every nook and cranny of the container. 

    Then, let it rest on the plastic surface for a few minutes before washing it off with water and a clean cloth to see the final result. 

    5. Rubbing With Magic Eraser Sponge

    A magic eraser is specially designed to clean marker ink from all types of surfaces. You can give a quick visit to a local hardware or grocery store to buy a magic sponge eraser. It is best to purchase a magic eraser that doesn't contain any harmful chemical additives.

    For the best results, treat the sponge eraser with water or a rubbing alcohol solution before using it on the stained plastic surface. 

    All you need to do is rub the marker stain with the eraser for about five to ten minutes. Perhaps, this is the easiest way to remove marker stains as you won't be needing any extra cloth or cotton balls to wipe off the stain. 

    6. Using Hydrogen Peroxide

    Hydrogen peroxide is one of the most potent cleaning agents available on the market. It works like magic, especially when you are dealing with stubborn and old marker stains. What’s more, you can easily purchase a bottle of the chemical compound from any nearby pharmaceutical store. 

    At the same time, you should get some cotton balls for applying the hydrogen peroxide to the stained plastic surface. As for the actual cleaning process, pour a few drops of peroxide on a cotton ball and wipe the marker stain on the plastic container. This method is effective in cleaning light stains. 

    On the other hand, if you want to remove an old and persistent marker stain, it's best to pour some drops of the peroxide directly onto the stain. Then, you can wipe it off with a clean paper towel or washcloth. 

    However, you need to be careful while using hydrogen peroxide as your chosen cleaning agent. It is designed to be used on white surfaces as it causes discoloration. So, if you're working with a colored plastic container, it is best to avoid using this method.

    7. Applying Glass Cleaner

    Commercial glass cleaners like Windex work really well when it comes to cleaning any stained surfaces. Needless to say, you can use this easy DIY cleaning trick for removing permanent marker stains from plastic. Moreover, this method works well against stubborn stains.

    It is interesting to note that the ammonia present in Windex is what helps to clean off the unwanted marks. However, ammonia can be a bit harsh on the plastic container, so it is best to dilute the glass cleaner with water before applying it to the plastic surface. 

    8. Applying Hairspray

    Like rubbing alcohol, hairspray uses the same mechanism to remove unwanted marker stains from a plastic surface. So, if you do not own any rubbing alcohol solution, you can use hairspray to get similar results.

    It’s simple, really — spray the product on the stained area and let it rest for a while before wiping it off with a washcloth or a clean paper towel. Here, the acetone present in the hairspray will dissolve the marker ink and remove every inch of the stain. 

    However, you can only use hairspray to remove light or fresh stains. Unfortunately, it won't work on old or stubborn marks. 

    9. Using WD-40 Lubricant

    WD-40 is a widely popular industry-grade lubricant that you can use to grease the sharpie stain so that it comes off easily. Moreover, WD-40 does not contain any toxic chemical additives, so you won't risk causing any damage to the plastic container.

    Anyhow, all you have to do is apply the lubricant to the stained area. After the stain is lubricated, you can use a clean washcloth or paper towel to wipe off the product. Once you are satisfied with the cleaning job, lather the stained item with soap and rinse off the excess. 

    10. Using Dry Erase Marker

    It may sound weird, but you can actually remove permanent markers from plastic by using another marker. A dry-erase marker ink can help in erasing any previous marker stains. You can simply cover the old marker stain with the dry-erase marker. 

    Once you're done covering every inch of the marker stain, you wipe it off with a clean paper towel or washcloth when the dry-erase marker ink is still wet. It is best to apply a little bit of pressure while wiping the plastic container. In this way, both the dry erase marker ink and the old permanent marker stain will be removed from the plastic surface. 

    11. Applying Nail Polish Remover

    You can easily find a small bottle of nail polish remover in your regular makeup kit. This tiny bottle can work like magic in removing both your nail polish and permanent marker from plastic surfaces. The chemical components in a nail polish remover include acetone like in a rubbing alcohol solution, which basically acts on the marker stain. 

    You need to gently pour a few drops of nail polish remover on the permanent marker stain. Then, use a paper towel or cotton ball to gently dab the stained surface to soak up any excess liquid. Continue tapping the plastic surface gently until all the nail polish remover is absorbed while the marker stain disappears with it. 

    12. Rubbing With Pencil Eraser

    If you don't want to use any harsh chemical products for removing marker stains from plastic surfaces, you can always trust a pencil eraser to do the trick. As a pencil eraser does not contain any toxic chemicals, it can act as a safe and effective cleaning agent in this case. 

    We're pretty sure you can find a pencil eraser near your study table. So, grab that eraser and start rubbing on the surface of your favorite mug or any other plastic container to clean off that stubborn marker stain. Continuous rubbing of the pencil eraser on the plastic surface will create friction that'll help in removing the marker stain. 

    13. Using Tea Tree Oil

    Tea tree oil is not only used for treating skin ailments but can also be used as a brilliant stain remover. This essential oil can be used to clean any marker stains from plastic as well as wooden surfaces. The organic chemicals present in the tea tree oil can soften the marker stain, which helps in removing it from any wood or plastic surface. 

    You can pour a few drops of the essential oil on a cotton ball and gently rub the stained plastic surface. The stain will start fading gradually with the continuous rubbing of the tea tree oil. Once you're done rubbing the stained area, wipe off the plastic surface using a clean paper towel or washcloth. Repeat the process until you get a desirable outcome. 

    14. Applying Dishwashing Liquid

    Just like your regular bathroom soap, the dishwashing liquid can very effectively clean off a permanent marker stain from the plastic surface. Moreover, dishwashing liquids do not contain any harsh chemicals and are absolutely safe to use.

    You can apply the dishwashing liquid directly to the stained area and scrub it thoroughly with an old toothbrush. Once the scrubbing is done, wash the plastic container with water to rinse off the lather. If you're not satisfied with the result, you can repeat the process until every inch of the marker stain is removed. 

    15. Using Hand Sanitizers

    Believe it or not, hand sanitizers are very potent in removing permanent markers from plastic surfaces. So, if you have a small bottle of hand sanitizer tucked somewhere in the purse, you can easily use it to clean off stubborn marker stains from a plastic container.

    Just like a rubbing alcohol solution and nail polish remover, hand sanitizers also contain small amounts of acetone. The acetone essentially dissolves the marker stain, which makes it easy to remove the stain. You can apply the hand sanitizer directly on the stain and gently rub the plastic surface before wiping it off with a clean cloth. 

    Steps To Remove Permanent Marker From Plastics 

    Knowing about the right cleaning agents might not be enough if you don't know how to apply them properly to the stained plastic surface. So, in this section, we'll be discussing the steps that you can follow for removing a stubborn permanent marker stain from a plastic container. 

    Step 1

    First, you have to soak the stain with a cleaning agent. If the stain is light and relatively new, you can use mild cleaning agents, like hand sanitizers or pencil erasers. But, if the stain is old and persistent, you need to go for more potent cleaning agents, such as vinegar, hydrogen peroxide, or rubbing alcohol solution.

    Step 2

    After applying the cleaning agent to the stained area, let it sit for a while as the stain soaks in the cleaning liquid. You'll notice that the chemicals present in the cleaning agents will slowly dissolve the marker ink. After soaking the stain, you need to scrub it thoroughly using a brush before wiping it off with a clean washcloth or paper towel. 

    Step 3

    Once you have wiped off the plastic surface, rinse off the container under water to remove any excess cleaning liquid, along with the remaining marker ink residues. If some of the marker stains still persist, you can repeat the entire process until every bit of stain is cleaned off the plastic. 

    Things To Keep In Mind 

    While removing permanent markers from plastic surfaces can be a pretty simple task, it is best to keep certain things in mind when you are using harsh chemicals. For instance, if you have a colored plastic container, you need to stay away from cleaning agents like alcohol or hydrogen peroxide, which can cause discoloration of the container. 

    Furthermore, strong cleaning agents like baking soda and hydrogen peroxide contain toxic chemicals that are harmful to children and pets. So, it is always best to go for non-toxic cleaning agents, such as a pencil eraser, magic sponge eraser, or even nail polish remover.

    But, if you want to use stronger cleaning agents to remove old marker stains from plastics, we'll suggest you wear gloves. These harsh chemicals often cause skin irritation and skin burns. So, to avoid such issues, it is best to wear normal latex gloves while working with these cleaning agents. 

    A set of multicolor felt-tip pens, multi-colored felt-tip pens on a green background with space for text

    Final Words

    We understand that removing a permanent marker stain from plastic surfaces can be a bit of a nuisance. After going through the article, we hope you have a better idea regarding the best methods and techniques that you can apply to clean off marker stains easily. 

    If you're trying to remove an old and stubborn marker stain, you can use potent cleaning agents such as baking soda with white vinegar or even hydrogen peroxide. However, if you're having a light stain on the plastic surface, you can go for less harsh cleaning agents, like regular bathroom soaps, hand sanitizers, or nail polish removers. 

    Additionally, we'll suggest that it is best to take extra precautions if you're using strong chemicals. And on that note, we'll be signing off. Take care, and we will see you next time! 

    Red is a very powerful color that is often associated with fire and blood; it can be connected with energy, war, danger, strength, power, determination or desire and love. Highly intense and spectacular, red is a color of emotion that can increase metabolism, respiration rate and elevate blood pressure. This being said it is understandable why some homeowners do consider a tad too powerful for home-use when it comes to their chromatic palette yet every now and then, an individual bold enough to give it a go breaks the charts, creates the extraordinary, the unbelievable with the color through bold red accent walls.

    Red Accent Wall Ideas 

    Red Kitchen Wall Accent

    In one`s kitchen and dinning room red makes sense as it is known to increases metabolism and be associated with love and determination. The kitchen and dining room are, at the end of the day, the spaces in which we share the most extraordinary days with our family, spaces in which we find comfort through food, spaces that offer us that important glass of water when we need it. The kitchen is considered the inner core of a home for a good reason; cast a glance at the extraordinary designs below.

    RED KITCHEN WALL ACCENT

    Red embracing the walls in kitchen can be balanced with white, sufficient light and a joyful state of well being. Notice how the amount of red above tends to complement the setting.

    via seedecor.net

    RED KITCHEN WALL ACCENT

    The wall that contains the bar receives red framed in white; inside the portal, beyond, in the kitchen, white and grays animate the setting.

    via flickr.com

    RED KITCHEN WALL ACCENT

    A Scandinavian setting with sufficient red and sufficient polka dots simply energizes a space, cherish it.

    via ourcosyhome.ru

    RED KITCHEN WALL ACCENT

    Light floods an interior spiced with red. The chalkboard with a red frame on a white wall creates a great balanced contrast that challenges the red accent wall.

    via coastalliving.com

    RED KITCHEN WALL ACCENT

    Sufficient red can create a great background to be animated by your sculptural iconic items; it gives one the opportunity to create depth of filed as the color greatly highlights the item in front.

    via journal.homepolish.com

    bfd63dff13541f8993deed4dff7fc479

    The entire taupe palette functions well with grays and the design above highlights this argument with a slight contrast between gray and red thus bringing the wooden isle forward as an accent.

    via HGTV

    22c1c553d2bca8888b7e2e0ba30d50ba (1)

    Red furnishings are a more permanent choice that can function in spaces with sufficient natural light.

    via bhg.com

    RED KITCHEN WALL ACCENT

    Wooden textures, a black countertop, and full red furnishings represent a difficult composition. Here the wooden beams dominate the space with an immense volume sculpted by light; the room also enjoys an extraordinary amount of light that dims the red`s intensity.

    via thekitchn.com

    d09cfe5cff179ece46b5e900f6cc3ee5

    One red wall accent can be sufficient, here it contrasts with the black chalkboard and surrounding white furnishings.

    via acultivatednest.com

    517bc143c8532fe98e9e8ad3981ff8da

    The shabby look of a french cottage kitchen needs little visual aid in terms of color palette; here it was sustained with greenery and it`s natural complement in wall paint : red.

    via houzz.com

    746dce0887b831f283661bbddac9db33

    A space can evolve in time; paint is an evolutionary tool that homeowners can use and here red was used brilliantly, it simply highlights the contour of the furnishings embraced.

    via hgtv.com

    RED KITCHEN WALL ACCENT

    A simple red pallet can bring that rustic-vibrant feel of the rural environment indoors.

    via debbie-debbiedoos.com

    7821a0ea1488d67bed6609231763d379

    The red`s intensity can be adjusted to fit your needs; there the surface looks aged, tested by time.

    via homelife.com

    Red Hallway Accents

    9c721864bc8bcb27a5b43469499bc1b8

    In the hallway red can be the idea conversation starter; it can also bring forward a gallery, highlight your collectibles or simply energize your guests from step one.

    via centsationalgirl.com

    1f819f9bbb6def8c172abc8d9a573355

    Stark white space beyond a door opening framed by an intense red that encapsulates two black doors.  Extraordinary contrast and composition that in practice ought to be executed with great attention to details.

    via lonny.com

    RED KITCHEN WALL ACCENT

    Elegant hue differences can create a depth hard to perceive by the mind but insanely appreciated by the eye.

    via matthewwilliamson.com

    8d3d68553ef6353749a9998457b8a262

    via ruthburts.com

    6ac17dcdbfd7a4656b8018e4b328568d

    via elledecor.com

    b743577835105c89b4a76747a8a5cef9

    Gradient gallery hallway starts with red only to darken the path towards a light opening.

    via saffronandsilk.blogspot.com

    fb2d5460c82e031c5b8d24a43e6fa0ba

    A display of memory, identity, authenticity.

    via crafalski.tumblr.com

    Dinning Room Red Accent Wall 

    DINNING ROOM RED ACCENT WALL

    White wood paneling emphasizes the feeling of space in a room that uses multiple red hues.

    via thisoldhouse.com

    DINNING ROOM RED ACCENT WALL

    Contrast between wood and textured red in an ambiance flooded by light.

    via architecturaldigest.com

    DINNING ROOM RED ACCENT WALL

    Dense setting uses red to tie various elements together.

    via Jeremy Samuelson; designed by Rachel Horn

    4c82d9c317b537c1d5fec6b9e90d1d38

    via houzz.com

    9d657142a5d0f98cafd2bb938175bd3d (1)

    One accent wall in an uncertain space may do more harm than good.

    Source Unknown

    DINNING ROOM RED ACCENT WALL

    Source Unknow

    Red Accent Wall in the Bedroom

    In the bedroom red might energize the individual each morning, it might aid the individual to create a positive ambiance. Red in any space can bring the light furnishing forward, it can allow the use of numerous highly intricate patterns, textures and details without creating that cluttered feel.

    Bedroom red accent walls

    bedroom red accent wall

    via weheartit.com

    7e5e854dec992b45ce0f6a2fc27b3da4

    The different hues here are creating a very sensible-manageable space in terms of chromatic. Simplicity can be read.

    via debbietravis.com

    ceb8cea30117be94afdd9560195f9042

    Stark white and pure red creating an immense contrast.

    via realsimple

    BEDROOM RED ACCENT WALLS

    The proper red will need no introduction, you`ll know when you see it.

    via soniadaigle.blogspot.com

    BEDROOM RED ACCENT WALLS

    A gallery or collection of memories can be easily sustained by the red palette.

    via pinterest.com

    BEDROOM RED ACCENT WALLS

    In the world of dreams red has a special place, the serenity of the bedroom above does the color great justice.

    via bohemianspirit.tumblr.com

    BEDROOM RED ACCENT WALLS

    Depth through hues and balance through light.

    via eudecoro.com.br

    BEDROOM RED ACCENT WALLS

    via cowboyreflections.com

    64c02c4a2680cfaa3ae6cefdd3aa9495

    The cherry on the top is the small little heart above the bed. In this setting the right palette disrupts color tension to instate harmony.

    Source Unknown

    a79b55af9909c875b59c8a0b6e46a49c (1)

    Black and red in interior design are definitely not a common option yet the combo has its certain allure, greatly appreciated by certain homeowners. The boldness and great contrast of the combination clearly stands out.

    via peytondawn.tumblr.com

    e5955f6a73ab60f57e988e82a8b28b21

    A child`s bedroom ought to contain color. The red and brown combination is not a happy choice as it makes the interior look dated, rustic and a tad old for a child but if one was to glance at the cart that carries the plush toy and the red wall he will surely be able to see the half-full part of the glass.

    via singingmommy.hubpages.com

    Red Accent Wall in the Living Room

    Find balance through simple elements

    RED ACCENT WALL IN THE LIVING ROOM

    Simple elements can shine regardless of color, form or texture. In the setting above they happen to function in chromatic terms too.

    via plascontrends.co.za

    1c818cb66a1e4299727b280208db13ed

    via lonny.com

    Use intricate pattern detailing

    b2956b5c73de35a15902a5e7c2486228

    A simple frame gallery or your most intricate pattern can benefit from a red background.

    via christinefife.com

    bf048f88acbe4d20311716ff2af06eaf (1)

    Red accent walls can help you bring forward more intricate items that you would like to expose thus earning the support status.

    via ladolcevitablog.com

    Use simple shelving to DISPLAY memories

    e5ed8a94bf1e5901eac4df5de56d6799

    Source Unknown

    9c57f454680e44bdeeeb723216c8eca2

    Emphasize your golden frames with intricate details with right background; red creates that intense energizing atmosphere that simply amplifies the effect of the exhibit.

    via thisivyhouse.tumblr.com

    aff7f015a27deb4d00ca5bc8df921a18

    via Robinson Interiors

    4c7d1c31f91db2c32e1f92e2b2d04551

    via vonderhude.de

    Chromatic balance with earthy tones

    2169d184773ee438d78b365110dee2b4

    Earthy tones dim down the intensity of red with ease, use them to your advantage to complement the intense setting.

    via cotemaison.fr

    40886ab98363b6255823c16c97ec7165

    Modern interiors could use red with ease, sculptural modernist furnishings applaud this color.

    Source Unknown

    Break the impact with light

    4ebe284232c59804fdde16ff6fa63aaf

    The light from a window can brighten the interior space being able to change a red interior that might look dark and unfriendly to something highly positive, filled with energy.

    via bhg.com

    b4fadbb60f72fd730a56fa8cd7601acb

    The coziness of a wood burning stove or a fire-place can shape a magical setting.

    via loveatpsychedelicvelocity.tumblr.com

    Create a red distraction on the wall

    3a112549d6ee990a9cc68744c081f55c

    To distract with red in interior design is no surprise, use unusual elements to break the pattern.

    via dishfunctionaldesigns.blogspot.com

    Natural green complementing red accent wall

    green complementing red accent wall

    Greenery complements a red wall accent from a chromatic standpoint whilst beautifully emphasizing the whole setting through its naturalness.

    via books.google.com

    Complementing texture and patterns

    CE_02.tif

    via picsdecor.com

    Your spectacular textures ought to shine with the right support, chose wisely.

    e52f4972a72192be955d53775c61d47c

    via allexincasa.ig.com.br

    Red bold accent walls are most commonly used as support elements for intricate details, furnishings, and patterns thus creating highly intense spaces in interior design. How do you see and use the red color indoors? We would love to hear your valuable feedback in the comment section below!

    Wooden pallets are the topic of today's chosen article, here  to make a stand for their raw beauty and incredible versatility around the household. Their usefulness cannot be contested and their raw texture and shape serves as the perfect base for a multitude of delicate, bold and powerful projects alike. Coffee tables, kitchen revamps or simple and fun wall art projects, all can be achieved and empowered by the humble wooden pallet. We invite you to emerge yourself in this creative universe and choose your favorite craft from the 101 DIY pallet projects presented below.

    Pallets – the one wonder of furnishing that still remains underutilized. But I’m not surprised; do a quick Google search and it’s likely that you’ll come across very few websites that actually go into the depths to explain their use. Sure, you can re-purpose pallets to practically build anything you want, but wouldn’t you need a guide for that?

    Of course you would! That’s why I’m going to attempt to give you a series of DIY pallet project ideas to execute right now. It’s time you put all the hesitations behind and geared up to make some epic pallet furniture.

    But before we begin 

    There are two things I’d like to tell you. First – where you might get pallets without spending a dime; second – the kind of pallets that are safe for use.

    1. Free pallets. Since pallets are primarily treated as disposable extras, you can get your hands on them without spending any money. Just get in touch with small businesses that are looking to dispose of these items and offer to help. They would gladly give you what you need. Some other places you can look for free pallets are:
    • Construction sites
    • Small businesses such as furniture stores, pet stores, and hardware stores
    • A place where a new company is about to open
    • Craigslist
    • Other online marketplaces
    1. How to find out if your pallets are safe for use? There is no point in gathering free pallets if they aren’t safe for DIY use in the first place. You don’t want the DIY pallets to be made of wood that has been treated with harmful chemicals. You can figure this part out quite safely by looking at the following aspects.

    [HT] =Heat Treatment - Means safe to use

    [DB] =Debarked - Safe to use

    [MB] =Methyl Bromide - Not safe to use

    [KD] =Kiln Dried - Safe to use

    The codes are pretty self-explanatory, aren’t they? But what do you do if your pallets do not have these markings [IPPC markings]? Well, this is a bit of a tough one.

    Some say pallets that do not contain IPPC markings are intended to be used for domestic purposes only, and domestic pallets are not treated with harmful chemicals. But there’s no way to be 100% certain they are safe to use or not.

    Also, avoid using pallets that look damaged or rotten, it makes little sense, you need healthy wood!

    DIY Pallet Projects

    #1. Wonderful Garden Tunnel Suitable For Vines and Games Alike

    We will start our most beautiful 101 DIY Pallet Projects with one idea implemented in the garden, perfectly applicable this spring season.Four wooden pallets have been cut to size and adjusted to create a wonderful tunnel in your garden which can later on be populated with flowery climbing vines and used as a hiding spot for your little one's games. Remember to treat the wood properly for your creation to last longer.

    #1. WONDERFUL GARDEN TUNNEL SUITABLE FOR VINES AND GAMES ALIKE

     

    #2. Old Wooden Pallet Boards Assembled as Dinning Room Table Box Centerpiece

    A dinning room table box centerpiece is a very versatile piece of decoration. It can be transformed with each passing season, reflecting the home's atmosphere and embellishing the actual dinner table in an unique manner. Fill it with fruit, fresh flowers, pumpkins and spice for the autumn season or pine-cones and cinnamon for the frosty one.Place it in the center of the table and not overcrowd it with additional decorations. The actual wood of the box will speak of beauty and naturalness itself.

    #2. OLD WOODEN PALLET BOARDS ASSEMBLED AS A DINNING ROOM TABLE BOX CENTERPIECE

    Source

    #3. Drawer and Shelves Pallet Furniture Piece With an Industrial Appeal

    A modern apartment nowadays tends to focus on mixing and matching different furniture pieces in order to obtain the perfect ambiance. A raw wooden piece made out of recycled wooden pallets can constitute such an example, speaking of its shade, texture and exuding a raw beauty, an industrial vibe very popular and sought by many. Place it in an all white Scandinavian decor and observe how it can, at the same time, blend in and stand out from the crowd.

    #3. DRAWER AND SHELVES PALLET FURNITURE PIECE WITH AN INDUSTRIAL APPEAL

    Source

    #4. Useful Bike Rack Made Out of Wooden Pallets

    The issue of storing a bike has been solved a long time ago with so many systems and gadgets being invented to support and host our metal companions. But in our opinion the classical wooden pallet bike rack can not be overthrown by nay metallic creation, its beauty laying in the actual simplicity of this project.

    #4. A VERY USEFUL BIKE RACK MADE OUT OF WOODEN PALLETS

    #5. Pallet Scraps Merged Into a Raw Yet Beautiful Wall Art Piece

    What we have learned over the year from creating various DIY projects is that any piece of material be it wood or metal can be re-purposed and transformed into a work of art.The following piece can be included in this topic where different bits and pieces of old wooden pallets have been cut and assembled into a heart shaped wall art with a delicate hidden message.

    #5. PALLET SCRAPS MERGED INTO A RAW YET BEAUTIFUL WALL ART PIECE

    Source

    #6. Wooden Pallet Boards and Paper Decoupage

    Wood and paper decoupage go hand in hand into creating incredible vintage pieces usable in custom flooring or wall decoration. The tricky part of this projects lies in the choosing of the right decorative paper and the realization of the process itself, mastering the exact amount of left paper and exposed wood to obtain the perfect worn out effect.

    #6. WOODEN PALLET BOARDS AND PAPER DECOUPAGE

    Source

    #7. Pallet and Rope Breakfast Bed Tray

    Rope and wood go a long way in DIY projects and almost every combination of the two natural materials results in wonderful creations. Here the simplicity of this wooden tray is overpowered by the beauty of the materials used and their raw texture. make sure you secure the rope handles properly to avoid unwanted accidents.

    #7. PALLET PROJECTS - ROPE AND WOOD BREAKFAST IN BED TRAY

    Source

    #8. Wooden Headboard With a Specially Designed Rope Message

    The classical headboard should and can be replaced by a specially designed hand made diy wooden pallet headboard. Add in this picture some glue and rope and we can guarantee a winner.Here the worn out wooden pieces assembled together and being delicately contrasted by the warmth of the raw rope assembled to form a loving message.

    #8. WOODEN HEADBOARD WITH A SPECIALLY DESIGNED ROPE MESSAGE

    Source

    #9. DIY Pallet Planter

    Spring is taking over our gardens and there is no better time than the present to start preparing your garden for this blooming fresh season. Use old wooden pallets to create a risen planter with drilled holes in its sides. Fill the created box with soil and fill the holes with flowers that will in time grow and cover the entire planter in a canopy of beauty and colors.

    #9. DIY PALLET PLANTER

    #9. DIY PALLET PLANTER

    #9. DIY PALLET PLANTER

    Source

    #10. Wooden pallets Assembled Into a MUlti-functional Tool Organizer

    Organization and planning represents the key to success in most cases.Keeping an organized garage can turn out to be a challenge but by creating a tool wall out of a few wooden pallets you will save a lot of time in searching for lost tolls in the future undertaken projects. Simply attach the pallets to an empty wall and create all sort of supports rising from it from which you can hang your tools and materials.

    #10. WOODEN PALLETS ASSEMBLED INTO A MUTLI-FUNCTIONAL WALL FOR THE GARAGE

    #11. Vintage Vibes in a Simple Bathroom Cart

    Vintage wood, candle light, fresh soap, wicker and lavender all come together and merge into creating a truly relaxation bathroom cart with a French vibe, suitable for any interior decor.Surge inspiration from the decoration of it and let it take you to that relaxing moment we all search at the end of the day from a hot scented bath.

    #11. VINTAGE VIBES IN A SIMPLE Wooden pallet BATHROOM CART

    Source

    #12. DIY Woodland Sign Perfect for the Holiday Season

    Decorating your home and adorning your walls has become a tradition in the wintry season. This year we are proposing you a different set of decorations made out of simple pallet wood and basic rope. Send a cheerful message throughout the home and express your joy and excitement in an elegant manner.

    #12. DIY WOODLAND SIGN PERFECT FOR THE HOLIDAY SEASON

    Source

    #13. Scandinavian Coffee Table Risen From an Old Wooden Pallet

    The Scandinavian style is probably the most adored out there for its coziness warmth and simple beauty exuded by each and everyone of the elements composing its atmosphere.White dominates the color scheme and wooden elements come to complete the desired image in a subtle manner. Today is a pallet coffee table adorned with wheels for increased maneuvering and a fresh coat of white paint to increase the chances of blending this furniture piece in.

    #13. SCANDINAVIAN COFFEE TABLE RISEN FROM AN OLD WOODEN PALLET

    Source

    #14. Ombre Yarn Heart Wall Art Pallet

    Wall art offers a versatile wide pallet of options for the adorning of blank walls. Wooden pallets come to fill such an empty spot in contrast with colorful yarn shaped in a creative manner.Choose a simple yet beuatiful piece of wood for this project as it serves as the background for it, contrasting and yarn itself and giving it power and boldness in making a statement.

    #14. OMBRE YARN  HEART WALL  ART PALLET

    Source

    #15. Outdoor pallet Furniture Set For The Hole Family

    Warm nights are to come and spending more and more times outdoors is highly recommended for our mental and physical health as well. Thus we encourage you to invest your time and effort into creating a wonderful versatile pallet furniture set for the outdoors with the exact purpose of encouraging you and your loves ones to spend quality time together in the freshness of your garden.

    #15. OUTDOORS PALLET FURNITURE SET FOR THE HOLE FAMILY

    Source

    #16. Wooden pallet Turned Into a Gorgeous Chandelier

    The texture and naturalness of a piece of wood can be but to value and exploited even further by the addition of warm light sources meant to diffuse their cozy shimmer and empower the actual wood piece even further. Here a selection of wooden pallet boards have been assembled to serve as a base for a set of hanging light bulbs. The effect is wonderful and exudes such a cozy warm vibe.

    #16. WOODEN PALLET TURNED INTO A GORGEOUS CHANDELIER

    Source

    #17. Wooden Pallet Turned Into a Vertical Garden

    Invite the natural element in by creating a basic simple vertical garden from a simple yet gorgeous wooden pallet and a set of mason jars filled with plants and herbs. Add a few extra mason jars to serve as candle holders and infuse a warm light that pushes this project to the statement of wall art.

    #17. WOODEN PALLETS TURNED INDOOR VERTICAL GARDEN

    Source

    #18. Creating a Shelving Unit Out of a Wooden Ladder and Pallet Wood

    The entire success of an idea behind a DIY project lies in the creative re-purposing of mundane materials an objects and their actual merge. Here a wooden ladder has bee used as the body for a pallet furniture shelf piece. Adorned properly this versatile creation can become a focal point in your living room. Add a string of Christmas lights to the frame of the ladder for special occasions.

    #18. CREATING A SHELVING UNIT OUT OF A WOODEN LADDER AND PALLET WOOD

    Source

    #19. Wooden pallet Scandinavian Inspired Couch

    Finding the right couch that fills your living area properly and merges perfectly with your desired decor and ambiance is a very difficult task many fail to accomplish. The solution to this problem lies once again in the humble wooden pallet that saves the day once more with its versatility. Paint a set of wooden pallets in a white or black hue and add comfortable cozy pillows and fluffy blankets for the perfect Scandinavian inspired couch.

    #19. WOODEN PALLET FURNITURE PROJECTS - THE SCANDINAVIAN COUCH

    #20. Succulent Filled Coffee Table

    Succulents must be the most adorable cute beautiful little plants out there.Their simplicity and vibrant green tones come in perfect completion of the natural raw texture of pallet wood which can be assembled into creating a wonderful coffee table that serves as a succulent planter at the same time.Remember to treat the wood once a year to prevent additional damage from the water added to your tiny plants.

    #20. Pallet SUCCULENT FILLED COFFEE TABLE

    Source

    #21. Mint Wooden Pallet Planting Center

    If you are an intense gardener who takes his job very seriously than you will definitely need to create a potting and planting command center where you can organize and store all your gardening tools and seeds.And because we are talking about the garden, wooden pallets constitute the perfect raw material for such a creative projects. Choose a fresh tone such as the mint green below for an extra touch.

    #21. MINT WOODEN PALLET PLANTING CENTER

    Source

    #22. Vertical Pallet Herb Garden

    You can take a simple wooden pallet and transform it into a useful beuatiful vertical herb garden in a blink of an eye. Simply add bottoms to your actual planting area and a set of legs for the planter to be free-standing. Place it near your kitchen window for easy access or use it to divide different ares on your wooden porch.Remember to treat the wood and protect it from water and insects.

    #22. VERTICAL PALLET HERB GARDEN

    Source

    #23. The Succulent Vertical Garden

    The resilience of these wonderful plants is what recommends them as the perfect candidates for a pallet vertical garden. Simply fill an entire pallet with different variations of the succulent plant and create a delicate composition that will slowly and surely take over the pallet wood, claiming it their own.

    #23. THE SUCCULENT VERTICAL GARDEN

    Source

    #24. Succulent Garden Serving as Wall Art

    When placed indoors, such a wooden pallet succulent garden can become the focus point of an entire wall. Let the beauty of the creation speak for itself and observe the growth of the beautiful plants that transform this wall art each year. Place the pallet in a spot with enough natural light and spray on water occasionally.

    #24. SUCCULENT GARDEN SERVING AS WALL ART

    Source

    #25. Woode pallet Insect Hotel

    As much as some of us might despise insects, their vital role in our garden can not be contested. If being in control of this aspect is something you are searching for, creating an insect hotel seems like a fun interesting project that should take up a place in your garden. Invite butterflies bees and other such creatures into your green heaven and encourage the natural order of things.

    #25. THE INSECT HOTEL

     

    #26. Wooden pallet Garden Shed

    Transform a corner of your garden into an useful garden shed for tools and storage by using a series of wooden pallets assembled together. Encourage plants and vines to take it over and observe as it becomes more and more part of the actual garden with each passing year.

    #26. WOODEN PALLET GARDEN SHED

     

    #27. Raised Garden Beds from Wooden Pallets

    A spring herb garden can be created by using wooden pallets as raised garden beds, protecting yourself from occasional animal attacks on your greenery. Another incredible benefit of using raised beds is comfort. You can thus avoid all those long hours spent bent over your plant beds ending up with excruciating back problems.

    #27. WOODEN PALLET RAISED GARDEN BEDS

     

    #28. Classic Wooden Planter from pallets

    I think you can agree with us that the merge of wood and greenery is beuatiful beyond compare.There is a subtle delicate elegance in this association that has deep roots into our subconscious. So it is only natural that pallet wood be used in the creation of planters for both indoor and outdoor purpose.Due to its delicacy the planters below have not been used in the true purpose of a flower pot but serve as a support for other ceramic planters that hold the herbs and plants, but with proper care and treatment you can use a wooden planter in the same manner as a ceramic one.

    #28. THE CLASSICAL WOODEN PLANTER

     

    #29. Wooden Pallet Swing Set

    Childhood memories are often filled with the image of a wooden swing placed in the garden or backyard hung from a big old tree. Here a simple wooden pallet has been dressed in white coat and transformed into a beuatiful swing hung in the front porch. Adorn it with vines and flowers for special occasions and a romantic setting.

    #29. WOODEN PALLET SWING SET

    Source

    #30. Garden Picnic Pallet Table

    There is nothing more enjoyable than serving and delighting yourself in a delicious meal outdoors in the fresh comfort of your garden. Upgrade the classical picnic with a blanket and a wicker basket and stack a set of wooden pallets to achieve a perfect informal dinning table outdoors.Use fluffy pillows for sitting and adorn the entire picture with fresh cut flowers for a wonderful scented experience.

    #30. GARDEN PICNIC PALLET TABLE

    Source

    #31. The Perfect Wooden pallet Swing

    The memories revolving around that wooden swing hung in the backyard from the biggest thickest tree in view will stay with you forever. Invest time in recreating those wonderful moments by using a rather long wooden pallet and some thick rope to add a new swing to your patio. Make it a little more comfortable by adding on a few throw pillows in different tones that will spice things up.

    #31. THE PERFECT WOODEN PALLET SWING

    Source

    #32. Mason Jars and Wooden pallet Wood Lighting Fixture

    The wooden pallet has a new addition, as versatile as it is: the mason jar. Fill them up with elegant white candles and adorn your living room ceiling with this perfect vintage creation.Hung it down with a set of ropes to finish and complete the rustic picture.

    #32. MASON JARS AND WOODEN PALLET WOOD LIGHTING FIXTURE

    Source

    #33. The Small useful Pallet Couch

    Merge two wooden pallets and use an old wooden door a a headboard for the perfect little couch. Add a set of cozy fluffy pillows on top and play with textures and colors for a vibrant dynamic of the room.

    #33. THE SMALL USEFUL PALLET COUCH

    Source

    #34. The Industrial Coffee Table

    The industrial style has been very in for a long time now and it is amazing how simple it is to achieve. Take an old pallet, add a set of large wheels and you are done.Place it in a modern contemporary interior design and notice how beautifully the entire scene comes together.

    #34. THE INDUSTRIAL COFFEE TABLE

    Source

    #35. Pallet Love Shelving

    Create an adorning love shelving unit for your walls with a few simple cuts from a new wooden pallet. Use the letter O to center an important meaningful family photo.

    #35. Wooden Pallet LOVE SHELVING

    Source

    #36. DIY Metal Pipe Laptop Table

    Spending hours and hours in front of the computer at your desk will most definitely result in back and neck pains.Thus taking a break from time to time and changing your sitting area is highly recommended.If you are fond of using your comfortable couch as your working station, create this small functional laptop table out of pallet wood and metal pipes.

    #36. DIY METAL PIPE LAPTOP TABLE

     

    #37. Wooden pallet Display Units

    If you are the owner of a little boutique, why invest tons of money in expensive furniture when you can create your own with your personal touches. Stack up a set of new wooden pallets and adorn them with underneath lighting fixtures for a special effect. Keep things modern and hip and your clients will adore the atmosphere exuded.

    #37. WOODEN PALLET DISPLAY UNITS

     

    #38. Delicate Pallet Mirror Frame

    Use the wonderful wood of o wooden pallet to create a delicate mirror frame. Leave the wood unfinished and let the cracks and texture speak for itself and its life.Add it to a small space like a hallway to maximize the idea of space or place it facing a large window to reflect the outdoors in.

    #38. A VINTAGE DELICATE MIRROR

    Source

    #39. Mirror Frame and Shelving as One

    Create this useful set without spending a dime and infuse a dose of rustic ambiance into your bathroom.Treat the wood with oil to bring out its wonderful texture.

    #39. MIRROR AND SHELVING ALL IN ONE

    Source

    #40. Colorful Modern Coffee Tables

    Merge a set of wooden pallets, add wheels and a bright pop tone, finishing it all up with glass/mirror surfaces and complete your living room with a fun vibrant coffee table.

    #40. COLORFUL MODERN COFFEE TABLES

     

    #41. Re-purposed Pallet Wood

    Take bits and pieces of old pallets and arrange them in a wonderful composition to form the frame of a mirror.The entire appeal exudes a shabby chic style we find adorable.Do not try to remove the layers of paint as it is a touch that adds glamour to the piece.

    #41. RE-PURPOSED PALLET WOOD

    Source

    #42. Pallet Wood Kitchen BACKSLASH

    Using wood as a backsplash in the kitchen might seem a little bit odd, considering steam and humidity but a washed out wood stenciled with a fun message will add a classic French vibe to your working area. Remember to treat the wood regularly to prevent deterioration.

    #42. PALLET WOOD KITCHEN BACKSLASH

    Source

    #43. The MENU Pallet Board

    Invite your family to a special dinner everyday by presenting the menu ahead in a vintage fun way. Create a wooden board and use contrasting tons to write the days of the week and chalk to change the daily dishes.

    #43. THE MENU BOARD

     

    #44. An Array of Wooden Pieces

    Use bits and pieces of different wooden pallets and assemble them together to form a wonderful coffee table. Mix and match the different tones and textures for an incredible effect and merge the raw texture with a set of hairpin legs.

    #44. AN ARRAY OF WOODEN PIECES

    Source

    #45. White Sun Bed

    Enjoy the wonderful spring heather outside in your backyard in a hand made pallet sun bed. Use a white paint finish for a Scandinavian fresh vibe that will contrast beautifully with the rich vibrant greenery surrounding you.

    #45. WHITE SUN BED

    Source

    #46. Vintage Vent Hood

    If you are looking for the vintage rustic style for your abode, a wooden designed kitchen will definitely fit right in. Use withered wood from an old pallet for a French vibe and let it stand out from the rest of your white painted cabinets.

    #46. VINTAGE VENT HOOD

    Source

    #47. A Special Kind of Christmas

    Take the side of ecologists this year and opt for a wooden pallet light Christmas tree that will spare a new fresh tree from being cut. Use a single type of lights, preferably white for a delicate atmosphere.

    #47. A SPECIAL KIND OF CHRISTMAS

    Source

    #48. Pallet Wood Star Decor

    Select a few pieces of rustic old wood and create a wonderful star decoration you can place in your Christmas tree or adorn your mantel with. Leave the wood unfinished and use different parts of the pallet with different textures and tones for a varied effect.

    #48. PALLET WOOD STAR DECOR

    Source

    #49. A Simple Rustic Christmas Tree

    Keep things simple this year and opt for a Scandinavian pallet wood tree that can be left untouched for a rough effect or glamoured up with a set of Christmas lights and some basic rope ornaments you could create yourself. Another beautiful option would be to paint the wood and express your creativity for this wonderful DIY project.

    #49. A SIMPLE Wooden Pallet RUSTIC CHRISTMAS TREE

    Source

    #50. Pallet Photo Display

    Cut a pallet in long pieces, merge the pieces together and paint it white. You can now use this board as a photo display by attaching a few twigs to it and connecting your photos and the twigs with some basic rope. Drill a few holes in the pallet and place a lighting source beneath for a starry effect.

    #50. PALLET PHOTO DISPLAY

    Source

    #51. A TV Background

    Old pallet wood transformed by the passage of time and the influence of the elements merged into a creative TV background.

    #51. A Wooden pallet TV BACKGROUND

    Source

    #52. A Book/ Magazines Wooden Box

    Storing all the different items we tend to gather up around the home can turn out to be a very difficult task we all dread to solve. Use the leftover pallets you have lying around the garden and transform them into a creative wonderful wooden box for placing books, magazines or throw pillows and place it next to your couch in the living room. Add a set of rope handles for effective maneuvering.

    #52. A BOOK/ MAGAZINES WOODEN BOX

    Source

    #53. A Pallet Working Station

    Every child needs a working station where he can learn, draw or read. It is an essential structural element in one's life and you can create such one from a set of wooden pallets. Treat the wood, finish it with a glossy white paint and cut out bits and parts to create certain storage spaces.

    #53. A PALLET WORKING STATION

    Source

    #54. Wooden Pallet Shelving

    Pallets and supports can merge into wonderful shelving ideas for your home.Leave the wood unfinished for a vibrant effect.

    #54. WOODEN PALLET SHELVING

    Source

    #55. A Cute Wood Swing

    Decorate your child's bedroom with a custom made white pallet wood swing decorated with artificial flowers and transform his universe. You can create a larger version for your porch and spend cozy summer nights outdoors.

    #55. A CUTE WOOD SWING

    Source

    #56. DIY Card and Photo Holder

    Diversify your crafting portfolio with a Christmas tree/ card& photo holder project as a perfect addition to your blank walls.Decorate it with pine branches to add that cozy holiday scent to your home.

    #56. DIY CARD AND PHOTO HOLDER

    Source

    #57. Elegant Wood Luminaries

    Candle light transform any room and atmosphere. Add vintage wood to the equation and you've got yourself a definite winner. Choose to cut the sides with a specific motif that will exude light in a delicate manner. Attach a piece of thick rope as a handle and place your hand made luminaries somewhere you can admire and will use everyday.

    #57. ELEGANT WOOD LUMINARIES

    Source

    #58. Pallet Wood Bookends

    Bookends are those simple volumetric letters everybody uses to hold their literature in place on the shelves but which do not necessarily beautify the place. To this problem we present you today a craft that through simple texture adds delicacy and beauty to any corner you intend it to be placed.

    #58. PALLET WOOD BOOKENDS

    Source

    #59. Rustic Vent Hood

    Improve the rustic vintage image of your kitchen with a pallet wood vent hood that will draw attention in an instant and empower the entire design. A darker wood tone will contrast beautifully with a pure white kitchen furniture.

    #59. RUSTIC VENT HOOD

    Source

    #60. Pallet Wood Planter Box

    Spring is the most wonderful season so let its primary elements which are the flowers bloom and grow in a wonderful controlled environment. Create a pallet wood planter box and place it outdoors on your patio in full spring sun.Add a layer of white paint and let it dry for a little before taking an old rag and removing the paint. The end effect will reflect a French vintage vibe we adore.

    #60. PALLET WOOD PLANTER BOX

    Source

    #61. Vertical Shelving

    Shelving is one of the most easy and common pallet crafts you will find out there.It can add beauty, functionality and style to any blank wall in an instant. Embellish it will fresh cut flowers and family memories and photos to claim the craft your own.

    #61. VERTICAL SHELVING

    Source

    #62. Pallet Wood Sliding Door

    Wooden doors come in all shapes and sizes but the actual beauty lies in the age of the wood, its intricate texture and natural tone.Here a few pallets have been transformed into an incredible sliding door that can be easily placed in a modern contemporary design.

    #62. PALLET WOOD SLIDING DOOR

    Source

    #63. DIY Pallet Clock

    The passage of time mark everyone and everything and wood is no exception. Wood aging is something being pursuit and searched thus it is only logical to use old pallet wood in the creation of a basic wooden clock.

    DIY PALLET CLOCK

    Source

    #64. Colorful Wood Box

    Increase your storage space with a colorful addition. Create a wonderful wooden box with a touch of color and rope hinges.

    COLORFUL WOOD BOX

    Source

    #65. Industrial Looking Bird Feeders

    As spring emerges from the dark corners it had been hiding, nature revives and birds, bugs and all sorts of creatures come to life and animate our garden. Take a step in this direction and invite the thrills of birds in your backyard with this fun bird feeders craft.

    INDUSTRIAL LOOKING BIRD FEEDERS

    Source

    #66. Pallet Wall Art

    Blank walls should be decorated with your personal creations so feel free to express your imagination on a canvas created out of pallet wood. Use bleach to paint your dreams white.

    Wooden PALLET WALL ART

    Source

    #67. Pop Wall Art

    A fresh fun twist on wall art should be added to a rather conventional area like the kitchen or dinning zone. Use pallet wood to create such a shape and add a coat of a bright hue to the end product to make it stand out and contrast the blank wall.

    POP WALL ART

    Source

    #68. DIY Platform Bed

    Use old pallets to create a sturdy structure for your bed. Customize it by adding a comfortable mattress and colorful pillows for the personal touch and taste.

    DIY PLATFORM BED

    Source

    #69. Pallet Wood Cityscape Wall Art

    Exploit the love you carry for a certain city and reflect in in your own wall art creation. Capture the city' skyline in an unique project you will simply adore in the end. Find different details you might have missed at the beginning and get attached even more to the image created itself.

    #69. PALLET WOOD CITYSCAPE WALL ART

    Source

    #70. Special Wedding Decor

    It is up to you in the end to create a special atmosphere on your special day. And why not create your own wedding decor for a vintage/retro theme?

    SPECIAL WEDDING Wooden Pallet DECOR

    Source

    #71. DIY Pallet Wood Chair

    Invest time in creating a comfortable patio chair or couch without spending lots of money or investing a lot of time and effort. Keep things simple and study and customize it with colorful pillows and cozy blankets that will come in handy on chilly nights spent outside.

    DIY PALLET WOOD CHAIR

    Source

    #72. A Special Type of Hammock

    Relax in a hand-made wooden hammock placed strategically under a tall tree in your backyard.

    A SPECIAL TYPE OF HAMMOCK

    Source

    #73. Elegant Navy Wood Clock

    Bring the navy theme in with a rather large pallet wood clock painted in beige and adorned with roman numbers indicated the hours passing by.

     ELEGANT NAVY WOOD CLOCK

    Source

    #74. Vintage Pallet Shelving

    Another colorful example of pallet shelving which preserves old paint layers and merges them beautifully in an artsy combination.

    VINTAGE PALLET SHELVING

    Source

    #75. Adjustable Sun Pallet Bed

    Enjoy hot summer days relaxing in the sun in your garden on a hand made pallet adjustable sun bed.

    #75. ADJUSTABLE SUN Pallet BED

     

    #76. Kitchen Fruit Basket

    Add a colorful touch to your white cabinet classically designed kitchen with this vibrant fresh pallet wood fruit basket. You can create similar ones for storing jars or spices and even for holding on to herb pots that will freshen up the kitchen and become useful at the same time.

    #76. KITCHEN FRUIT BASKET

     

    #77. Simple Candle Holders

    En-light your nights with these simple yet elegant vertical candle holders.Be careful by the combination of wood and fire and protect the actual candle with glass.

    #77. SIMPLE CANDLE HOLDERS

     

    #78. A Special Family Message Display

    Display you love and affection in plain sight and leave your mark on wood for the future to come.

    #78. A SPECIAL FAMILY Wooden Pallet MESSAGE DISPLAY

    Source

    #79. Christmas Wall Art Piece

    Wish a merry and bright Christmas this year with a fun wall art creation on pallet wood.Use white and red paint to truly embody the Christmas spirit and attach a pine branch to complete the scene.

    #79. CHRISTMAS WALL ART PIECE

    Source

    #80. Valentine's Day Gift

    Although Valentine's day has become mainly a consumerist affair, try to attack the issue in a different manner by creating your gift instead of purchasing it. This wall art piece expresses affection in a very colorful and beautiful manner, maintaining that degree of uniqueness we all search in items today.

    #80. VALENTINE'S DAY GIFT WOODEN PALLET

    via not2shabbydarling

    #81. Stenciled Wood Wall Art

    There is nothing more enjoyable than the smell of burning wood. Try the process on a wood board by controlling the exact design with a stencil.

    #81. STENCILED WOODEN PALLET WALL ART

    Source

    #82. A Loving Attention Pallet

    Exercise your drawing and painting skills on pallet wood whilst sending an affectionate message.

    #82. A LOVING ATTENTION PALLET

    Source

    #83. Heart Silhouette Wood Art

    You you fill like committing and investing more time into a Valentine's project, create a stencil, dram your shape on a pallet wood board and cut it accordingly to the design. Apply a fresh coat of pastel paint and adorn with flowers or photographs.

    #83. HEART SILHOUETTE WOOD ART

    Source

    #84. Rustic Pallet Wood Doors

    If you have in the near future plan an idea of changing your kitchen cabinets, why not orient yourself towards wooden pallets? Choose old pieces of wood with character and combine them with a white kitchen main body.

    #84. RUSTIC PALLET WOOD DOORS

    Source

    #85. Outdoor's Coffee Table With Built in Fire-pit

    Summer is approaching fast and with it, wonderful nights spent outside in the garden with friends and family. Create a functional pallet coffee table and insert a central fire pit areas for those cozy summer nights.

    #85. OUTDOOR'S COFFEE TABLE WITH BUILT IN FIRE-PIT

     

    #86. Garden Pallet Playhouse

    Spending tons of money on store bought toys does not sound like a good investment.So orient yourself towards creating a garden playground for your little ones from pallet wood. Invest time in the project and try and implicate them in the process for a memory they will cherish forever.

    #86. GARDEN PALLET PLAYHOUSE

    Source

    #87. Elegant Sturdy Wooden Floors

    If you are a fan of wooden floors and let's be honest, who isn't, pallet wood is a wonderful creative method that will save you a lot of money but will cost in the time department.

    #87. ELEGANT STURDY WOODEN FLOORS

    #88. The Perfect Tree House

    Create a tree house for adults by merging wooden pallets into a platform where you can add a few furniture pieces and enjoy nature from within.#88. THE PERFECT TREE HOUSE

    Source

    #89. Pallet Planters

    Start a spring herb garden by filling up a wooden pallet with soil and compost and planting your seedings. Make tags for your herbs to remember exactly what you have planted.

    #89. PALLET PLANTERS

    #90. Rustic Flower Pots

    Lemon trees and olive trees exude that Mediterranean vibe we adore so much thus it seems only logical to try and complement the olive green with some gorgeous wooden pallet planters.

    #90. RUSTIC FLOWER POTS

    Source

    #91. An Entire Backyard Furniture Set

    If you are lucky enough to live in the seaside or to have such a vacation home, create outdoor furniture for entertaining from wooden pallets. Keep them basic and simple and add a set of comfortable cushions to the ensemble.

    #91. AN ENTIRE BACKYARD FURNITURE SET

    Source

    #92. An Adorable Coffee Table for Your Patio

    Every relaxation point from your home needs a coffee table and an industrial vintage looking one can add glamour and charm to any location.

    #92. AN ADORABLE COFFEE TABLE FOR YOUR PATIO

    Source

    #93. Perfectly Inserted Wooden Deck and Furniture

    Lush vegetation and wood work perfectly hand in hand, the first taking gradually over the second one and embellishing it in the process.

    #93. PERFECTLY INSERTED WOODEN DECK AND FURNITURE

    Source

    #94. A Large Elegant White Swing Set

    A wonderful patio or deck deserves a large swing for the entire family, especially if the view is worth it. Add string lights to the ensemble for magical nights.

    #94. A LARGE ELEGANT WHITE SWING SET

    #95. Vertical Indoor Garden

    Use a wooden pallet to create a vertical herb garden. Apply a layer of chalkboard paint and use chalk to write the exact herbs and spices you have planted.

    #95. VERTICAL INDOOR GARDEN

    Source

    #96. Sublime Delicate WEDDING Decor

    A wooden pallet background seen through a canopy of string lights is the perfect vision for a wedding decor. Add flowers to the mixture and the image is complete.

    #96. SUBLIME DELICATE WEDDING DECOR

    Source

    #97. The Perfect Way of Presenting the Day's Special

    Transform the daily menu into something fun and to be expected.Use chalk to change up the dishes

    #97. THE PERFECT WAY OF PRESENTING THE DAY'S SPECIAL

    Source

    #98. Beautiful Narrow Work Desk

    Recycle the bottom part of an old table and spice it up with a wooden pallet top.

    #98. BEAUTIFUL NARROW WORK DESK

    Source

    #99. Pallet Wood Turned Into a Sliding Door

    Create a door frame from pallet wood and make a sliding door.

    #99. PALLET WOOD TURNED INTO A SLIDING DOOR

    Source

    #100. DIY Magic Storage Sofa

    Merge functionality with style in this creative narrow pallet sofa perfect for the coffee area.

    #100. DIY MAGIC STORAGE SOFA

     

    #101. Perfect Pallet Walkway

    Create a heavenly pathway through lush vegetation in your garden using pallet wood.

    #101. PERFECT PALLET WALKWAY

    Source

    What is your take on the versatility and utility of wooden pallets? Choose your favorite from the 101 pallet projects presented above and share your ideas with us in the comment section below.

    Earlier this year we gathered a collection of the most beautiful 101 DIY pallet projects to take on, providing you with what we believe to be useful inspirational information for future DIY projects. Today we have focused our attention on recycled pallet bed frames, a topic commonly encountered and of high interest among fellow drafters. Pallet wood is an infinite resource, filled with creative possibilities and multiple functions. The number of pallet projects or areas where pallet wood proves to be useful grows larger with each passing day, filling in blanks left in the furniture industry and being re-adapted, reinterpreted and beautified in creative, imaginative ways. Whether we are talking about recycled pallet bed frames, outdoors patio furniture, pallet coffee tables, raised garden beds and so on, pallet wood is and should be recycled and up-cycled on a daily basis.

    "A pallet /ˈpælt/, sometimes inaccurately called a skid (a skid has no bottom deck boards), is a flat transport structure that supports goods in a stable fashion while being lifted by a forklift, pallet jack, front loader, work saver, or other jacking device, or a crane. A pallet is the structural foundation of a unit load which allows handling and storage efficiencies. Goods or shipping containers are often placed on a pallet secured with strapping, stretch wrap orshrink wrap and shipped. Since its invention in the twentieth century, its use has dramatically supplanted older forms of crating like the wooden box and the wooden barrel, as it works well with modern packaging like cardboard boxes and Intermodal containers commonly used for bulk shipping.

    While most pallets are wooden, pallets can also be made of plastic, metal, paper, and recycled materials. Each material has advantages and disadvantages relative to the others."

    The advantages of using the beautiful material of pallet wood are numerous: they are very easy to find, with healthy strong wood and sturdy structure, and rather cheap, which makes them a wonderful alternative to other store-available materials, not to mention the actual beauty of the wood, its intricate complex texture evoking the natural environment with all its small perfect imperfections, raw texture and multitude of varieties and tones. Pallets come in different sizes, offering numerous possibilities for interpretation and modification. They can be cut up to fit a tiny corner, the wood stripped and reused in creative projects layered to form storage units or raised beds, and so on. Imagination and patience are all that is required in the process. Left bare, in their raw shape, they would fit any decor from the modern, contemporary ones where they will add a necessary contrast with other sleek pieces of furniture, to industrial raw environments where exposed brick walls and concrete flooring demand such a material to warm up the atmosphere. If chosen to be painted, pallets welcome neutral tones of white, beige, grey or even pastel tones that will fit perfectly a Scandinavian-inspired decor. Choose to invest your creativity wisely and opt for pallet furniture.

    Recycled Pallet Bed Frames

    Further on we invite you to cast a glance at our small collection of pallet bed frames and we encourage you to choose your favorite project from the list below.

    1. Layered pallet frame bed with a white tile background serving as a headboard

    Notice how the natural tone of the wood exudes warmth and coziness into the room. The rest of the decor has been kept to neutral tones as well, letting the atmosphere breathe and not overwhelm it. This like many other beds in our list are simple, inexpensive examples of DIY platform beds with pallets, a simple and swift resolution that can boost your comfort with little to no costs.

    1. LAYERED PALLET FRAME BED WITH A WHITE TILE BACKGROUND SERVING AS A HEADBOARD

    Source

    2. Wooden headboard and bed frame exuding warmth and coziness

    A rather small bedroom requires storage space. Here pallet wood has been used to create the bed headboard and floating nightstands. The space beneath the pallets themselves is being used as book and magazine storage.

    2. WOODEN HEADBOARD AND BED FRAME EXUDING WARMTH AND COZINESS

    Source

    3. Narrow pallet bed overlooking the city

    For a narrow bed placed near a large glazed wall overlooking the city line, pallets seem like the right smart choice. Cheap and versatile, don't you think?

    3. NARROW PALLET BED OVERLOOKING THE CITY

    Add a cozy holiday spirit to your bedroom by adorning your pallet bed frame with sparkling string lights.

    4. A SIMPLE PALLET BED FRAME ILLUMINATED WITH CHRISTMAS LIGHTS

    Source

    5.  White pallets used as bed headboard

    White works wonderfully on pallet wood, opening up any space and fitting perfectly into a small bedroom.

    5.  WHITE PALLETS USED AS BED HEADBOARD

    Source

    6. A boho-chic atmosphere integrating a pallet bed frame and greenery

    We love the mixture of pallet wood warm and cozy and the green fresh touch of nature. [easyazon_link keywords="Wooden crates" locale="US" tag="homesthetics0a-20" link_id="173704" type="link" ref="misen"]Wooden crates[/easyazon_link] have been added to the décor to complete the image and store plants and pillows.

    6. A BOHO-CHIC ATMOSPHERE INTEGRATING A PALLET BED FRAME AND GREENERY

    Source

    For a feminine touch this diyer chose to paint his pallet bed frame in a delicate turquoise tone that is here emphasized by the warm touch of string lights.

    7. DELICATE PASTEL TURQUOISE PALLET BED FRAME LIT BY STRING LIGHTS

    Source

    8. Delicate feminine pallet wood bed

    Pallets have been deconstructed and their wood used to build a simple yet elegant bed frame decorated with feminine pink bed covers.

    8. DELICATE FEMININE PALLET WOOD BED

    Source

    9. Minimal bedroom design in neutral tones

    The simplest of designs, featuring a single layer of pallets nestling a rather comfortable mattress and warm fluffy bed covers.

    9. MINIMAL BEDROOM DESIGN IN NEUTRAL TONES

    10. The perfect bed frame design for an airy large modern bedroom

    Large bedroom with huge glazed walls overlooking the natural environment should be let to breath, with as little furniture as possible. Here the pallet bed does just that, allowing the surroundings to trespass the physical limit and become part of the actual bedroom.

    10. THE PERFECT BED FRAME DESIGN FOR AN AIRY LARGE MODERN BEDROOM

    11. Scandinavian infused bedroom design with a pallet bed frame at its center

    We at Homesthetics have always found the Scandinavian style with its airy open neutral fresh style adorable and suitable for so many individuals. It is a spirit that allows you to feel cozy at home without overdoing it. Here old pallets have become a beautiful rustic bed headboard emphasized by the stark white of the rest of the décor.

    11. SCANDINAVIAN INFUSED BEDROOM DESIGN WITH A PALLET BED FRAME AT ITS CENTER

    12. Bright neon green pallet bed adorned on a gold and green wallpaper background

    Feeling cheerful and creative? Opt for bright toned bed frame that will raise your spirit each day.

    12. BRIGHT NEON GREEN PALLET BED ADORNED ON A GOLD AND GREEN WALLPAPER BACKGROUND

    Source

    13. Cozy small bedroom with a pallet bed frame serving as a shoe storage at the same time

    A narrow room with an exposed brick wall requires a light furniture, one hat will contrast the raw texture and intense rich tone of the wall itself. Choose a pallet bed frame adorned with white bed covers which can double as shoe storage as well.

    13. COZY SMALL BEDROOM WITH A PALLET BED FRAME SERVING AS A SHOE STORAGE AT THE SAME TIME

    Source

    14. Simple and clean bedroom design

    Pallet beds can exude a serious conservative atmosphere as well, even if at a first you wouldn't associate recycled pallets with such a style. Here perfectly cleaned pallets frame a simple bed adorned with elegant bed covers and pillows with delicate blue accents.

    14. SIMPLE AND CLEAN BEDROOM DESIGN

    Source unknown

    15. A very low pallet bed frame offering comfort in a minimal design

    If you are a big fan of the Japanese style, improvise a low pallet bed frame, keep the decorations to a minimum and the tones neutral and obtain a relaxed bedroom style that will bring you closer to the earth's energy.

    15. A VERY LOW PALLET BED FRAME OFFERING COMFORT IN A MINIMAL DESIGN

    Source

    16. Raw industrial loft design with exposed brick walls, cement flooring and pallet bed frame

    The industrial style adores raw insertions: exposed brick walls, concrete floors, pallet furniture, hanging wires and free lighting bulbs to illuminate the scene.

    16. RAW INDUSTRIAL LOFT DESIGN WITH EXPOSED BRICK WALLS, CEMENT FLOORING AND PALLET BED FRAME

    Source

    17. An all white open plan apartment

    Paint your pallet furniture all white and integrate it in an all white themed apartment with delicate lighting and fluffy cozy fabrics.

    17. AN ALL WHITE OPEN PLAN APARTMENT

    Source

    18. Scandinavian infused bedroom design

    Wood, white and lots of natural light will define the perfect simple Scandinavian bedroom design.

    18. SCANDINAVIAN INFUSED BEDROOM DESIGN

    Source

    19. Neutral very simple pallet bed frame in an all white décor

    Another beautiful example on how pallet wood can be integrated and transformed into a key element of a fresh airy bedroom.

    19. NEUTRAL VERY SIMPLE PALLET BED FRAME IN AN ALL WHITE DECOR

    Source

    20. Small bedroom providing comfort through a simple pallet bed

    Small spaces can be quite tricky to furnish but pallet furniture can turn out to be the solution you were seeking for.

    20. SMALL BEDROOM PROVIDING COMFORT THROUGH A SIMPLE PALLET BED

     

    21. Pallet bed offering storage space

    Storage is of the essence when you are dealing with a small apartment so opt for a layered pallet bed frame that will provide you with all the shoe storage space you require.

    21. PALLET BED OFFERING STORAGE SPACE

    Source

    22. Dark hues contrasting an airy light atmosphere

    A beautiful dark tiled floor requires a similar bed frame approach. here a dark toned pallet bed frame complements the Moroccan inspired floor whilst contrasting the beautiful natural light invading the bedroom.

    22. DARK HUES CONTRASTING AI AIRY LIGHT ATMOSPHERE

    Source

    23. Baby crib pallet bed frame

    Baby cribs can be quiet expensive and are used only for a short period of time. Create your own crib from pallet wood and invest time and love into the design.

    23. BABY CRIB PALLET BED FRAME

     

    24. A day pallet bed frame with accent decorative pillows

    A day bed that doubles as a sofa can be created out of wooden pallets and adorned with comfortable pillows, a fluffy mattress and delicate fabrics.

    24. A DAY PALLET BED FRAME WITH ACCENT DECORATIVE PILLOWS

    Source

    25. High pallet bed in a colorful yet peaceful background

    Choose to contrast your colorful bedroom background with a neutral bed piece made out of wooden pallets.

    25. A HIGH PALLET BED IN A COLORFUL YET PEACEFUL BACKGROUND

    Source

    26. Bohemian chic cozy bedroom corner

    For an unconventional Bohemian chic bedroom design opt for the unconventional: stacking up pallets to create the bed frame and use them as nook storage as well.

    26. BOHEMIAN CHIC COZY BEDROOM CORNER

    Source

    27. Feminine décor embellishing a pallet bed frame

    Simple pallets can become quite feminine with the right touches: fluffy white pillows, delicate greenery and pink accents.

    27. FEMININE DECOR EMBELLISHING A PALLET BED FRAME

    Source

    28. Cozy pallet bed frame for your furry friends

    Create the perfect cozy bed frame for your dog or cat using inexpensive pallet wood.

    28. A COZY PALLET BED FRAME FOR YOUR FURRY FRIENDS

    Source

    29. Small narrow pallet bed on wheels

    Add wheels to your narrow pallet bed creation for easier maneuvering.

    29. A SMALL NARROW PALLET BED ON WHEELS

    Source

    30. Pallet swing suspended outdoors

    Use and join a set o two pallets and suspend them outdoors for the perfect swing/ day bed to be enjoyed in summer days and nights as well.

    30. PALLET SWING SUSPENDED OUTDOORS

    Source

    31. Simple pallet and rope creation perfect for the front porch

    Adorn your front porch with a simple pallet swing you and your little ones will adore for a long long time. Create it as a family project and have fun with it.

    31. A SIMPLE PALLET AND ROPE CREATION PERFECT FOR THE FRONT PORCH

    Source

    32. Modern vibe exuded in an airy living room design

    You can take the vintage rustic look out of pallets if this suits you better and insert them delicately into a modern living room design.

    32. A MODERN VIBE EXUDED IN AN AIRY LIVING ROOM DESIGN

    Source

    33. Warm wooden hues balanced by bright blue tones

    Warm can be complemented by a variety of tones. Here bright blue hues contrast and accentuate the beauty of natural pallet wood frames.

    33. WARM WOODEN HUES BALANCED BY BRIGHT BLUE TONES

    34. Cozy pallet bed frame and headboard touched by shimmering light

    If you have chosen to construct a pallet wood headboard don't forget to accentuate its beauty and texture through artificial lighting.

    34. COZY PALLET BED FRAME AND HEADBOARD TOUCHED BY SHIMMERING LIGHT

    Source

    35. Feminine outdoors pallet frame sofa

    You patio or terrace requires a comfortable sofa where you can relax and entertain at the same time. Pallet wood provides the perfect base material for this project if treated properly against the natural elements.

    35. FEMININE OUTDOORS PALLET FRAME SOFA

    Source

    36. The simplest pallet bed swing

    A very simple yet smoothly finished approach to a bed swing viable for indoor and outdoor usage at the same time.

    36. THE SIMPLEST PALLET BED SWING

    Source

    37. Cozy pallet day bed perfect for a small living room

    Create your perfect living room day bed with little effort and a small budget.

    37. A COZY PALLET DAY BED PERFECT FOR A SMALL LIVING ROOM

     

    38. Fun decoration of a pallet bed headboard

    Have fun with your pallet projects and decorate your headboard with hand-painted birds or other natural elements you adore.

    38. FUN DECORATION OF A PALLET BED HEADBOARD

    Source

    39. Simplest choice to adopt for an outdoors day bed zone

    Why spend tons of money on outdoor furniture sets when you can create your own out of pallet wood?

    39. THE SIMPLEST CHOICE TO ADOPT FOR AN OUTDOORS DAY BED ZONE

    Source

    40. Stacked layers of pallets serving as an outdoors furniture set

    Stack up wooden pallets add in a few comfortable pillows and you've got yourself a cheap cozy alternative to a patio furniture set.

    STACKED LAYERS OF PALLETS SERVING AS AN OUTDOORS FURNITURE SET

    Source

    41. Simple nature pallet bed frame warmed up with string lights

    Adorn your pallet headboard creation with a single string of Christmas lights to add that romantic glow to the entire room.

     SIMPLE NATURE PALLET BED FRAME WARMED UP WITH STRING LIGHTS

    Source

    42. Modern nonconformist bedroom design

    Simplicity should define a bedroom as a space of relaxation and comfort.

    MODERN NONCONFORMIST BEDROOM DESIGN

    Source

    43. Mondrian inspired pallet bed frame

    Get creative with your pallet bed frame design and decorate or paint it as you please.

    MONDRIAN INSPIRED PALLET BED FRAME

    Source

    44. Simple bed frame with storage space made out of pallet wood

    Deconstruct wooden pallets and use the sturdy wood to recreate the perfect bed. Don't forget to create storage space underneath.

    SIMPLE BED FRAME WITH STORAGE SPACE MADE OUT OF PALLET WOOD

    Source

    45. A colorful fun approach to a kid's bed frame

    You could have fun with the organization and decoration of your little one's bedroom and opt for a pallet bed frame painted in a bright tone he will adore.

    A COLORFUL FUN APPROACH TO A KID'S BED FRAME

    Source

    46. Pallet bed headboard offering shelving space

    Even the headboard can serve as storage space, here for books, working as beautiful diy bookshelf for both family photos and books.

    PALLET BED HEADBOARD OFFERING SHELVING SPACE

    Source

    47. Shabby chic bed frame design

    Use weathered old pallet wood to recreate a wonderful yet strange bed headboard ripped out of fairy-tales.

    A SHABBY CHIC BED FRAME DESIGN

    Source

    48. Pallet bed frame nestled in a small attic bedroom with exposed beams

    The attic space can be transformed to suit the most comfortable and cozy bedroom there is. Exposed wooden beams complement the small space and fit perfectly with the warm tones of a pallet wood bed frame.

     PALLET BED FRAME NESTLED IN A SMALL ATTIC BEDROOM WITH EXPOSED BEAMS

    Source

    49. Simple pallet bed frame with a large vintage map serving as its background

    A pallet bed frame can serve as neutral base for a teenager's bedroom. Here an old large map has been used to decorate the background.
    SIMPLE PALLET BED FRAME WITH A LARGE VINTAGE MAP SERVING AS ITS BACKGROUND
    Source

    50. Cozy dark hued bed frame in a similar background design

    If you are looking to decorate and furnish a wooden cottage, the possibilities revolve around iron or wood as materials go. Here the wonderful wooden dark paneling has been let to be the primary focus of the room whereas the pallet wood bed frame evokes the same dark tones without drawing attention.

    COZY DARK HUED BED FRAME IN A SIMILAR BACKGROUND DESIGN

    Source

    51. Attic loft featuring exposed and raw finishes

    Another wonderful example of how to decorate and furnish an old attic space.

    ATTIC LOFT FEATURING EXPOSED AND RAW FINISHES

    Source

    52. Simple cozy pallet canopy bed

    Canopy beds can be create around the pallet bed frame as well with an airy fresh touch and a dreamcatcher adorned above the headboard.
    SIMPLE COZY PALLET CANOPY BED
    Source

    53. Modern pallet bed with a feminine delicate touch

    The image below is quite simple to obtain and seems quire comfortable.

    MODERN PALLET BED WITH A FEMININE DELICATE TOUCH

    Source

    54. Pallet bed frame kept in natural hues

    You can create a rather larger bed frame than the size of the mattress and use the extra space to hold a wooden create nightstand.

    PALLET BED FRAME KEPT IN NATURAL HUES

    55. Neutral grey tones exuding a Scandinavian vibe

    Details are the ones that transform a design in the end and the example below is no exception from this rule.

    NEUTRAL GREY TONES EXUDING A SCANDINAVIAN VIBE

    Source

    56. Suspended pallet bed frame in a glamorous industrial chic décor

    This bold design features a multitude of elements that manage to create an opulent atmosphere without being necessary expensive themselves.

    SUSPENDED PALLET BED FRAME IN A GLAMOROUS INDUSTRIAL CHIC DECOR

    57. Bunk beds created out of pallet wood

    Bunk beds are such a great option for your child's bedroom, fun and creative at the same time.

    BUNK BEDS CREATED OUT OF PALLET WOOD

    Source

    58. Simple minimal yet elegant pallet bed frame in an all white décor choice

    A very clean simple design puts the accent on the few pieces of furniture and décor it nestles.
    SIMPLE MINIMAL YET ELEGANT PALLET BED FRAME IN AN ALL WHITE DECOR CHOICE

    59. A rather large living room pallet couch and coffee table set

    A fresh airy living room design requires a simple furniture design.

    A RATHER LARGE LIVING ROOM PALLET COUCH AND COFFEE TABLE SET

     

    60. A tree house- pallet bed fun composition

    A suspended bed- tree house will enthusiast your little one beyond measure.

    A TREE HOUSE- PALLET BED FUN COMPOSITION

    Source

    61. A stack of pallets and a simple mattress is all that is requested

    Keep things to a minimum and you will fall in love with the results.

    A STACK OF PALLETS AND A SIMPLE MATTRESS IS ALL THAT IS REQUESTED

    62. Simple pallet day bed frame for two

    Such a comfortable elegant piece created out of two pallets.

    62. SIMPLE PALLET DAY BED FRAME FOR TWO

    Source

    What do you think about the idea of using pallet wood as a base for your bed? Is the style a little bit too nonconformist for your taste? Feel free to share your ideas and opinions in the comment section below.

    Related Articles

    111 World's Most Loved DIY Projects

    39 Insanely Smart and Creative DIY Outdoor Pallet Furniture Designs To Start

    27 Of The World's Best Ways to Transform Old Pallets Into Outdoor Furniture

    22 Simply Clever Homemade Pallet Furniture Designs To Start Right Now

    12 Ways To Put Your Bedroom Corner Space To Good Use

    29 Brilliant Easy to Build DIY Platform Bed

    21 Mindbogglingly Beautiful Fairy Tale Bedrooms for Kids

    21 Super Small Nightstands Ready to Fit in Petite Bedrooms

    37 Simply Spectacular Tree Bed Designs to Pursue

    Recycled Pallet Bed Frames – DIY Pallet Collection

    47 Epic Ways to Repurpose Old Picture Frames at Home

    15 Creative Small Beds Ideas For Small Spaces

    30 Small Bedroom Interior Designs Created to Enlargen Your Space

    37 Smart DIY Hanging Bed Tutorials and Ideas to Do

    Bedroom Christmas Lights Ideas For A Cozy Atmosphere

    32 Dreamy Bedroom Designs For Your Little Princess

    100 Inexpensive DIY Headboard Ideas for Your Bedroom Design

    47 Stylish Floating Bed Design Ideas

    53 Incredible Hanging Beds to Float in Peace

    33 Epic Navy Blue Bedroom Design Ideas to Inspire You

    6 Best Vacuum Cleaners for Mattress  

    Your recliner can indeed serve you for many years. But that is only possible when you take proper care of it. 

    To prevent your recliner or leather chairs from everyday wear and tear, it is an absolute must that you find the right slipcover. However, you need to keep in mind that durability is not the only thing you can think about. 

    If your recliner is in the living room, you must find a slipcover that also looks elegant and goes with the existing décor. When done right, your furniture will get a reupholstered look. The problem, however, arises when you visit the market to buy one as there are thousands of options that will leave you confused. 

    To help you, we have designed this guide with the top 7 products you can try. So, let’s take a look!

    Top Recliners Slipcovers 

    Best Recliner Slipcovers

    1. Easy-Going Recliner Stretch Sofa Slipcover

    One of the first recommendations that we have for you is the Easy-Going Recliner Stretch Sofa Slipcover. To protect your recliner from daily wear and tear, it is best that you give this option a try. The designers have paid special attention to ensure that it fits your oversized recliner well.

    Easy-Going Recliner Stretch Sofa Slipcover Sofa Cover...
    • High Quality Material: 80% polyester+20% spandex,high...
    • Dimensions:Recliner Slipcover:Fit Total sitting area is...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The slipcover comes in 4 parts, and it will fit your sofa like it has been made specifically for the purpose. This is one of the best recliner slipcovers as it comes in separate parts to make sure that it fits every part of your recliner well. 

    It has elastic straps that secure the cover nicely to the recliner. Apart from that, the material of the slipcover requires a special mention as it is made up of high-quality polyester-spandex blend, enhancing the durability and flexibility of the product manifold. Extra points to the manufacturers for choosing the right material, which makes the slipcover extremely huggable and stretchable. 

    Moreover, maintaining this item won’t be bothersome. Once it gets a little dirty with use, put it directly into the washing machine and set it for a mild machine wash. But keep in mind that in order to maintain the high-quality fabric, it is best that you use mild detergent for cleaning. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    The only issue with this item is that it is not waterproof and can get damaged in case there is a sudden spillage of liquids. In case the liquid seeps deep under the layers, it would be difficult to take the stains out. So, if you have kids in the house, you might have to reconsider. 



    Pros

    • Made of good quality fabric
    • Fits snugly
    • Easy to wash
    • Requires less maintenance




    Cons

    • Not waterproof



    2. H.VERSAILTEX Stretch Recliner Slipcover

    Up next, we have the H.VERSAILTEX Stretch Recliner Slipcover on the list, which is popular among users for the extra soft and plush feel that it delivers. What makes this recliner stand out among its contemporaries is that it comes with a footrest that wraps nicely beneath it and delivers an excellent fit. 

    H.VERSAILTEX Stretch Recliner Cover for Lazy Boy Recliner...
    • GREAT FIT: This innovated 1 Piece recliner chair couch cover...
    • FULL PROTECT: These fantastic velvet slipcovers are unique...

    Why Did We Like It?

    If you are looking to add a luxurious touch to your living space, this is one of the best recliner covers to try. It is made of plush velvet fabric, and therefore, looks fantastic while being soft to touch. You would be surprised by the versatility that it puts on the table and is suitable for manual and electric recliners alike. 

    Moreover, we scored this product high on the ease of use that it offers to the users. There is a right-side handle, side pockets, and a continuous footrest, making it super easy for the user to put on the slipcover. There are also two elastic loops present at the back corner, which ensures that the fit is top-notch. 

    Other than that, it is super convenient to install this item. There are proper instructions printed on the manual that you will find in the package. Not to mention, the elasticized bottom makes it easy to put on the slipcover and make sure that it stays in place. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    Despite being made of excellent quality material, it is essential to note that it is not suitable for an oversized recliner. If you use it on one, it will be pretty difficult for you to get the fabric tucked in and will only give the recliner partial coverage. In the worst case scenario, the elastic edges won’t really sit well. 



    Pros

    • Lasts for a long time
    • Easy to wash and maintain
    • Simple to install
    • Comes with detailed user instructions




    Cons

    • Not suitable for oversized recliners



    3. Great Bay Home Modern Velvet Plush Recliner Slipcover

    The Great Bay Home Modern Velvet Plush Recliner Slipcover is so plush and velvety that you won’t be able to resist cuddling on it. This high-quality polyester slipcover will have you at hello! It is super comfortable and adds a dash of style to your room.

    Great Bay Home Modern Velvet Plush Recliner Slipcover....
    • Protects furniture from spills, stains, wear and tear with...
    • Fits most armchairs up to 40 inches wide

    Why Did We Like It?

    This recliner cover is made of 95% polyester and 5% spandex and hardly experiences any wear and tear with use. It can easily last for a few years with little to no maintenance. The spandex-coated outdoor fabric is also super soft and will help you take long naps on your recliner. 

    Furthermore, it is one of those recliner covers that provide the ultimate protection to your furniture. Once you put it on, your recliner will be protected against dust and stains. Even if you have children in the house, this cover will make sure that no harm is caused to your recliner.  

    Moreover, you can rest assured that when you put it on correctly, it will stay in place and not move much as it is slip-resistant. You will find a helpful installation guide on the package, and that, along with the elasticized bottom, will make installation extremely simple. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    Unfortunately, on receiving the product, we noticed that the side pockets on this recliner slipcover were two shades darker than the rest of the cover. It looked a little odd, honestly, when viewed from particular angles. If this problem had been rectified, we would have scored this product even higher. 



    Pros

    • Easy to clean
    • Super comfortable to sit on
    • Lasts for a long time
    • Made of thicker fabrics




    Cons

    • Colors of the side pockets do not match



    4. Easy-Going Recliner Sofa Slipcover

    Next up, we have the Easy-Going Recliner Sofa Slipcover. This has managed to garner much popularity in the last few years because of the exceptional workmanship that goes into its making. The faux suede fabric is of excellent quality and is relatively easy to maintain.  

    Sale
    Easy-Going Recliner Sofa Slipcover Reversible Sofa Cover...
    • HIGH QUALITY: Elegant quilted texture, thick microfiber,...
    • DIMENSIONS: Sofa Cover: Fit seat width 18-19 in, please...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The first thing to take note of about this product is its exceptional build quality. It comes in an elegant quilted texture that adds a great deal of definition to the piece. 

    The microfiber is pretty thick and will last for a long time with minimal maintenance. Plus, because it is water-resistant, its lifespan is considerably extended. 

    Coming to maintenance, as we have mentioned already, it is super convenient. You can put it directly in your washing machine for a quick wash. A word of advice: Refrain from using bleach or harsh detergents as that might damage the color of the furniture covers. 

    Lastly, what adds to the ease of use is the fact that it comes with elastic straps that prevent the slipcover from sliding. So, even if you are sitting on it for a long time, it will remain in place and not move an inch. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    While we have no complaints about the quality of the product, we need to mention that it does not come with a proper instruction guide. So, unless you have prior experience of using recliner covers, you might find it challenging to put this slipcover on the recliner. 



    Pros

    • Maintenance is easy
    • Durable product
    • High-quality build
    • Cleaning is simple




    Cons

    • Does not come with proper user instructions



    5. Prince Deco Stretch Recliner Slipcover

    We are almost reaching the end of our list, and next up, we have the Prince Deco Stretch Recliner Slipcover. Thanks to the high-quality blend, it is super comfortable to use, and no doubt looks stellar. 

    PrinceDeco Recliner Chair Cover Stretch 1 Piece Recliner...
    • UNIQUE FEATURES AND FABRIC: This soft textured stretch...
    • PERFECT FITTED DIMENSIONS: These cozy and fantastic recliner...

    Why Did We Like It?

    This recliner chair slipcover comes in a range of colors, and there is one for everyone. It is made of polyester and spandex blend and delivers a soft texture that will make you want to sit on the recliner for long. The thick knit material gives the recliner cover an exquisite look and will surely catch everyone’s attention. 

    And this recliner cover not only offers versatility in terms of colors but also in the types of recliners that it is suitable for. So, you can go for this option irrespective of whether your recliner chair is manual or electric. 

    Not to mention, we loved the shrink-resistant feature that ensures that the fits stay well even after multiple washes. It is super easy to clean too; you can wash it by hand or put it in the washing machine. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    A word of warning: This item is not waterproof. So, if any liquid falls on this thick material, there is a chance that it will seep in and leave permanent stains. If you accidentally drop something on it, we suggest that you wash it immediately. 



    Pros

    • Easy installation
    • Available in a range of colors
    • Very stretchable
    • Soft to touch




    Cons

    • Not waterproof



    6. RHF 4 Separate Piece Velvet Recliner Slipcovers

    To enjoy a cozy experience on your recliner, try the Rose Home Fashion RHF 4 Separate Piece Velvet Recliner Slipcovers. The soft velvety material is soft to touch and makes sitting on it super comfortable. 

    Why Did We Like It?

    What makes this recliner cover stand out is the premium quality fabric that goes into its making. Owing to the quality, the material is pretty stretchable and can even fit an oversized recliner. Putting on and taking off this cover for maintenance work is simple. 

    Other than that, we couldn’t help but marvel at the excellent build quality of the slipcover. The knitting is super neat and will ensure that the slipcover stays in place even after hours of use. So, your sofa will always have a clean look and will not be ruffled. 

    And when it comes to convenience, this product gets some extra scores. You will find side pockets on it that can be used to keep phones or books while you take a nap. The side pockets work as a great storage place. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    The only complaint that we have is with its packaging quality. On receiving the product, we noticed that the box in which it was delivered was tapered around the corners, and we were worried if the product was safe. Luckily, it was!



    Pros

    • Made of high-quality material
    • Excellent build
    • Comes with storage pockets
    • Easy to clean




    Cons

    • Packaging needs to be improved



    7. MarCielo FBA Recliner Slipcover

    There was no way we were going to wrap up our list without having mentioned the MarCielo FBA Recliner Slipcover Burgundy. This furniture cover is suitable for most sofas, recliners, love seats, and even chairs, making it very versatile and popular among users. 

    Sale
    MarCielo Stretch Recliner Slipcover, 1-Piece Couch Cover,...
    • 360 DEGREE COMPREHENSIVE PROTECTION: The recliner stretch...
    • FITS MOST RECLINER: This recliner cover is one size fits...

    Why Did We Like It?

    When you are looking for a full-coverage slipcover for your recliner, this can be the best bet. It is made in a way that it can enwrap your recliner completely, thereby protecting it from unwanted damage, stains, and, most importantly, everyday wear and tear. 

    Moreover, the versatility that it puts on the table is nothing short of incredible. It is a one-size-fits-most slipcover and is suitable to be used on most types of chairs and recliners. The fit is perfect, and the slipcover stays in place without shifting or moving. 

    Most importantly, maintaining this item is pretty convenient. Once it gets dirty, you can simply send it for a machine wash and let it dry naturally. It is wrinkle-resistant and does not develop creases at all. Other than that, you will also find side pockets on it where you can store essential items.

    What Could've Been Better?

    Unfortunately, we were not really happy with their customer support team. We had a few queries, and we got a response very late on reaching out to them. To be honest, we expected a more prompt reply from a brand as good as this one. 



    Pros

    • Provides full-coverage
    • Build to last
    • Easy to maintain
    • Simple installation process




    Cons

    • Customer service needs improvement



     

    Recliner Slipcovers Buying Guide

    Now that we have given you a detailed round-up of the top products, were you able to make a choice? 

    We understand if you are facing some trouble in making your decision. Actually, there are a few other factors that you need to take note of to understand what would be the best pick for you.

    Let’s take a look at some of those factors!

    1. Coverage Provided By The Recliner Slipcover

    When choosing recliner slipcovers, you can opt for two types of coverage: full or partial. To be honest, there are advantages and disadvantages to both and you should select one that works best for you. 

    If you choose to go for a full coverage recliner cover, it will no doubt deliver a reupholstered look to the recliner. However, you need to keep in mind that full coverage slipcovers are a task to put on and take off. 

    Partial coverage recliner covers, on the other hand, are quite easy to put on. But they mostly look like a shield and would not cover your recliner in entirety. So, the chances are that some portions of our worn out recliner might still be visible after you put on the slipcover. 

    2. Maintenance

    Keeping your slipcover in the right condition, especially when it is a full-coverage variant, can be pretty challenging. You might need to send it for a wash often if you have kids or pets in the house. In case you have problems washing it frequently, it is best that you go for one that is waterproof.  

    If the slipcover is not waterproof, at least check if the fabric is good and that the color will hold even after multiple washes. 

    remote control for furniture, chairs, sofa bed

    Verdict

    That’s all we have for you today!

    We hope that learning about the best recliner chair covers has been fun so far and that you won’t face trouble in selecting one anymore. Making the right choice is essential because your recliner needs special care, especially when you have children in the house. 

    If you are still having second thoughts, let us help by letting you in on our favorites. The Easy-Going Recliner Sofa Slipcover takes the award for being an all-round model. Apart from that, if you are looking for an item that is easy to install and maintain, we would suggest that you give the H.VERSAILTEX Stretch Recliner Slipcover a try. 

    For any suggestions that you would like to share with us, feel free to write to us in the comments box below. And for more exciting reads, do not forget to keep a watch on this space. 

    Until next time, bye! 

    Related Articles

    8 Best Battery Pack For Power Recliners

    7 Best Bungee Cord Chair

    8 Best Bean Bag Chairs

    How Many Types of Massage Chairs Are There?

    Taking on a major remodeling project can be challenging, especially without the right tools.

    Usually, everyone has a collection of handy tools in the house like a screwdriver, a wrench, and maybe a hammer. Most experienced users and DIY enthusiasts even add power tools to their collection. Now, the thing about power tools is that they make the job ten times easier. However, you must know how to use them.

    There are too many to choose from these days, especially when it comes to saws. Moreover, choosing the right kind of power tool is the actual task. If you’re a DIY enthusiast or beginner looking into power tools, this is the guide to read.

    We are here to help you pick between the all-important jigsaw and reciprocating saw. Both these tools can be super beneficial for different types of cutting, but usually, only one is enough. 

    So, without further ado, let’s get right into it.

    Reciprocating Saw Vs. Jigsaw

    Reciprocating Saw Vs. Jigsaw

    Power Saws - What Are Those?

    The world of construction and demolition has become much more manageable. Now, even the simplest tools such as a saw or a screwdriver have an electrically operated version. A power saw is one such tool that has been enhanced to provide more using less effort. 

    With the creation of power saws, it has become tremendously easy to cut through more challenging materials without much strain. But that is just one aspect of it as it is not just physical strain that this solves but also time. 

    Cutting a massive piece of wood might be possible with a manual tool, but the chances of it taking half a day are also pretty high. That is why these tools are rather sought after as a complicated cutting job can be done in half the time. Furthermore, this is why professionals use them for more extensive projects.

    A reciprocating saw and a jigsaw are both power saws, but they are not the only ones. There are many like them which can be used for different kinds of projects. Such tools include tile cutters, miter saws, panel saws, and of course, chainsaws. 

    What To Consider When Buying a Power Saw

    Whether this is your first power tool or the 100th, each time, there have to be certain factors that need to be kept in mind before buying them. Since each tool is different from the other, the mechanics and the ideal projects for the tools vary. 

    Here are some of the things you have to keep in mind when thinking about buying a power tool

    1. Materials

    The first thing to look into would be what kind of material you need to cut with the power tool. While most power tools work on all materials, others are only for specific materials, like a tile cutter. 

    A tile cutter cannot be used for cutting anything other than tiles, and similarly, only a tile cutter can be used to cut tiles. This is why it is crucial to make a list of materials to ascertain if any special power tools will be required.

    1. Price 

    Having a budget in mind is a good idea, especially if you need to buy more than one power tool. Depending on the project, you may need more than one tool to carry out the whole project effectively. 

    It will not help if most of the project budget is spent on one tool in such situations. Keep a set budget aside for each tool, and then head out to look for one. 

    1. Type Of Cut

    Are you looking for longer cuts or shorter ones? Precise and delicate cuts or rough cuts? It is essential to ask these questions so you can direct yourself to the appropriate tool.

    Some power tools, like reciprocating tools, cut horizontally, making them ideal for specific projects. Furthermore, many tools have differently angled cuts that are specific to certain materials and projects.

    1. Type Of Project 

    Larger projects will require tools that use more power and brute force to cut through objects instead of smaller projects. Make a note of the kind of work you will be undertaking before buying a power saw.

    1. Frequency 

    Power tools can be expensive, which is why it is not possible to keep buying them. If you plan on using one frequently, we advise you to go for something high quality and durable. That being said, it might be a bit out of budget, but it will also be a valuable investment. 

    However, we recommend not spending much money on big power tools for smaller and short-term projects. There are several budget-friendly options, although they might not be as durable.

    1. Features

    Most power saws must come with multiple blades and blade guides; this makes using the tool much more effortless. In addition, they should include features that make the tool safe, like safety locks and comfortable, like padded grip handles. 

    It is important to remember that a power tool does have a lot of power and vibration. For this reason, comfort should be of utmost importance.

    Reciprocating Saw Vs. Jigsaw Compared

    Essentially, they aren’t too different from each other. Many professionals would even say that a jigsaw is in the same family as a reciprocating saw. However, the main difference comes in because of the different types of cuts it offers.

    But before getting into the difference between the two tools and determining which is better, let’s first look at them individually. 

    Reciprocating Saw

    What Is It?

    Usually used in construction or electrical work, a reciprocating saw is a bit like an electrical hacksaw. It works horizontally, i.e., the blade moves forward and then back to cut through materials, which is precisely how the tool gets its name.

    The best part about it is that it can be used for more rough-cutting, which is usually not what power tools are used for. As reciprocating saws pack a punch, these are primarily used by professionals for demolition purposes. 

    Since it is a professional tool, it is made to cut through anything from metal to plastic to wood and even plaster. No wonder so many people opt for this tool! Plus, you can use multiple blades on one tool according to your requirement.

    Purpose 

    As we mentioned, cutting with a reciprocating saw means having rough, non-intricate cuts, and usually, that kind of work is best for demolition and remodeling. Most people use reciprocating saws for DIY projects at home or any small-scale cutting work. 

    Many reciprocating saws cut right through ceramic as well, which makes this the ideal tool for professionals. As the tool has a lot of power, it is best utilized in the open, where you can demolish wooden and metal materials. Anything less, and you’d be missing out on its true power and what it can offer. 

    Mechanics 

    You already know how it works; the blade works in a forward and backward movement. Since it is like an electric hacksaw, the cuts will be straight, albeit a little rough around the edges. Additionally, different kinds of blades can cut through multiple materials and be attached to the primary tool. 

    Keep In Mind

    While the reciprocating saw is quite powerful, the power can be a bit restricted with cordless saws. This tool is known for its power which is why it is often chosen to carry out construction or demolition work. However, it is essential to keep in mind that cordless versions have batteries that are bound to run low on power after prolonged use.

    If you are looking for an unending power supply for a big project, it is better to opt for a corded version. The alternative is to buy a cordless version with enough battery backup to last for a while.

    The next thing to remember is that even though corded versions offer more power, they can restrict movement. When working on a big project, it is essential to move around comfortably, which might not always be possible if a 6-foot long cord is coming in the way.



    Pros

    • Usually available in electric and non-electric variants
    • Better for demolition projects
    • Multiple blades
    • Possible to make flush cuts
    • Can perform overhead cutting




    Cons

    • Not ideal for intricate cutting



    Jigsaw

    What Is It?

    We weren’t kidding when we mentioned that jigsaws might be an extension of the reciprocating saw family. These power tools are very similar to the reciprocating saw in terms of looks, but the jigsaw has a circular cutting motion, unlike its sibling. 

    The blades in the jigsaw move vertically in a circular motion rather than a forward-backward motion. Many users love that it is incredibly lightweight, making it easy to carry and work with. Additionally, unlike the reciprocating saw, these are ideal for more delicate cuts.

    For a tool that is in the same family, they sure do have a ton of differences. Let’s explore a little more. 

    Purpose 

    Unlike reciprocating saws, jigsaws are perfect for precision cutting. The movement by the thin blades of the jigsaw ensures fine cuts and more intricacy in work. Furthermore, the thin blades allow the user to use stencils for fine cutting as well. 

    It is not as powerful as the reciprocating saw, but it can be used for multiple tasks and even smaller DIY tasks at home. Moreover, every jigsaw can be used with numerous blades as they are mostly detachable, making it a pretty handy tool to have at home. Most DIY enthusiasts and professionals use this for remodeling and metalwork. 

    Mechanics 

    This is a bit different from reciprocating saws despite being similar as the blade is attached vertically. Once connected, the blade will move in an oscillatory motion and cut the material in the process. 

    The only thing to remember about this tool is that it is not as powerful by default and needs more power for some materials. The cutting would have to be done at a higher speed to give the jigsaw more power, especially to cut metal or wood. 

    Keep In Mind

    Jigsaws are rarely ever used for massive projects, which is why power is not an issue. But that does not mean it cannot be used for heavy-duty work. When using a jigsaw for something big, make sure it has enough power to handle the task. For this reason, a corded jigsaw is a more suitable option as the supply of power is consistent. 

    A jigsaw usually has multiple features and aspects to look into before it is used for a project, and it all comes down to the requirements. If the project you’re working on requires a lot of movement from the tool, ensuring the jigsaw has precise steering is necessary. 

    On a similar note, some features need to be looked into for the user’s benefit. Minor additions to the tool like anti-vibration or comfort grip make the tool more fun to use. Plus, it makes it easier to have more precise cuts if the user is comfortable using the tool. 



    Pros

    • Ideal for making fine cuts
    • Switchable blades
    • Lightweight and comfortable
    • Can be used on any material
    • Cordless models available




    Cons

    • Can’t be used for major projects



    Main Differences Between Reciprocating Saws And Jigsaws

    • Cuts

    One of the biggest differences between the two is the cuts they can make. Reciprocating saws are much better suited for jobs that require rough cutting and demolition. It offers cuts that are blunter in both horizontal and vertical strokes. The only thing is that those strokes are short, which is why they tend to be rougher. 

    On the other hand, jigsaws offer fine and more precise cuts, making them perfect for finishing a project. Since the latter’s blade works in an oscillating motion, working on parallel or curved surfaces is easy. The only thing to remember here is that the more power it has, the more efficiently it will work.

    • Materials 

    Both tools can be used on a variety of materials since they have multiple blade add-ons. But, considering that a reciprocating saw is quite powerful, it is best used on thick and tough materials like metal or hard plastic at the start of the project. 

    On the other hand, a jigsaw offers similar strength and power. It can also be used on metal, plastic, and even ceramic but towards the end, for finishing. 

    • Weight

    Saws and power tools, in general, have a bit of weight in the body. This is why jigsaws and reciprocating saws have a little bit of an advantage as they are both lighter tools when compared to saws in general.

    However, when compared to each other, a reciprocating tool is lighter than a jigsaw. Most reciprocating saws weigh around 2-4lbs while jigsaws are around 5-10lbs, making the former a better option for extended work periods. But either way, they are both light and portable power tools.

    • Design 

    As mentioned earlier, the reciprocating saw is based on a simple hacksaw design as the blade movement is forward and back. 

    A few features of this tool are the blade, grip, and trigger. For ease of usage, this power tool also has a rear handle. Additionally, high-end models might have a feature to collect dust too. All in all, the design is quite simple, with a few additional features to make the cutting more effortless. 

    The jigsaw design is a bit more complicated and consists of multiple parts. Most of the time, there are more than ten features that together form the jigsaw. Some of those include a clamp, blade guard, footplate, lock button, and many more. Despite the difference, in theory, the tools at first glance don’t look too different.

    • Price 

    Price-wise the range for both tools is quite vast, and they are both readily available at affordable prices. A budget jigsaw usually starts at $30, and a reciprocating saw of similar quality should be around $20-$30. However, the jigsaw seems to be a bit cheaper than the reciprocating tool. 

    However, the higher end of the tools is where the difference comes in. A good-quality jigsaw can easily be purchased for less than $500, but a good-quality reciprocating saw is usually close to $1000. Even a mid-range reciprocating saw is over $100, while a jigsaw of similar quality is about $60-$70.

    When To Use A Reciprocating Saw And A Jigsaw

    We have mentioned time and again that these tools aren’t too different from each other. But, they do have specific purposes and work best in certain projects. This part of the article gives you a better idea of when a reciprocating saw and a jigsaw should be used. 

    1. Carving Work

    Carving work can be done for multiple projects such as for signs, and in such projects, precision is of utmost importance. Especially when carving intricate designs and letters, everything carved should look clean and appealing. This is where a jigsaw will be of more use than a reciprocating saw.

    The former is known to work best for fine cuts, and hence the work produced will be of a higher quality. All you need to do is cut over the traced design or letters, which is effortless when doing it with a jigsaw and an appropriate blade.

    That being said, carving work can be done when using the correct blade on the reciprocating saw, but it will not be as clean. Since this machine is not made for delicate cutting, the result might not look as appealing as you’d like. 

    1. Clearing

    Planning to tear down a big piece of wood or get rid of some metal pipes outside the house? Get a reciprocating saw. 

    Since work like this usually happens at the beginning of demolition or during renovation, the cut does not matter. Even if the material is not cut most accurately, what matters is that it should be out of the way. This is why a reciprocating saw is a much better option as compared to a jigsaw. 

    The reciprocating saw will cut through the material using less effort in no time. While this kind of work can be done with a jigsaw, the chances of getting it done quickly are very low. This is mainly because a jigsaw does not have that kind of power or strength in the blade.

    1. Outdoor Cutting

    Now we aren’t saying that someone has to be a DIY enthusiast or a professional to be using these tools. Sometimes, regular day-to-day work can also be sorted out using a power tool. Take cutting branches or bushes, for example; while there are dedicated tools for cutting them, one of the two saws can be used too.

    You might have guessed it - it is a reciprocating saw. It is pretty evident since the mechanics of a jigsaw do not make it ideal for branch cutting. If you have taken it upon yourself to get rid of a few stray branches and prune a tree, then the horizontal cutting of the reciprocating saw will be ideal. 

    Moreover, it’s not just branches - even small trees can be cut using this tool. As already established, it is more than capable of handling thick pieces of wood, making it the perfect tool for clearing a lawn on a Sunday morning. 

    1. Fabric Cutting

    This one may seem a bit odd because scissors still exist in this world, but thick fabric can be cut with a jigsaw. While most people prefer using scissors - personal or professional-grade - jigsaw provides a much smoother and even cut. 

    This is because a scissor, although being used for its primary purpose, is still a manual tool. A jigsaw can only provide accurate and precise cuts in half the time and effort because it is a power tool. Jigsaws even have a specific blade to take on cutting fabric like carpets. 

    Needless to say, this is not a job for a reciprocating tool.

    1. Refurbishment

    A full refurbishment and remodeling project is one of the few projects where having both kinds of saws is quite handy. It also depends on what type of remodeling and refurbishment project it is and what part you need to carry out. 

    For example, a whole kitchen needs to be refurbished with new cabinets, new platforms, etc. If you have taken it upon yourself to see the entire thing through, it is best to have both a reciprocating saw and a jigsaw. 

    The former will be of use in the beginning - to remove and demolish old wood and metal parts of the kitchen. This type of tool is a much better option when you have to remove small items like nails.

    While the latter can be of assistance to cut kitchen pipes consistently and also for carving cabinets. Many people use jigsaws while installing countertops as well as it is easier to cut small holes with them. Plus, it has dedicated blades for this type of work.

    In a nutshell, with both tools by your side, remodeling projects can be done quickly and with great precision. 

    Which Is Safer?

    We mentioned before that despite the difference in features between the two, both tools look the same. However, the jigsaw is much easier to control since it does not have as much power as the reciprocating saw. 

    There may be more features in a jigsaw, but it has been made with plenty of safety features that make it safe. Moreover, the blades that come with a jigsaw are not as big as those with reciprocating saws. It’s pretty clear that large blades combined with the immense power of the reciprocating saw do not scream “safe” for a new user. 

    If this is your first time using a saw, we would recommend using a jigsaw. This will allow you to get used to that tool and the power that a “power tool” can offer. Only after that should you move on to something more extensive, as a reciprocating saw.

    Reciprocating Saw vs. Jigsaw FAQ

    What Is A Sawzall?

    A Sawzall is the same as a reciprocating saw but made by a company called Milwaukee Tools. This name is trademarked by their company and became synonymous with the term “reciprocating saw.” It was the first of its kind to enter the market in the 1950s. Since then, it has maintained its quality.

    Can Bricks Be Cut With A Reciprocating Saw Or Jigsaw?

    You might have better luck trying to cut brick with a reciprocating saw. While both tools can cut through concrete, bricks are a bit thick and need more power.

    Is It Okay To Buy Both The Tools?

    Ideally, that would be the best way to go about it. Since you can use both tools for multiple purposes, it is best to have them both. The only thing to keep in mind is your budget and frequency of using the tools.

    Can A Reciprocating Saw Be Used As A Jigsaw?

    Yes, indeed it can! Many reciprocating saws do have blades that cut in a vertical motion. However, the jigsaw is more precise as the power is not as strong. So if you’re only looking to cut in an up-and-down fashion, then a reciprocating saw can be used, but go for a jigsaw for precise cuts.

    Reciprocating Saw vs. Jigsaw

    Conclusion - Is There A Clear Winner?

    With that, we finally come to the end of this comprehensive guide on reciprocating saws and jigsaws. 

    We know you are looking for a clear winner, so the reciprocating saw is much better, in our opinion. It has more power and is fit to be used regularly. However, if you must buy a power tool, why not get both? 

    The chances of you taking on a demolition project is as high (or low) as taking on a sign-making project. You never know when the need for one tool or the other comes around, so there is no harm in having both. 

    But, in the end, it all comes down to what you need. Let us know which one you ended up going with. On that note, we shall sign off and see you again soon!

    Until next time!

    Related Articles

    Different Types of Saws & How to Use Them

    Table Saw Vs. Circular Saw  

    10 Inch Vs. 12 Inch Miter Saw 

    Single Bevel Vs. Double Bevel Miter Saw  

    DeWalt DW745 Vs DWE7480

    7 Best Bandsaws for Resawing

    5 Best Toe Kick Saws

    13 Best Sliding Miter Saw 

    13 Best Hybrid Table Saw  

    11 Best Track Saws 

    13 Best Hybrid Table Saw 

    11 Best Belt Sanders Right Now

    9 Best Spindle Sander

    9 Best Hand Sanders  

    13 Best Palm Sanders

    If you’re a fan of smoky grilled meat, love hosting people, and have space around the house, owning a grill is a wise choice.

    Think about it: isn’t it fun to grill meat at home for friends and family on a warm Sunday afternoon? However, figuring out which pellet grill is ideal can be quite a task because there are so many factors to consider. 

    However, it’s no secret that Rec Tec and Taeger are the top two contenders. And as human beings, we are compelled to compare. From superheroes to supercars, there can only be one winner. And a pellet grill is no different. 

    If you are looking to know which brand is superior, you’re in the right place. In today’s guide, we are comparing Rec Tec and Traeger on various aspects to decide which might be the ideal one.

    So without further ado, let’s jump right into it!

    Rec Tec vs. Traeger | All You Need to Know

    A Brief Overview Of Each Brand

    Before we get into comparing the two, let’s talk about the grills they both have to offer. Since both these brands are high-quality, they have produced quite a few grills that have become popular in the market. 

    Some of the well-known Rec Tec grills are the RT-590 and the RT-700 pellet grills. And when it comes to Traeger, the Ironwood Series 885 and the Traeger Pro Series 575 are just as popular. This brings us back to figuring out which one, out of the variety of options available, is the best. 

    To begin with, let’s look at a brief overview and history of each brand to understand them better. 

    Traeger| An Overview 

    Now, while we aren’t comparing on the basis of who got here first, Traeger did set the trend. In 1985, Joe Traeger was the first person to invent pellet grills. He knew from the very start that this invention would change the culinary industry, and hence he patented it in 1986. 

    As the brand grew, so did its reputation. Traeger was the only trusted name for pellet grills, and it lived up to it. However, the brand gained traction not only because it was the only one making pellet grills but also because of its quality and reliability. But, the patent was only for 20 years. 

    In 2006, once the patent expired, many more companies began manufacturing pellet grills. This made the market more competitive. Joe Traeger ended up selling the business, and soon Traeger moved overseas for production. But, despite the ever-rising competition, it remained as one of the best and most reliable names.

    Plus, as the technology advanced, so did a lot of Traeger grills. The competition in the market has led them to build new and improved grills with hi-tech features and wider cooking areas while maintaining their high-quality and premium status. Some of their newer models are Wi-Fi enabled, which is pretty impressive.

    Rec Tec| An Overview

    Out of the many brands that took advantage of Traeger’s expired patent, Rec Tec was the most successful. The company came into existence in 2009, which was three years after Traeger’s patent expired. It started with just two friends who loved to grill and were always looking to improve their grilling experience. 

    What started in a garage is now one of the best pellet grill brands in the market. But this isn’t just because they hopped on board at the right time. Rec Tec (now known as recteq) has always focused on manufacturing high-quality products using new technology. Plus, their grills have bull-horn-shaped handles (who wouldn’t love that!).

    Since the company was always about trying to have the best grilling experience, we can see how temperature control can be a big deal. Getting the proper heat and smoke is crucial, and that is why Rec Tec grills focus a lot on temperature control and have digital controllers to reach precise temperatures.

    Traeger vs. Rec Tec

    As we mentioned earlier, both these brands have made a name for themselves with not just one or two products but many. Each of these has a vast catalog of grills at different price points with varying features. 

    To make the comparison easier, we have made a list of the most important features when selecting a grill. Whether you are looking online or in a store, making a note of these features will give you a better idea of the grill’s quality. Hence, picking the one that’s more suited to your needs will not be as challenging a task.

    1. Price

    Without a doubt, price is one of the essential aspects when selecting a grill. No matter how nice and efficient any product might be, it is always advisable to buy something that will not rob you of your life’s savings. Or at least it should have enough to offer to compensate for the price.

    That being said, both Traeger and Rec Tec are high-end brands with expensive grills. They are not unaffordable, but even their basic grills can be considered premium, given their name and quality. So, it would be futile to look at any of these brands if you are looking for cheap and super budget-friendly grills.

    However, out of the two, we suggest going for Rec Tec. Not only is it a little less expensive than Traeger, but it also has more value for the price, especially if you want a more advanced grill.

    [easyazon_image align="none" height="333" identifier="B07GL7PNPQ" locale="US" src="https://m.media-amazon.com/images/I/511yj0k4EWL._SL500_.jpg" tag="homesthetics0a-20" width="500" type="image" link_id="240728"]

    1. Temperature Range

    When it comes to pellet grills, it is always better to buy one with a wide temperature range. It makes room for more versatile cooking. With a wide temperature range, you can smoke different kinds of meat and cook it without having to worry about finding the ideal temperature. 

    When it comes to Rec Tec and Traeger, both offer incredible temperature ranges. However, Rec Tec is a better performer in this regard since the range is wider and it has a “FULL” setting which increases the heat even more. Most Rec Tec models have a range of 200℉ to 500℉, and the FULL setting takes the heat beyond 500.

    For most Traegers models, the max temperature is about 450℉ with just a few models going up to 500℉. The minimum temperature it can go down to is 165℉. So clearly, the difference in temperature ranges is not much. It’s just that Rec Tec’s FULL setting gives the brand advantage, especially if you prefer grilling to smoking.

    1. Construction

    It goes without saying that both brands only use high-quality materials to construct their grills. They both offer grills that have sturdy built and tight fittings that will last a long time. However, there is a difference between the two since they both use different high-quality materials.

    Most of the components in Rec Tec grills are made out of stainless steel, with the exception of the heating rods that are made out of ceramic. On the other hand, Traeger grills are made with powder-coated steel, and only the handles are made with stainless steel. 

    Some of the high-end Trager models have stainless steel bodies and grates as well as double-wall insulation. In this aspect, the Rec Tec models are a bit more favorable since all models have stainless steel bodies, firepot, grates, and drip pans. 

    Rec Tec has an advantage when you compare the two since stainless steel is rust-resistant and will last longer than powder-coated steel. Plus, the ceramic heating road also has a long life and might even outlive the other components. 

    1. Cooking Space

    The amount of space that is enough for cooking is very subjective. If you like to host people and cook in large quantities, then a wider cooking space is necessary. But if you’re new to using grills and are just testing the waters, then maybe getting a smaller one is wiser. 

    But how do you decide exactly how much cooking space you need? To put it in perspective, a full-size turkey or a dozen burgers will need at least 300 square feet or more. Rec Tec and Traeger offer grills with varying cooking spaces; it all comes down to what is ideal for you. 

    The only difference is that a larger cooking space is available mainly in Traeger’s premium models, while Rec Tec offers ample cooking space in all models. In addition, Rec Tec’s grills have additional space in every model that extends the area by 200-300 square feet.

    1. Pellet Hopper

    People who use the grill multiple times a week know how massively inconvenient it is to refill the hopper constantly. After all, who wants to deal with yet another tedious task more than once after prepping the food. 

    To avoid dealing with constant refilling of the hopper, especially when you’re smoking something overnight, we suggest looking at hoppers sized at 20 lbs or more. Rec Tec and Traeger both have grills that can meet any requirement. 

    Most of the Rec Tec Models start at 20 pounds and go all the way to 40 pounds. On the other hand, Traeger’s models start at 18 pounds and go to a maximum of 24. If you are looking for a grill with a smaller hopper size, like 20 or 24 pounds, both brands stand tied for us.

    However, since Rec Tec has much larger sizes to offer, it has a wider variety to choose from. 

    [easyazon_image align="none" height="334" identifier="B07GLK1NC2" locale="US" src="https://m.media-amazon.com/images/I/51lpYXyCPpL._SL500_.jpg" tag="homesthetics0a-20" width="500" type="image" link_id="240729"]

    1. Temperature Control

    Temperature control is an important aspect of the smoking and grilling process. While Traeger has stepped up in this aspect over the years, Rec Tec always prioritized it. Overall they both perform equally efficiently. However, one is more traditional than the other. 

    Traeger has a Pro D2 controller that keeps the grill at the desired temperature within a +/- of 15℉. In the premium models, the grills have a feature where the temperature increases at a faster rate in case the lid is opened. This is quite beneficial since opening the lid to check on the meat does affect the cooking process, as it does in baking.

    However, if you are looking for something a bit more advanced, Rec Tec is the way to go. Not only does it have a digital temperature screen (as opposed to Traeger’s standard temperature dial), it also Smart Grill Technology. This technology keeps the temperature inside consistent for a long time.

    Plus, the temperature stays within a range of +/- 5℉, making it a lot more accurate. It also calculates when the ignitor should be turned on/off and how many pellets it needs to meet the required temperature. And all this is in addition to the auto-shutdown and cool down feature.

    In a nutshell, they both have different things to offer. If simple and traditional is your style, then pick Traeger. If not, you have Rec Tec. Functionality-wise, they are both accurate and phenomenal at temperature control.

    1. Warranty

    The one thing people check after the price of any device is the warranty period, primarily if they are investing in something expensive. Saving up a fortune and buying something which only lasts for about 3-4 months is everyone’s nightmare. 

    This logic extends to grills too. It can be pretty expensive, but knowing a company can cover certain damages until a specific time is relieving. When it comes to Rec Tec and Traeger, it is evident that they will last long. However, having a warranty on the models is the cherry on top. 

    For most of the Rec Tec grills, the brand has a six-year warranty. We have established that it is a sturdy piece of equipment to have in the house. With this kind of warranty, not just you but your kids too be able to use these grills in the future.

    Trager, on the other hand, while also offering long-lasting grills, only has a warranty period of three years. And while it is impressive for a brand to provide a warranty for this long, it is no match for the six years by Rec Tec.

    1. Customer Service

    Now, this may not be an essential point for a lot of people. But, if you’re looking at the warranty, we know customer service centers and numbers are on your mind. 

    Needless to say, since both brands have been in the business long enough, they have responsive and support customer service teams. One of the best things about Traeger is that, despite being overseas, they have a knowledgeable team in the US that is always eager to help. This is why people don’t mind the hassle of contacting them.

    However, Rec Tec one-ups them here. Not only do they have a supportive team, but each grill includes the number of the company’s two founders. People who have had trouble with the grills have actually called the founders and spoken to them about their issue. 

    And it is this level of intimate connection that the brand is building with its customers that it is so popular. 

    [easyazon_image align="none" height="334" identifier="B07GLK1NC2" locale="US" src="https://m.media-amazon.com/images/I/51MOuH+itlL._SL500_.jpg" tag="homesthetics0a-20" width="500" type="image" link_id="240730"]

    1. Portability

    Grilling and smoking meat is not something that can only be done in the backyard on a sunny day. Some people love to take their grill into the great outdoors for a cooking session in the middle of the forest. It’s for people like them that grills need to be more portable and mobile.

    Whether it’s for tailgating or camping purposes, having a grill that cooks on the go can be very convenient. This is where Trager has gotten an opportunity to shine. Don’t get us wrong; Rec Tec has some fantastic options to choose from. Some of their models have foldable legs, and most of them have wheels. 

    But Trager has a much more extensive collection of mobile grills. They have prioritized mobility to a point where they have a whole collection of portable grills. Plus, they have a section of grills made for tailgating and one line that effortlessly cooks on tabletops. 

    1. Additional Features

    Now, coming to the fun bit. No matter what product you want to buy, as soon as there are some bells and whistles, it automatically amplifies its need. You may not need a Wi-Fi controlled fireplace for the winter, but it sure will be fun to have. 

    Similarly, both these grills have evolved with time. And as technology advances and people expect more from a product, they have successfully delivered. Be it wanting to control the grill remotely or have an indicator that lets you know when the meat is ready; both brands have done it all.

    • Traeger

    Let’s start Traeger. One of the most note-worthy features Trager has added to its grills is the wi-fire technology. Other than being a very smart name, it is also brilliant tech. Wi-fire technology is in-built in all Traeger grills, which allows you to connect the grill via wifi to an app.

    The app is quite convenient since it not only allows you to monitor the temperature, but you can monitor food temperature and also add more smoke. And all of this, with just a few taps on your smartphone or tablet. Plus, the high-end models also come with two meat probes.

    [easyazon_image align="none" height="334" identifier="B07T2FWL8Q" locale="US" src="https://m.media-amazon.com/images/I/512aIqM-fHL._SL500_.jpg" tag="homesthetics0a-20" width="500" type="image" link_id="240731"]

    Speaking of high-end models, those have low pellet sensors, grease management systems, and exhaust systems. Plus, if the grill does not work, the built-in error reporting feature can tell you why it’s not working. And, this is all just the tip of the iceberg. 

    • Rec Tec

    Moving on to Rec Tec. Much like Traeger, the Rec Tec grills also have an app that monitors and changes the temperature inside the grill. The app allows you to set timers and alerts that will notify you when the food is done.

    However, the cool stuff with Rec Tec is beyond the app. The grill itself allows for extra low and extra hot temperature settings. These can be set based on the amount of smoke requirement for the meat. 

    In addition, it has hopper lids that can also be used as a warmer. It also has interior lights that allow you to see the meat inside at night without carrying a torch everytime. It’s a small addition, but it’s the little things that count right! Plus, it has two temperature probes. 

    The best part about all this is that they are in all models, and not just the premium ones (as it is in Traeger). And, you can buy a smoke box that can cold smoke fish, cheese, and even sauces by paying a bit extra.

    In the end, it all comes down to what you need when it comes to these extra additions. However, we are partial to Rec Tec in this aspect since the fun features are accessible in all models.

    Rec Tec and Traeger: Recommendations  

    Having read all those features, you might tell that it is a challenging task to pick one true winner. 

    Both the brands have a lot to offer and are leading in one aspect or another. However, we felt it might make it easy for you to pick one if we list out a few of our recommendations based on the features above.

    Both, Rec Tec and Trager, have multiple grills to choose from, but the ones mentioned below are some of the most popular in the market. 

    [easyazon_image align="none" height="333" identifier="B07GL7PNPQ" locale="US" src="https://m.media-amazon.com/images/I/410DS0CgTvL._SL500_.jpg" tag="homesthetics0a-20" width="500" type="image" link_id="240732"]

    Rec Tech

    1. RT-700

    The RT-700 is one of the top-line grills by Rec Tec. If you plan to go all out with a grill, this is one of the top contenders. It has a massive 702 square inches cooking area with an additional 352 square inches. All in all, you can have a whopping 1054 square inches of cooking space.

    In addition to the massive cooking area, even the pellet hopper size is huge. It has a 40 lbs capacity, which makes it ideal for overnight cooks. The temperature range on this grill is between 200℉ and 500℉. So if you’re looking for a grill that can efficiently slow cook and roast at high temperatures, this is a great option.

    Other than that, it is equipped with most of the standard Rec Tec features like stainless steel construction, four wheels, and Smart Grill Technology. The grill even has a small towel ring, which we thought very convenient. 

    1. RT-590

    This is the mid-range model by Rec Tec that is perfect for families that love to grill. The cooking area is 590 square inches with an ability to expand to 772 square inches. It has a simple-looking body, and the octagonal shape allows more headroom inside so you can place larger pieces of meat like two turkeys! 

    This one may not be as large as the 700, but it is enough for families that grill occasionally (or eat two turkeys at once). It also has two stainless grates and a generously sized hopper at 30 lbs. With a hopper that size, you can get at least 30 hours of cooking done.

    As mentioned, all other features in Rec Tech are uniform. This also comes with two temperature probes, PID, and smart grill technology and has four wheels for each mobility.

    1. RT-340

    Finally, we have the low-range grill. It may cost less, but it sure does pack a punch. It has a lot to offer in addition to all the regular features like sturdy construction, dual meat probes, and Smart Grill technology. This one is perfect for people testing the waters with grills or for people that only need them very rarely. 

    The cooking area on this one is 340 square inches with an additional 171 square inches. It has a 20 lbs hopper capacity, and the temperature range is between 200℉ and 500℉. Much like its big brothers, this one too comes with a six-year warranty. The only difference between this and the bigger models is that this one has two wheels only.

    Traeger

    1. Timberline

    The models in the Timberline series are all considered top-end grills by Trager. These grills have three cooking areas of varying sizes. The smallest in the series has a total cooking area of 850 square inches, while the biggest is around 1300 square inches. 

    The hopper capacity on all the models in this series is 24 lbs, and the temperature range is between 160℉ and 450℉. The great thing about these grills is that it is double-walled and insulated for better heat retention. It also has adjustable racks. 

    These grills are all Wi-Fi enabled with Wi-Fire technology and can be controlled by the Traeger app. It also comes with a three-year warranty. 

    1. Ironwood

    Next in line is the mid-ranged Traeger grills. These are like the mid-ranged Rec Tec models because they are ideal for small families and frequent grilling in small quantities. The lower end of the series has a minimum of 650 square inches in terms of cooking area, while the higher end is around 800 square inches.

    They also have double side-wall insulation for better heat retention. It is slightly different from the Timberline series since only the side walls are insulated instead of the whole construction. The hopper capacity is 20 lbs, and it has a temperature range of 160℉ and 450℉. These grills will use a little less than a whole bag of pellets.

    Additionally, they can be controlled and monitored via Wi-Fi using the Traeger app and are protected under a three-year warranty.

    1. Pro

    Lastly, there is the Traeger Pro series grills which we recommend for new users. It’s a low-budget series from the brand and ideal for people getting used to grilling and smoking.

    Since these are entry-level grills, they do not come with double side-walls or adjustable grates, but they have plenty to offer. The smallest has a cooking area of 575 square inches, while the largest is 780 square inches. All these grills have a hopper size of 18 lbs. which is ideal if you don't grill very often.

    Like all the other grills by Traeger, these are also Wi-Fi enabled and can be controlled via the app. Plus, it comes with one thermometer probe to check the meat.

    Summing It Up

    Picking one winner is not easy when it comes to big brands like Rec Tec and Traeger. While both brands have certain advantages over the other, Rec Tec does stand out for us a bit more in terms of value. 

    To start with, since it is a newer brand, it has features that are more suited to the newer generation of grilling enthusiasts. Plus, they offer a lot more in terms of warranty, price, and customer service than most leading brands do. 

    However, in terms of grill performance, both brands are exceptional. Traeger has been in the business for a long time, so they know what they are doing. Ultimately, it all boils down to the user’s need, and so the ultimate choice is yours. On that note, we shall take your leave and be back soon with more such comprehensive guides and reviews.

    See you next time!

    Related Articles

    Traeger Renegade Pro Review – Traeger Pellet Grills

    Blackstone 28” Griddle Review – One of the Best Flat Top Grill Today

    5 Best Small Traeger Grill For Backyard & RV BBQs

    Saber R50SC1417 Gas Grill Review Under the Microscope

    Weber Spirit E-330 Review – Handpicked Gas Grills Reviewed

    Napoleon Prestige Pro 500 Under Review

    Weber Summit S-470 Gas Grill Under the Microscope

    Nexgrill vs. Weber | Budget Grills Product Comparison

    Broil King vs. Weber Grills | Two of the Best Compared

    13 Best Grills For Apartment Balcony at Tasty Prices

    Rainwater harvesting is one of the most self-sufficient and environment friendly methods of using water. You are collecting water from the sky as it falls, all the while trying to utilize is as much as you can, and without a price tag looming on it. To put things into perspective, if an inch of rain falls on a thousand square feet space, you can harvest about six hundred gallons from it. Six hundred gallons is a real lot!

    Some states in the U.S.A. do not allow rainwater harvesting, for reasons that are myriad and make little sense, but most states are perfectly happy with this practice. So, before you go on to making a rainwater harvesting system, do check the local laws for any regulations against this.

    But, if you’re in the clear and perhaps want to do it discreetly, these simple to make and easy to buy rainwater harvesting systems will do your job perfectly.

    1. Simple Rain Barrel Installation

    The rain barrel water harvesting system is quite easy. Through this do-it-yourself tutorial, you can make it in no time and start harvesting water in just four steps. Connecting a rain barrel system to the rainwater drainage pipes is an efficient way of collecting rainwater. What I also like about this tutorial is the reliance on visuals to explain the process, which is always a boon.

    More details at wikihow.com

    1. The Better Home DIY Rain Barrel

    Making a rain barrel itself isn’t a complicated process. All you require is a large trash can. Using a few tools you can repurpose it into a rain barrel and use it for gardening purposes if you like. Moreover, it is quite discreet and doesn’t stand out, which is most welcome.

    More details at bhg.com 

    1. Barrel Made Out Of PVC

    These giant water containers are robust and can be retrofitted as rain barrels very easily. They are large enough to not only feed the plants, but also any animals in your homestead. The added advantage of deciding to make this rain barrel system is the elaborate list of do’s and don’ts that come with the tutorial.

    More details at instructables.com 

    1. The HandyMan Barrel

    This rain barrel system idea is a little elaborate and comes with a series of pipes to attach, but in actuality isn’t all that difficult to make, or even costly. Just for a hundred dollars, you can have a rainwater harvesting system which will save on your future expenses. The number of gallons of water you are saving from buying or paying the bill for is huge. Plus, the tutorial is pretty detailed yet is easy to follow.

    More details at familyhandyman.com

    1. Simple Barrel

    Using a rain barrel is a pretty simple rainwater harvesting system in the first place. With this rain barrel, that process becomes even simpler. Nothing too elaborate, this rain barrel can be created within a day and with very basic skills. It will be enough for small level irrigation.

    More details at aeconline.org 

    1. Trashcan Barrel

    Trash can rain barrels are the simplest to make and also the least expensive. They are sturdy and work as large enough water containers. Helping your budget is the tutorial which is pretty basic to follow.

    More details at sites.google.com

    1. The Homesteading Rain Barrel

    This rainwater harvesting system uses a proper water tank often seen in big housing. It isn’t a typically used rain harvesting apparatus. But, it is an ideal setup for rain harvesting if you own a large irrigable land or a garden or if you keep livestock that requires constant water source. This can be most helpful as it helps in preserving rainwater for a much longer period of time.

    This option requires a large place to set it up, such as a shed or barn. This also comes with a solar purification system to keep water from contamination as well. Though large, this could be very helpful and certainly worth a look if you have ample space for it.

    More details at builditsolar.com 

    1. How-To Collect Rainwater

    A little different from contemporary rainwater harvesting method, this system can help in preserving a rather swell quantity of rainwater. It provides the in’s and out’s of rain catchment and should be studied a little before its installation.

    This system also warns you of any problems that it may encounter. It is easy to read and understand while installing this system.

    More details at watercache.com 

    1. The Incredibly Cheap Rain Barrel

    A very easy and affordable resource. Along with being functional, it is very easily available and for a low price. A rain barrel is much easy to handle and doesn't take much of space. It can be kept almost anywhere under the sky and is easier to maintain and check on.

    More details at instructables.com

    1. The YoungHouseLove Barrel

    This site provides you with detailed steps on how to make your own rainwater barrel. You can customise it in any manner you wish to, to make it look more beautiful and less boring. Though this does not provide you with a huge quantity, but it is very helpful when you want to water a few flower pot and/or vegetable patches.

    More details at younghouselove.com 

    1. The Large Gallon Barrel

    If you are looking for a bit larger harvesting system, you can consider this as an option. If you have a mid-sized livestock and a garden that is bigger than that, this system is perfect.

    The below mentioned website provides you with a detailed explanation on how to construct this type of water harvesting system. Instruction pictures are well explained and easy to understand even for someone who is novice in this.

    More details at instructables.com 

    1. The Enormously Elaborate Rainwater Harvesting System

    Yes, this seems like a tedious task and could look daunting as well. But, it is quite simple. You take 4 interlocked water tanks made of metal and make the system. The video is great at explaining and helping you out at finishing this task easily and fast.

    More details at youtube.com 

    1. The Simple To Make Rain Barrel

    This one’s quite handy a guide for learning not only how to harvest the rainwater, but how to make use of it. The rain barrels are easy to make once you follow the steps properly and in the end you are ready to harvest.

    More details at gardengatemagazine.com

    1. The Neat Can Barrel

    A very unique and detailed tutorial that helps you make a rain harvesting barrels out of discarded trash cans. The coolest part it, the instructions are made in a manner that they don't get confusing after a few steps.

    More details at 1craftylane.wordpress.com 

    1. The Flower Pot Barrel

    This rain barrel looks like a large flower pot and hence doesn’t stand out as a sore in your surroundings. It is quite easy to make and set up and the instructions do most of the work for you.

    More details at growforagecookferment.com 

    1. The Filtering Barrel

    This trash can rain barrel steps up its game. Not only does it filters it water, it also helps prevent debris from contaminating the stored water in your system. This is great as it prevents clogs. The tutorial shows you a cost effective way to make this system.

    More details at web.extension.illinois.edu 

    1. The Discreet Rain Barrel

    This is quite discreet a system to set up, and something you definitely require if there are regulations that prevent you from harvesting. It is robust, well-walled and easy to make following the simple yet detailed tutorial.

    1. Tutorial For Rain Barrel Installation

    Another video tutorial for visual builders, this rainwater harvesting system isn’t decorative but it does its job efficiently. Its simplicity makes it easy to build it and set it up. Just follow the tutorials.

    More details at youtube.com 

    1. The Discreet Bladder Water Collection System

    You can’t really make this one on your own, but it does its job really well. Moreover, due to its unusual features, the bladder tank doesn’t stand out and remains quite incognito from prying eyes. You can install this system in your basement or crawl space.

    More details at irrigationstore.com.au

    1. The Canopy Rain Barrel

    It's a pretty looking and very simple rainwater harvesting system. It's funnel like structure on the top is designed to maximise water collection and help you collect as much water as possible. Setting up a few of these around your property ensures you have a whole lot of water to use.

    More details at instructables.com 

    1. The Galvanized Rain Barrel

    This rain barrel was created with a galvanized stock tank. It is robust and looks quite chic, blending in with the surroundings and holds enough quantity of water for you.

    More details at thebikegarden.com

    1. The Multi-Piped Rain Barrel

    Though it isn’t something you can really build on your own, and one that requires elaborate welding work, this rainwater harvesting system is efficient, space saving and great to look at. Perhaps, you can install it in your backyard and paint it too to make it look prettier?

    More details at tomw.net.au 

    1. The Desert Friendly Underground Rain Barrel

    This is not a beginner’s level rainwater harvesting system. It is quite elaborate in its make and installation and is best suited for more arid climates. It is for underground installation, to keep the water cool and will help your homestead receive the water it requires, and water you need too. In places where water supply is scarce and rain doesn’t last for long, such a system becomes more of a necessity.

    More details at alysearthbaghome.blogspot.com

    24. The Plastic Barrel System

    Using a plastic gallon barrel, a plastic adapted, a pipe thread and a hose thread, you can make this simple yet very effective rainwater harvesting system in no time.

    More details at instructables.com 

    1. The Moveable Rain Barrel

    This simple to make yet efficient rain barrel can be uninstalled and ported for your convenience. It is large enough to hold enough water and yet small enough to not be too visible.

    More details at younghouselove.com

    1. State of the Art Filtering Rain Barrel

    This is a fully readymade rain barrel that not only does the job of rainwater collecting but its state of the art filtering system filters and purifies the water for drinking. Moreover, it is beautiful to look at and very modern in its design.

    1. High-Rise Rain Barrel

    It is installed at quite a tall height to increase the water collection. It is big enough to store water for weeks and yet small enough to install it in your backyard easily.

    1. Two Can System

    Using two new trash cans, this rainwater harvesting system helps collect more water at one go and this system can be replicated with more trash cans if you want to have more water.

     

    More details at Pinterest

    1. Daisy Chain Rainwater Collection

    This system of seven trash cans lined side by side and connected to each other does exactly what was suggested before. It makes sure you have a whole lot of water and maximises your water collection while it rains.

     More details at Pinterest

    1. Vertical Rain Barrel SysteM

    In this installation, the rain barrels are stacked vertically instead of horizontally, with the spivot at the very bottom so that the water pressure is highest. It is efficient and space saving as you don’t have to use a large horizontal space to keep multiple barrels.

    More details at Pinterest

    1. Dual Water Storage System

    This system is for areas that receive a high amount of rainfall or very constant rainfall. With two large containers, collecting rainwater is easier and helps in long term storage of the water.

     More details at Pinterest

    1. Rock-faced Rain Barrel

    Using a rock like facade to hide the rain barrel and make the system look more organic and one with its surrounding, this rainwater harvesting system is efficient and neat and great to look at.

     More details at Pinterest

    1. Butterfly Roof System

    With slanted roofs on two sides, water slides into the barrel, travelling through the ridges on the roof and streamlined into the center area for collection. This is very effective and collects water far more quickly than most systems.

    More details at Pinterest

    1. Metal Container

    This metal container looks fantastic and has no chance of getting a hole in it or leakage of any sort. It is big enough for storing a lot of water and isn’t big on the budget side either.

    More details at Pinterest

    1. Chic Barrel

    This barrel is more about the look than any special functionality. It resembles a typical, medieval barrel and is beautiful to behold. So, if you’re looking for decoration, this one might be the one you would want to go for.

    More details at Pinterest

    1. The Rain Saucer

    This rainwater harvesting system uses a typical water storing barrel but attaches two funnels on the top on either side of the barrel for maximum water collection. Neat and efficient and not taking too much space, this is a system you can build.

    Source Unknown

    1. Rain Garden

    Building a rain garden system removes the requirement of installing a barrel, transferring the water and all the intermediate steps that consume both time and energy. This system directly irrigates the garden and is a gardener’s delight.

     More details at Pinterest

    Rainwater harvesting systems are generally inexpensive and with certain DIY projects they can actually be free of charge, a splendid thing about an immensely powerful resource.

    If you have the option to grow and nurture nature through the use of rainwater, if you`ve had the option to reduce costs and water consumption in your household, why would you not do it?

    What do you think about harvesting systems and collecting rainwater? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below!

    Related Articles

    5 Best Barrel Sauna Kits Reviewed

    Are you a woodworking enthusiast confused between purchasing a Radial Arm Saw and a Miter Saw? Well, you’ve come to the right place!

    Having the right equipment in your tool kit can change your woodworking game completely. Whether you require the tools for personal home improvement projects or professional woodworking, having the right saw by your side is absolutely essential.

    But with both Radial Arm saws and Miter saws available in the market, there has been a lingering question in most people’s minds about which to buy. Professionals and enthusiasts alike are constantly wondering which of the two saws is the better tool.

    However, we believe that this perspective is the wrong way to approach this dilemma. What one really needs to be asking is not which saw is better, but which equipment will be best for you and your individual usage. But even then, making a choice between the two can seem very overwhelming, especially if you’re a beginner in the woodworking circuit.

    Radial Arm Saw vs. Miter Saw

    Circular saw miter saw photographed in the workshop atmosphere.

    So, in order to help you all make this decision effectively, we have compiled the required differences between the two. This informative piece will detail the features, how each of these saws functions, what they are capable of, and the purpose they serve.

    First, we will look at each of the pieces of equipment above on a one-to-one basis to get a more clarified idea regarding them. So, without further ado, let’s jump right into the thick of it, shall we?

    What Is A Radial Arm Saw?

    The Radial Arm Saw is the comparatively older equipment of the two and is, therefore, an extremely reliable tool to have in your workshed. This saw is the good old friend that every home woodworker and professional owned before the Miter Saw came into being. 

    So, if you’re someone who has a small workshed and is short on space, the Radial Arm Saw is a rather good investment to consider. The sheer versatility of this tool will eliminate the need for you to own multiple devices for different purposes and hence save you both money and space in the long run.

    The tool itself consists of a shapely circular blade that is mounted on a sliding arm, which enables it to power through all kinds of wood stock and makes a variety of cuts. The blade on this tool can be adjusted according to various angles and degrees; however, the adjustment will need to be measured and made manually.

    However, one aspect this saw falls short in is having an inbuilt safety mechanism. Although it does include some locks and provides you the option to strengthen the fence around its side, it’s still not very safe to use. This is because the powerful blade of this saw poses a significant risk to users because of its ability to cut fingers clean off if not used with extreme caution.

    Moreover, if your saw is equipped with a dull blade, it has the ability to latch onto your wood piece and then throw it around the room with its sheer speed. Hence, when it comes to Radial Arm Saws, it is essential to use them with the utmost caution, and is best if not used by beginners at all.

    Highlights of the Radial Arm Saw

    1. The machine consists of a circular power saw lodged into a mechanical arm.
    2. The diameter of the blade ranges from 12 to about 22 inches.
    3. This equipment is highly customizable and has an array of adjustable angles and depths that can be set up in order to enhance its versatility and usage.
    4. The side fence provided as a part of this equipment is usually sufficient to provide the required amount of stability and accuracy for a variety of cutting operations. However, it is recommended you fortify this side fence by attaching an additional fence for extra security.
    5. Safety guards are separately available and should be necessarily purchased to make this saw more safe and secure for the user.
    6. It comes equipped with additional attachments

    Different Cuts It Facilitates

    The Radial Arm Saw, as we mentioned above, has more versatility and hence facilitates a large variety of cuts. Here we wanted to mention the 4 major kinds of cuts it can perform and how to execute them to provide you with a better idea of the tool.

    1. Crosscuts

    Crosscuts are one of the simplest cuts that can be made rather easily with a Radial Arm Saw. All one needs to do is measure the piece of wood you plan to cut with a scale and mark the top part with a marker or a pencil of your choosing. After accounting for the width of your blade, lower and align it to the piece before you proceed to power the saw.

    It’s essential to build a fence around the equipment so that you can hold the wooden piece against that fence while slowly pulling the saw toward you. Once the entire width of the wood is cut, turn the power off and return the blade to its original and neutral position before continuing with your work.

    1. Ripping

    Ripping is a method of cutting that enables you to cut a piece of wood along its length instead of its width like in the case of crosscuts. This can be executed in a Radial Arm Saw by twisting the rotating head of the blade and locking it in place.

    The pawl of this tool requires it to be released and readjusted to the height of the wooden board you are planning to cut in order to prevent any potential jams or kickbacks. It’s also essential to note that this positioning of the blade makes it one of the most dangerous ways of utilizing this equipment. Hence it is absolutely crucial for the user to be extra cautious during the process.

    1. Miters, Bevels, And Compounds

    Miter cuts and their variations are another cut that can be executed with a Radial Arm Saw with relative ease. This specific cut and its variations are made possible by the option of miter and bevel release levels which enable you to manually customize the degree you plan to cut in.

    Moreover, it is essential to ensure that the blade of the equipment is lifted when you make any of the above adjustments. It’s also crucial to lock the angle in before proceeding with the cut, which a lot of new woodworkers may tend to overlook. We will be discussing these cuts in a little more detail when we come to the Miter Saw.

    1. Dadoes And Rabbets

    Dadoe is a U-shaped cut that runs across the width of the piece of wood, while rabbet is an L-shaped cut made along the edge of the same board. These cuts come in most handy when acting as joinery in larger and more complex woodworking projects.

    Since the Radial Arm Saw gives you the ability to customize its depth according to your requirements, it is also effective in making these specific kinds of cuts. However, to efficiently execute this cut, you will need to attach the separately provided dadoes blade onto the machine.



    Pros

    • Versatility in usage
    • Incredibly powerful blade and cutting depth
    • Much more compact compared to other woodworking equipment




    Cons

    • Not very precise in its cutting
    • Dangerous to use and hence requires a lot more safety precautions to be followed



    What is a Miter Saw?

    A Miter Saw is basically a stationary power tool constructed with a circular blade suspended from an arm as the Radial Arm Saw itself. However, unlike other more traditional circular saws, this equipment allows for considerably more precision and control in cutting wooden planks. This is made possible because of its hinged arm that is attached to its main body with a slit and an extremely well-fortified fence.

    The blade of this power tool usually ranges between 8-12 inches in diameter, which further facilitates the execution of high-precision cuts more effectively. Furthermore, this tool is equipped with a unique dust collection mechanism and a blade guard that makes it very safe to use in all environments and especially for beginners starting out in the woodworking field.

    If that wasn’t enough, it also has a built-in scale in place that enables users to easily adjust it with minimal effort and make cuts in varying degrees. As a result, this tool has gained a lot of popularity since its release and has now become a regular appliance found in almost every professional woodworking workshop.

    A significant detail to remember, however, is that the Miter Saw is not one size fits all and is in fact, available in variations that we will be discussing below.

    Types of Miter Saws

    There are mainly 3 different types of Miter Saws freely available in the market right now.

    1. Compound Miter

    This variant of the Miter saw only enables the blade of the equipment to pivot from left to right specifically. This limits the movement of this saw and only facilitates wooden board cutting in that particular direction.

    1. Dual Compound Miter

    This variant of the Miter Saw is similar to Compound Miter but allows the blade of the equipment to pivot both left and right. This provides greater flexibility in cutting direction and facilitates the making of quick bevels at any angle.

    1. Sliding Compound Miter

    This last variation of the Miter Saw is the most flexible among all its counterparts. In addition to the compound movements we described above, you can slide this saw backward and forward to enable you to cater to wooden boards with greater lengths. Out of all the variants, this is, therefore, a better option to invest in.

    Highlights Of The Miter Saw

    1. This is a motorized power-cutting tool system with a circular blade, hinged arm, and heavy-duty structure.
    2. It is available in different blade diameters that range from 8-12 inches, respectively.
    3. It is equipped with varied adjustable mechanisms that facilitate rotating angles and depth adjustments to provide precise cuts. These mechanisms additionally come with built-in locks and stop to give them stability during operation.
    4. A laser guide may be installed on the side fence for enhanced accuracy.
    5. Additional clamps and table extensions can be separately purchased to use this equipment for a wider variety of projects.
    6. The fence of this equipment is extra-fortified and provides stability while absorbing the shocks of the functioning machine.
    7. The in-built clear protective blade guard and dust-free mechanism of this equipment make it safe to use while maintaining a clean and dust-free workspace.

    Different Cuts It Facilitates

    The Miter Saw, as we mentioned above, is available in 3 different variants. However, when we talk about the cuts this power tool is able to accomplish, we are explicitly talking about the Sliding Compound Miter. There are mainly 4 different kinds of cuts that this equipment can hence perform, and we are going to describe the cuts and how to execute them below briefly.

    1. Crosscuts

    As we discussed before, the crosscut is the most straightforward woodcutting procedure amongst most woodworking projects. To execute this standard cut, you will require to slice across the grain direction of any given piece of the wound on your Miter Saw.

    1. Bevels

    Bevel, on the other hand, Bevel is an angled cut that goes through the thickness of the wood board and is typically made when you want to connect two pieces of molding to establish an invisible seam. This cut is usually created by tilting the circular blade on the sliding compound miter to a specific angle. The wood is continued to be placed in the regular place allowing the angular blade to design an automatic bevel.

    1. Miters

    This cutting technique that the Miter saw facilitates is essentially what this equipment is named after. Much like the bevel cut, this cut likewise requires the circular blade of the tool to be set up in an angled position. However, this cut is mainly made across the width of the wooden board instead of its thickness and is used primarily for creating corners in wooden projects.

    This is also an extremely common cutting procedure in woodworking that is regularly used to make boxes and wooden frames. Furthermore, the Miter Saw is naturally inclined at making cleaner, more precise, and better-looking miter cuts. This is possible because of its pivotable saw that can easily be adjusted to varying degrees along with its hinged handle and fence that provide it the necessary stability.

    1. Compound Cuts

    Compound Cuts are essentially an amalgamation of both the bevel and the miter cuts. It’s ideal for making kitchen renovations that require seamlessly cut wooden crown moldings. These are also a little more complicated to execute usually; however, they are made far easier because of the unique design of the Miter Saw.



    Pros

    • Provides extremely precise operation
    • Additional optional attachments available for a more versatile operation
    • Designed with numerous safety mechanisms enabling beginners to use it
    • Has the ability to create 4 essential yet varied cuts




    Cons

    • Not very powerful and can’t cut through very thick pieces of wood
    • Can execute a limited variety of cuts



    Differences Between Radial Arm Saw and Miter Saw

    Now that we’ve covered what each of these pieces of equipment essentially is and how they function individually, we wanted to highlight some of the most significant differences between them.

    1. Power And Size

    Power and size are interrelated when it comes to the factors that determine the performance of woodworking equipment. Usually, the larger the size of the tool the more powerful the tool typically is.

    In this context, the Radial Arm Saw is a more substantial tool that is compatible with larger blade sizes ranging from 12 to 22 inches. Compared to this, the Miter Saw has a more compact structure and is only compatible with blades ranging from 8 to 12 inches in diameter.

    The large and enhanced structure of the Radial Arm Saw provides it with more power, giving it a comparatively high cutting depth. Hence, this equipment is able to cut through thick pieces of lumber with relative ease, which the Miter Saw cannot.

    1. Portability

    On the other hand, however, the compact size and structure of the Miter Saw make it a lot more portable than its space-taking counterpart. This is further compounded because the latter requires a fixed and static workstation for a seamless operation that the Miter Saw already comes inbuilt with. Hence, you can easily lob the former around wherever you wish to place it as compared to its more substantially sized counterpart.

    1. Safety

    The Radial Arm Saw is lagging far behind the more modern and secure Miter Saw when it comes to safety. This is because the latter is constructed with a lot of considerate features that make it simpler and a delight to use.

    For starters, this Miter Saw is equipped with a protective blade guard that not only protects users from the dangers of using such a big blade but also collects wooden shavings to keep your workspace clean and clutter-free. Furthermore, this equipment comes with an extra fortified fence that has an excellent shock-absorbing system that makes it a lot more stable to use.

    As compared to this, The Radial Arm is a rather dangerous woodworking appliance to own and is a threat not only to beginners but also to professionals alike. Hence, before using this tool, it is essential to properly equip yourself and the equipment with all the necessary safety guards and extra fences to ensure maximum security from accidents during operation.

    1. Precision

    The Miter Saw, as we mentioned earlier, offers a lot more precision than its counterpart. This precision is mostly derived from the smaller blade diameter that it is compatible with, making it easier to control. However, the precision of this equipment can also be attributed to the clear blade guards that provide enhanced visibility, and safety lock mechanisms that make it steady.

    Additionally, some saws come equipped with a laser/LED guide that adds further precision to the process of cutting. You can also buy these laser/LED guides separately and install them on your machine as and when required. Compared to this, the Radial Arm Saw does not have any of these given features. Hence, overall it lacks the precision that the Miter Saw offers.

    1. Ease Of Use And Installation

    How easy each piece of equipment is to use is intrinsically related to the safety mechanisms provided. And since the Miter Saw is loaded with more safety features it automatically makes it a lot safer to use than the Radial Arm Saw.

    Additionally, the Radial saw comes with a lot of loose attachments and manually adjustable mechanisms. The angle plus depth adjustment features that this tool is equipped with are all required to be adjusted physically by the user with the help of a separate scale. The extra dadoes blade provided also needs to be set up manually, which can be quite a hassle to install.

    As compared to this, the Miter Saw has all automatically adjustable features that do not require separate scales or an extra pair of hands to adjust. Therefore, it is safe to conclude that the Miter Saw is considerably easy to operate and install.

    1. Types Of Cuts/Versatility In Work

    As we mentioned earlier, the Radial Arm saw has greater versatility when it comes to cutting wood. The enhanced structure of this equipment enables you to create ripping cuts and dadoes and rabbets that the Miter Saw is unable to make. Furthermore, as we mentioned before, the Radial Saw also allows for a greater cutting depth that facilitates the slicing of thicker wood and lumber as compared to the Miter Saw.

    However, while the Miter Saw may lack versatility, it can still be enhanced in that arena by installing additional clamps and table extensions. Therefore, these separately available attachments can make the equipment a little more flexible and versatile to use for your varied woodworking projects.

    Which One To Choose?

    With that, we have comprehensively covered all the major differences between both these woodworking saws. Hence, one could conclude, in the most basic sense, that structurally both these saws are sort of similar in their build. This is because both of them are inherently mounted circular blades, however, even so, they vary greatly when it comes to their form, usage, and functionality.

    So, now the question that remains is which woodworking saw is the best purchase for you? Well, we’re here to inform you that the answer to that question lies completely in the range of your personal usage. There can be no clear or explicit winner between the two because both of them fulfill very distinct functions.

    Factors To Consider While Choosing The Right Saw

    Hence, although both saws may look similar to the untrained eye, the reality is that these are both very different equipment. If you ask any trained or professional woodworking they would all tell you the same thing. And that thing is that which wood-cutting saw you choose always depends on primarily two important factors, they are:

    • Your level of expertise
    • What do you plan to use it for?

    So, if you’re a trained or self-developed woodworker looking to branch out into the field of woodworking and are already familiar with the safety mechanisms and procedures practiced within the industry, then the Radial Arm Saw might be the right fit for you. This choice is also, however, dependent on the kind of woodworking projects you want to take up as a professional.

    If your expertise, for example, lies in small projects that need more precise cutting procedures then the Miter Saw might be a better option for you. Alternatively, if you’re planning to take up more substantially sized woodworking projects, then the Radial Arm Saw is hands down the better option for you.

    On the other hand, if you are a woodworking enthusiast or someone who is fairly new to the DIY woodworking game, then the Miter Saw is without a doubt the best purchase for you. These not only offer a higher precision level but are also safer and easier to use.

    Hence, while this equipment may not provide a lot of varied options for versatility in cutting, they do cover all the basic and essential cutting procedures that you might require for your projects. This includes any projects you may take up for home improvement such as creating the crown molding for your kitchen.

    The Winner

    So, if you ask us who the winner between these two mounted saws is, we’d have to go with the Miter Saw.

    This is mainly because, regardless of your level of expertise when it comes to woodworking, the Miter Saws are usable by different kinds of people. So, no matter what your standing as a woodworker is, this saw will always come in handy.

    This is because the use that this provides is unmatched by the most powerful tools available in the market. And hence, for that same reason, this saw is more popular for mainstream usage while the alternative has faded in popularity and is still fighting to remain relevant.

    SSUCv3H4sIAAAAAAAACpyRz27DIAzG75P2DhHnRiJ/mrR7lWoHB0iCSqEC0mmq+u4zECrOu+Gf7c/+zPPzo6rIBE4y8lU9Q4SxVGpz3oKXRiOmh51bobmwJXnYbqAlEFx6YyWoEk7g2arhJhDqTamAXzFJnAe/OeHC9B0x8GJBjQTfEmnFS4qrnIhJ7MAUIYeCuW2KLKMk/q/O9PjObmARmv3GhQsjVigBycgllZLrjxf2VlqDjUtTuHoYBioUdIXS3Uom9VK0Gb/Gs+c2ZjbtbVjhvTlRxtxhUuHEM2qKzFdwDst55sUghp9sbsUcbXw0sKsSjj8RwqZrR3ocBjp2R9q1bTvuBen3Vok6cZ0shDG7Sl5al2EDwhnMtJnPdT+e+rpvZlqf8VnPomXjiXUwThQP//oDAAD//wMAO57hiJgCAAA=

    Final Words

    It is important to remember that our choice of the winner does not erase the fact that the Radial Arm Saw provides much more functionality than its counterpart. It’s just that those extra functionalities that this equipment offers don’t come into use as often and consequently are not considered essential by most woodworkers.

    We would still, therefore, ask everyone to base their final decision on the factors that we stated above so that you end up with equipment that meets all your individual woodworking needs. Nevertheless, based largely on the consensus of relevancy, if we had to pick only one mounted saw to recommend to you today, we would still go along with the Miter saw, as we mentioned earlier.

    So, we hope this comprehensive guide exploring the differences between the Miter Saw and Radial Arm Saw has aided in providing you guys some clarity. That’s all we have for you today folks. Happy woodworking!

    Related Articles

    13 Best Screwdriver Sets on the Market Today

    Simply the Best Stained Glass Ring Saws

    49 FREE DIY Router Table Plans For an Epic Home Workshop

    13 Best Tile Saws Reviewed | Buyer’s Guide

    11 Best Sliding Compound Miter Saws

    Different Types of Saws & How to Use Them

    13 Best Sliding Miter Saw 

    13 Best Hybrid Table Saw 

    11 Best Track Saws

    13 Best Hybrid Table Saw

    5 Best Toe Kick Saws

    11 Best Dry Cut Metal Chop Saw

    11 Best Bow Saw | Reviews + Buyer’s Guide

    11 Best Table Saw [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]

    7 Best Cabinet Table Saws [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]

    9 Best Band Saw [Reviews & Buyer’s Guide]

    7 Best 12-inch Miter Saw Reviews [Buyer’s Guide]

    13 Best Contractor Table Saws [Reviews & Buyer’s Guide]

    Best 20″ Chainsaw [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]

    A list of super simple and super epic completely free rabbit hutch plans follow, these will help you construct a strong solid structure that ought to keep the fluffiness safe and sound from predators and weather alike. All the items in our list feature photos and complete instructions, often with diagrams and step-by-step building instructions and all free rabbit hutch plans below have past the the test of time and they have been vouched for repeatedly in their communities and therefore one simply cannot go wrong with the rabbit hutches below; we invite you to simply choose the one that fits your needs.

    In the list all rabbit hutches naturally have common attributes but their structure and style varies and as a result, your experience will too. We strongly encourage to compare all these options carefully before starting building, make sure that you need a one or two story rabbit hutch or that you actually need any of the outdoor rabbit hutch plans below before going the extra mile; it goes without saying that you have to adapt the hutches to the number of rabbits you are going to grow.

    If you`ve found the rabbit hutch plans below interesting we invite you to check various other free woodworking plans, we have curated lists that will show you how to build a pole barnsmall cabin, greenhouseporch swingfire pitgaragecat tower, a rocket stovetiny houseduck housedeer standbat house, diy tree housecat towerporch swingfarmhouse tablepole barndiy dog beda playhouse, a chicken coop, or a a coffee table.

    Free Rabbit Hutch Plans 

    HOWtoSpecialist`s Free Rabbit House Plan Tutorial

    HOWTOSPECIALIST`S FREE RABBIT HOUSE PLAN TUTORIAL

    A rather simple rabbit hutch tutorial with complete diagrams for every step, is recommended for beginners and professionals alike. Jack recommends wood essences resistant to weather such as pine and cedar for this particular project as the materials will greatly improve the construct`s behavior in time. Your little furry friend will greatly appreciate his new home and you have everything you need everything thoroughly explained thanks to Jack`s tutorial, it is also worth noting that the project can be easily scaled and customized for your bunnies!

    More details here

    Ana White`s Free Two-Story Rabbit Hutch

    ANA WHITE`S FREE TWO STORY RABBIT HUTCH

    Tutorials on Ana's website always seem super simple, and super easy to realize and that happens every time because they actually are! Ana White has simply made the world a better place thanks to her easy-to-follow tutorials.  The two-story rabbit hutch above has everything a fluffy friend would need and happily it can shelter his friends as well, cast a glance over the complete project and see how it would fit your situation, this is one that should definitely be shortlisted.

    More details are here and here.

    Rogue Engineer Shares a free rabbit hatch plan

    ROGUE ENGINEER SHARES A FREE RABBIT HATCH PLAN

    A beautiful rabbit hatch that connects the little critter with soil and vegetation thanks to a lower deck where he can roam freely. The upper deck is marvelous and it includes a small apartment where the rabbit can take refuge when the weather is uncertain.

    Rogue Engineer happily presents this rabbit hutch plan with everything that one would need for completion, material list, tool list, color photos, diagrams as well as detailed written instructions that will help any beginner realize this stress-free.

    More details here.

    Epic PVC Rabbit Huts on BeSurvival

    EPIC PVC RABBIT HUTS ON BESURVIVAL

    A proven technique for fast DIY rabbit hutch shelters uses PVC frames to materialize the ensemble; this technique is used for all kinds of structures, we have featured such a unit in our chicken coop list and here it comes the PVC frame rabbit hut; all you need is 1 1/2 SCH 40 pipe and wire-frame cages. One can find these PVC pipes and their connectors at any local hardware store and the complete instructions that accompany the tutorial make this DIY project readily available to anyone in the world happily. A super efficient, modular project that will shelter your furry friends for decades.

    EPIC RABBIT HOTEL FEATURED ON INSTRUCTABLES

    A rabbit hutch can be cool but an entire hotel for your little bunnies is certainly better, you will simply adore the free rabbit hotel plan featured on Instructables and so will kids as the low height of the ensemble invites them to interact with the bunnies. In the link below you will find complete building instructions with color photos, a supply list, and a tool list, all you need to create his masterpiece that will be enjoyed by all parties i

    Create a hotel for your bunnies with this free hutch plan that is created so your kids can interact with the rabbits as much as they like.

    More details are here.

    EPIC RABBIT HOTEL FEATURED ON INSTRUCTABLES

    This free plan for furry rabbits has been featured in Instructables too and it uses reclaimed wood to assemble an epic small rabbit hutch almost 5 feet long that ought to be sufficient for 3 to 6 young rabbits. In the following tutorial 12 steps of instructions part you from the completed object and these include images that you can follow but please take note that the materials and tools are not listed. The process and the images explain a great deal though, analyze them carefully and you will surely succeed!

    More details here.

    Outdoor Plans Presents Free Rabbit Hutch Plan

    OUTDOOR PLANS PRESENTS FREE RABBIT HUTCH PLAN

    A super simple rabbit hutch that you can complete in a couple of hours easily. Instructions and a complete material list properly synced with the diagram make the DIY project swift but written instructions ease the process even further and so does the tool list nestled in the following link. Needless to say that you can scale this to your needs.

     More details here.

     Sectional Rabbit Hutch Plan Presented on Instructables

     SECTIONAL RABBIT HUTCH PLAN PRESENTED ON INSTRUCTABLES

    If you want to spoil one happy rabbit you can use the free plan featured on Instructables below. The sectional diy rabbit hutch that you will complete can hold up to five furry critters and happy you have the option of creating the hutch sections either 4' or 6'.

    Step-by-step instructions for the construction include diagrams, materials, and too lists as well as photos.

    More details here.

     SECTIONAL RABBIT HUTCH PLAN PRESENTED ON INSTRUCTABLES

    As you can imagine the following rabbit hutch plan is a super simple DIY plan and that is all true, it has nothing to do with it being featured on Simple Easy DIY. Follow the tutorial and you will find out exactly how to cut the material, how to ensemble the frame, install the roof and door, and everything from top to bottom. The rabbit hutch tutorial includes a video that will help a great deal, an educational medium that in this case replaces the written instructions.

    More details here.

     Woodworking Site Provides a Free Rabbit Hutch Plan

     WOODWORKING SITE PROVIDES A FREE RABBIT HUTCH PLAN

    As you can deduct from the exploded illustration above the tutorial above is super easy to follow and it provides clear instructions and a lot of support illustrations that will help you complete an epic rabbit hutch. The Woodworking website even provides illustrations that will help you understand how the piece connects with one-another, all pieces are numbered carefully so you can track them down easily. For this tutorial, you will also need some hinges and wire mesh, elements commonly used in rabbit hutches.

    More details here.

    WHEELED Free Rabbit Hutch Plan

    An awesome free rabbit hutch plans with wheels! It might sound odd when you first hear it but the great advantage is that you can move the rabbit hutch easily.

    The thoroughly presented step-by-step instructions spread across three pages in BuildEazy`s plan with a dozen diagrams with specific dimensions and a complete material list that starts on the second page if you want to browse it rapidly.

    More details here. 

    Learn How to Build a Bunny Condo

    The bunny condo that follows is more of a bonus item to our list, it presents a super simple tutorial that you can assemble in your home in less than an hour, please take note that the diy rabbit hutch above is nothing short of extraordinary and will definitely make a bunny super happy!

    Find the video here.

    A short list of only 13 items presented super epic solutions for the furry friends that we love to take care of so much, have you found this free rabbit hutch plan interesting enough to craft? We would love to hear your thoughts in the comment section below!

    Related Articles

    30 Portable Chicken Coop Plans You Can Easily Move

    Barndominium 101 | Floor Plans, Pricing Guide & Pictures

    57 DIY Chicken Coop Plans in Easy to Build Tutorials – 100% FREE

    47 Free DIY Swing Set Plans for a Happy Playing Area in Your Backyard

    49 FREE DIY Router Table Plans For an Epic Home Workshop

    43 DIY Duck Houses Plans and Duck Coop Plans to Build Now

    57 DIY Bookshelf Plans and Ideas For Healthy Home Libraries

    163 Free DIY Pole Barn Plans and Designs That You Can Build Easily

    37 Free DIY Tiny House Plans for a Happy & Peaceful Life In Nature

    27 Insanely Cool DIY Rocket Stove Plans for Cooking With Wood

    39 FREE DIY Bat House Plans to Shelter the Natural Pest Control

    19 Adorable Free Cat Tower Plans For Your Furry Friend

    23 Awesome Free Deer Stand Plans You Can Start Right Now

    23 FREE Detailed DIY Garage Plans With Instructions To Actually Build

    101 Simple Free DIY Coffee Table Plans

    Just imagine - you’re driving home from an exhaustingly busy day at work, only to find that there’s been a load shedding in your locality!

    Sorry, didn’t want to give you an anxiety attack right away; but let’s just be honest here, isn’t this one of everybody’s worst nightmares?

    Now you may say, generators are pretty cool at making up for it. Well, ask yourself - how do you like the deafening noise of your old loud generator that probably wouldn’t run throughout the night?

    We certainly don’t, and that’s why we have enlisted 7 of the quietest 5000-watt generators for household use, which could also come in handy for upgrading your home appliances. Also, we’ve added a brief buyers’ guide for your convenience so that you acknowledge the key factors to consider while buying one of these models.

    So, let’s get going, shall we?

    1. Champion 6250-Watt DH Series Open Frame Inverter

    There’s hardly any other home appliances brand in the market that lives up to its name as well as Champion. Being one of the major players in the top-notch generator market, Champion has been recently making waves with its all-new 6250-watt DH series model. We’re quite intrigued by its advanced quiet technology, and we believe you’d be too!

    Right off the bat, this model has proven to be pretty efficient for both household use and outdoor operations. The secret behind it is its motor, which runs on 5000W and is capable of creating up to 6250 starting watts. This way, the model can take care of your water pump system, refrigerators, and air conditioners without breaking a sweat.

    However, despite delivering such a high energy output, this product is specially engineered to remain gentle on sensitive appliances such as smartphones, laptops, and TVs. Speaking more about its efficiency, this model comes with a massive 4.2-gallon fuel tank. Here, every consecutive gallon of fuel enables the machine to generate electricity for a little more than 3 hours. A filled tank guarantees you up to 13.5 hours of electricity coverage at 25% load.

    Now coming to its USP, this model features an advanced quiet technology that cuts down its noise levels very low. Fun fact - at one point, we weren’t even aware that the machine was running in the other room! Plus, another fun fact - this model is 20% lighter than the typical Champion 5000w generators, so we’re seeing a decent improvement here.

    Although we’ve personally tested this product for quite a while now, we’re quite impressed to say that we haven’t found any flaw that’s worth being mentioned. There are some users who have complained that the model fails to provide 3 hours per gallon after a year or so if used regularly. Nonetheless, it entirely depends upon how roughly you use the model.

    Dimensions: ‎26.6" x 25.6" x 23.7" | Weight: ‎121 lbs | Power Source: ‎Gas Powered | Start Type: Recoil | Voltage: ‎120/240V | Wattage: 6250W (Starting), 5000W (Running) | Frequency: 60 Hz | Engine: 301cc 4-stroke OHV | Noise Level: 69 dBA | Fuel Tank Capacity: 4.2 Gallons | Run Time: 13.5 Hours (25% Load) | Warranty: 3 Years

    2. Duromax XP5500E 5500-Watt Gas-Powered Portable Generator

    Duromax is best known as the brand that doesn’t only manufacture high-end appliances but also sets the bar higher for portability and user comfort. The best way to experience this is by testing its best-selling product, the XP5500E Portable Generator range. Read on to know more about the power and durability this model provides at such a reasonable budget.

    If you were impressed by the Champion 6250-watt generator, but don’t have enough space in your apartment to store it, you can go for the Duromax XP5500E. Now we’re not claiming that this model will offer you the exact power and performance, but it’s quite efficient at saving you from hours of load shedding. What’s more, it’s also one of the most compact generators we’ve come across by far, which makes storage look like a cakewalk.

    So, what else makes this model worth your consideration? It's a high-powered engine, without a doubt. This model comes with a 7.5 HP 224cc patented Duromax engine that also features a spark-ignition technology and a 4-cycle air-cooling feature for higher convenience and durability. Plus, as the name implies, this machine runs on gas that is further converted into electricity.

    This powerful setting, combined with the MX2 technology, makes this product eligible to generate 120-240v of electricity. This way, it becomes easier to keep heavy appliances such as refrigerators and air conditioners running for quite a few hours.

    Now, unlike the Champion DH series unit, buyers have complained that it isn’t the best recommendation for outdoor operations. However, the manufacturers claim it to be powerful enough to be compatible with RVs. Furthermore, Duromaxx needs to fix the wheels by adding air valves.

    Dimensions: 25" x 24" x 21" | Weight: 122 lbs | Power Source: ‎Gas Powered | Start Type: Recoil/Electric | Voltage: 120/240V AC, 12V DC | Wattage: 5500 (Starting), 4500W (Running) | Frequency: 60 Hz | Engine: 224cc 4-stroke OHV | Noise Level: N/A | Fuel Tank Capacity: 3.9 Gallons | Run Time: 19 Hours (25% Load) | Warranty: 30-day Replacement, 1 Year (Parts)

    3. Briggs & Stratton Q6500 Inverter Generator

    It’s hard not to mention the legacy of the globally-leading brand Briggs & Stratton when it comes to innovations that have changed the game forever. Speaking of which, it’s an all-new Q6500 inverter generator that looks like it’s a part of Tony Stark’s Iron Man armor. However, apart from its sassy looks, this product has a lot more to offer.

    To begin with, this product defines reliability at its best. If you’re looking for one of the quietest and most durable generators, and are open to raising your budget a little high to avail the best product, this is your cup of tea. We’ve found out that at a 25% workload, this model produces a maximum noise level of 66 dBA. Our expert analysis says that it’s quieter than 60% of our alternative recommendations, which is quite amusing.

    Furthermore, it comes equipped with the classic B&S 306 cc engine that creates a maximum energy of 6,500W, giving itself the upper hand over the Champion 6250W model. However, its consistent wattage is similar, i.e., 5000w. In other words, the B&G QuietPower model serves every task that the Champion generator can fulfill, that too, at a higher power.

    Plus, the model comes with a 5-gallon tank, which is higher than any product that we’ve tested by far. Also, we’ve found this model to be quite efficient at conserving fuel while being used, entitling itself as an environment-friendly model.

    Although this model has a bigger fuel tank than the Champion model, it offers less run time. In other words, this model offers 14 hours of run time at 5 gallons, whereas the 6250 series provides 12 hours at 4 gallons. Apart from that, we’re not entirely satisfied with its fragile plastic cover.

    Dimensions: 25.5" x 21.1" x 21.4" | Weight: 139 lbs | Power Source: ‎Gas Powered | Start Type: Recoil | Voltage: ‎120/240V | Wattage: 6500W (Starting), 5000W (Running) | Frequency: 60 Hz | Engine: 306cc 4-stroke w/ Integrated Alternator | Noise Level: 66 dBA | Fuel Tank Capacity: 5 Gallons | Run Time: Up to 14 Hours (25% Load) | Warranty: 2 Years (Consumer)

    4. Honda EU7000IS 7000-Watt Portable Quiet Inverter

    Some brands do not require any introduction as their global popularity makes all of the noise, and Honda is undoubtedly one of them. We were fortunate enough to have hands-on experience with the EU7000IS 7000-watt generator, and we are very impressed with its extended runtime. Let’s check out what more this product brings to the table.

    The internationally accomplished brand image of Honda makes this product a little too exciting to begin with. Honestly, this one makes an appropriate household appliance, considering the excellent value that it had offered us. Also, why wouldn’t it? This model features the patented Honda 389cc GX390 EFI engine, one of the most advanced motors engineered by the brand in a while.

    Also, as the name implies, this model can generate up to a maximum wattage of 7000W, thanks to its groundbreaking motor mechanism. However, its efficiency is experienced the best when it’s used at its running wattage, i.e., 5500W. But, the icing on the cake is that when it’s run at 25% load, this model can extend up to 16 hours of runtime!

    Now let’s move on to the new add-on features it offers, such as the electric start and Honda’s trademarked Oil Alert settings. These features combine to give us a satisfying user experience as the machine shuts down on its own when it’s not being used. So, overall, it appears to be quite a smart and powerful device that you can consider if you’re looking for peak performance.

    A thing or two could honestly be done better with this model, for instance, fixing its considerably heavy body. Although we understand that high-end appliances are usually heavier, we think it’s a little too heavy for a home appliance. Also, the price seems a little too high, if compared with most of its alternatives. 

    Dimensions: 33.4" x 27.6" x 28.4" | Weight: 263.2 lbs | Power Source: ‎Gas Powered | Start Type: Recoil/Electric | Voltage: ‎120/240V | Wattage: 7000W (Starting), 5500W (Running) | Frequency: N/A | Engine: 389cc GX390 EFI | Noise Level: 52 - 58 dBA | Fuel Tank Capacity: 5.1 Gallons | Run Time: Up to 16 Hours | Warranty: 3 Years (Residential)

    5. Yamaha EF6300iSDE Quiet Inverter

    Yamaha is a brand that has reshaped the dynamics of technology with its trailblazing innovations over the years. If you’re searching for impressive performance under a reasonable budget, the Yamaha EF6300iSDE quiet inverter is one of the best options you can consider. Its cutting-edge remote control feature is guaranteed to offer you a satisfying user experience.

    We believe that it can be a potential competitor to the Honda EU7000IS unit. Well, yes, we know that this product offers us a maximum efficiency of 6,300W, whereas the Honda model offers us 7000 watts. So, how is this comparison relevant?

    Well, an average household wouldn’t require the appliance to crank up to its peak performance every time, except outdoor use. So it’s more important for the model to have an impressive running performance instead. On that note, this model features a 357cc OHV 4-stroke engine that offers a similar running wattage of 5,500W.

    It also comes with a 4.49-gallon tank that offers around 13.3 hours of run time at 25% load, which is also quite close to the Honda model. However, the cream of the crop here is that this model can be availed at a very lower price than the Honda EU7000IS unit. Also, it weighs less, saving us from some of the inconvenience.

    Although we haven’t found any technical fault that is worth mentioning, we’re not a very big fan of its design. We wish the manufacturers would have designed it a little more ergonomically, as it features insufficient areas for gripping that make the device tough to move around.

    Dimensions: 30.7 " x 24.2" * x 27.2" | Weight: 200 lbs | Power Source: ‎Gas Powered | Start Type: Electric | Voltage: ‎120/240V | Wattage: 6300W, 5500W (Running) | Frequency: 60 Hz | Engine: 357cc 4-stroke OHV | Noise Level: 58 - 64 dBA | Fuel Tank Capacity: 4.49 Gallons | Run Time: 13.3 Hours (Constant 25% Load) | Warranty: 3 Years

    6. Westinghouse WGen5300s 6600W Generator

    Westinghouse has been recently making waves in the appliances market with its cutting-edge innovations. One of its highest-rated products, the WGen5300s generator, had our attention at first glance.

    It has a reliable 274cc OHV engine which makes this model capable of running up to a peak performance of 6600 watts and offers a decent running performance of 5300 watts. Furthermore, it has a runtime of 14.5 hours at 25% load and stands out to be CARB compliant, which makes it an environmentally friendly generator.

    Now coming to its noise levels, this model produces around 68 decibels, which is decent for its price range. The model further comes with a 3-year warranty period, so you don’t have to stress over it being damaged anytime soon.

    As per the customers, the carbonator of this model isn’t quite durable and can show signs of malfunctioning if it’s run at its peak performance for a considerable time. Also, some buyers have complained that the parts get damaged during shipping, which needs to be taken care of by the manufacturers.

    Dimensions: ‎26.7" x 21.6" x 20.3" | Weight: 132.5 lbs | Power Source: ‎Gas Powered | Start Type: Recoil | Voltage: ‎120/240V | Wattage: 6600W (Peak), 5300W (Running) | Frequency: 60 Hz | Engine: 274cc 4-stroke OHV | Noise Level: ‎68 dBA | Fuel Tank Capacity: ‎4.7 Gallons | Run Time: 14.5 Hours | Warranty: 3 Years

    7. SIMPSON SPG5568 Portable Gas Generator

    As we’re featuring some of the best value options for our bargain hunter pals out there, it’d be somewhat unfair not to mention the SIMPSON SPG5568 unit. Although it isn’t the most technologically advanced option you’ll find in the market, this manual generator is guaranteed to satisfy the simple requirement of an average household.

    We were searching for a reliable generator under a reasonable budget when we came across the SPG5568 model. After testing it, we can say that the model is capable of handling the medium-duty household requirements because it offers a running wattage of 5500W. 

    We believe that the SPG5568 can give stiff competition to the WGEN5300s, mainly because both of them have a similar low oil indicator feature for higher user convenience. Furthermore, the SPG5568 adheres to the EPA standards, meaning that it’s certified to be a reliable appliance. However, it comes at a cheaper price tag than the SPG5568, making it a smart option to consider.

    Moving further, this model comes equipped with a powerful 420cc engine that has been specially engineered to conserve fuel. This way, the machine delivers up to 4.07 KW-hours per gallon, which is considerably higher than an average generator.

    It’s rather disappointing to find out that the duplex 120v outlets of this model aren’t GFCI-protected. This can expose the engine to the damages inflicted by extreme temperature conditions, dirt, and debris. So, we can’t guarantee that this product will last for years to come.

    Dimensions: 27” x 21” x 23” | Weight: 174 lbs | Power Source: ‎Gas Powered | Start Type: Recoil | Voltage: ‎120/240V | Wattage: 6875W (Starting), 5500W (Running) | Frequency: 60 Hz | Engine: 420cc 4-stroke OHV | Noise Level: N/A | Fuel Tank Capacity: 6.6 Gallons | Run Time: 9.5 Hours (25% Load) | Warranty: 3 Years (Residential)

    Quietest 5000-watt Generators Comparison Table

    Product Dimensions Weight Power Source Start Type Voltage Wattage Frequency Engine Noise Level Fuel Tank Capacity Run Time Warranty
    Champion Inverter ‎26.6" x 25.6" x 23.7" ‎121 lbs Gas Powered Recoil ‎120/240V 6250W (Starting), 5000W (Running) 60 Hz 301cc 4-stroke OHV 69 dBA 4.2 Gallons 13.5 Hours (25% Load) 3 Years
    Duromax Generator 25" x 24" x 21" 122 lbs Gas Powered Recoil/Electric 120/240V AC, 12V DC 5500 (Starting), 4500W (Running) 60 Hz 224cc 4-stroke OHV N/A 3.9 Gallons 19 Hours (25% Load) 30-day Replacement, 1 Year (Parts)
    Briggs & Stratton Inverter Generator 25.5" x 21.1" x 21.4" 139 lbs Gas Powered Recoil ‎120/240V 6500W (Starting), 5000W (Running) 60 Hz 306cc 4-stroke w/ Integrated Alternator 66 dBA 5 Gallons Up to 14 Hours (25% Load) 2 Years (Consumer)
    Honda Quiet Inverter 33.4" x 27.6" x 28.4" 263.2 lbs Gas Powered Recoil/Electric ‎120/240V 7000W (Starting), 5500W (Running) N/A 389cc GX390 EFI 52 - 58 dBA 5.1 Gallons Up to 16 Hours 3 Years (Residential)
    Yamaha Quiet Inverter 30.7 " x 24.2" * x 27.2" 200 lbs Gas Powered Electric ‎120/240V 6300W, 5500W (Running) 60 Hz 357cc 4-stroke OHV 58 - 64 dBA 4.49 Gallons 13.3 Hours (Constant 25% Load) 3 Years
    Westinghouse Generator ‎26.7" x 21.6" x 20.3" 132.5 lbs Gas Powered Recoil ‎120/240V 6600W (Peak), 5300W (Running) 60 Hz 274cc 4-stroke OHV ‎68 dBA ‎4.7 Gallons 14.5 Hours 3 Years
    SIMPSON Generator 27” x 21” x 23” 174 lbs Gas Powered Recoil ‎120/240V 6875W (Starting), 5500W (Running) 60 Hz 420cc 4-stroke OHV N/A 6.6 Gallons 9.5 Hours (25% Load) 3 Years (Residential)

    Quietest 5000-watt Generator Buyers’ Guide

    Cross your heart and answer this- Now that you have access to 7 of the quietest 5000w generators in the market, are you confident enough to choose the one that fits your needs precisely?

    There still is some vital information that you may be missing out on, which is a common mistake for buyers. Anyway, just a reminder- Before you buy a product, you have to understand the key features that make it a smart option to consider.

    So, let’s have a quick peek at the key features that make one of these products worth your investment, shall we?

    Noise Level

    Speaking of the quietest generators in the market, it’s quite apparent that it’s a critical feature that you have to cross-check. Now, we’re saying this because generators are deafeningly loud in general, which isn’t a pleasant thing to experience. As per our expert opinion, any product that produces over 74 dbA at a distance of 23 ft is too loud. 

    Generator Type

    Honestly, conventional generators are a thing of the past nowadays. Inverter generators are trending now, as they are environment-friendly and do not damage sensitive electric appliances. However, on the other hand, conventional generators are super cheap. That’s pretty much the only advantage of the conventional ones because it’s quite inferior in terms of performance.

    Engine

    What good is a generator that fails to generate an average wattage of 5000w? Yes, you’ve to make sure that the model you’re choosing comes with decent capacity and horsepower and does not malfunction when thrust at peak performance. Our average recommendation would be a 350cc/10 HP powered engine. 

    Fuel Type

    If you’re buying a generator for regular use, you have to consider the operating costs involved with the purchase too. On that note, which kind of fuel the model runs on makes a massive difference in how much the product will cost you post-purchase. So, if you’re buying one for frequent use, you should opt for cheaper fuel options such as gas. If not, then you can go for the petrol/diesel-powered generators.

    Fuel Tank Capacity

    Being a motor that acts as a substitute for electricity, it’s apparent that it won’t run on electricity as an active power source. So, no matter what sort of fuel it uses to function, it’s more important to check how much of it the model can store. Fortunately, most of the recommendations on our list offer an average fuel capacity of 5 gallons. 

    Start System

    There are mainly two ways to start a generator- the typical manual pull system and the automatic switch feature. Now, this is a significant factor that the user convenience of the product depends upon because the pull system can be quite stressful at times. That’s why we recommend that beginners should always opt for automatic features.

    Our Verdict on Quietest 5000-watt Generator

    It’s hard to decide what we hate more - the frequent power cuts or the loud noise of the generator? Let’s just say that the most common answer to that question is “both”.

    And that’s where a quiet 5000w generator comes in handy. On that note, we hope that you enjoyed going through our list of the top 7 quietest 5000-watt generators.

    Remember folks - the Westinghouse WGen5300s model delivers the highest wattage while providing the largest fuel tank. On the other hand, the Honda EU7000IS offers the most durable and powerful engine among the other alternatives. If you’re looking for the lowest noise levels, the Champion model is our top pick.

    That being said, we’ll see you soon with more and more exciting content.

    Till then, stay tuned!

    When people look for generators, fuel efficiency is one of their top concerns. After all, the right fuel goes a long way toward savings.

    And when it comes to the choice of fuel, propane is clearly the winner. True, generators that run on gas are also popular, but when it comes to fuel efficiency and ease of use, propane generators beat the rest by a long shot.

    Plus, they are also quieter than their non-propane counterparts. This makes them perfect for both home and recreational use. But, how do you choose the best one among the plethora of options available in the market?

    To help you do just that, we’ve decided to compile this list of the ten best propane generators that you can buy. What’s more, we’ve even created an easy-to-digest buyers’ guide to aid in your decision-making!

    So, let’s not dally any longer and dive in.

    Best Quiet Propane Generators for Home & RV Use

    1. Champion 3800W Dual Fuel Portable Generator

    We begin our journey with the Champion 3800W portable generator, which is as much a winner as its name suggests. Built with dual-fuel capacity, this is a device that’s absolute value for money. If you’re looking for a generator that works equally well indoors and outdoors, this is the one to go with.

    Champion Power Equipment 4750-Watt Electric Start Dual Fuel...
    • Dual Fuel: Operate your 3800-watt portable generator right...
    • Electric Start: Power up the 224cc Champion engine with the...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The first thing that caught our attention about this machine is its dual-fuel technology. It runs equally well on propane as well as gas, so you don’t have to worry about fuel efficiency.

    The next thing that we like about it is the 224cc, 4-stroke Champion engine that comes with a push-button electric start. It delivers 4750 starting watts and provides 3800 running watts with up to 9 hours of run time on a full tank of gas.

    With propane, you get up to 10.5 hours on a 20-pound tank, which is a lot if you ask us. Plus, the device is air-cooled to maintain operating temperatures to a minimum. It even has the option of both electric as well as recoil starts. 

    Finally, we were pretty impressed by the Volt Guard, Intelligauge, and Cold Start technologies on this unit. Coupled with the durable cast iron sleeve, portable wheels, and low-oil shut-off mechanism, we’d say this is one for the keep.

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    Even though it’s advertised as a quiet generator, we found the device to be rather noisy. In fact, when we checked, the noise levels were closer to 80 dBA. Now that’s pretty loud if you ask us. But if you don’t mind a bit of noise, then this is undoubtedly one of the best ones in the market.



    Pros

    • Safety fuel selector switch
    • Highly portable
    • Durable build
    • Propane hose included




    Cons

    • Slightly on the noisier side



    1. Sportsman GEN4000LP

    The next item we have for you is the GEN4000LP from Sportsman, one of the reliable brands in the generator realm. Ideal for camping trips or emergencies, this is a product that delivers superb value for money to all consumers. Utilizing dual-fuel technology, this is one of the most fuel-efficient products available.

    No products found.

    Why Did We Like It?

    When it comes to generators, power capacity is one of the biggest concerns. And we are glad to say that the GEN4000LP scores high in this account. With 3250 watts of continuous operation and 4000 watts of peak power, this is one heck of a machine.

    We really liked the running times on it, which we clocked at ten hours on a full tank and fifty-percent load. The generator has a 7HP 4-stroke OHV recoil start engine that delivers enough power for common household appliances and power tools.

    Also, the product is affordably priced, which means you don’t have to break the bank to buy one. Apart from the above, it also boasts circuit protection technology, which ensures that it operates safely at all loads. 

    We were pleased to find that it comes included with a propane fuel hose and regulator, which makes the task of refueling a lot easier. Plus, the automatic low-oil shutdown feature helps to protect the engine from damage. Overall, a must-buy, in our opinion.

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    Although it comes with two 120V AC and One 12V DC outlet, the generators lack a 240V AC outlet; this limits its usage somewhat. Also, there’s no 30A receptacle, so that’s another issue you’ll have to deal with.



    Pros

    • Propane fuel hose and regulator included
    • 10-hour long running time
    • Automatic low-fuel shutoff
    • Approved by the EPA




    Cons

    • No 30A receptacle
    • Doesn’t have a 240V outlet



    1. Champion 3400W Portable Inverter Generator

    The next product that we have for you is an inverter generator, again from the house of Champion. And we’re pleased to say that this one has a better noise rating than the first item on the list. However, it’s a lower-powered device as well, so that’s the trade-off you’ll have to live with. 

    No products found.

    Why Did We Like It?

    First off, it’s a dual-fuel device, which means you can operate it on either gasoline or propane. The engine is a four-stroke 192cc one and can deliver 3400W of power for domestic as well as on-the-road operation.

    Talking of the engine, we must mention the extreme fuel efficiency that this device boasts of. Running times vary from 7.5 to 14.5 hours based on the fuel type, and it goes without saying that propane gives better running efficiency.

    Convenience is one of the first things that comes to our mind when we think of this generator. The 3-position ignition switch makes starting it convenient, and the Quick Touch Panel allows us to access all the controls in one location. 

    In the end, we must also mention the low-oil auto-shutdown feature that protects the engine from damage and expensive repairs. Plus, it even comes with parallel capability, and the economy mode makes for quieter operation and more fuel savings.

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    The weight is a bit heavy when compared to other devices. However, the puncture-free wheels make the product portable, which is a blessing, in our opinion. Plus, the battery needs to be regularly charged to keep it operational.



    Pros

    • Quieter operation
    • Easy electric start
    • Provides clean power
    • Comes with a 3-years warranty




    Cons

    • Slightly heavy
    • The battery needs regular charging



    1. Westinghouse WGen7500DF

    Westinghouse is a name that needs no introduction among those in the know. With a reputation for providing quality generators, the manufacturer distills their experience of over a century into every product they make. And the WGen7500DF is a prime example of their superior craftsmanship. Interested to know more? Just read on.

    Westinghouse 9500 Peak Watt Dual Fuel Home Backup Portable...
    • 7500 Rated Watts and 9500 Peak Watts (Gasoline); 6750 Rated...
    • Intuitive Control Panel Features Two GFCI 5–20R 120V...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Honestly speaking, there’s nothing quite like a Westinghouse generator for those emergency requirements. The WGen7500DF gives you the advantage of propane as well as gasoline-powered operation. 

    With gasoline, we ran it at 9500 peak watts and 7500 runnings, while propane gave us 8550 watts peak watts and 6750 when running. This means that no matter what fuel you use, you’ll have enough juice to power all your household or camping essentials.

    This monster is powered by a massive, 420cc, 4-stroke Westinghouse engine that is encased in a cast-iron frame for extra durability. It even comes with a digital hour meter and a low-oil shutdown feature. 

    Ease of use is one of the factors Westinghouse has paid particular attention to, and this reflects in the plug-and-play nature of the device. It even comes with a remote-start key fob, a 12V battery charger, and a complete engine-oil tool kit. Talk about convenience!

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    As this is an open-frame generator, the device is considerably louder than other inverter generators. This means if you’re looking for ultra-quiet operations, you’ll be disappointed. Also, at 194 pounds, the device is pretty heavy.



    Pros

    • On-the-fly fuel change
    • Remote electric start
    • Premium quality product
    • Large 6.6 gallons fuel tank




    Cons

    • Rather heavy product
    • Considerably louder



    1. DuroMax XP2000EH

    If a portable powerhouse is what you’re looking for, then you can’t go wrong with the XP2000EH Sidekick from DuroMax. Perfect for those outdoor trips, this is a combination of portability, power, and durability; that’s a rare blend. Lighter, quieter, and more fuel-efficient than regular generators, this is one of the good ones.

    No products found.

    Why Did We Like It?

    Power on the go is hard to find, but DuroMax has the formula all figured out. Its Sidekick series is unsurpassed in its class and has the capability to deliver 2000 peak watts and 1600 running watts. This makes it perfect for camping and tailgating, among other things.

    When we review a generator, we look not only for power but also for the kind of power that the machine provides. And we’re glad to say that this one incorporates inverter technology for providing clean and stable energy for electronics.

    And if you’re worried that one generator won’t be enough for your purposes, then do not worry! The sidekick has a parallel connection feature that allows the bridging of two units together for double the wattage. 

    If even that isn’t enough for you, then it also sports a low-oil shutoff feature, together with idle control that lowers the generator RPMs and saves fuel. Plus, it also reduces the noise by a considerable degree, which is an added advantage.

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    We mentioned that this device could be paralleled together, right? Well, the kit for doing so must be bought separately, which means you’re going to have to shell out money over and above the generator cost. We would’ve preferred it if the kit were included. Also, at 6.5 hours, the peak runtime is a little lower than what we’ve seen till now.



    Pros

    • Stable and clean power
    • Paralleling capability
    • Eco-mode feature
    • Fully featured power panel




    Cons

    • Paralleling kit not included
    • Relatively lower runtime



    1. DuroMax XP4850EH

    DuroMax does it again! The next item on our list is also from the very same manufacturer, and this time we have an open frame offering for you. Sturdy and durable, the XP4850EH is one mean machine. And while we’re by no means saying this is our top pick, if you’re looking for a conventional generator that gets the job done, look no further.

    DuroMax XP4850EH Generator-4850 Watt Gas or Propane...
    • Plenty of Power – With 4,850 starting watts and 3,850...
    • Dual Fuel Technology – This generator runs on gasoline or...

    Why Did We Like It?

    If durability and sustainability are what you’re looking for in a generator, then the XP4850EH is just for you. Designed with dual-fuel technology, this unit can operate on either gas or propane.

    It’s equipped with a massive 7HP 208cc engine that’s designed to give you peak wattages of 4850W and running power of 3850W. This is enough for most domestic as well as RV requirements.

    On a full tank at 50% load, it gives you 8 hours on gas and 10 hours on propane. Now that’s efficient! Also, it’s an inordinately sturdy product, as can be seen from the rugged steel frame and rubberized wheels. 

    Finally, coming to the sound. This generator comes with an oversized muffler, which stops it from generating large amounts of noise. At 23 feet, we measured the sound levels to be 69 dBA, which is quiet enough to be comfortable. Plus, it also has an electric start key, voltmeter, and circuit breakers, among other features. Overall, an excellent product. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    At 130 pounds, this is a rather heavy device. This means despite the presence of wheels, you’ll have a tough time lugging it around. Plus, the fuel tank is smaller than we expected.



    Pros

    • MX2 Power Boost technology
    • GFCI protected outlet
    • All metal construction




    Cons

    • Rather heavy product
    • Only 3.9 Gallon fuel tank



    1. Pulsar PG7750B

    After the double deal from DuroMax, we’re here with yet another stellar product, this time from the house of Pulsar. The PG7750B is an open-frame monster that delivers a massive 7750W of peak power. But power is not the only thing under its hood, as you’re about to learn right now.

    No products found.

    Why Did We Like It?

    For those of you who’re looking for decent performance at a modest cost, this model from Pulsar is one you just can’t ignore. It comes with a dual-fuel running capacity that gives up to 7750W of peak power and 6250W of running power.

    This makes it perfect for running your RV and domestic devices. Plus, this generator even comes with a digital power and runtime meter, four standard AC outlets, and a DC port for battery charging. What’s more, it’s even got a 30A outlet for RV purposes.

    The switch-and-go technology makes it easy to shift between propane and gasoline without turning the device off. With propane, the PG7750B gives an impressive eight hours runtime at 50% load. Now that’s impressive! 

    And when all is said and done, this is a durable device that’s designed with a strong powder-coated steel frame. It’s even got a pair of no-flat tires and a foldable handle for portability, which is much needed in this device, as you’ll find out below.

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    The weight, of course! At over 200 pounds, this is as heavy a product as it is powerful! Without the portability features, it would have been a really hard task lugging this one around.



    Pros

    • Switch-and-Go technology
    • Large 6.6-gallon fuel tank
    • Comes with a propane hose
    • Automatic low-oil shutdown




    Cons

    • Pretty heavy product



    1. Firman H03652

    When it comes to propane generators, we’ve rarely seen runtimes go above 10 hours, that too at minimized loads. But the Firman H03652 proves that a propane generator can be powerful and still deliver impressive runtimes. Don’t believe us? Well, take a closer look and decide for yourselves.

    No products found.

    Why Did We Like It?

    Clean fuel, efficient power, and perfect portability, that’s what the Firman H03652 promises you. Whether it’s an outdoor frolic you’ve planned or a domestic requirement that’s your need, this is a machine that has your back.

    Equipped with a 208cc Firman Max Pro engine, this generator provides massive power of up to 4550W, yet runs coolly and efficiently. This is on account of its Phoenix Fat-Head Block technology. The engine is also equipped with a low oil shutoff and is encased in a cast iron sleeve.

    But the highlight of this device is undoubtedly the five-gallon fuel tank that delivers a whopping fourteen hours of runtime. Plus, it’s also RV ready and comes with a multi-feature control panel and extended propane hose. 

    As for the weight, the device is considerably lighter than the last product and is exceptionally portable. It comes with a wheel kit that’s got heavy-duty tires that don’t go flat and a U-shaped padded handle that offers extreme ease of use. Overall, one of the best buys on the list, in our opinion.

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    The only point of concern in this unit is that it doesn’t come with a 220V outlet. This means it can’t be used in case you want to connect a transfer switch or a breaker panel. 



    Pros

    • Automatic low-oil shutdown
    • Large fuel tank
    • Flexible on-road, at-home operation
    • Extremely portable




    Cons

    • Doesn’t come with a 220V outlet



    1. Ford FG5250PBR

    And at long last, we’re on the final item on our list. And this one is yet another beauty from the house of Ford. Like the other offerings, this one too runs on both propane and gasoline. Also, its Switch-and-Go feature allows a seamless transition from one fuel type to another at the touch of a button.

    No products found.

    Why Did We Like It?

    A powerful, 224cc, Single-Cylinder 4-Stroke OHV engine that’s air-cooled is responsible for the 5250W peak power that this machine delivers. Protected by a heavy-duty powder-coated steel frame, this is a durable generator.

    Coming to the fuel tank, the 4-gallon capacity does seem a bit too low. But with eleven hours of continuous operation at half loads, its efficiency speaks for itself. It’s also equipped with a 12V AC 30A RV port, which makes it perfect for your next on-road adventure. 

    Weighing at a little over 100 pounds, and equipped with never-flat wheels, this generator takes portability to a whole new level. It even comes complete with a propane hose, so you don’t have to shell out extra for it.

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    The only flaw in this otherwise decent product is that it doesn’t come with a battery charging port. Which means you’re going to have to charge the thing separately. In today’s age of well-rounded devices, this is not something that we expected.



    Pros

    • Powerful dual-fuel engine
    • Switch-and-Go technology
    • Twist-lock outlet




    Cons

    • No battery charging port



    Quiet Propane Generator Buyers’ Guide

    So, now you’re equipped with information on the ten best, and quietest propane generators on the market. But don’t think that’s enough to make the correct decision. Settling on the right propane generator takes more diligence than knowing a few model names.

    There are quite a large number of factors to consider when you’re selecting the propane generator of your choice. And to make sure you’re well acquainted with the lot of them, here’s a nifty buyers’ guide that can help you make the decision.

    By coupling the information in this guide with the unbiased reviews above, you can be sure to make the wisest decision. So without further ado, let’s take a look at the factors that you must keep in mind while choosing a propane generator.

    Types Of Propane Generators

    The first thing that you need to keep in mind is the type of propane generator that you need. This depends on the use to which you’ll put it. If you’re in need of a generator for mostly home purposes, then go with a home standby one.

    On the other hand, if you’re looking for one to use on the go, you need to settle with a portable propane generator. However, these can get rather noisy, so for quieter operation, you can go with inverter generators.

    Your Power Level Requirements

    Once you’ve determined the purpose and the type of generator that you need, now it’s time to choose the power level requirements for your machine. Usually, the more the number of appliances you’re planning to run, the higher the power you require.

    In case you want a generator that can power your whole house, you’ll need to go with one that’s at least 5000W or more. However, if you’re looking to power an RV or a campsite, then a smaller one with 3000W peak power will be enough.

    Generator Runtimes

    The next important factor that you need to keep in mind is the runtime of your generator. This is essentially the number of hours that your generator can run at a stretch. For powering your entire house, you should go for one with at least 10-12 hours of runtime.

    For RV applications, you’ll usually need the power in specific intervals, which means an extended running time is not really needed. Still aim for one with at least 6-8 hours of runtime for best results.

    On that note, do remember that runtime is usually calculated at fifty percent load. So the usage to which you put your generator also plays a role in this.

    Portability Factor

    Not all portable generators are made equal, and this needs to be kept in mind while settling on the right model. While some measure within 100 pounds and can be wheeled around, others can be over 200 pounds and virtually impossible to move, even with wheels.

    To decide on portability, consider how frequently you need to move the device. Is it mainly meant for home use and is more likely to sit in one spot? Then you can go with a heavier model. For on-the-road use, make sure to select a portable one that can be easily carried.

    Electric Start Mechanisms

    Forget the old pull cord that’s usually associated with generators. When selecting your model, choose one with an electric start mechanism that makes turning the generator on a cinch. What’s more, you can even choose one with a remote start mechanism for greater convenience.

    Safety Factors

    At the end of the day, a generator is an electromechanical device and can pose serious safety concerns. When choosing one, go with models that feature low-oil alert and auto-shutoff features. Better still, make sure that your device of choice has a surge protection mechanism built in to protect sensitive electronics.

    Number Of Outlets

    Finally, the last but very vital thing that you need to take care of is the number of outlets on the generator. Go with ones that have four or more standard AC outlets, as this will allow you to plug in several small appliances. And for RV use, don’t forget the 30A outlet.

    Verdict

    And there you have it! Now you’re ready to go out and purchase the best propane generator of your choice! Before you set out to shop, however, we want to share our favorites with you.

    From our list, the overall winner is decidedly the Champion 3800W, which despite being a bit noisy, delivers a stunning performance. However, if raw power is what you’re looking for, then the Westinghouse WGen7500DF is a better option. And if portability is your prime concern, then go with the XP2000EH from DuroMax.

    So, keep the above in mind when settling for the right generator, and rely on the buyers’ guide to help you out! On that note, we’ll take our leave, hoping that you get exactly what you’re looking for.

    Till next time!

    Related Articles

    33 Awesome and Cheap Small Cabin Plans to Nestle in the Woods

    9 Best Quiet 4000-Watt Generators

    10 Quietest 3000-Watt Generators For RV And Home Use

    7 Best Whole House Generators 

    There is no denying that 4000-watt generators can prove to be lifesavers during power outages.

    After all, they produce consistent power for extended periods and prevent disruption of activities. Not just that, they are quieter than the traditional units and can be carried anywhere, which makes them ideal for camping, tailgating, and powering RVs. So, going for such a device would certainly be a wise decision.

    However, since there are many options and factors to consider, selecting the right model can be quite time-consuming and challenging. 

    That is why we have brought together a list of the nine best quiet 4000-watt generators currently available on the market after extensive research and testing. We have also provided a buyer's guide towards the end of the article to help you make an informed purchase. 

    Now, without any further delay, let's get started!   

    Top 9 Quiet 4000-Watt Generators

    Best Quiet 4000-Watt Generator

    1. DuroMax

    When it comes to manufacturing durable and reliable portable generators, DuroMax is one of the best brands on the market. Thus, it should come as no surprise that the DuroMax XP4000S portable generator is among our top recommendations. Equipped with a robust engine, the product offers sufficient power to deal with multiple jobs.     

    DuroMax XP4000S Portable Generator-4000 Watt Gas Powered...
    • Plenty of Power – With 4,000 peak watts and 3,300 running...
    • Powerful Engine – The DuroMax 208cc OHV engine is a...

    Why Did We Like It?

    With 3300 running watts and 4000 peak watts, this portable generator can withstand heavy loads, making it suitable even for power tools and home air conditioners. Additionally, it boasts a robust 208 cc OHV engine to ensure it can handle numerous jobs involving high-voltage appliances with ease. Rest assured, it will fulfill your requirements during a power outage. 

    We were also pleased to find out that it features a sensor that automatically shuts off the device when the oil is low to protect the device. We must also mention that all the windings in the device are made of copper for a longer lifespan. 

    Apart from that, the generator is approved by the EPA, which means it produces low emissions and is more eco-friendly than traditional generators. Last but not least, it sports an affordable price tag, making it a top choice if you are on a tight budget.        

    What Could've Been Better?

    We didn't come across any significant drawbacks to this product that would be considered a deal-breaker. However, we have to admit that the power fluctuates once in a while, which can be noticed on the voltmeter. But then again, given the economical price tag, we don't think most users would mind this minor issue.   



    Pros

    • Budget-friendly
    • Durable and well-built
    • Can handle heavy loads
    • Backed by a three-year warranty




    Cons

    • Power fluctuates at times



    2. Champion Power Equipment Open Frame Inverter

    Founded in 2003, Champion Power Equipment has been dedicated to producing and designing the best power equipment for over a decade. And this open-frame inverter from the brand is yet another feather in its cap. Packed with plenty of functional features, the product ranks high in terms of performance and fuel efficiency. 

    Champion Power Equipment 4000-Watt RV Ready Open Frame...
    • Advanced Open Frame Inverter Design: 50% quieter and 20%...
    • Quiet Technology and Extended Run Time: 64 dBA is great for...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The modern open-frame design is what caught our attention from the get-go, which not only makes the product stand out from other traditional generators but also makes it lighter. Therefore, users should face no problem carrying it from one place to another. 

    And thanks to Quiet Technology, the inverter generator operates at under 64 decibels, making it ideal for RVs. 

    Apart from that, the product is parallel-ready, allowing you to double the power output by connecting up to two high-watt inverters. We were also quite impressed with its Economy Mode, which makes it incredibly fuel-efficient and extends the engine life.       

    Additionally, the inverter generator is backed by a three-year warranty. Thus, you don't have to pay to repair or replace the product during the first three years of purchase. And there’s more; the company offers free lifetime technical support, thus providing one of the best customer experiences in the industry.       

    What Could've Been Better?

    Without a doubt, this product is one of the best quiet 4000-watt generators currently available on the market. However, it may not be ideal for those with a modest budget. Other than the steep price tag, we found a few issues with the instructions, which was a little disappointing.  



    Pros

    • Backed by a 3-year warranty
    • Quiet operation at 64 decibels
    • Lifetime free technical support
    • Highly fuel-efficient




    Cons

    • A bit expensive



    3. Westinghouse

    Our next pick is from Westinghouse, a prominent US-based power equipment brand that has been providing clean energy solutions since 1886. Meet the iGen4500 inverter generator that can help meet your various power needs whether you are on the go or camping. Read on to know what all it offers.  

    Westinghouse 5000 Peak Watt Super Quiet Portable Inverter...
    • 5000 Peak Watts and 3900 Rated Watts at Less Than 3% THD;...
    • Features a 5–20R 120V Duplex Household Outlet, an RV-Ready...
      

    Why Did We Like It?

    For us, the main highlight of this product is the reliable push-button electric start that ensures the generator stops and starts without any hiccups. It also comes with a key fob for wireless remote start, allowing you to stop and start the generator from up to 260 feet away. Needless to say, these features make the product superior to traditional portable generators.

    As far as the engine is concerned, it is fuel-efficient, thanks to the active throttle system that regulates the engine speed and power as per the load that's demanded. It also features a low-oil automatic shutdown sensor, which ensures that the product powers off automatically to prevent damaging itself. And the best part? It is exceptionally quiet. 

    The inverter generator sports a convenient and intuitive digital data center that displays lifetime run hours, voltage output, power output, and fuel level. Thus, it enables you to track real-time information and maintenance intervals.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    The hatches for the oil compartments and the battery are small. So, people with large hands may find it difficult to screw and unscrew the oil cap and secure the battery. Other than that, the product may be slightly expensive for some buyers. However, given the features on offer, we would say that it is worth the investment. 



    Pros

    • Sports a big fuel tank
    • Built-in wheels for easy portability
    • Powered by a highly fuel-efficient engine
    • Incredibly quiet




    Cons

    • Small oil compartment hatch



    4. WEN GN400i Inverter Generator

    Wen has been manufacturing and supplying top-grade yet affordable power equipment for over 70 years. So, it made sense to add a product from a brand of such caliber to our list. Whether at the campsite, at home, or on the job, the GN400i Inverter Generator makes sure you don't have to worry about outages. 

    WEN GN400i RV-Ready 4000-Watt Open Frame Inverter Generator,...
    • Dimensions: 19.8" L x 13.8" W x 18.9" H | Weight: 66.1...
    • Generate clean power to safely operate sensitive electronics...

    Why Did We Like It?

    We must single out the design as the USP of the inverter generator. At 66 pounds, it is incredibly lightweight and portable, allowing you to carry it wherever you go. Not to mention, it takes up only a small space, making it an ideal choice for trailers. 

    Moving on, we were thoroughly impressed with the engine power. The four-stroke engine can generate up to 3500 running watts and 4000 surge watts of reliable power. Additionally, the Eco-Mode feature deserves special mention as it enables the motor to automatically regulate fuel consumption, thereby preventing gasoline wastage and saving you money. 

    You will be pleased to know that the product is designed to prevent voltage drops and spikes, which means it is safe for use with mobile phones, laptops, and other electronics. And lastly, it is backed by a two-year warranty, so you don't have to worry if it malfunctions down the road; the brand has you covered.    

    What Could've Been Better?

    Unfortunately, the noise level of this Wen generator is relatively high but not as loud as a traditional generator. So, you might want to keep it in mind if you decide to purchase this product. Also, it would have been excellent if the manufacturer had provided a bottle of oil with it. 



    Pros

    • Comes with a two-year warranty
    • Safe to use with sensitive electronics
    • Lightweight and portable
    • Sports an economical price tag




    Cons

    • Not the quietest generator on this list



    5. Pulsar

    Now that we are midway through the list, let’s take a look at the G450RN portable backup generator from the house of Pulsar. Pragmatic and highly versatile, this product can be your go-to option for an alternative power source on your next adventure. So, let's see what it brings to the table in the next few sections.

    Pulsar G450RN, 4500W Super Quiet Portable Inverter Generator...
    • 4, 500 peak watts/ 3, 700 running watts
    • Capable of up to 15 hours of extended operation at half load...

    Why Did We Like It?

    For starters, it is a quiet generator because it operates at only 63 decibels, allowing you to have a normal conversation just 10 feet away. This makes the product a great choice for a power source while camping. Additionally, the product is CARB-approved, which is excellent news for eco-conscious users. 

    The fuel capacity of this portable generator is 3.2 gallons, making it capable of providing uninterrupted power at half load for up to 15 hours. Therefore, you can use this product during blackouts and outdoor events without worrying about fluctuations. We also loved its compact construction and never-flat wheels that support easy storage and maneuverability.

    Apart from that, the wireless remote start deserves mention; it allows you to control the product from up to 80 feet away. And did we mention that it is parallel-ready? Indeed, you can hook up to two portable generators to enjoy double the wattage from this portable inverter generator.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    We did not find any information about the warranty offered by the manufacturer. As such, we can’t confirm whether it is backed by a warranty or not. Other than that, we found the oil access point a tad difficult to open, which was a bit frustrating. 



    Pros

    • Operates quietly
    • Convenient to move around and store
    • Eco-friendly
    • Ideal for camping




    Cons

    • Oil access point is difficult to open



    6. Bilt Hard Inverter Generator

    Bilt Hard is a brand that specializes in the production, development, and research of high-quality gas tools and power tools. And this inverter generator is an ideal example of what the brand is capable of designing. Praised by customers from across the globe for its range of compelling features, this is an option you wouldn't want to ignore.  

    BILT HARD 4500W Dual Fuel Portable Quiet Inverter Generator,...
    • Dual-Fuel Operation (Gasoline & Propane): Features a 141cc...
    • Clean Inverter Power (<3% THD): Our gas generator delivers...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The product features innovative inverter technology, which ensures that it delivers clean power that's safe to use with phones, laptops, and other sensitive electronics. We were also impressed with the built-in casters and the sturdy collapsible handle that make the product easy to maneuver. On that note, this versatile product is an excellent addition to an RV and small homes. 

    Additionally, it comes with both recoil and electric start. While the electric start allows you to switch the unit on with a press of a button, the recoil start comes in handy when the engine fails. Beyond that, you will be pleased to know that it operates at just 68 decibels, which means it won't disturb your entertainment and rest, much less the neighbors’. 

    Not to mention how it comes with a two-year warranty, proving the brand has faith in the quality of its products. Overall, it is a great backup power option during a power outage and outdoor events.   

    What Could've Been Better?

    A few disgruntled users have expressed their disappointment over the run time of the unit. They mentioned that it runs just a little over three hours, whereas the brand says it would run for 14 hours. Other than that, we would have liked it if it came with an oil bottle.   



    Pros

    • Backed by a two-year warranty
    • Easy to move around
    • Super quiet operation
    • Provides clean and reliable power




    Cons

    • Doesn’t come with oil



    7. PowerSmart Inverter Generator

    Next, we have chosen this quality unit from PowerSmart, a prominent name in the power equipment industry. It is a great option if you are looking for a gas-powered generator that provides green electrical energy for home power backup, RV camping, and powering mobile phones. So, let's dig a little deeper.   

    PowerSmart 4400-Watt Portable Generator with Inverter...
    • Power: 4400 starting watt and 3600 running watt clean power...
    • Convenience: Equipped with a 30A outlet for RV, Home use,...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Straight off the bat, you get a 2.54-gallon massive fuel tank, enabling the machine to run for 15 hours straight. So, be it a power outage or an outdoor event, you can trust this inverter generator to provide an uninterrupted power supply for extended periods.

    It features a digital display, which shows the total runtime, session runtime, frequency, and voltage to help you keep track of its performance and know when it's time for maintenance. Apart from that, we were pleasantly surprised to find out that it runs at 61 decibels on max power output, meaning it's incredibly quiet and a perfect choice for camping.

    Now, what makes it a truly powerful generator is its four-stroke, single-cylinder, OHV engine that provides top-notch performance as a reliable power backup option. It is also parallel-ready, allowing you to connect two inverter generators to boost the total power output. Naturally, this unit is one of the most highly rated and sought-after inverter generators.   

    What Could've Been Better?

    A major gripe that we have with this product is that it doesn't come with built-in casters, which could make it difficult to carry, especially for elderly people. Other than that, we must mention that we couldn't find any information related to the warranty.



    Pros

    • One of the quietest 4000-watt generators
    • Available at a reasonable price
    • Boasts a powerful engine
    • Works for extended periods




    Cons

    • Doesn’t come with built-in casters



    8. Champion Power Equipment

    We will not be wasting any time introducing you to Champion Power Equipment as we have already reviewed an exceptional inverter generator from the brand previously. Now, as for this model, it is a notch above most options on our list. Keep reading to know more about it.   

    Champion Power Equipment 4500-Watt RV Ready Portable...
    • QUIET TECHNOLOGY: 61 dBA is great for RVs, tailgating, or...
    • PARALLEL READY: The optional parallel kit (sold separately)...

    Why Did We Like It?

    In our opinion, one of the most notable features of this generator inverter is the Intelligauge which allows you to monitor the operating hours, frequency, and voltage with ease. Thus, it helps you keep track of the performance of your device. 

    Additionally, it comes with the EZ start dial that ensures that the engine starts easily and quickly, without the user putting in the effort, unlike generators with recoil starts. Another thing that we liked about this device is that it produces clean electricity (< 3% THD), which means you can connect your mobile phones, laptops, and other sensitive electronics confidently. 

    Like most Champion Power Equipment inverter generator models, this one also features Quiet Technology, which ensures it operates at a lower noise level (61 decibels).   

    Finally, we must mention that the product is CARB compliant, which means it meets the emission standards set by California Air Resource Board. Thus, you can buy it without worrying about harming the environment.       

    What Could've Been Better?

    Unfortunately, it doesn't come with a parallel kit. So, be prepared to make additional expenses to buy one if you want to connect it to another inverter to increase the output power during outdoor events or tailgating. Other than that, the product works perfectly.  



    Pros

    • Backed by a three-year warranty
    • Eco-friendly
    • Easy to start the device
    • Ideal for camping and tailgating




    Cons

    • Doesn’t include the parallel kit



    9. WEN GN4500 RV-Ready Portable Generator

    This list would have remained incomplete had we not included the GN4500 RV-Ready Portable Generator from WEN. Affordable yet with extraordinary features, this generator can provide you with the required power where and when you need it most. Want to know more? Well, then keep reading.   

    WEN GN4500 4500-Watt 212cc Transfer Switch and RV-Ready...
    • Generate up to 4500 starting watts and 3600 running watts
    • 4-gallon fuel tank provides a half-load runtime of up to 13...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Firstly, those planning to use it on their RVs will be pleased to know that it comes with a 120V RV outlet, making it incredibly easy to connect with RVs. 

    As far as the engine of the generator is concerned, we are pleased to inform you that it couldn't be more robust. In fact, it is a 4-stroke, 212 cc engine that can generate up to 3600 running watts and 4500 surge watts of steady, clean, and reliable power. 

    Beyond that, the tank needs to be discussed as it is decently large and can hold up to four gallons of fuel, enabling the product to run long (13 hours). And finally, it is backed by a two-year warranty; hence repairs and replacements should be the least of your concerns for the first two years with this product.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    Although the product is compact, it's not lightweight as advertised. In fact, at nearly 108 pounds, it is one of the heaviest generators on this list. So, make sure you purchase the wheel and handle kit to move it from one place to another.  



    Pros

    • Backed by a two-year warranty
    • Sports an affordable price tag
    • Has a highly-efficient engine
    • Comes with a large fuel tank




    Cons

    • Quite heavy



    Quiet 4000-Watt Generators Buying Guide

    Quiet 4000-Watt Generators Buying Guide

    Now that you have gone through our top recommendations for quiet 4000-watt generators, we think a buyer's guide will help you make an informed decision. In this section, we have discussed the important aspects of a 4000-watt generator so that you don't have any problem choosing a unit that works best for you.

    Make sure you read the entire thing; otherwise, you might miss out on a thing or two. Also, if required, note these points down on a piece of paper and keep it handy while purchasing.    

    1. Runtime

    The runtime of a 4000-watt generator is an essential factor that you need to consider while making a purchase. After all, it determines the total time the generator will run on a tank full of gasoline at half the rated wattage. More often than not, the runtime depends on the size of the tank and the engine.

    However, it also significantly depends on the load. In other words, the number of electronics that you are connecting at a time. To increase the runtime, make sure you don't power too many devices simultaneously. 

    2. Portability

    You want to make sure that your generator is portable for transportation and storage. Fortunately, most 4000-watt generators are not bulky and can be carried from one place to another. Also, these days, many models have wheels underneath them that further enhance their portability and ease of storage. We recommend that you choose one such unit.  

    3. Noise Level

    Generally measured in decibels, the noise level is yet another important factor that you can't afford to ignore while purchasing a portable generator. You wouldn't want the generator to be too noisy to ruin the camping experience or disturb your rest. 

    Therefore, make sure that you go with a unit with a lower noise level between 50 and 70 decibels; the lower, the better. Don't worry; all the products we have reviewed are within that range.

    4. Warranty

    Make sure that the generator you are going for comes with a warranty. This is because a warranty ensures that you don't have to incur additional expenses to repair or replace the generator if it malfunctions in the future. 

    Apart from that, a warranty means that the product is of good quality and it will last a long time. Usually, 4000-watt generators are backed by a two or three-year warranty, and some brands may even offer lifetime technical support, but still check before purchasing to be safe. 

    Quiet 4000-Watt Generators Frequently Asked Questions?

    Here, we have answered some of the most commonly asked questions about 4000-watt generators. Hopefully, you will find them useful.

    Q1. How is a 4000-watt generator better than a traditional unit?

    A 4000-watt generator is better than a traditional generator in many aspects. To begin with, inverter generators don't cause voltage spikes and distortions too often, making them an ideal option for connecting phones, laptops, and other sensitive electronics.

    On the other hand, traditional generators tend to cause voltage spikes when there is a sudden increase or decrease in the current. Apart from that, 4000-watt generators are portable and produce low noise levels, while that's not the case with the traditional units.

    Q2. What are the items that a portable 4000-watt inverter generator can power?

    A 4000-watt generator can power many electronic appliances such as TVs, refrigerators, and even air conditioners. Furthermore, you can use it as a backup power supply in your home during power outages.

    Quiet 4000-Watt Generators

    Quietest 4000-Watt Generators Verdict

    With that, we have almost reached the end of our review-based guide. And hopefully, now you are equipped with all the necessary information to get yourself the right 4000-watt generator. However, if you are still confused, then stick around for a couple more minutes as we let you in on our favorites from the list to make things crystal clear.

    According to us, the DuroMax is the overall best, simply because it can handle heavy loads and sports a budget-friendly price tag. Additionally, the Champion Power Equipment Open Frame Inverter is also a decent option, as it is highly fuel-efficient and backed by a 3-year warranty. 

    And if you are looking for the quietest portable generator, you cannot go wrong with the Westinghouse

    That's all for today. Until next time, take care!

    Related Articles

    7 Best Whole House Generators

    10 Best Quiet Propane Generators For Home And RV Use

    Top 10 Quietest 5000-Watt Generators For Home Use

    10 Quietest 3000-Watt Generators For RV And Home Use

    Are you on a budget but still in need of a bicycle parking rack, toddler chair, or other essentials? Do you have some spare PVC pipes that you don't know how to dispose of?

    We have a DIY solution for any home project problems, whether you're short on finances but need to finish a project or have excess PVC pipes from previous plumbing works.

    This article will present 50 easy and useful DIY PVC pipe projects you can make from the comfort of your home.

    50 DIY PVC Pipe Projects You Can Do Today

    Plastic pipes for the water system on grey background. Repair service, sale, online. Flat lay. Copy space 50 DIY PVC Pipe Projects You Can Do Today

    Polyvinyl Chloride pipe, or PVC pipe, is a type of economical material used in sewer systems and water lines as it is durable and resistant to environmental factors over time.

    Yet, there are instances where excess PVC pipes can be left rotting in the nooks and crannies of our storage space after construction or DIY repairs.

    There will also be times when we'll need budget-friendly solutions for everyday needs, such as storage racks or even interior design elements.

    So, instead of stocking PVC pipes, we can reuse them for other purposes which are laid down below. Let's get started!

    1. PVC Pipe DIY Bike Rack

    PVC Pipe DIY Bike Rack

    Image Source

    If you are a habitual cyclist who uses bikes to-and-from work or are a serious cyclist who competes in marathons and races, you'll surely need a bike rack for your two-wheeled buddy.

    To make a sturdy and reliable PVC bike rack while keeping your budget on track, use 3/4-inch PVC pipes and assemble them to replicate the image above.

    The key challenge here is ensuring that your front wheel can fit and balance between the gaps.

    2. Toddler Chair

    Toddler Chair

    via Trisha Poffenberger

    During summer beach days or camping trips, you would want your toddlers to feel comfortable sitting down while getting some sun through this DIY PVC pipe project – a toddler chair!

    In making the toddler chair, you must have a 3/4" PVC pipe, eight elbows, and six PVC tees.

    You will also need to add a cloth that will serve as the seat and backrest. You can use fabrics showing your toddler's favorite cartoon character, superheroes, or preferred colors.

    3. Drill Dock

    Drill Dock

    Image Source

    An organized station for your drilling tools can bring joy to every individual immersed in mechanical work. You can work with PVC pipes to make organization happen even on a budget.

    In making a drill dock PVC pipe project, you'll need to measure your drills and buy PVC pipes with diameters that can fully accommodate your equipment once slotted in.

    4. PVC Pipe Water Shooter

    PVC Pipe Water Shooter

    via Sarah Dees

    Providing your kids (and kids at heart) a fun time means creating PVC pipe projects that are entertaining, like a water shooter.

    Making this PVC pipe project is easy because you only need the barrel (external) and the piston (internal), both of which can be made with different-sized pipes.

    You'll need to insert the piston into a relatively larger barrel with a seal cap on top that has a drilled hole. This creates enough pressure to push the water out in the signature super soaker style.

    5. DIY Marshmallow Gun

    DIY Marshmallow Gun

    via : Cindy

    Keep the intensity (and fun) high during kiddie parties or family gatherings by shooting marshmallows everywhere! To have enough for everyone, you must have a cost-effective alternative – a DIY PVC pipe marshmallow gun!

    It is easy to make, as you only need to combine PVC pipes, tees, and elbows to create a gun-like shape. Just ensure both ends are open to blow on one end and push the marshmallow out the other.

    6. Pool Noodles

    Pool Noodles

    via Fringe Sport

    When teaching your kids, and even some adults, to swim, they need reassurance that they will float no matter what, and you can do that through pool noodles.

    To elevate your pool noodle's buoyancy and ease your tutees, you can cut it in half and insert a PVC pipe between the two noodles for additional stability and rigidity.

    You can also use this for pool photoshoot designs if you keep the water noodles festive and on theme.

    7. Knife Holders

    Knife Holders

    via Ryan Grondin

    If you want to keep your kitchen or working area neat and well-ordered, you can do this through another PVC pipe project.

    A DIY PVC pipe knife holder is essential in keeping the knives and users safe by moving them off the counter and away from your child.

    In making your DIY PVC pipe knife holder, cut PVC pipe according to the lengths of your knives from the tip to the end of the spine.

    8. PVC Pipe Aquaponic Garden

    PVC Pipe Aquaponic Garden

    Image Source

    As you create a PVC pipe aquaponic garden, sustainability and healthy living can now be found within your household.

    To do this, you have to connect your PVC pipe (fluid conveyance) with holes to a water source (hose) and make sure that the latter can generate water throughout your pipe system.

    9. DIY Laptop Stand

    DIY Laptop Stand

    via super ziper

    Living in the modern world also calls for modern solutions, including a DIY laptop holder made of PVC pipes.

    To do this, you need a 1 to 1-1/4-inch PVC pipe and six elbows. Then, you can sand and paint them to your liking. Lastly, connect them using glue to form an angled-laptop stand based on the size of your device.

    10. Shoe Organizer

    Shoe Organizer

    via : April Stephenson

    If your hobbies include collecting shoes, the first thing you need to remember is the answer to the question: where will I put the shoes?

    The most obvious answer is a shoe organizer. Yet, if you are on a tight budget for organizers, as most of your funds are focused on buying shoes, PVC pipe may be your friend!

    You can cut a standard-sized 6-meter PVC pipe into 15 to 20 short lengths, depending on your shoe size, arrange them like the image above, and you can have your very own DIY shoe organizer.

    11. PVC Cabana

    PVC Cabana

    via JTM

    Relaxation is not complete without a cabana, whether by the swimming pool, at the beach, or right in your backyard.

    Lounging in the comfort of a cabana while sipping your coffee does not need to be expensive, as you can include it in your lists of PVC pipe projects.

    To do this, you must have at least eight PVC pipes, which can be six to ten meters long, depending on your desired design. Then, connect these PVC pipes using L and T-shaped fittings.

    12. PVC Starburst Pattern Mirror

    PVC Starburst Pattern Mirror

    Image Source

    Recycling your stock PVC pipes can also help up your indoor design by making it the mirror's frame. As we know, mirrors are essential parts of a home that can create the illusion of a bigger space in a smaller area.

    To make a starburst pattern mirror, any tutorial would include cutting each pipe, gluing the pipes together in your chosen design, and attaching them to your walls via screws.

    Moreover, you can also elevate this inexpensive way to decorate your home through light spray paint or aerosol paint.

    13. PVC Lemonade Stand

    PVC Lemonade Stand

    Image Source

    During the summer, one thing that both you and your kids will enjoy doing is making a lemonade stand to sell lemonade.

    Before we proceed with the selling part, you can create a lemonade stand PVC pipe project with your young entrepreneur using a 40-foot PVC pipe, and slip tees, all of similar diameters.

    After you have assembled the PVC pipe system, you can paint the signage by hand or with spray paint, add a stand cover, and let your kids start selling!

    14. Kids Sprinkler

    Kids Sprinkler

    via Danielle Ramsay

    If you want to spark excitement among the young ones during your annual family gathering or just for your usual weekend leisure, DIY projects like this kids' sprinkler will be perfect for any occasion

    To make this DIY PVC pipe happen, you must use your imagination, lay out a design, buy PVC materials, use colorful tape and design all over the sprinkler, and connect to a water source like a hose.

    15. Ball Pit

    Ball Pit

    via Moesha Mercer

    When you want your kids to feel the excitement and sensory stimulation from a ball pit without actually going to a ball pit park, ball pit PVC pipe projects are a great idea.

    Aside from using a PVC pipe, it would be best to have some water noodles, elbow connectors, pipe glue, zip ties, netting, and balls.

    Moreover, an additional way to boost your kids' mood is by incorporating their outdoor slides as an entrance to the kids' ball pit.

    16) Bookshelf

    Bookshelf

    via Amanda

    In trying to introduce the world of books, and life in general, to your kids, you are left with so many books and so little space to keep them. A bookshelf DIY PVC pipe can save your day!

    With a bookshelf DIY PVC pipe, you secure the books and keep your little ones' areas nice and tidy. Make sure to make a shelf they can reach when their need to read arises.

    Tip

    The bookshelf design in the image above can also be used as your bag organizer within your closet.

    17. Kiddie Carwash

    Kiddie Carwash

    via Tanya Memme

    During summer breaks, we need something that will keep our kids' minds busy, their bodies moving, and their hearts gleaming with joy, and there's no better way to do that than with a kiddie carwash in your backyard.

    Aside from using a PVC pipe for the structure and fencing, make sure you have fabric, textiles, water toys, paper designs, sponges, a pool noodle, an expansive lawn, and colorful cones to add to the fun.

    18. Overhead Camera Mount

    Overhead Camera Mount

    via Gina Michele

    In the digital age, where content creation has been the topmost priority to earn money, and social relevance, an overhead camera mount is another essential that you need to have to take pictures or videos from a bird's eye view.

    Overhead camera mounts on the market are expensive, so including this in your DIY PVC pipe projects is a must.

    For this, you must ensure the lower PVC pipe mount is sturdy enough to support the neck and the weight from the camera once mounted.

    19. Bird Bath

    Bird Bath

    via Richard Buse

    Birds need water to drink and to keep their bodies clean. To do that, they will need a bird bath.

    But, a bird bath does not need to be expensive, it just needs to be efficient, and you can do that by creating one in your backyard using PVC pipe.

    You can use a thick PVC pipe as the column of the bird bath. You can also cut a PVC pipe into sections, cut them in half (vertical), and form a frame using elbows to create a table-like bath.

    20. Photography Backdrop Stand

    Photography Backdrop Stand

    Image Source

    Birthday shoots, homecomings, and other celebrations need a photo booth; in that booth, you will need a backdrop stand. Well, with that problem, the best solution is a DIY PVC pipe square frame covered in fabric.

    It's easy to do as you only have to ensure the mount is well-built, the stands that hold it are well-balanced, and the fabric you attach is aligned with the theme.

    21. Craft Room Tool Organizer

    Craft Room Tool Organizer

    via Aspen Flores

    If you or your kids' hobbies involve arts and crafts, something that will surely spark joy in your lives is a craft room tool organizer.

    Aside from the end product, you will also enjoy the process of making PVC pipe projects like the image above.

    To make it more creative, aside from when you cut PVC pipe, remember to paint the tubes in your favorite hues and incorporate different patterns to make them lively and fun. 

    22. Tool Pockets

    Tool Pockets

    via LifeProTips

    Things can get messy in a hardware store or workshop when tools and accessories are in disarray. Yet, you can prevent it with tool pockets PVC pipe projects.

    This project's straightforward process only involves cutting the PVC pipe into a tube with lengths depending on the tools.

    Then, proceed by painting (optional), attaching them to a wooden wall board, or just letting them stand tall above your work desk.

    23. No-Ladder Gutter Cleaner

    No-Ladder Gutter Cleaner

    via SBLY Media

    Cleaning the gutter takes tons of energy as you need to climb the roof and clean it from there. However, times have changed, and the DIY PVC pipe projects game has leveled up as you can now have a no-ladder-toss gutter cleaner.

    To make this gutter cleaner, you must assemble the nozzle and the valve. The nozzle will be the one that will clean the gutter, and the valve is the one connected to your air or water source.

    24. PVC Pipe Bed

    PVC Pipe Bed

    via Sterling Acree

    Having kids means providing them with their own beds. Yet, what if you are on a budget or have a small space? The answer is a DIY PVC pipe bed!

    In building a pipe bed, the foundation is the main thing you need to stabilize. They must be adequately connected using elbows and have different columns attached through a T-shaped PVC pipe.

    Moreover, you can use cute rainbow washi tape designs to make it more appealing for the kids and tape it all over the poles.

    25. Fall Wall for Kids

    Fall Wall for Kids

    via Summer Keyser

    If you are looking for fun and games to keep your kids away from the spell of gadgets during the summer, you can create a fall wall for kids inside your home or in your garden.

    For a complete tutorial, what you need to have are PVC pipes, elbows, a board where you can glue these materials, and a container so that the balls will not go anywhere upon falling.

    You can also add some colors to your pipes using spray paint. Make sure that the colors you incorporate are eye-catching and can stimulate visual sensations.

    26. PVC Fence

    PVC Fence

    via Karina WA

    A fence is a protective element that protects the perimeter of your yard, yet it sometimes costs a lot, especially in this economy. However, there are cheap but reliable alternatives, such as a PVC pipe fence.

    Aside from securing your homes, it can also be an excellent addition to level up your garden aesthetics, especially when you know how to design the fence using T and L-shaped PVC pipes.

    27. Cord Organizer

    Cord Organizer

    via Brittany

    Another inexpensive way to organize your cords is by creating a PVC pipe cord organizer.

    To do this, you only need to cut a PVC pipe horizontally to the lengths you need, attach them to the wall using glue or an adhesive, or drill a hole and lock them with a screw.

    28. Drying Rack

    Drying Rack

    via Angie Hutching

    In every pool session, your kids would gladly want a place to get or hang their wet towels to dry off quickly. A PVC pipe drying rack is the best affordable idea you can get in this case!

    You can have it in a two-way parallel design or a layered rack similar to the image. Just remember to make the frame foundation well-connected to ensure the balance of the rack.

    You can permanently mount the drying rack in your garden. It will act as your pool towel hanger and washed clothes dryer instead of letting them dry inside the bathroom.

    29. Honey Spinner

    Honey Spinner

    via Permies

    Extracting honey from honeycombs can be done quickly using a honey spinner. To help small-time beekeepers, a DIY PVC pipe spinner can be used as a cheap yet efficient alternative.

    In making the PVC pipe honey spinner, you only need about a meter and a half of PVC pipe to seal the deal.

    30. Wine Rack Drawer

    Wine Rack Drawer

    via Martha Stewart

    There is no such thing as too much wine, but they must be kept perfectly secured in a wine rack drawer similar to this Martha Stewart piece.

    For PVC pipe furniture projects like this to prosper, you need to buy PVC pipes with a diameter that fits the body of your wine bottles.

    It would also help to cut the PVC pipe in lengths that can accommodate the bottom up to the caps of the wines.

    Fun Fact

    You can also design your wine rack with some wine corks, and to do that, you need to check out our article on DIY wine cork projects.

    31. Odd Bits Organizer

    Odd Bits Organizer

    via Julie Salamone-Lee

    If you have pets and kids, one of your priorities is to keep odd bits away from their reach. You can do that using a PVC pipe odd bits organizer.

    To do that, cut your PVC pipe, arrange them in any manner you like, whether horizontal or vertical and screw them into your walls above their reach.

    32. Sprinkler Socket System

    Sprinkler Socket System

    via samuel belknap

    When you are a busy person who goes to the office before sunrise and leaves after sunset, you surely won't have spare time to water your garden. Yet, it's not a problem when you have a sprinkler socket system.

    You must assemble and connect the pipes to a primary water source or hose for an irrigation sprinkler socket system to work.

    33. Floating Window Planter

    Floating Window Planter

    via Mandi Johnson

    A fun detail to add in a kitchen is a floating window planter for your herbs, which means having flavor and health benefits right within your reach while preparing food.

    You must have at least a 4-inch PVC pipe to have this kind of magic indoors. Then, you must put holes in the pipe's body, depending on how many herbs and shrubs you will plant.

    Also, ensure the holes are big enough for the plants to breathe and take in enough water for sustenance.

    34. PVC Pipe Lamps

    PVC Pipe Lamps

    via decor8

    If you are tasked to decorate your house's interior design, an idea worth doing is a PVC pipe lamp project.

    For PVC pipe projects like this, you need to follow this tutorial: cut a PVC into a tube, depending on the diameter of your liking, carve different shapes and patterns on its shell, paint, and put a light source inside.

    In addition, you can also put this as a table centerpiece to level up your table décor and preparations.

    Remember

    You can always complement the PVC with a wooden lamp by following the full instructions in this DIY wooden lamp article!

    35. Ladder Golf Game

    Ladder Golf Game

    via Brielle and Karen

    A PVC pipe can also save your dull day by helping you create a ladder golf game for kids and adults.

    The tutorial for this project is simple, as you only need to connect the lower frame with the standing frame and add other accessories using yarns or ropes.

    36. Soccer Goal

    Soccer Goal

    via Dave Fymbo

    A PVC pipe can transform a plain and simple yard into a play and training area for kids who like playing soccer or association football.

    To create a sturdy soccer goal, use a thicker PVC pipe about 2 inches in diameter, and attach a net around it. You'll have your little FIFA players scoring goals in no time.

    37. Overhead Garage Storage

    Overhead Garage Storage

    via Dubois Cornell

    Sometimes the floor area of your garage is not enough to cater to all of your stuff (given your car and associated tools), which is why you need to be creative and integrate additional overhead storage using PVC pipe.

    To do it, you must connect the pipes and use a screw to safely fasten the pipes to the garage's ceiling.

    38. Sanding Files

    Sanding Files

    via TRAINS4U2C2

    PVC pipes surely come in handy, as they can also be used as sanding tools to contour surfaces of different materials.

    To make it functional, you need to cut a parallel gap in the pipe's body and use it to buff the nooks and crannies of complex shapes.

    39. Oil Recovery System

    Oil Recovery System

    via Ryan Keele

    Oils can be reused, but sometimes, recovering them after every use isn't easy. Yet, it's an easy task to do when you have an efficient oil recovery system made of PVC pipe.

    For this, you must assemble a tube that connects to a particular funnel. You will need another pipe that will act as the main line for all the other tubes and another connection that will lead the oil right into the recovery bin.

    40. DIY Table

    DIY Table

    Image Source

    If you think glass and wood are the only table materials that bring out the aesthetics in every house, then you're wrong because a PVC pipe table can be an elegant addition to your interiors, too.

    Aside from being sophisticated furniture when it comes to visuals, a PVC pipe table can also be a valuable item that can house your fish, just like in the image above.

    41. Dog Cot

    Dog Cot

    via Marìa Fernanda Alfaro Estrada

    Dogs like to play and sleep anytime and anywhere, but it will surely make them feel more loved and cared for when they have their very own dog cot to play and sleep on.

    A PVC pipe dog cot is simple to make. Its complete tutorial only involves making a frame, cot feet, and adding fabric that will act as the dog's bed.

    42. PVC Pipe Baby Gym

    PVC Pipe Baby Gym

    via Karol Michels

    In helping your kids learn how to walk, the best cheap solution is a PVC pipe baby gym, which they can hold on to when taking their first few steps.

    The PVC pipe baby gym full tutorial only involves creating two parallel rails with bottom stands connecting to balance the baby gym out.

    43. Vacuum Attachment Holder

    Vacuum Attachment Holder

    via Lori Taylor

    When using a vacuum, we tend to forget where we placed a specific attachment, and in turn, delay our cleaning or storing.

    To help you keep things tidy and secure, we have a solution allowing you to store all your vacuum attachments in a single area – a PVC pipe vacuum attachment holder!

    All you need is a pipe with a diameter that fits the opening of your attachments, connect it to wood or wall using a screw, and stick and store your vacuum attachments.

    44) Utensil Serving Station

    Utensil Serving Station

    via Brittany Bailey

    Earlier, we discussed how to build a cabana, and the best pair to a cabana is a PVC pipe utensil serving station to complement your outdoor set-up with a fitting buffet.

    To make your serving station, cut the PVC into the length of your utensils from the neck down to the handle. After that, you can style the pipes using ribbons or other colorful accessories.

    Then, you can store the utensils inside your DIY PVC utensil serving station.

    Tip

    You better check out the tutorial on plastic spoon crafts to be aware of the other creative and fun activities you can do with your utensils.

    45) PVC Pipe Playhouse

    PVC Pipe Playhouse

    via IMAGE SOURCE

    If you can make an in-house ball pit, you can also do a playhouse using PVC pipes, clothes, and other fun materials for your kids.

    Doing this is like imitating the complete tutorial of a cabana. The difference is that the PVC pipe playhouse is smaller in size.

    46. Fishing Rod Organizer

    Fishing Rod Organizer

    via Carrie Haddican

    When your life revolves around fishing, you most likely have a lot of fishing rods stored in your garage. That raises the question: how can I store all these rods?

    The answer is simple, use a PVC pipe similar to the image above. A PVC pipe organizer can house at least eight fishing rods. But it can still accommodate more, depending on the size of your PVC pipe.

    Fact

    You can also do this for your golf clubs.

    47. String Pipe Cutter

    String Pipe Cutter

    via Part Time Cowboy

    You do not need heavy equipment to cut through a PVC pipe, as a string can help you get the job done.

    This is done when you create friction by continuously rubbing the string around the area of the pipe you want to cut. After a few tries, the friction will neatly divide the PVC pipe.

    48. Mattress Transport Sling

    Mattress Transport Sling

    via Jackie

    Moving a mattress from one place to another is a no-brainer with a full tutorial on how to make a PVC pipe mattress transport sling.

    To do this, you need to make a bottom structure based on the average length of your mattress, vertical stands to connect the bottom and top parts, and a rectangle-like upper part that will serve as holders.

    49. Hair Dryer Stand

    Hair Dryer Stand

    via Matt's Finds

    Doing your hair is all fun and games until you finish the actual hair styling part, and you are left with nothing but a question about where to put your hair dryer and flat iron.

    Well, we have an answer – a PVC pipe hair dryer stand!

    The complete tutorial for the hair dryer stand is undemanding, as you only need a Y connector PVC pipe to solve any hairy situations.

    50. Flower Vase

    Flower Vase

    via Dot & Bo

    Last but not least from this PVC pipe full tutorial list is the flower vase that can elevate the visual aesthetics of your home, office, or other places.

    To do this, all you have to do is get a Y connector or an elbow PVC pipe, put some flowers on it, and display it on your coffee table or give it as a gift on Mother's day.

    DIY PVC Pipe Projects FAQs

  • We know you want to clarify some things related to PVC pipes and DIY activities. Well, we have some of the answers to your FAQs in this section. Read on!

  • How can you make a PVC pipe look nice?

    You can make a PVC pipe look nice by doing the following:

    • Adding light to dark paint colors
    • Decorating with a stylish Washi tape
    • Reusing it in your garden, bathroom, or as house decor where you wouldn’t expect to see PVC pipes
  • How do you bend PVC pipe DIY projects?

    You can easily bend the PVC pipe by putting oven-heated sand inside the pipe for about a minute. 

  • DIY PVC Pipe Projects Conclusion

    Conclusion

    With all the do-it-yourself projects on PVC pipes from this list, you can surely have an enjoyable, productive summer with your kids through the different activities listed above.

    Just remember that a PVC pipe is not only for sewers and water systems, as it can also be your best companion for a fun-filled activity and the best one for organizing stuff.

    Now, get your pipe, follow the tutorial of your preferred DIY, and create magic with your PVC pipe projects!

    Fall is here, finally; we are prepared, the 111 world's coolest pumpkin designs to carve this fall follow, these ought to transform everything.

    Fall is already awesome, we all know it.

    Fall embellished by the scent of freshly cut, curved pumpkin occasionally animated from within by a candle is something different entirely though, it is simply magical so cast a glance and surge inspiration, regardless of event or celebration, the pumpkin that will inspire you is in the following gallery and from that point on you are solely responsible to create something unique, authentic, original, something truly memorable. In the following gallery, you will find both carvings that can appeal to Halloween per se as well as general or specific themes that can serve certain events or simply the fall itself throughout.

    From simple tutorials to extraordinarily advanced ones, the gallery invites creative enthusiasts to start playing, preferably with friends and loved ones; it invites one to use this decorating motif to express themselves in a creative, artistic manner, Cast a glance in the following gallery and tell us what do you think, we would love to hear your thoughts in the comment section below.

    World's Coolest Pumpkin Designs

    1. Diy cool owl pumpkin carving

    1. DIY COOL OWL PUMPKIN CARVING

    A pumpkin can hold an owl carving beautifully thanks to its shape, whether the pumpkin is round or elongated, an owl will fit beautifully. One could search for free owl pumpkin stencils online yet the the simple design above can be reinterpreted with ease without a stencil too!

    via removeandreplace.com

    2. Showcase your harvest with a sunflower pumpkin carving

    2. SHOWCASE YOUR HARVEST WITH A SUNFLOWER PUMPKIN CARVING

    Super swift, super graphic, and extraordinarily meaningful is to carve one of the fall's most beautiful and most representative plants on a pumpkin; they are part of our harvest, and we ought to cherish them in home decor too!

    via livedan330.com

    3. Carve an evil smile

    3. CARVE AN EVIL SMILE

    Halloween will soon be upon us and getting that scare-factor all carved out through one pumpkin only is not such an easy task, get in the zone, and practice in your next craft session!

    via coolpumpkindesigns.blogspot.com

    4. Curious owl carving

    4. CURIOUS OWL CARVING

    The background of this carving, here animated by light is something spectacular, something different entirely, it might take some practice but it will be worth the effort!

    via graffbaycityblog.blogspot.ca

    5. Simple carvings and plastic mice 

    5. SIMPLE CARVINGS AND PLASTIC MOUSES 

    It is super rapid and super efficient, quite scary too! You can create the holes with any knife and the plastic mouses are super accessible. Get creative, use them wisely!

    6. Snoopy pumpkin carving

    6. SNOOPY PUMPKIN CARVING

    Snoopy ought to be able to rest wherever he pleases and a pumpkin carving can apparently make him great great justice, how does he look on your end?

    via etsy.com

    7. The awkward smile carving

    7. THE AWKWARD SMILE CARVING

    We all have this super awkward smile from time to time when we silently politely agree with a friend against our inner will. Such a smile might be creepy, and frightening at times and this pumpkin carving can surely vouch for that, just cast a glance!

    via easyday.snydle.com

    8. Vomiting pumpkin carving

    8. VOMITING PUMPKIN CARVING

    Not pleasant for humans, not pleasant for pumpkins; we are not that different after all, are we?

    via squidoo.com

    9. Intricate evil pumpkin carving smiling 

    9. INTRICATE EVIL PUMPKIN CARVING SMILING 

    Now the smiling evil pumpkin always works as a pumpkin yet when we add super intricate details everything changes, it becomes artwork.

    via aldovega.com

    10. Portray the dark side

    10. PORTRAY THE DARK SIDE

    Death can go places, it is actually all around, death pumpkin carvings are a recurring theme during Halloween but they surely aren't for those weak of heart, how do you see these?

    via zombiepunpkins.com

    11. Funny zombie pumpkin carving 

    11. FUNNY ZOMBIE PUMPKIN CARVING 

    Create a lovely caricature and have fun in the process, spread laughter around you!

    via zombiepumpkins.com

    12. Creepy portrait for a creepy pumpkin

    12. CREEPY PORTRAIT FOR A CREEPY PUMPKIN

    Create something spooky and win the Halloween!

    via zombiepumpkin.com

    13. Pumpkin carving reaching out

    13. PUMPKIN CARVING REACHING OUT

    Pumpkin carvings can be standing or they can be part of an installation that does not necessarily imply other pumpkins, The picture above describes a little zombie attempting to grab someone or reaching out, emerging from the grave, it might give someone quite the scare, a really impactful installation.

    via zombiepumpkin.com

    14. Sculpt your favorite character - count Dracula's pumpkin carving

    14. SCULPT YOUR FAVORITE CHARACTER - COUNT DRACULA PUMPKIN CARVING

    Count Dracula is definitely a character that gained traction and during Halloween his presence should be summoned at all costs.

    via zombiepumpkin.com

    15. Carve a witch playing with fire

    15. CARVE A WITCH PLAYING WITH FIRE

    via aldovega.com

    16. One zombie in a pumpkin flash can distract the pedestrian

    16. ONE ZOMBIE IN A PUMPKIN FLASH CAN DISTRACT THE PEDESTRIAN

    via aldovega.com

    17. Skull carried on a pumpkin

    17. SKULL CARRIED ON A PUMPKIN

    via evollt.com

    18. Super funny wanna be creepy pumpkin carvings

    18. SUPER FUNNY WANNA BE CREEPY PUMPKIN CARVINGS

    via dailypicksandflicks.com

    19. Dark pumpkin face carving animated by light

    19. DARK PUMPKIN FACE CARVING ANIMATED BY LIGHT

    via housedirection.com

    20. Spooky tree pumpkin carving making a scene

    20. SPOOKY TREE PUMPKIN CARVING MAKING A SCENE

    via oddstuffmagazine.com

    21. Halloween invites minion pumpkins to cannibalism

    21. HALLOWEEN INVITES MINION PUMPKINS TO CANNIBALISM

    Source Unknown

    22. Carve demons and ghouls and surprise 

    22. CARVE DEMONS AND GHOULS AND SURPRISE 

    via pumpkinmasters.com

    23. Smile differently in a carving

    23. SMILE DIFFERENTLY IN A CARVING

    via catlove.co

    24. Beautiful and insanely creepy pumpkin carvings 

    24. BEAUTIFUL AND INSANELY CREEPY PUMPKIN CARVINGS

    The superb pumpkin carvings above simply present distinct qualities, and grim human-like features that set them apart and give them that wow factor, beautifully spooky.

    via ericfreitas.deviantart.com

    25. Sculpt your pumpkin into artwork

    25. SCULPT YOUR PUMPKIN INTO ARTWORK

    The splendid artwork can hardly be entitled carving yet its insane creativity is simply worth sharing, a great source of inspiration.

    via thisoldhouse.com

    26. Werewolf pumpkin carving transformation

    26. WEREWOLF PUMPKIN CARVING TRANSFORMATION

    A rather rapid carving that can be greatly interpreted thus offering one great freedom of expression, the general theme can also translate into versatility.

    via babble.com

    27. Carve a minion family

    27. CARVE A MINION FAMILY

    The Halloween excitement is all over, you know it, we know it, and minions know it.

    via media.photobucket.com

    28. Sculpt a surprised minion pumpkin carving

    28. SCULPT A SURPRISED MINION PUMPKIN CARVING

    Fall is here, it is awesome, Halloween follows, and the little one surely is surprised, but you are not?

    via zombiepumpkins.com

    29. Vampire pumpkin carving reaching out

    29. VAMPIRE PUMPKIN CARVING REACHING OUT

    It looks on fire thanks to the candle behind him yet he's not evil, you can change that.

    via zombiepumpkins.com

    30. Carve a tree terrorized by a smaller pumpkin on a pumpkin

    30. CARVE A TREE TERRORIZED BY A SMALLER PUMPKIN ON A PUMPKIN

    This pumpkin inception is powerful, funny, and super easy to realize.

    via zombiepumpkins.com

    31. Spider-pumpkin carving

    31. SPIDER-PUMPKIN CARVING

    Everything-spider can win the day and a super spider-pumpkin carving will surely win Halloween.

    Source Unknown

    32. Create a pumpkin supervillain meeting 

    32. CREATE A PUMPKIN SUPER VILLAIN MEETING 

    via wae.blogs.starnewsonline.com

    33. Get super playful with simple features

    33. GET SUPER PLAYFUL WITH SIMPLE FEATURES

    Here the teeth and eyes are greatly accentuated, they convey an awkward situation for the pumpkin in a really funny manner, creating as much depth as possible to emphasize your design.

    via Villafane Studio

    34. Transform pumpkins into pure art

    34. TRANSFORM PUMPKINS INTO PURE ART

    The Villafane Studio is world-renowned for its state-of-the-art carvings, They're insanely inspiring and super creative, surge inspiration!

    via Villafane Studio

    35. Realist clown pumpkin carving

    35. REALIST CLOWN PUMPKIN CARVING

    Clowns have their own place in Halloween and when the Villafane Studio showcases them super realistically, things get quite frightening.

    via Villafane Studio

    36. Pierce pumpkins and illuminate them from within

    36. PIERCE PUMPKINS AND ILLUMINATE THEM FROM WITHIN

    A rapid carving option if realized with a power drill; be playful and you will have extraordinary results.

    37. One pumpkin carving art piece that will scare your guests

    37. ONE PUMPKIN CARVING ART PIECE THAT WILL SCARE YOUR GUESTS

    Simply frightening, extraordinarily detailed, and graphic, a piece of art that once accomplished should sit on the fireplace mantel, gaining the much-deserved attention.

    via coolpumpkindesigns.blogspot.com

    38. Half-dead pumpkin eating humans

    38. HALF DEAD PUMPKIN EATING HUMANS

    Simple carving when compared to the super cute design, is highly graphic and quite funny, share laughter!

    via coolpumpkindesigns.blogspot.com

    39. Rapid patterns animated by light

    39. RAPID PATTERNS ANIMATED BY LIGHT

    One electric drill can help you with your pumpkin carvings rapidly, in a couple of minutes a small composition ought to be ready for display.

    via  homemade-by-jade.com

    40. Pumpkin prison in a pumpkin for a pumpkin

    40. PUMPKIN PRISON IN A PUMPKIN FOR A PUMPKIN

    A super creative craft, one that will surely surprise your guests, especially children around the Halloween dinner table, have fun, and maybe even attempt to sculpt the whole outer pumpkin as a metallic cage.

    via lhj.com

    41. Sculpt an epic pumpkin installation 

    41. SCULPT AN EPIC PUMPKIN INSTALLATION 

    It might require some work yet a big pumpkin eating a pumpkin brain is surely great eye candy for your Halloween celebration. Needless to say, the scent of the carved pumpkin will be beautifully combined with the one of the candle thus creating great coziness and warmth in your fall-decorated home.

    via Villafane Studio

    42. Cunningly hound pumpkin sculpture

    42. CUNNINGLY HOUND PUMPKIN SCULPTURE

    The better the sculpture the bigger the scar!

    via Villafane Studio

    43. Pumpkin witch carving

    43. PUMPKIN WITCH CARVING

    The immense nose and chin greatly stand out and so do the teeth and insanely beautifully sculptured eyes.

    via Villafane Studio

    44. Sculpt a grumpy face

    44. SCULPT A GRUMPY FACE

    The volume of the pumpkin can greatly aid you in your carving endeavors.

    via Villafane Studio

    45. Add new elements to your carving

    45. ADD NEW ELEMENTS TO YOUR CARVING

    Super simple additions like hands, feet, or hats can emphasize your carving and possibly customize it in a versatile manner.

    via Villafane Studio

    46. Pumpkin skin and pumpkin skeleton contained

    46. PUMPKIN SKIN AND PUMPKIN SKELETON CONTAINED

    A really really simple carving that will surely grasp everyone's attention, get creative, get carving!

    Source Unknown

    47. Dazed Pumpkin Carving

    47. DAZED PUMPKIN CARVING

    Simply present the pumpkin dazed, stunned, it is splendidly playful, and children will love it!

    Source Unknown

    48. Leaves and Traditional Motifs

    48. LEAFS AND TRADITIONAL MOTIFS

    All regions can particularize their pumpkins through different means, and different patterns, speak of your traditions with traditional motifs on your pumpkin!

    via designsponge.com

    49. One evil smile

    49. ONE EVIL SMILE

    Things can come easily to pumpkins and carvers alike, simply choose something that you would enjoy doing!

    Source Unknown

    50. Use the tail of the pumpkin

    50. USE THE TAIL OF THE PUMPKIN

    The tail of the pumpkin can greatly accentuate carvings in a super creative manner, the eyes can be placed within the folds thus creating super playful faces.

    via smithratliff.com

    51. Pierce and scale

    51. PIERCE AND SCALE

    One electric drill can make this process super easy and once scaled and illuminated from within, your pumpkin set will look extraordinary.

    via instructables.com

    52. Pumpkin becomes a devoured apple

    52. PUMPKIN BECOMES DEVOURED APPLE

    Use paint if needed, add some leaves to further emphasize the apple image yet pay great attention to the middle, beautifully carving the core can make or break your design.

    via blog.landsend.com

    53. Sculpt a sunflower and light it up

    53. SCULPT A SUNFLOWER AND LIGHT IT UP

    Great solution for immense pumpkins that you would like to place around the yard, feel free to use the elect drill to accentuate the middle even further.

    via Gayle Schmidt

    54. Pumpkin eating small pumpkin design

    54. PUMPKIN CANNIBALIZATION PROCESS ILLUSTRATED

    A super creative piece that you can easily realize with the little ones, simply find the right-sized pumpkins.

    via livedan330.com

    55. Forest pumpkin carving

    55. FOREST PUMPKIN CARVING

    The possibilities are endless here, you can interpret your own forest in various ways, get playful!

    via jemoser.wordpress.com

    56. Flower pumpkin carving

    56. FLOWER PUMPKIN CARVING

    via templeofthai.com

    57. Fire-spitting dragon pumpkin carving

    57. FIRE-SPITTING DRAGON PUMPKIN CARVING

    via pokemongoapkfree.com

    58. Superb forest on fire pumpkin carving

    58. SUPERB FOREST ON FIRE PUMPKIN CARVING

    Difficult yet insanely rewardful.

    Source Unknown

    59. Carve a tiger on a pumpkin

    59. CARVE A TIGER ON A PUMPKIN

    A rather easy carving that will gather the smiles of all children who meet him again on Halloween.

    via removeandreplace.com

    60. Gravity-defying pumpkin installation 

    60. GRAVITY DEFYING PUMPKIN INSTALLATION

    A central pole will help your pumpkins keep this charade up, make sure you portray their faces differently to build up the installation's naturalness.

    via tatertotsandjello.com

    61. Pumpkin becomes an ice bucket

    61. PUMPKIN BECOMES ICE BUCKET

    One of the most practical ideas displayed in the gallery and without a doubt the simplest one to materialize. Enjoy fall with the right champagne.

    via everydaydishes.com

    62. Attempt to scare off your guests

    62. ATTEMPT TO SCARE OFF YOUR GUESTS

    Source Unknown

    63. Pumpkin carvings become great frogs

    63. PUMPKIN CARVINGS BECOME GREAT FROGS

    A great showcase of how the right cut can transform the volume, extraordinarily creative and ingenious installation, materialize it, scale it, and scare!

    via womansday.com

    64. Create an elephant pumpkin

    64. CREATE AN ELEPHANT PUMPKIN

    via womansday.com

    65. Creative skeleton pumpkin installation

    65. CREATIVE SKELETON PUMPKIN INSTALLATION

    Source Unknown

    66. Mine-craft zombie pumpkin carving

    66. MINE-CRAFT ZOMBIE PUMPKIN CARVING

    via alphamom.com

    67. Funny vertical pumpkin installation

    67. FUNNY VERTICAL PUMPKIN INSTALLATION 

    Different colors, different faces, different volumes, all wrapped up in a playful installation.

    via popsugar.com

    68. Technology can lead the pumpkin world 

    68. TECHNOLOGY CAN LEAD THE PUMPKIN WORLD 

    via fantasypumpkins.com

    69. Have fun illustrating a pumpkin fight

    69. HAVE FUN ILLUSTRATING A PUMPKIN FIGHT

    Numerous possibilities here but the head of the killed pumpkin, smashed, is extraordinary and so is the pumpkin throwing the head of another pumpkin. You will gather numerous smiles with this installation in your front yard, get creative.

    via erraticprojectjunkie.blogspot.com

    70. Simple clown smile carving

    70. SIMPLE CLOWN SMILE CARVING

    via pumpkinlady.com

    71. Snoopy sleeping on a halloween pumpkin

    71. SNOOPY SLEEPING ON A HALLOWEEN PUMPKIN

    via etsy.com

    72. Intricate details piercing pumpkins

    72. INTRICATE DETAILS PIERCING PUMPKINS

    via abritintn.blogspot.com

    73. Kitty pumpkin carving

    73. KITTY PUMPKIN CARVING

    via stardustandsequins.wordpress.com

    74. Portray the sky in  a pumpkin

    74. PORTRAY THE SKY IN  A PUMPKIN

    via pluckingdaisies.com

    75. Cinderella pumpkin carvings among other fairy tale-inspired carvings

    75. CINDERELLA PUMPKIN CARVINGS AMONG OTHER FAIRY TALE INSPIRED CARVINGS

    via clipzine.me

    76. Create an interesting 3D effect

    76. CREATE AN INTERESTING 3D EFFECT

    via hubpages.com

    77. Spider pumpkin carving

    77. SPIDER PUMPKIN CARVING

    via plunk-artwiththepumkins.buzznet.com

    78. COOKIE MONSTER PUMPKINS CAN BOOST COLOR

    via princesspinkygirl.com

    79. A simple "boo" message might do

    79. A SIMPLE "BOO" MESSAGE MIGHT DO

    via brit.co

    80. White pumpkins look different

    80. WHITE PUMPKINS LOOK DIFFERENT

    An elegant carving on a white pumpkin gains the timeless attribute, use this to your advantage.

    via stylemepretty.com

    81. Anatomy pumpkin carvings for doctors

    81. ANATOMY PUMPKIN CARVINGS FOR DOCTORS

    via brit.co

    82. Showcase a beautiful mocking jay

    82. SHOWCASE A BEAUTIFUL MOCKING JAY

    via buzzfeed.com

    83. Few things can be as good as a piece of cake

    83. FEW THINGS CAN BE AS GOOD AS PIECE OF CAKE

    via johwee.deviantart.com

    84. Fool around in your pumpkin carving

    84. FOOL AROUND IN YOUR PUMPKIN CARVING

    via flickr.com

    85. Epic white pumpkin filled with flower 

    85. EPIC WHITE PUMPKIN FILLED WITH FLOWER 

    via bhg.com

    86. Chevron pattern pumpkin carving

    86. CHEVRON PATTERN PUMPKIN CARVING

    via witandwhistle.com

    87. Black pumpkin night sculpture 

    87. BLACK PUMPKIN NIGHT SCULPTURE 

    Source Unknown

    88. Pumpkin lantern coloring a stark white decor

    88. PUMPKIN LANTERN COLORING A STARK WHITE DECOR

    via countryliving.com

    89. Raccoon pumpkin carving 

    89. RACCOON PUMPKIN CARVING 

    via bhg.com

    90. Epic flowered carving pumpkin

    90. EPIC FLOWERED CARVING PUMPKIN

    via countryliving.com

    91. Kinder surprise pumpkin

    91. KINDER CANNIBALIZATION SURPRISE PUMPKIN

    via womansday.com

    92. Small fairy pumpkin house

    92. SMALL FAIRY PUMPKIN HOUSE

    via goodhousekeeping.com

    93. Random cuts can sculpt organicity

    93. RANDOM CUTS CAN SCULPT ORGANICITY

    via hgtvgardens.com

    94. Portray your furry friends in a carving

    94. PORTRAY YOUR FURRY FRIENDS IN A CARVING

    via Pinterest

    95. A whale of candy sailing in sweets

    95. A WHALE OF CANDY SAILING IN SWEETS

    via womansday.com

    96. Marry me pumpkin carving 

    96. MARRY ME PUMPKIN CARVING 

    via minimalisti.com

    97. Cinderella carriage pumpkin carving 

    97. CINDERELLA CARRIAGE PUMPKIN CARVING 

    via minimalisti.com

    98. Hello Kitty pumpkin carving

    98. HELLO KITTY PUMPKIN CARVING

    via popsugar.com

    99. Sinister snape pumpkin design

    99. SINISTER SNAPE PUMPKIN DESIGN

    via popsugar.com

    100. Hallow frame pumpkin design

    100. HALLOW FRAME PUMPKIN DESIGN

    A hallow pumpkin can portray a void, here beautifully animated by a black frame, possibly illuminated by a candle.

    via shemakesahome.com

    101. Spooky mummy pumpkin

    101. SPOOKY MUMMY PUMPKIN

    Rapid slicing, is a rapid craft that can look awesome in your interior.

    via womansday.com

    102. Delicate flower pumpkin

    102. DELICATE FLOWER PUMPKIN

    It speaks of fall, it speaks of harvest, an all-around great decoration for Halloween and Thanksgiving alike.

    via bhg.com

    103. Creative clock pumpkin 

    103. CREATIVE CLOCK PUMPKIN 

    It may point out spooky times.

    via builtbykids.com

    104. Monogrammed pumpkin on your porch

    104. MONOGRAMMED PUMPKIN ON YOUR PORCH

    Diverse textures, shapes, and sizes can highlight your pumpkin installation.

    via bhg.com

    105. Adorable DIY Caravan Pumpkin

    105. ADORABLE DIY CARAVAN PUMPKIN

    Something funny that the Little League will surely enjoy.

    via bhg.com

    106. Bloody-dyed pumpkin family

    106. BLOODY DEEP DYED PUMPKIN FAMILY

    Using simple painting can greatly emphasize the carving's cuts.

    via fabbridesigns.com

    107. DIY Crow Pumpkin Carving

    107. DIY CROW PUMPKIN CARVING

    It has different meanings, it will beautifully nestle in the fall's scenery.

    via bhg.com

    108. Emoticon inspired pumpkin carvings

    108. EMOTICON INSPIRED PUMPKIN CARVINGS

    via youtube.com

    109. Epic pumpkins depicting constellations 

    109. EPIC PUMPKINS DEPICTING CONSTELLATIONS 

    Sensible design language is fit for absolutely any interior design.

    via designsponge.com

    110. DIY Starbucks Pumpkins

    110. DIY STARBUCKS PUMPKINS

    A brand can influence a great deal of Halloween pumpkin carvings apparently, it may not be your cup of tea yet it is an option.

    via sheknows.com

    111. Shape a crescent moon in your pumpkin 

    111. SHAPE A CRESCENT MOON IN YOUR PUMPKIN 

    The crescent moon is an iconic shape for Halloween, it can fit anywhere and it can beautifully emphasize its settings, on the black background, in particular, it shines.

    via countryliving.com

    Pumpkin carving ideas can beautifully surprise during Halloween and so can various pumpkin installations and playful sculptural ideas. A Halloween without a pumpkin is like a fall without a harvest, one might argue. Gather your family in a craft session and get creative with simple, beautiful ideas, it will be memorable, and splendid.
    What do you think? Are the World's Coolest Pumpkin Designs in the gallery above? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below!

     

    One of the most common problems seen while resin casting is the presence of air bubbles. 

    When the project cures, these air bubbles can leave unpleasant holes on its surface. Even though it's possible to sand and remove some of these holes, it can become a tedious job for large projects. 

    Hence, the best solution is to use a tool to take out the air bubbles from the resin before it is cured. And, this is why professional resin casters use a pressure pot to solve their problem.

    A pressure pot is usually used to spray liquids and do paint jobs, but modifying it for resin casting is quite simple. However, the challenging part is choosing the right unit for your job. Therefore, we thought of creating this informative guide recommending some of the best pressure pots available on the market.

    So, without further ado, let's begin!

    1. California Air Tools 5 Gallon Pressure Pot

    A professional resin caster would instantly fall in love with this pressure pot because of its excellent design. And, it takes only a few minutes to convert the pressure pot for resin work. So, you will be able to work with it as soon as the package arrives at your home. 

    When it comes to resin casting, most people have to settle for small pressure tanks. But, that isn't the case with this product as it has a massive ten-gallon cavity. The tank has a diameter of 15 inches and a height of 17.5 inches which is enough to hold medium-sized molds. 

    However, what we really like about this pressure tank is its Teflon coating. This ensures that you can quickly clean up the tank, especially during those times when there has been a spillage. The base material of the tank is steel which makes it even more durable, and it doesn't wobble when it's filled with air. 

    The pressure capacity of this tank wouldn't disappoint you as it works at a range of 20-30 psi which is enough for resin casting. And, the large lid gasket ensures that the compressed air won't be able to escape until you open the pressure relief valve.  

    The only complaint we found about this California Air Tools pressure pot was that some people received products with a maximum pressure label of 50 psi. However, most people seemed to have received the correct product. So, if you come across a similar problem, make sure to contact the company to get the correct item. 

    Material: Teflon® coated steel tank | Pressure Rating: 20 - 30 psi | Weight: 50.00 lbs | Capacity: 2.5 - 10 Gallons

    2. TCP Global ‎2-1/2 Gallon Pressure Pot

    If you're just starting with resin work, you may not want to initially invest in a big pressure pot. This product from TCP Global has the perfect tank capacity for accommodating smaller resin molds. So, let's check out some features present in this unit. 

    The first thing we noticed about this pressure pot was the clamps. Every clamp is soldered onto the body of the pot, so there's no way you can lose them. And, when you tighten the clamps after lowering the lid, it creates a firm seal so that none of the compressed air can escape the tank. 

    Moreover, the best feature of this pressure pot has to be its size which is comparable to a medium/large-sized pressure cooker. So, this product is excellent for those who have to work with limited space. And, once the task is over, you can easily store it on a regular shelf. 

    Besides, this pressure pot is made of heavy-duty solid steel, so you don't need to worry about denting even while using it at maximum working pressure. And, the stainless steel finish makes it easy to clean the tank of this pot if there's any resin spillage.  

    Even though this is an excellent pressure pot, our only gripe is the time taken to modify it for resin casting. This isn't really a drawback as this product was originally meant for paint jobs and other similar tasks. However, once modified, this pressure pot will remain an integral part of your resin workspace. 

    Material: Solid Steel | Pressure Rating: 25 - 30 psi | Weight: 38.00 lbs | Capacity: 2.5 - 10 Gallons

    3. ABLAZE 1.5 Gallon Stainless Steel Vacuum Chamber

    Are you looking for a small yet effective tool for resin casting? If yes, then this vacuum chamber from Ablaze would be an excellent choice for you. It might look small, but along with the right vacuum pump, you can get a lot of use from it to make several projects. 

    One of the reasons people are wary of getting a pressure pot is because of its weight. This vacuum chamber weighs only 5 pounds, so anyone can lift it without any challenges. You can even place this product on a wooden or plastic table, and it won't weigh down the surface. 

    We especially liked the transparent lid of this vacuum chamber, as it gives you a peek inside the tank. This helps you to keep an eye on the resin project to see the progress. It's especially helpful for catching spillages as early as possible for easy cleaning. 

    Moreover, this product comes with an extended 5-foot pipe, so it can be easily connected to any vacuum chamber even if placed at a distance. And, the lid has a silicone gasket to create an airtight seal that would resist the loss of pressure.  

    We have read a lot of positive reviews about this vacuum chamber. However, some customers saw slight cracks on the lids that may have been caused during transit. So, if you face a similar problem, try contacting Ablaze to resolve it as soon as possible. 

    Material: Glass | Pressure Rating: 15 psi | Weight: 19.06 lbs | Capacity: 0.375 - 5 Gallons

    4. BACOENG 3 Gallon Stainless Steel Vacuum Chamber

    BACOENG is a leading producer of vacuum chambers, and this has to be one of their best models. Along with being an essential tool for degassing materials like rubber and epoxies, this product looks aesthetic because of the orange accents. So, let's have a look at the advantages of using it for your projects. 

    Even though many vacuum chambers do have glass lids, most aren't up to the mark. So, there's always a fear of it breaking, but you wouldn't need to worry about that with the glass lid provided with this item. 

    Unlike acrylic lids, this one is made of thick tempered glass so that it won't break even with the highest vacuum pressure. Moreover, it also allows you to take a look at your project during the curing process. 

    When it comes to the construction of this vacuum chamber, high-quality stainless steel has been used to make it. And, there's a small amount of chromium in the steel, which shields it from oxidation and chemical damage. 

    Furthermore, the company provides a food-safe square silicone mat with this vacuum chamber, which helps catch any leaking resin. 

    This isn't really a drawback of this vacuum chamber, but we have observed that it's significantly more expensive than other similar products. Having said that, it's also important to note that this unit comes with a high-quality tempered glass lid and a robust stainless steel body to make it durable. 

    Material: Stainless Steel | Pressure Rating: 15 psi | Weight: 17.06 lbs | Capacity: 1.5 - 3 Gallons

    5. P PBAUTOS 5 Gallon Vacuum Chamber

    Tired of looking for a vacuum chamber that's easy to use? Check out this one from P PBAUTOS as, along with being user-friendly, it has a large tank which is excellent for larger projects. So, let's take a peek at this stainless steel vacuum chamber. 

    Often, using a vacuum chamber can be complicated because of all the things that a person has to do. But, a resin artist hardly has time to go through it. Have no fear, as this item from P PBAUTOS has one of the most straightforward assemblies we have seen. Moreover, it comes with carrying handles, so you don't need to worry about transporting it. 

    A common concern among resin artists is the ability of vacuum chambers to hold the pressure, and this product does manage to do it quite well. The acrylic lid does have a good weight, which makes the seal even more effective. And, it won't release the pressure until you have opened up the valve. 

    Another excellent feature of this vacuum chamber is its quietness. Because of the silencers, the pot works in silence even when the vacuum pump is set to its highest pressure.  

    We can't complain about this product as it's a really great vacuum chamber for professional resin artists. However, it does have an acrylic lid which can be a drawback to some people. But, using the pot carefully will reduce the chance of damaging its lid, which is, in fact, bulletproof. 

    Material: Stainless Steel | Pressure Rating: NA | Weight: ‎12.53 lbs | Capacity: 2 - 5 Gallons

    Pressure Pot For Resin Casting Comparison Table

    Product Material Pressure Rating Weight Capacity
    California Air Tools 10 Gallon Pressure Pot Teflon® coated steel tank 20 - 30 psi 50.00 lbs 2.5 - 10 Gallons
    TCP Global ‎2-1/2 Gallon Pressure Pot Solid Steel 25 - 30 psi 38.00 lbs 2.5 - 10 Gallons
    ABLAZE 1.5 Gallon Stainless Steel Vacuum Chamber Glass 15 psi 19.06 lbs 0.375 - 5 Gallons
    BACOENG 3 Gallon Stainless Steel Vacuum Chamber Stainless Steel 15 psi 17.06 lbs 1.5 - 3 Gallons
    P PBAUTOS 5 Gallon Vacuum Chamber Stainless Steel NA ‎12.53 lbs 2 - 5 Gallons

    Pressure Pot For Resin Casting Buying Guide 

    When it comes to purchasing a pressure pot, it's easy to get confused about the various options available in the market. One common mistake people make is that they don't check if the pressure pot can even be modified for resin casting.

    Here's a guide for making the process easier for you to choose an excellent pressure pot that would last for a long time.

    1. Size 

    One of the first things to check in a pressure pot is its size, as it would define the resin molds that can fit into the tank. Usually, the capacity of a pressure pot is represented with gallons, the most common one being the 2.5-gallon variant. 

    But, you should also check the diameter and height of a tank to make sure that your usual molds will fit into it. The dimensions are usually mentioned in the specifications of a product. 

    If you're looking forward to working with resin on a larger scale, it's better to get a bigger pot. However, you should also remember that a bigger pot will need considerably more air to build up the required pressure. 

    2. Pressure Capacity

    The main goal of using a pressure pot is to create an environment to compress any air bubbles present in a resin project. Hence, the pressure capacity of a product will matter a lot, and the recommended pressure level for resin casting is between 30-50 psi. 

    Keep that number in mind while looking for a pressure pot so that it can be of use. As most units are made for spraying liquids, the capacity can stop at around 25 psi, which won't be helpful for resin casting. 

    Moreover, make sure to get a pressure pot that mentions its maximum pressure limit. This would let you know when to stop filling air into the tank. Be careful while setting the pressure, and if there's even a bit more, try to let the air out to achieve the recommended pressure level. 

    3. Ease Of Modification 

    You can't just use a pressure pot for resin casting after getting the product. The first thing you should do is change some of the valves and apply tapes to any areas from which the air may escape.

    Hence, you should always pick a pressure pot that is easy to modify, as there's no justification for spending hours changing things up. We especially like those products that come with instructions about modifying them for resin casting, but it's also easy to find on the internet. 

    And, if a company states that its pressure pot isn't suitable for resin casting, don't even think about getting it for your work.

    4. Safety 

    While picking a pressure pot, you should take some time to check its safety features. The products will often have things like a gasket on the lid for an airtight seal, safety valves, and clamps on the side to make sure that the pot is secure. 

    We also like pressure pots made with high-quality metal as it adds durability. If possible, look for pressure pots with commercial-grade safety features and certifications to remain tension-free while working. 

    Having said that, you should also remember to follow all the safety instructions while using the product and never exceed the suggested working pressure. 

    5. Pressure Pot Vs Vacuum Chamber 

    You must have noticed that we recommended some vacuum chambers along with the pressure pots. The reason behind this is that both products work equally well when it comes to getting rid of air pockets while the resin is curing. 

    Compared to pressure pots, the air is drawn out of the tank in a vacuum chamber, which shrinks the bubbles. Vacuum chambers also perform better when you are using rubber molds for resin casting. 

    And, those interested in DIY jobs can figure out a way to turn a pressure pot into a vacuum chamber and vice versa. But, always be aware of the pressure or vacuum limit to ensure safety.

    Final Words 

    So, that's everything we had to tell you about the best pressure pots available on the market. We hope that this guide will help you find the right pressure pot or vacuum chamber for your resin projects. Also, do remember to go through the buying guide to make the correct choice. 

    Among our recommendations, we will suggest the California Air Tools 10-gallon pressure pot to anyone who works with bigger resin molds and doesn't want to spend much time in modifications. 

    In comparison, the TCP Global ‎PT8310 2-1/2 gallon pressure pot is better suited for those who work on small projects. However, modifying this unit does take a little more time. 

    With that, we come to the end of this informative guide about pressure pots for resin casting. Do let us know if you have any queries regarding the suggestions. 

    Till then, take care and stay safe! 

    When it comes to measuring, precision is key, be it in distance or thickness; nearly every field calls for high levels of accuracy.

    In environments where the slightest fractional difference can determine success or failure, these precision instruments are an essential tool. For measuring out ingredients or materials, there is nothing that comes close to using a precision scale to get the readings you need.

    With so many variants to a precision scale on the market, how can one find a suitable model for their needs? Worry not, dear reader. We have included the absolute best scales available as well as a guide, so you can get the accurate readings you need.

    Now, that being said, let’s get right into it!

    Best Precision Scales

    Oat groats, grits weighing in glass bowl on electronic kitchen scales on wooden table.

    1. Nicewell

    This Nicewell digital scale is an easy-to-use precision scale to serve all your precise measurement needs. The scale measures accurately and has a tare function that makes it perfect for a digital kitchen scale. With four high-precision load sensors and a stainless steel platform, this is a complete package as far as digital scales come.

    Sale
    Nicewell Food Scale, 22lb Digital Kitchen Scale Weight Grams...
    • PRECISE WEIGHT: The digital food scale built-in four...
    • MULTIFUNCTION LARGE SCALE:9"x6.3" platform and Large lcd...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Being a digital kitchen scale, this Nicewell precision scale features a backlit LCD display that has multiple units for easy conversion. It is easy to change the units on display from the standard American ones to other units of measurement, like kilograms.

    Additionally, there is a tare button to easily subtract the weight of a mixing bowl or container and get an accurate reading. This feature comes especially in handy when measuring food and other high-precision items.

    Another handy feature is a low-maintenance design that is fingerprint-resistant while being durable. A stainless steel platform prevents items from sticking to the scale and makes cleaning a breeze using just a damp cloth. The tempered glass layer underneath also helps to bear the load for larger measurements.

    What Could've Been Better?

    Although there is an auto-off function that comes in handy for preserving the battery, it tends to switch the unit off quite quickly. This feature can become a minor inconvenience while cooking or going through a recipe, as you have to turn the scale back on after every few minutes.



    Pros

    • Easy to clean
    • Highly sensitive sensors
    • Multiple measuring units
    • LCD screen




    Cons

    • Scale shuts off quickly



    2. Etekcity

    Etekcity has designed this multi-functional and versatile scale to measure both liquids and solids. A uniquely designed stainless steel bowl is attached to provide high-precision measurements no matter what material you are measuring. Using strain gauge sensors and a clear LCD screen, the EK4150 makes for an excellent scale with various applications.

    Etekcity Food Kitchen Scale with Bowl, Digital Weight Scale...
    • 𝗣𝗿𝗲𝗰𝗶𝘀𝗲...
    • 𝗦𝗺𝗮𝗿𝘁 𝗨𝗻𝗶𝘁𝘀: scale will show...

    Why Did We Like It?

    One feature that stood out in the EK4150 was the storage method when not in use. The scale turns into its own storage unit by using the bowl as a cover. Placing the stainless steel bowl upside down on the scale will protect it while being stored away.

    Furthermore, the scale features an alarm and built-in conversion on the display to help speed up the cooking process. Having a bowl attached to the scale helps the tare calibration weights to provide accurate measurements in liquid and solid materials. The timer feature is also handy to notify you when preparing dishes without a separate timer.

    Another outstanding feature is the LCD screen having a backlight, meaning it is easy to read no matter the lighting conditions. A built-in unit converter also helps make adjustments to get measurements as accurately as possible.

    What Could've Been Better?

    Where most scales require the user to manually input the units the scale should be measuring, the EK4150 does this autonomously. However, this can become counterintuitive as getting measurements in ounces for anything above 16 ounces is impossible; the scale will convert it to pounds.



    Pros

    • Smart units display
    • 11lb/5 kg capacity
    • Convenient storage
    • Solid and liquid measurements




    Cons

    • Measurements are limited to a pound



    3. Nicewell Food Scale

    Packaged with a digital meat thermometer, this food precision scale from Nicewell is a perfect tool to keep around the kitchen when preparing meals. Sporting a durable metal body design that is quite spacious,  it can accommodate and measure a large number of materials with precision and ease.

    No products found.

    Why Did We Like It?

    Measuring out liquid or solid materials is a seamless experience when using this Nicewell food scale. With a metal body, the scale is easy to clean and has a high load capacity. Even heavier or more robust materials will not damage the measuring platform so it can have an extended lifespan.

    High-precision load sensors also allow the scale to give a fast and accurate readout in g, kg, lb, oz, fl.oz., or ml. The tare function and durable design allow this digital scale to accommodate wet and dry ingredients alike.

    Furthermore, the control panel has a wide range of information besides the actual weight readout. There is an overload alarm and a low battery alert so that you can stay on top of maintenance. However, with its maximum 22-pound weight capacity, this shouldn't be too much of an issue.

    What Could've Been Better?

    This Nicewell scale has a metal body construction, so it is easy to see why it has a hefty weight. While carrying it around or getting it out of storage is not difficult, the extra weight may be a minor inconvenience to some users.



    Pros

    • Wide measuring range
    • Dedicated tare button
    • Water-resistant
    • Durable metal body




    Cons

    • Hefty weight



    4. OXO International

    This precision scale from OXO International has several great features that make it a standout for measuring ingredients and materials quickly. A large digital screen and pull-out LCD display make it a contender as one of the best precision scales today.

    Sale
    OXO Good Grips 11-Pound Stainless Steel Kitchen Scale with...
    • Stainless Steel is Smudge and fingerprint-resistant
    • Zero function for taring the scale before weighing...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Although this precision scale already has a large area for placing material, OXO International has increased the effective area by including a pull-out feature on the display screen. Usually, large bowls and plates cause the screen to become shadowed, making readings challenging to see. This makes it much more convenient to use the scale even if you need a larger area than what is provided.

    Furthermore, the weighing platform can be removed to make cleaning more accessible. And as it has a stainless steel construction, wet or sticky materials can be wiped off or washed away with a damp rag. Another benefit of having a stainless steel design is reducing the number of fingerprints and smudges on the scale between cleans.

    Another feature that increases the OXO precision scale functionality is a dedicated button for unit conversion. Switching between oz, lb, g, or kg is tactile so that it won't be accidentally activated.

    What Could've Been Better?

    One slight caveat to using this scale is the half-second delay that it takes when the material is added or taken away from the platform. This forces the user to pause between adjustments to ensure the correct amount is being measured out.



    Pros

    • Smudge-resistant platform
    • Pull-out display
    • 11-pound weight capacity
    • Easy maintenance




    Cons

    • Half second delay



    5. Framar

    An elegantly designed scale from Framar, the 0203 is both stylish and accurate, with a tempered glass platform and bright LCD display. With a low-profile design, it is easy to store away when not in use and is lightweight to allow for easy transportation.

    FRAMAR Hair Color Scale for Hair Salon - Digital Scale for...
    • 👌 PRECISE MEASUREMENT – Accurate, elegant, easy-to-use...
    • ⚖️ PROFESSIONAL – Unit Button instantly converts...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Using tempered glass as the base for the measuring platform, the Framar precision scale has an easy-to-clean design that is practical for various uses. It can withstand up to 11-pounds and is low-maintenance, only needing a quick wipe-down to get it clean.

    Powered by two AAA batteries, the scale will power off after two minutes of inactivity. This gives the user more than enough time in between measurements to prepare ingredients without having to pause and turn the scale back on.

    Additionally, the scale features a dedicated conversion button to switch between three units. Grams, pounds, and ounces give a range of measurements to work with and provide total accuracy with graduations of 0.05 oz at a time.

    What Could've Been Better?

    While the range of units that the Framar precision scale comes with is quite precise, it is limited to only three units. This simplification of units does restrict it if you are looking to measure a particular amount of material.



    Pros

    • Easy unit conversion
    • Slim and lightweight design
    • AAA batteries included
    • Two-minute auto-off




    Cons

    • Only weighs in oz, g, and lbs



    6. MEGAWISE Digital Kitchen Scale

    Megawise, as the name suggests, is a brilliant piece of equipment that provides accurate results every time. Apart from its functionality, this sleek and modern digital scale goes well in any contemporary-style kitchen.

    Digital Kitchen Scale K28H – Ultra-Slim Design, Precise...
    • High Precision & Wide Capacity – Measures from 1g up to...
    • 5 Measurement Units – Easily switch between g, oz, lb:oz,...

    Why Did We Like It?

    From its sleek design to its functional aspects, the Megawise Digital Kitchen scale is modern through and through. First off, this product comes in a light white color and is made of sturdy tempered glass that is easy to maintain over time.

    An LCD screen, tare, and unit button are conveniently located on one side of the horizontal screen so that you can look at the measurements and change the units with ease. The scale itself has four precision sensors that take accurate readings from 1g to 33 lbs, making it versatile in the amount of material it can measure.

    Furthermore, there are dedicated buttons for both the unit conversion and tare functions, so the user interface is quite intuitive and easy to use.

    What Could've Been Better?

    A slight inconvenience to using a digital control panel is the accidental touch that occasionally happens. When working with wet material, the probability of having a "ghost touch" increases. While it is not a deal-breaker, digital controls are a factor that should be considered for this precision scale.



    Pros

    • Five weight units
    • Horizontal screen design
    • Tare function
    • Tempered glass platform




    Cons

    • Sensitive touch screen



    7. Greater Goods Kitchen Table Top Scale

    This kitchen scale from Greater Goods is trendy and accurate in measuring ingredients to the slightest gram. Preparing meals and portioning ingredients is much easier; from the bright LCD display to the intuitive and straightforward user interface, the Greater Goods kitchen scale is a solid choice for any kitchen.

    Why Did We Like It?

    Whereas other food scale models use multiple calibration weights, the Greater Foods kitchen scale uses only one. This increases the accuracy by having the total weight of the material measured on one axis. As a result, the scale is able to detect the slightest changes in weight, with a total of four different units of measurement.

    Additionally, the scale has a beautifully minimalist design that blends into any kitchen decor. The body is also sleek enough to be easily stored out of sight when not needed. No longer will a singular scale stand out and take away from the overall aesthetic of the kitchen.

    What's more, the measuring platform and body of the scale are low-maintenance. They can both be used and cleaned easily without worrying about sticky materials leaving marks and stains.

    What Could've Been Better?

    While the precision scale itself is accurate, the measuring platform does not offer much in terms of measuring real estate. It is narrower than the body of the scale, meaning large bowls or plates tend to shadow the display. A pull-out screen or larger platform would have been a welcome feature to have.



    Pros

    • High-contrast LCD
    • Easy-to-clean
    • Sleek and modern design
    • Slim profile




    Cons

    • Small measuring platform



    8. Geekclick Food Scale

    Whether you are baking, cooking, or simply prepping for meals, the Geekclick scale is a valuable tool to keep on hand. With high-precision load sensors, accurate measurements are taken in no time at all. The large LCD display is backlit as well to help you read out measurements in any lighting condition.

    Geekclick Food Scale, Kitchen Scale Digital Weight Grams and...
    • 【ACCURATE WEIGHING】The digital food scale allows you to...
    • 【OPTIONAL UNIT CONVERSION】Food weight scale is equipped...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Right off the bat, the control panel on this Geekclick scale has a user-friendly layout that is easy to understand. In particular, there is a button specifically for unit conversion, allowing you to measure the unit that you need. The scale will not automatically change units when a specific weight limit is reached, which makes following recipes much more effortless.

    Another handy feature is the durability and ease of use that the scale. As it is made of robust stainless steel, cleaning is straightforward, and staining is pretty much non-existent.

    Storing the scale away is made easy as well, thanks to the attached hook on the underside of the unit. With its slim profile, it lies flush against the wall and stays out of the way until you need it.

    What Could've Been Better?

    As is the case with several scales that use a touch-sensitive control panel, this Geekclick scale is prone to ghost touches. When measuring out ingredients, moisture or spilled material can cause the buttons to activate at the wrong time. This minor inconvenience isn't a deal-breaker, just an occasional instance that could have been solved with physical buttons.



    Pros

    • Stainless steel platform
    • Tare function
    • Blue backlit display
    • Attached hook design




    Cons

    • Touch-sensitive buttons



    9. Geekclick Kitchen Scale

    Made from two of the most durable materials in kitchenware, this Geekclick kitchen scale has a solid build that will last you a while. Maintenance is also much easier thanks to the robust nature of these materials. Not to mention the incredibly hefty 22-pound capacity, it is sure to meet any meal prep measurement needs.

    No products found.

    Why Did We Like It?

    Equipped with four unit measurements, this kitchen scale has a dedicated button to switch between them depending on your needs. It measures in one-gram increments, so there is as much accuracy as possible when adjusting ingredients on the platform. The sensors in the scale have been upgraded as well to give a faster readout as elements are added or taken away.

    Besides, the scale features three modes for measuring out different mediums. There is a standard weight mode, a water mode, and a milk mode. Each mode is calibrated to accurately measure that specific medium to provide the best performance and versatility possible.

    Of course, Geekclick has added a sharp LCD display screen that can be seen in various lighting conditions. This screen can also be put on a two-minute timer to preserve battery life and consumption.

    What Could've Been Better?

    One addition that would have been welcome in the control panel of the Geekclick kitchen scale is a dedicated button for the tare feature. While there is a button for unit conversion, the tare option is part of the power button, which is already used for auto-off and turning the scale on and off.



    Pros

    • Fingerprint and smudge resistant
    • One gram increments
    • Auto-off feature
    • Lightweight design




    Cons

    • No separate tare button



    Small digital weighing scale for bakery measure Precision Scale Buying Guide

    Precision Scale Buying Guide

    Before you get into ordering a precision scale, there are a few things that you should keep in mind in order to get the best performance out of it. There are so many features and models from various manufacturers, so it is essential to know precisely what you should be looking for on a scale.

    To highlight a few essential factors in the selection of precision scales, here are a few facets to consider.

    1. Types Of Precision Scales

    A. Tabletop

    Usually, these types of scales are kitchen scales and are some of the most commonly seen precision scales. Some of these scales come with a container attached to the unit to help weigh out wet and dry ingredients alike. Otherwise, a separate bowl or storage container may need to be used alongside the scale.

    Whether you are baking or simply brewing coffee, these food scales are able to accurately measure out the required amount of ingredients. Essentially, a tabletop scale is a perfect option if you are looking for kitchen scales and regularly engage in cooking.

    B. Pocket Scales

    As the name suggests, a pocket scale is a compact version of a precision scale. Being so portable, a pocket scale is ideal for making measurements on the move or for easy transportation. Of course, being so small, the scale will not have many advanced features like a tare or a container for measurements.

    2. Design

    Depending on the construction of the scale, the net weight that the weighing platform is able to support can vary. Durability and maintenance are also affected by the materials used in the design of the scale.

    The weighing platform is an essential component of the scale, as most tasks that involve measuring use the platform as a base. This is why having an adequately sized platform is critical. After all, if you don't have much space to measure, then the scale won't be as functional as you would have hoped.

    Another important feature to look for is anti-skid padding, which secures the entire unit and prevents it from moving while adjustments are made. By stabilizing the scale, it is able to take measurements more accurately. The more accurate the tool, the better performance you can get out of it.

    Furthermore, if weight is a consideration, then you may want to opt for a hefty and robust or lightweight scale. Compared to other scales, the weight of a robust scale usually has a higher net weight capacity. On the other hand, lightweight scales like glass scales may have a lower capacity but are easier to transport.

    Digital scales offer a backlit display to give readings to the user. For the absolute best in terms of functionality, then a pull-out display is the way to go. The benefit of having a pull-out display is being able to measure large items without it blocking the display while taking measurements.

    3. Power Supply For Digital Scales

    With the development of technology, today's scales usually run on battery power or use a USB connection to function. While a battery-powered scale is dependent on the battery life, a USB is able to run so long as it remains connected. Additionally, the battery life of a scale is determined by how power-efficient the scale is, which can be considered a maintenance factor in the long run.

    4. Weight Capacity

    When looking for the best precision scales, a high weight capacity does not always equate to better performance. The minimum capacity should also be considered, as it tells how accurate and precise measurements the scale is able to detect.

    Of course, maximum weight limits are essential for weighing out heavier items; however, the maximum capacity is not always needed for regular, everyday use. Weight limits should only be considered if you plan on using the scale for an extensive range of materials and measurements.

    5. Advanced Features

    A. Auto-Off Function

    The purpose of an auto-off function is self-explanatory. It will turn the scale off after some time in order to preserve battery life. An auto-off runs on a timer, so this feature may be a minor inconvenience if you take too long every time you measure ingredients.

    B. Tare Function

    One of the most common features found in precision scales is a tare feature. This setting will negate the weight of the container holding the material to be measured from the overall weight it detects. As such, it is incredibly useful for measuring fine or wet ingredients in a container without making a mess.

    Precision Scale Buying Guide

    Verdict

    With that, it is safe to say that you are now more equipped with the knowledge to get the correct amount no matter what you are measuring out.

    Our top choice has to be the Nicewell, being the best all-rounder in terms of durability, accuracy, and functionality. However, the Etekcity and Nicewell Food Scale are worth looking into as well, with high-quality performance and build to match.

    These precision scales come in handy for a simple weigh-in of ingredients when following a recipe or preparing a well-portioned and healthy meal. As the famous saying goes, measure twice, cut once; you will be cutting down on those pounds in no time with these handy scales by your side!

    Related Articles

    5 Common Tools to Measure Distance

    13 Best Molcajete

    11 Best Screws For Particle Board

    11 Best Zoodle Maker

    Are you looking forward to building a suitable chicken coop in your backyard?

    Well, the first thing you need to do is to choose a plan that will fit your needs and give your chickens the right room to stay in. A portable coop plan lets you be more flexible in designing your coop and is also a popularly chosen option. So, it will be an ideal style to go for.

    But there are a multitude of portable chicken coop plans available across the internet. As such you might get confused while searching for a plan that will fit your requirements.

    To make your task simpler, we have selected the 30 best options for you. Also, we have included the details of the materials to be used, the structure, and a few instructions for each coop plan.

    Read on to know more.

    Portable Chicken Coop Plans

    1. Classic A-Frame

    If you want your chicken coop to be easy to manage, you will love this classic coop with an A-Frame shape. It has a whole lot of amenities that you can’t help being impressed with.

    First of all, it has a large living area that is fit for breeding lots of chickens. Added to this, durable wheels help easy movement, while convenient handles enable pushing and lifting. Thanks to the sturdy material of the wheels, there is also not much wear and tear during the movement.

    Most importantly, the coop can be moved to your grass lawn whenever you feel. In this way, the chickens could have sufficient insects and grass to graze on.

    Also, the A-frame helps you to cover the lower portion easily during inclimate weather for added protection. Even placing water and food within the coop is not much of a problem.

    1. Vacation Home

    This one truly looks great and seems like it would be perfect for any beachfront. It has a run styled like a porch and a cute ‘upper-story’ living area. Equipped with wheels and handles, it is quite easy to move from one location to another.

    Note that this coop is ideal if you have 8 to 10 chickens or a few more. The design is a very simple one and has few angular ends. There are quite a few segments so as to house more chickens than the tractor-shaped ones.

    To make the plan a reality you can start by forming the structure through rectangular wooden blocks. Then move on to complete the coop through old treated plywood pieces and discarded vinyl floorings. These can make the walls and floor of the ‘vacation home’ respectively.

    Besides, large windows can be made by cutting through the plywoods, but the openings must also be covered by hardware cloth. As such, the ventilation would be perfect for both scorching summers and freezing winters.

    1. On The Go

    Being one of the most innovative plans that you will come across, this would let you move the chickens just about anywhere. What does the magic is a combination of supportive and strong frames and large and durable ties.

    Interestingly, this coop is made to look like a hutch and consists of an enclosure with both an outdoor and indoor area. Also, an external door lets the chickens free-range and forage prior to returning to the safely built coop.

    To construct this coop, you just have to centralize the weight of the hutch so as to balance the gravitational centre of the two-wheels used for movement. Once this is done, your on-the-go chicken coop is all set to be used!

    As for the number of chickens that can be housed, it can range from a dozen to more than 30. However, this doesn’t make any difference in the ease of movement, thanks to the balancing of the wheels. Also, the wire mesh windows keep away any predators, thus providing complete safety to your chicken.

    1. Compact Hen House

    If minimization of space is a priority for you, this plan would be the perfect option to go for. It is designed to be upright and compact and is meant for keeping a few hens.

    Though its size is smaller than other coops, it has sufficient room to provide optimal comfort to the chickens. The structure is such that it provides a lot of vertical space, which is ideal for chickens as they roost in perches above the ground level.

    Constructing this coop is simpler to many others and just requires wood pieces, fencings, pallets, wire mesh, a roofing sheet, and other odds and ends. As for the cost involved, it is just that of the PolyCarb sheet used for the roof and the wire mesh for the windows.

    However, the process can be a bit time-consuming, since you need to get rid of nails and break down pallets from the fencings and wood pieces. But then, the completed coop will have two doors on the bottom “run” and two at the top, along with medium-sized wheels. So, it’s definitely worth the effort!

    1. PVC Run Framework

    Giving your chickens more space for roaming while also keeping them safe might seem tough on the face of it. But with this coop plan using a PVC framework makes this super easy to achieve. All you need for building this one is some fittings, nettings, and PVC pipes.

    Ideally, hens should be given the freedom to roam in your backyard and scratch up some insects. In this regard, a coop made primarily from PVC pipes is quite convenient. It provides a protected space that you can move to different areas of the yard.

     And the best bit of the story is that the whole thing can be put together in a matter of minutes. It may be done with or without tools, cutting, or glue.

     Wrapping the safety netting around the PVC frames and securing the ends with wire ties may seem a bit difficult. However, two people working together on it can make the task much easier.

    1. Cottage Classic

    As the name suggests, this coop looks exactly like a mini cottage on wheels and is actually a diy chicken tractor. While turning this plan into a reality, you can make as many modifications as you desire to make it exactly like you want it to be. The result? Your chickens can have a ‘luxurious’ home.

    However, the fun fact behind making this coop is that most of the things required are obtained from lay-offs of old structures. Wood pieces can be obtained from garden sheds or fencings, while wheels can be gathered from old mowers. You only need to buy the hinges for doors and the wire-mesh.

    Also, as lovely as it looks from outside, it has an unbelievably easy design. While the ‘cottage’ part is meant for the living area and the nesting, the extended part built by pieces of rectangular fencing is the run area.

     The rectangular pieces are also extra long to make for handles so that it becomes easy to pick the coop up. Apart from this, a medium sized window and a small hole at the back for ventilation make the coop complete.

    1. Chicken Wagon

    You might not have thought about it before, but an old trailer dumped in the backyard can act as a great foundation for your chicken coop. In fact this is the best possible way to reuse a trailer instead of letting it be trashed in a dump. Your coop will have great potential for placement as well as addition of run areas.

    For making the living and nesting areas, you can take inspiration from the structure of gypsy caravans. Materials that can be used are odds and ends of rough wooden planks and frames of old windows. Interestingly, T posts can be used to make a sufficiently large portable yard and also to move the coop around easily.

    As many as 8 nest boxes can be made inside the coop and you can access those from behind the doors. Storage areas are also present below and above the nest boxes. Also, there are two kinds of doors suitable for use in different climates.

    1. Chicken Barrow

    With this chicken coop plan, you can give the home for your chickens a different look altogether. It can be made by following some easy steps and only requires a few basic tools and supplies. Such a coop can also fit well in any backyard and is a quite budget-friendly idea to go ahead with.

    This coop plan gets such a name due to its wheel-barrow-like shape. The design is actually referred to as a “hoop-house”. For the base, a rectangular piece of plywood with dimensions of about 8’x3’x3’ has to be used.

    For the arched ends of the barrow, jigsaws have to be used to cut out the arch shape. One one end there is a nesting box with a hinged lid while the other end has a door cut out in between.

    Ball-bearing wheels must be attached to base, and PVC pipes must be fitted as support for constructing the cover of the barrow coop. Thereafter, both chicken wires as well as welded wires are attached to cover the coop.

    1. House in the Woods

    Is building a cabin in the woods for your chickens a long-cherished dream of yours? If so, then this chicken coop plan will let you fulfill this dream in the easiest way possible. A playhouse that the kids may no longer want to use can form the basic structure of this coop. It can be conveniently used for 6-9 chickens that will also help in fertilizing your garden soil.

    This playhouse-coop will have one door for the chickens and a human door to the run. Besides, the nesting boxes will be external and hence can be accessed without entering the coop. It will also have a flooring that is easy to clean. As for the transportation, the ‘cabin’ can be built on a low trailer or on skids to enable easy movement.

    Ultimately, this chicken coop would keep your birds protected from attacks by predators as well as mosquitos. It would also provide you with maximum convenience, thanks to the doors and nesting boxes which will enable easy feeding and accessibility.

    1. Rolling Coop

    Most of the chicken coops seen nowadays are built at at least a slight elevation from the ground to enable more mobility. This is one such plan and allows for 4 wheels which make it easy to push it from one area to another without lifting or straining.

    This coop has an inverted-V shape and has one nest box each on both the ends. While the back wall is made solid to keep away critters, a lift door is added to the main entry at the front. To make it further protected from racoons and other predators, the bottom portion is covered with chicken wire.

    You can build this coop for housing 4 chickens at most but it needs to be moved often to allow the birds to forage. Once it’s ready for use, it can comfortably fit in average garden beds. Also, to make sure the wooden portions last longer, it would be best to paint those.

    1. Geodesic Home

    This plan might require you to get a bit more creative, but it is an ideal option if you need to move the run and coop across seasons. For fresh grass lawns or dorman garden areas, this is hence a perfect coop to go ahead with. Further, as a bonus, you will get free fertilizer for your gardening escapades next year.

    This structure is strong enough to house and protect as many as 12 chickens. You can also build it quite conveniently with materials that are readily available. Also, a circular bed makes much more efficient use of the space than the rectangular one.

    To build up the structure you require PVC pipes for making the dome and chicken wire to cover it up. As for the amenities, you can put in one nesting box and some perches for roosting. Nesting boxes can be made from the grass-collector of a mower. To ensure durability, you should clad it with scrap chicken wire.

    1. Basic Frame

    A-frames are one of the most popularly made forms of chicken coops. And this is another simply designed A-frame option that lets you easily access the nesting and roosting space of your birds. It also makes cleaning much simpler and allows convenient egg collection. You can fit it as per a wide range of flock sizes and can easily connect it to an additional run as well.

    This chicken coop consists of a built-in nesting box and a perch. It would be suitable for rearing 2-4 chickens. The bottom run portion is clad with chicken wire, while there is a coop-cum-living space at the top.

    With this plan your chickens will get as much as 40 square feet of run space and 10 square feet of coop space. Also, keeping the bottom covered with wire provides the chickens utmost protection. All in all, this plan is a perfect fit for someone who is looking to make a simple but also convenient and protective chicken coop.

    1. Making The Rounds

    This is another coop plan that offers you a fancy looking house for your chickens. Though it foregoes the traditional run, you can easily add one if you feel that to be more convenient. Being a compact and mobile henhouse, you can close it up for safety on each night, bring it to a garage or shed and then wheel it back each morning.

    This plan will allow your chickens free range while also protecting them for hawks and other predators. It can be placed in a pasture and has beneficial effects on the land, thanks to the free range that the chickens get. There are also no major chores involved for cleaning the coop. What you have to do every couple of days is to push it onto fresh grass.

    For building the coop, you must first make a box-shaped structure with dimensions of about 7’x3’. Supporting wooden planks fitted on all sides of the coop frame and the nesting box should be added on the end. As for the door, it is built in an easy-to-operate two-in-one fashion.

    1. Little Egg Factory

    This coop basically has an A-shaped design but it gives much more portability than other A-shaped plans. There are easy-grip handles at both ends to facilitate the movement.

    As the bulk of the weight lies near the bottom portion, it becomes easier to move the coop. Added to this, there is perfect space-utilization with the run being placed beneath the living-space.

    This coop is built by firstly joining thin rectangular wood -pieces just the way a basic A-frame is structured.

    Two nest boxes are kept on the two sides, while a space for moving is cut out from the partition separating the living space from the run. Glue as well as screws are used for attaching the pieces, with the holes being pre-drilled.

    As for the wheels for the coop, they can be installed on one end or both ends depending upon your preferences. If one end has wheels, then the handle should be on the opposite end.

    1. Barn Inspired

    If you would want your chicken coop to have a unique design but also not be too difficult to make, this plan is a great one. Your chickens would have a barn of their own, but it still won’t be too large and hefty in terms of the design. This style is also most suitable for simple customization, such as external access to windows, decor and nesting boxes.

    This coop can be built just with the help of leftover building material and pieces of reclaimed wood. While the top part of the barn has the nesting boxes and the coop, the remaining part is entirely devoted to the run. And it is the top part where the doors and the arrangement for ventilation is made.

    Most of the barn is covered by good-quality chicken wire to ensure maximum protection. There is also a ‘stair-way’ ramp connecting the top to the run. Easy movement is facilitated by wheels on all four sides.

    1. Traditional Design

    PVC pipes are commonly used in making chicken coops as they are lightweight and can be moved easily. This traditionally-styled coop is another hen house which uses PVC pipes as the main building material. It can be moved from season to season or just whenever you feel the chickens need a change of environment.

    This coop has such an easy design that you can alone put it together in no time. Basically, it is a box of dimensions 2 mt x 1 mt x 1 mt and is suitable for holding 2-4 chickens. However, you can also accommodate more chickens by adding an extension to the original structure.

    For moving the coop, you can just drag it along since it’s really lightweight to move. Thus there is no need to attach wheels either. Two nest boxes can be created with plywood and put within the coop, along with two planks placed above to act as the roosts. Clearing the nest boxes and accessing them for egg collection would also become very easy through this arrangement.

    1. Budget-friendly Design

    To make your chickens a coop with the maximum amenities as well as protection, the budget may often become a constraint. But this plan would provide you all that you desire and would yet not involve costs beyond your budget.

    This coop is made by attaching pieces of 2x4 wood pieces to make the floors and walls. A firm base is constructed by using pallet wood which is a really cost-effective option. The wall is made sturdy by screwing the 2X4 wood pieces to the base and adding beams to cover it. Also, the floor made by adding the plywoods over the base gives the chicken flock a firm place to rest and stand on.

    Even the roofs of this simple tractor are created through such plywood pieces, by attaching them to make 22 degree angles. After that, you would just need a corrugated metal sheet for the roof.

    It is also super easy to make the doorway, as you just need to attach the front playwoods to the base at a gap of 16”. This large space is great for the chickens to travel in and out of the coop and also makes the leaning quite easy.

    1. Easy Access Plan

    Most people living in urban areas neither have many chickens nor have the space for making an average-sized chicken coop. This plan with an easy-access design will just be the right one for them.

     It is also very simple to make and can be easily moved from one place to another. While the nesting and roosting space is in the upper portion, the lower part gives the chickens enough room to roam about. You can also connect a larger run without too much of hassle.

    This coop has two nest boxes on both sides at the front, which can be easily accessed for egg collection by using the handles attached. As for the living area, it is divided into three segments and can be opened through hinged doors for feeding the chickens. Once built up, this chicken coop can also be maintained very easily.

    1. The Kerr Center Chicken Tractor

    This chicken coop plan is another suitable choice for producing home-grown eggs in urban settings. It is raised slightly above the ground and is actually a portable tractor. This design allows maximum run space for chickens, along with easy egg collection and cleaning of the rear part.

    While the nesting boxes and an enclosed shelter are positioned at the backside, the front portion is entirely devoted to the run area. Also, the boxes are placed at a height of 20 inches, which also allows a part of the rear portion to be used for grazing.

    A ramp is attached at the front opening of the shelter to let the chickens move out to the run area easily. Besides, the coop also has a door flap at the back that must be raised to access the eggs. It provides complete protection to the birds during the night.

    1. Kevin’s Chicken Tractor

    Among the range of portable chicken coop plans available, this one has an unique look and design. It closely resembles a rabbit pen due to the arched shape. You can easily move it from place to place since it is lightweight and has a set of wheels at the backside. And the best part is that no special tools or expensive materials are required to build it up.

    As for the structure of the coop, the base is square-shaped and is actually made up of wood pieces. Three arches are made by attaching PVC pipes to the base, and welded wire is used to cover the coop up.

    Chicken wire may be used in place of the welded wire, but the former is rather flimsy. Also, the door is made from wood as well, with its upper portion being arched to match the shape of the coop.

    At the back is the external nesting box, with a pull-up hinged lid. All in all, if you are looking forward to constructing a light, portable yet well-built pen for your flock, this will be a great plan to go for.

    1. The Mobile Stage Coach

    This chicken coop is especially suitable for organic urban landscapes and gardens. It is in effect a chicken tractor, which will allow you to move the birds all over your property.

    Note that those of you who are not that confident about building a coop all by yourself will love this option. That’s because you can order a precut version. This will save a lot of the work involved in building it up. It will also have a nesting radiant misting system or heater installed.

    This coop has an extended roost area of as much as three feet. You get a plastic-lined roost floor to enable easy cleaning, along with an auto-feeder and auto-waterer. A stainless solar day/night ventilation facility is also made at the back.

     Besides, there are plastic nesting insert trays that make cleaning the nesting space much easier. To sum it up, this chicken coop plan is a ‘super-speciality’ unit of your chickens and also ranks high in terms of convenience.

    1. Back to Basics

    The A-frame structure can be used for making a lot of simple and easy to maintain chicken coops. This is another such chicken coop plan which is also a cost-effective way to keep the birds in one place. You can even move the coop to any desired spot whenever you feel.

    To make this coop, you will require lumber pieces of several dimensions for the A-frame. Both the tent-shaped sides of the frame should be supported by additional wood pieces attached in between. Similarly, the base must also have such supports in the middle.

    Importantly, in this design, chicken wire must be used to cover the entire coop instead of plywood pieces. Movement takes place through wheels attached at about 3 feet from each corner of the A-frame. These wheels have to be accompanied by swing-up arms for moving the coop, that can be swung down to allow it to rest on the ground.

    1. Hen Hideout

    You can use PVC pipes not only to make the simpler and smaller chicken coops, but also relatively bigger ones. This hen hideout coop is among those great chicken coop plans and also represents fair value for money. You don’t require using any wood pieces to build the frame. For the movement, a large wheel is fixed at each corner.

    This coop will provide your chickens with a fairly large protected enclosure to roam about. You can make the structure wholly out of PVC pipes as they won’t rot out or absorb any foul smell from the chickens. It should be made based on your requirement for living and run area. After this, you can cover the coop by attaching ½ ” wire mesh screens to the PVC pipes.

    For making the ‘henhouse’, you have to use plywood. The quantity would again depend on the size you would want it to be. A medium henhouse generally requires about 11/32” inches of plywood. At the bottom of this structure, there would be swing-up doors to access the feeder, and for letting chickens out to forage.

    1. The Hyperion

    This plan is among the most affordable options in the list. Though it looks fairly basic, it is a truly effective solution to all problems that you might be facing with many smaller coops. Importantly, it has the coop space raised to a two feet height above the base. This gives the chickens a large area to roam about.

    While plywood is used to make the coop space, hardware cloth is used to cover the bottom and rear run and perching areas. This coop has a waterer as well as a feeder attached to the wall by electric cables.

    A chicken door is set on the wall of the coop. It can be opened or closed from the outside, which ensures that the chickens can’t escape when you do it. At the backside of the coop is a human door with side-hinges. If you have a door with a hinge at the top, when you go inside the chickens can run out through the side opposite to you.

    1. Lane Brooder

    Having a unique design, this coop offers two entrances for the chickens, one up to the coop and the other into the run. If you find that the chickens use the coop entrance, you can build a ladder for them. For making the basic structure of the coop, you can either gather a discarded wide wooden box or have to make one with plywoods.

    Attaching the legs beneath and a door on the open end will give you the coop space. After this, you need to make the long rectangular run area by fixing pieces of plywood on the sides of the henhouse.

    For making the nest box, a 4 x 4 plywood piece is used that keeps the hay piled up properly. As for the wheels, they are attached in the same manner as a wheel-barrow. So when you lift the small end of the run, it should tip up on the wheels.

    1. Meaties Tractor

    This a coop plan suitable for keeping meat chickens. Those of you who own a small flock can go for this plan which is simple to transform into reality. There also won’t be any budget problems as all the materials to be used are quite affordable. This coop can be made by using scrap lumber pieces for the coop space. For the run area, thin rectangular plywood pieces and wire mesh can be used.

    While the run area is made in the form of a long horizontal extension from the hen house, the coop space is a box with dimensions of about 3’ x 3’. It has a door of medium height at the backside. You can paint the plywood portions of the coop black so that chicks are provided with extra warmth during the spring.

    To allow easy access for cleaning the coop, there is a hinged opening on top of the run. As for the wheels, they can be repurposed from an old wagon or mower. Wide handles are also made from wood pieces which make movement very easy.

    1. The Roadhouse

    If budget is not a major constraint for you, this coop plan will be quite a nice option to go ahead with. Besides having a sheltered area for roosting, the coop also has a nesting box at one end.

    As for the basic structure, it is the same as that of an A-frame coop and is made by using plywood. The coop is slightly raised and has a doorway to the run with a ramp attached for the chickens to move out. Corrugated vinyl sheets are laid on the floor, which makes it easy to clean the coop.

    Welded wire is used to cover the run part as well as the lower portion of one side. Your chickens get a run of about 4x10 ft, which is quite a lot of area. They would enjoy this freedom, while also remaining protected, thanks to the strong welded wire. The nest box at the back end can be accessed from the top and is also easy to clean.

    1. Coco Channel

    This spacious as well as protected chicken coop is an ideal for anyone who can devote weeks to its construction and has a large budget as well. It is capable of holding more than 12 chickens comfortably. This plan even consists of flower beds for decorating the exterior and would definitely be a high-end coop for you birds.

    This coop must be spread across an area of at least 80 square feet. It is basically a long rectangular cottage, with a “house” for the living area at one end. A ramp from the house leads to the long and sufficiently wide run area.

    High-quality plywood has to be used for constructing this coop, which has a large nest box at the back. You can use the roofing material of your choice, but there must be a large tent-shaped roof. As for the wheels, they should be placed on all four ends.

    1. The Mini Coop

    This is another plan which utilizes available space quite efficiently. It is suitable for 3 to 4 chickens and can provide them pretty much room for roaming about. This coop is shaped like a tent, with the front run area being relatively lower in height and having a roof with a gentler slope.

    While the run is covered with welded wire, the walls of the coop space as well as the roof are created by corrugated metal sheets. As for the frame of the henhouse, it is built by joining scrap wood pieces.

    Large wheels are attached to the backside of the coop, and can be obtained from a discarded lawnmower. To move the coop, you just have to drag a bit from the front.

    1. Perfectly Portable

    This plan is pretty basic but looks quite adorable. Its design is also quite convenient and spacious. Moreover, the design is such that you can readily make it larger if you wish to have more chickens over time. A larger run can also be added when you need it.

    But the most amazing thing about this coop is that it can be moved with just one hand. What does the trick is the use of PVC pipes to make a wide handle at the front. While the base is square-shaped and has dimensions of 5 x 10, the height of the coop is 6 feet. This size is perfect for a few home-grown chickens.

    Also, the wood pieces used are made by ripping 2 x 6 pieces into two halves instead of the regular 2 x 4s, which reduces the weight of the coop substantially. A large nest box at the back and the front run area makes the coop a complete home with roaming-area for the chickens.

    Chicken coops and chickens on white background illustration

    Conclusion

    If the idea of having chickens seems exciting to you, you will surely want them to be safe and able to have enough room to roam. Chicken coops are exactly what you need to fulfill that purpose and keep your chickens healthy and happy.

    However, for choosing a suitable plan, you must be clear about your priorities when it comes to a chicken coop. For instance, if space is not a constraint for you, plans such as a PVC framework or a perfectly-portable design may be suitable.

    That said, if space is not ample but you still cannot compromise on the run, those such as the Little Egg Factory or the compact chicken coop would be ideal.

    So, sort out your priorities and go on to choose a plan for making your chicken house. All the best!

    Related Articles

    Barndominium 101 | Floor Plans, Pricing Guide & Pictures

    57 DIY Chicken Coop Plans in Easy to Build Tutorials – 100% FREE

    47 Free DIY Swing Set Plans for a Happy Playing Area in Your Backyard

    49 FREE DIY Router Table Plans For an Epic Home Workshop

    43 DIY Duck Houses Plans and Duck Coop Plans to Build Now

    57 DIY Bookshelf Plans and Ideas For Healthy Home Libraries

    163 Free DIY Pole Barn Plans and Designs That You Can Build Easily

    37 Free DIY Tiny House Plans for a Happy & Peaceful Life In Nature

    27 Insanely Cool DIY Rocket Stove Plans for Cooking With Wood

    39 FREE DIY Bat House Plans to Shelter the Natural Pest Control

    19 Adorable Free Cat Tower Plans For Your Furry Friend

    23 Awesome Free Deer Stand Plans You Can Start Right Now

    13 Epic Free Rabbit Hutch Plans You Can Download & Build Today

    23 FREE Detailed DIY Garage Plans With Instructions To Actually Build

    101 Simple Free DIY Coffee Table Plans

    10 Best Electric Fence for Chickens in 2022

    11 Best Corn Moisture Testers

    Best Floors For a Chicken Coop Options Right Now

    Taking a shower in the bathroom in December can feel like quite a task. But not when you have the right portable bathroom heater. 

    During the winter months, your bathroom might feel colder than the rest of the house. That is not a very pleasant experience, meaning that your bathroom would feel unwelcoming at most times. 

    You can install the best space heaters to combat this situation. People are slowly shifting from natural gas space heaters to more portable variants. 

    But the problem actually arises when you visit the market and feel bombarded with a plethora of choices. To make your task easy, we decided to compile this guide with the top 13 products that you can try. 

    You will find a detailed round-up of the best products with a buyer’s guide at the end. Without any more delay, let’s dive right in!

    Portable Bathroom Heaters 

    Portable Bathroom Heaters 

    1. GiveBest 905

    If you are on the lookout for excellent compact bathroom heaters, it is best that you try the GiveBest 905. The heat output capacity of this bathroom heater is nothing short of incredible; rest assured, there will be no dearth of warm air once you install it. 

    GiveBest Portable Electric Space Heater with Thermostat,...
    • 2 in 1 heater fan: This ceramic heater offers dual heating...
    • Multi-protection safety system: These heaters are made of V0...

    Why Did We Like It?

    What stood out for us about this bathroom heater is that it comes with multiple heat settings. You can either put it on 1500W or 750W, depending on the exact temperature outside. 

    Once you set the temperature range, the heater will automatically turn off when the built-in thermostat reaches the correct value. As you can understand, it is pretty energy efficient and includes the best overheating protection. 

    It is ideal that you use the adjustable thermostat feature to keep the temperature of the room comfortable at all times. Moreover, it is important to note that this is one of those portable heaters that hardly makes any noise when switched on. The noise level does not go above 45 decibels, meaning it would sound like humming. 

    To sum it up, this portable space heater is a great buy because it is compact and highly energy-efficient.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    As a bathroom space heater, this option is actually a great one as it ensures that the bathroom air is warm at all times. However, keep in mind that it is not good for large spaces for which you might need to install a central heating system. 



    Pros

    • Effective heating element
    • Lasts for a long time
    • Saves electricity
    • Easy to carry




    Cons

    • Not meant for large areas



    2. Lasko CD08200

    When it comes to checking out the best bathroom heaters, there’s no way you can miss out on the Lasko CD08200. This ceramic space heater is designed to keep your bathroom warm in all weather conditions. Hence, it is suitable for both small and big bathrooms. 

    Sale
    Lasko Portable Electric Ceramic Space Heater with ALCI Plug...
    • HEATS UP THE BATHROOM FAST – Say goodbye to stepping out...
    • SMALL & MIGHTY – Powered by an energy efficient 1500-watt...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The heating power of this bathroom heater is incredible and functions quickly. If switched on before entering the shower, you will see that the bathroom is completely heated up by the time you get out. The heating speed is pretty fast, and it is one of the best bathroom technologies if you like a spa setup. 

    Now, to be the best bathroom heater, a device does not need to be big. Just like this space heater, it can be small and mighty. The Lasko CD08200 is compact and comes with adjustable heat settings. But keep in mind that even if it looks small, it can generate a good amount of heat. 

    Additionally, unlike many portable bathroom heaters, this one is easy to assemble. You need to simply unpack it and plug it directly into a power source. Not to mention, using it is pretty straightforward too. There’s only one button, and you can adjust the heat settings with it. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    If we are being picky, we have to say that we were not really happy with the size of the cable. Unless the charging point is nearby, you will see that the cord is short, and that might make the device fall. In that case, it is best to get an extension cord. 



    Pros

    • Provides fast heating
    • Durable item
    • Heating variation
    • Works well with an exhaust fan




    Cons

    • Cord length is small



    3. BEYOND BREEZE BNT-15L

    Next, we have one of the best bathroom heaters called the BEYOND BREEZE BNT-15L. Because of its great performance and excellent customer service, this item enjoys much popularity across the world. Once you buy it, this electric heater will surely make your winter nights more comfortable. 

    BEYOND BREEZE Space Heater, 1500-Watt Ceramic Portable...
    • Ceramic Heat Elements - Ceramic small space heaters are fast...
    • Compact & Portable - Eelecric space heater has carry handle...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Finding the right ceramic heater is not an easy task. And once you use this item, we are sure you are not going to look any further. 

    This bathroom heater will make you feel comfortable after you are done taking a bath. When you start using it, you will notice that it heats up small bathrooms in a few minutes and large bathrooms in under 15 minutes. The electric coil ensures that it heats up the space fast and offers consistent heating. 

    Furthermore, this electric fan heater does not compromise safety. It comes with overheat protection technology, and you can rest assured that there are no risks involved. 

    There is an automatic overheat protection device installed in it. In case it gets too heated up, the overheat protection function will turn off the device immediately.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    It is one of those bathroom heaters that make a lot of noise when switched on and many people have trouble dealing with this issue. However, its performance is incredible, and you can always put on some music to drown the humming sound of this fan heater.



    Pros

    • Safe to use
    • Heats up fast
    • Lasts for a long time
    • Well designed




    Cons

    • Noisy operation



    4. Dreo DR-HSH004

    The design of this device is noteworthy and will go with all kinds of bathroom furniture. Be it small rooms or big ones; the Dreo DR-HSH004 will ensure that you enjoy hot air in winter by distributing heat evenly. Means, you will feel comfortable even during the cold months of the year. 

    DREO Space Heater, 1500W Portable Electric Heaters for...
    • Faster Heat Than Ever: Powered by DREO Hyperamics...
    • Shield360° Protection: DREO Room Heater Heat up your day...

    Why Did We Like It?

    When winter is knocking on your door, it is an absolute must to try this good space heater. This ceramic heater is compact in size and will effectively heat up any space irrespective of where you put it. 

    We really loved how this portable heater comes with a hidden handle that makes it easier for you to carry it around. On top of that, it has an adjustable built-in thermostat and touch control technology that makes this electric heater super easy to use. 

    Not only that, this fan heater is pretty noiseless, and you will hardly feel its presence when it is switched on. This ceramic heater is designed keeping the comfort of users in mind. 

    What’s more, you can rest assured that there are no risks involved in using the product. The heating power is adjustable, and there are overheat protection mechanisms, ensuring that the device does not get too heated up and cause a fire.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    Though the product exhibits an excellent heating element, we were not really impressed with the kind of packaging it had. On receiving the item, we noticed that the box in which it was delivered was tapered. From a brand as good as this one, we expected better, 



    Pros

    • Compact in size
    • Comes with heat protection
    • Simple to use
    • Detailed user manual included




    Cons

    • Packaging is poor



    5. Antarctic Star 3618-B

    For the ones who are looking for bathroom heaters that can effectively make winter more comfortable, the Antarctic Star 3618-B is their best bet. It is one of those ceramic heaters that provide quick heat and is also super convenient to use. We are not surprised that so many people love it. 

    Antarctic Star Space Heater, Portable Electric Heater...
    • Overheat & Tip-over protection:The heater has an anti-tilt...
    • Compact and Powerful :Dimensions:9.1" x 7" x 6", 3.3 pounds...

    Why Did We Like It?

    A bathroom heater should always be good at ensuring that the space heats evenly and this device aces this function. It is one of the best bathroom heaters to provide quick heating and is super simple to carry around. There’s a small handle by the side, and you can take it anywhere you wish to. 

    Apart from that, it is pretty suitable for small rooms and bathrooms. The size of this bathroom heater is small, and it will hardly occupy any floor space if you decide to keep it on the ground. So, even if you do not have a very large space, you can keep this device anywhere. 

    Also, it comes with adjustable heat settings. There are 3 modes that let you decide which temperature would work best for you. 

    Long story short, this device is highly energy-efficient, and there would be no hefty electric bill by the end of the month.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    After using it for a week, we noticed that the switches on this portable bathroom heater are a little stiff. We complained to their customer support team and requested a replacement. They quickly resolved the issue, and we got a replacement in a week’s time. 



    Pros

    • Provides even heating
    • Lasts for long
    • Sturdy construction
    • Suitable for use in all areas




    Cons

    • Switches can be better



    6. R.W.FLAME 

    Up next, we have the R.W.FLAME bathroom heater, which is pretty popular for providing heating all year round. You can simply use it as a fan during summer and as a heater when it gets cold. It is good at heating up any space quickly without fail. 

    COWSAR Portable Espresso Machine
    • 2-in-1 Coffee Maker: This ETL certified coffee maker is...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The best bathroom heaters are not ones that can be used only in the bathrooms. For example, this product is suited to be used in your living room or your home office too. It is pretty compact in size, and the attached handles make it one of the best portable bathroom heaters that you can get your hands on. 

    Unlike most other space heaters, you will forget that it is even switched on after a while because it hardly makes any noise. The sound it produces is less than 40 decibels and will create no distractions while you work or sleep. So, it can be a good companion throughout the year. 

    What is more, is that it comes with in-built heat protection technology that ensures that the device automatically tips off the moment it gets overheated. This will ensure that you or other members of your family do not have to face any adverse impacts of a bathroom heater getting overheated.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    Unless you have used portable heaters before, you might feel a little challenged to use this as there’s hardly any user instruction. The manual is not at all detailed, and you might have to look up the internet for help with installation and operation. 



    Pros

    • Makes very little noise
    • Compact
    • Good safety features
    • Suitable for all weathers




    Cons

    • User instructions not detailed



    7. BabyExo Space Heater 

    If you are on the lookout for a cute space heater that is portable and energy-efficient, it is best that you try the BabyExo Space Heater. With this, you will be able to enjoy a night of good sleep and say goodbye to chilly nights. When the room is adequately heated, the device gets turned off automatically. 

    BabyExo Small Space Heater for Indoor Use, 1000W PTC Fast...
    • MINI SPACE HEATERS FOR ALL SEASON USE - This ceramic heater...
    • ENERGY EFFICIENT INDOOR CERAMIC HEATER - Mini electric...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The first thing to come to our mind when talking about this bathroom heater is its design. It is simply stylish and one of the best-looking heating units that we had the opportunity to try. With 4 plastic non-skid legs, this item can be placed anywhere and will surely enhance and add to the decor. 

    Moreover, this is a great space heater when it comes to saving energy. It comes with PTC ceramic heating technology and a high-speed fan that ensures that your indoor space is heated up in seconds and the electric consumption is less. 

    What is more, is that its safety features are top-notch! In case the device gets overheated or accidentally falls over, it will get automatically turned off. So, you can rest assured that there will be no risks in using this product.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    On the downside, this product makes quite some noise when switched on. If you are planning to work or sleep when it is turned on, it can be a bit of a problem. However, to drown the sound, you can put on some music. We would suggest that you keep this factor in mind before you make the purchase. 



    Pros

    • Excellent design
    • High energy efficiency
    • Good safety features
    • Lasts long




    Cons

    • Makes noise



    8. Potulas H1

    Up next, we have one of the best convection heaters that you can try: the Potulas Space Heater. When you are trying to make a room in an old house warm during winter or make your office space more comfortable, this ceiling heater can be a great buy. 

    1000W Small Portable PTC Ceramic Heaters for Bedroom, Energy...
    • 1000W/500W Energy Efficient Heater - up 1000 watts of power...
    • 2S Fast Heating Heater - Equipped with PTC ceramic heating...

    Why Did We Like It?

    This item is high on energy efficiency and helps you ensure that you do not have to pay hefty electric bills by the month-end. If you are using it in small rooms, you can put it on low heat and save a considerable amount of energy. For a bigger room, however, you have to put it on high heat. 

    Apart from that, you do not have to wait for a long time for this device to work its wonders. It comes equipped with PTC ceramic technology and a high-speed fan that helps to spread the heat fast in the rooms. And this ensures that the sound it produces is minimum. 

    Furthermore, this powerful heater is suitable for use in all kinds of spaces. You just need to ensure that the space is enclosed and the exhaust fan (if any) is switched off. It is no doubt a compact wall heater, but it can easily heat up small to medium-sized rooms.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    Despite its brilliant performance, we were not very pleased with the fact that it uses plastic grates. If you are sensitive to the smell of plastic, this might not really work for you. For home products, odor is a major factor, and you should take note of this aspect. 



    Pros

    • Helps save energy
    • Suitable for use in all areas
    • Durable
    • Does not make noise




    Cons

    • Releases odor



    9. Luwior LWIH002

    Do you hate chilly winter evenings in your garage and office? With the Luwior LWIH002, you will no longer face this trouble. Once you start using this bathroom heater, you will not be required to put on layers of winter clothing to avoid the cold. This ceramic heater will drive the cold away efficiently. 

    Why Did We Like It?

    This is one of those portable heaters that can work well as ceiling heaters too. With the high-quality thermostat system, you can rest assured that once you switch it on, the temperature in the room will be optimum. You can use the thermostat knob to adjust the temperature according to your requirement. 

    On top of that, you would be happy to know that this is one of those space heaters that can heat up your room in a few seconds. Within 30 seconds, a bathroom of 200 square feet can be easily heated up. Because the fan comes with high-speed functioning, there will be no unwanted noise. 

    Apart from that, you do not need to worry about the safety of your pets or kids when using this product. Even if someone accidentally trips over it, the device gets automatically turned off.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    After using it for a few weeks, we noticed that the plug got too heated up. There is no risk for safety hazards, but in case you end up touching it, you might feel uncomfortable. We hope the manufacturer fixes this issue soon. 



    Pros

    • Included all safety technology
    • High longevity
    • Heats up rooms quickly
    • Easy to carry




    Cons

    • Plug gets heated up



    10. F.EASY.D Space Heater 

    If you have a thing for good designs, there’s no way you can miss out on the F.EASY.D Space Heater. This space heater will help you enjoy a warm and comfortable winter with your loved ones. And the super cute design of this bathroom heater will surely turn some eyeballs. 

    Sale
    Cute Space Heater, Portable Space Heaters for Indoor Use,...
    • Warmth Meets Stylish Design: Inspired by classic mid-century...
    • Warm Gifts for Women and Men: With a cute and stylish...
     

    Why Did We Like It?

    It does not make sense to invest hefty amounts in buying heaters that can function only in bathrooms. This one can be used in bedrooms, office spaces, and garages too. In short, this is good for small to medium-sized rooms and will help you warm them up efficiently. 

    Moving on, the design, as we have already mentioned, is pretty attractive and will surely add some charm to your desk. Not only does it look good, but it also comes with excellent fire safety features. The construction is done entirely in fire-resistant material, and there are additional tip-off protective measures too. 

    It is one of those electric heaters that will help you enjoy warm winter evenings without occupying much space in your house. The compact and sturdy design helps you place the device anywhere you like and is best suited for indoor use.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    We have no complaints about how well it performed. However, its packaging could definitely have been better. The styrofoam layers in the package were a bit less, and we were worried that the product was damaged during transit. Luckily that wasn’t the case. 



    Pros

    • Suitable for all types of spaces
    • Durable construction
    • Includes safety mechanisms
    • Occupies very little space




    Cons

    • Packaging needs improvement



    11. Yeslike Space Heater

    We are almost reaching the end of our list, and next up, we have the Yeslike Space Heater. This item can be used as a wall-mounted heater or as a ceiling heater. Whichever way you choose to use it, rest assured that it will provide the best heating conditions during the cold winter months. 

    Why Did We Like It?

    It is understandable if you do not like to wait for hours for the room to get heated up after you switch on the bathroom ceiling heaters. This device will help you get the room heated up in a few minutes. Because of the PTC ceramic heating element, this space heater displays great thermal efficiency. 

    Moreover, you can choose to place this item anywhere you please, and it will provide 360-degree heating. This is possible because of the oscillating technology that enables it to dissipate heat in multiple directions. 

    Apart from that, we have to score this product a full ten for its high-quality construction. There are no exposed blades that can affect your safety. And the construction is sturdy enough to make sure that the product lasts for a few years.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    Despite it being pretty sturdy, we were not very happy with the fact that it does not come with an automatic thermostat. So, in case the heat gets too much, it won’t become less automatic, and you would have to adjust it manually. And when you have to do this at night, it might feel a bit hectic. 



    Pros

    • Great build
    • Excellent customer support team
    • Highly efficient
    • Lasts for a long time




    Cons

    • No automatic thermostat present



    12. SWEETFULL S710

    SWEETFULL S710 bathroom heater is one bathroom heater that does not make noise even when you put it on high heat mode. The unique noise reduction technology is what makes it stand out among its contemporaries. To know more about this product, keep reading!

    SWEETFULL Space Heater for Indoor Use, 1500W Portable...
    • 【ELECTRIC HEATER FOR SAFE】The safety protecting measures...
    • 【3 HEATING MODELS AND 4-MODE TIMERS】Ceramic Heater Fan...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Not all portable heaters are actually easy to carry, and some of them are quite bulky. But not this item, thanks to its compact size as there’s an additional handle that enables you to carry it wherever you like. 

    Other than that, you will not have to worry about your carpet catching fire when using this item. It is constructed of fireproof material and comes with added heat protection facilities that provide good coverage even if the device tips over. 

    Furthermore, this ceramic space heater is exceptional when it comes to generating and retaining heat. Once you switch it on, the room will be warm for a long time. In other words, you can expect a medium-sized room to turn warm within a few minutes.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    Unfortunately, this bathroom heater comes with a short cable. Unless you place it close to a power source, there’s a good chance that your device might topple and fall. To prevent such problems, consider using an extension cord. 



    Pros

    • Easy to carry
    • Well-designed
    • Overheat protection
    • Provides quick heating




    Cons

    • Power cable is not long



    13. Ordenando Space Heater 

    There was no way we were going to wrap up our list without having mentioned the Ordenando Space Heater. During the cold winter months, this space heater can turn your rooms considerably warm and comfortable. Plus, it works its magic within a few minutes. 

    Portable Space Heater, 500W/900W Small Ceramic Space Heaters...
    • MINI SPACE HEATER: Dimensions:...
    • FAST HEATING CERAMIC SPACE HEATER: Do you hate the cold days...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Unlike many other standard space heaters, this device comes with double protection to ensure that you face no risks. In case your device gets knocked over accidentally or in case of overheating, it will immediately shut off.  

    Moreover, it scores a perfect ten on ease of use. It is compact in size, hardly occupying any floor space, meaning it can go well in offices, garages, and definitely bathrooms.

    Apart from that, you have the option of easily controlling the heat that this device produces. When the days are too cold, you can turn the heat up a notch to feel comfortable. Similarly, when the days are a little warm, you can turn down the heat and save excess energy consumption.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    The only problem that we faced when using the item was that their customer support team was not very responsive. We reached out to them with some queries, and it was weeks before they got back to us. Honestly, we expected a faster response from them. 



    Pros

    • Easy to use
    • Lasts for a long time
    • Adjustable heating function
    • Compact size




    Cons

    • Customer service is slow



    Portable Bathroom Heater Buying Guide

    Portable Bathroom Heater Buying Guide

    Now that we have given a detailed round-up of the top 13 bathroom heaters that you can try, were you able to decide which one to go for? We understand that deciding which bathroom ceiling heaters would be the best bet is difficult. 

    And in order to make the right choice, you need to look beyond the heating element and consider a few other factors. Let’s quickly take a look at them. 

    1. Safety Is Crucial

    To opt for the best bathroom heaters or space heaters, it is essential that you pay special attention to safety. Electricity and water are not the best of friends, and when opting for wall-mounted heaters, you need to make sure that protective measures are in place.

    It is best that you put the bathroom heaters as far from the shower or any other water source as possible. And make sure that the plug of your device complies with the ALCI Safe Plug standards. It should get turned off automatically when it gets too heated up or gets overturned for some reason.  

    2. Energy Efficiency

    There’s an ongoing debate about whether ceramic heaters are better than infrared heaters. According to us, the best bathroom heater is one that is energy efficient. 

    There’s no point investing in bathroom heaters that will generate a hefty electric bill by the end of the month. You need to ensure that the heater warms only as much as needed. 

    These days, most space heaters come with adjustable thermostats which will help you cut down usage costs significantly. 

    3. Noiseless Operation

    After a long day at work, when you are relaxing in a hot bath, you would not like the bathroom heaters to make noise, right? Just because you focus on the heating element, do not forget about comfort. 

    Be it Pelonis space heaters or regular bathroom heaters; you need to ensure that they offer soundless operation. The best bathroom heaters come with PTC technology and a high-speed fan that would keep the noise at a minimum.

    Best Portable Bathroom Heaters

    Verdict

    That’s all we have for you folks!

    We hope you had a great time learning about the best portable bathroom heaters that are available out there. They are pretty different from wall-mounted heaters and electric baseboard heaters as they are not permanently fixed into the electrical circuit of your home.  

    Before we say goodbye, we would like to let you in on our favorites. The GiveBest 905 takes the award for being our favorite model. But for fast heating, we recommend that you give the Lasko CD08200 a try. 

    In conclusion, bathroom heaters are an absolute must during winter. If you have any other suggestions, feel free to mention them in the comments section below. 

    Keep a watch on this space for more exciting reads. Until next time, see you soon!

    Related Articles

    6 Best Micathermic Heaters

    7 Types of Water Heaters Explained in Detail

    9 Best Indoor Natural Gas Space Heaters

    10 Best Solar Pool Heaters

    10 Best 240v Electric Garage Heater To Consider

    13 Best Oil-Filled Radiator Heater

    Best Portable Air Conditioner and Heater Combos

    13 Most Energy-Efficient Space Heaters

    13 Best Pool Heaters

    What Size Tankless Water Heater Do I Need?

    Ceramic VS Infrared Space Heaters

    I love porch swings. They are beautiful yet simple, comfortable yet small enough, and swinging is an extremely relaxing thing to do. Most ready-made swings cost a lot and I would love to make them on my own instead. The experience and the effort put in are rewarding. So, here are thirty porch swing ideas for me and you that we can most definitely do, all by ourselves.

    If you`ve found the porch swing plans below interesting we invite you to check various other free woodworking plans, we have curated lists that will show you how to build a fire pitgaragecat tower, rocket stovetiny houseduck housedeer standbat house, diy tree housecat towergreenhousesmall cabinfarmhouse tablepole barn, rabbit hutchdiy dog beda playhouse, a chicken coop, or a a coffee table.

     

    DIY Porch Swing Plans &amp; Ideas

    1. The Elegant White Porch Swing

    White always stands out and goes with almost anything. This particular porch swing has a porcelain hue to it which is striking to look at. Cleverly using white rope for it only adds to the appeal. Contrasting the all-white subtly are yellow and green pillows, striated and vibrant.

    THE ELEGANT WHITE PORCH SWING plans

    More details at abeautifulmess.com

    2. The Stocky Little Porch Swing

    This swing has a really simple yet bold design. I especially love the arms. They look robust and imposing yet very aesthetically pleasing. The backrest, on the other hand, is a little too low and might be deemed inconvenient by some. But, if you’re someone who doesn’t have a problem with it, then this will be a lovely addition to your porch.

    THE STOCKY LITTLE PORCH SWING plans

    More details at simplydesigning.porch.com

    3. The Blue Bench Porch Swing

    I adore the color of this porch swing. It reminds me of Greece. I also like how this swing is so simple in design yet has such a unique appeal to it. Moreover, it can be used as a bench too, and is easy to build.

    THE BLUE BENCH PORCH SWING

    More details at ana-white.com

    4. The Rustic Porch Swing

    This beautiful porch swing has such an antique allure. I love the large pieces of wood that make the porch swing look like a block and bulky. Using a crib mattress and a lot of fluffy pillows makes it look so comfortable that I’d love to sleep away on it. Plus, you can use this swing as a living room installation. I would personally love to do that in winter, with a quilt to complete it.

    THE RUSTIC PORCH SWING

    More details at sawdust2stitches.com

    5. The Navy Blue Porch Swing

    I love the color of this swing. It perfectly complements the abundance of white in its environment. A very sailor-like color scheme, I believe. It is also quite simplistic in its design and is something you can make on your own very easily.

    THE NAVY BLUE PORCH SWING

    More details at yellowbrickhome.com

    6. The Brown Slanted Porch Swing

    Ah, brown! A color that blends into anything and everything seamlessly. This swing has a very earthy appeal and I like its subtle yet accentuated design of it. It is something I’d love both on the porch and indoors, and like many porch swings on this list, it is incredibly simple to make.

    THE BROWN SLANTED PORCH SWING plan

    More details at ana-white.com

    7. The Headboard Porch Swing

    Turning a headboard into a porch swing is an idea that does not strike someone out of the blue, yet it is something that somehow makes perfect sense. Not only is a headboard elaborate in its design and when added to your swing makes it stand out, but it also offers really good back support. Again, it isn’t too tough to do it.

    THE HEADBOARD PORCH SWING

    More details at therusticpig.com

    8. The Carved Heart Porch Swing

    I want this swing on my porch. It is beautiful in every way possible. I love the curve at the lower end of the seating area and the shape of the armrests. I like the empty spaces on them and the heart on the backrest. It is neat and looks very aesthetically pleasing. Even though it is traditional, it has a few modern elements that blend well with the other style.

    THE CARVED HEART PORCH SWING plan

    More details at instructables.com

    9. The Lover’s Porch Swing

    A very minute variation of the other porch swing, this cedar porch swing has an added element of couple names engraved on either side of the heart.

    THE LOVER’S PORCH SWING

    More details at wilkerdos.com

    10. The Perfect Commune Porch Swing

    By far the prettiest and most outlandishly innovative porch swing idea you can come across, this porch swing setup is complemented by the beams, the roofing, and a fire pit in the center bringing an exotic and mystical charm to the swing setup. You can very easily experiment with the swings regarding their shapes. You can also add curtains, blinds, cushions, and pillows to the mix and color the setup vibrantly.

    THE PERFECT COMMUNE PORCH SWING

    More details at instructables.com

    11. The Small And Adorable Porch Swing

    This is an adorable little porch swing that can fit in almost any corner. It looks like a lego piece designed by Ikea but you can make it on your own following easy steps.

     THE SMALL AND ADORABLE PORCH SWING

    More details at jayscustomcreations.com

    12. The High-Back Carved Porch Swing

    I need a good lumbar support system in my swing. Dealing with back issues, I need something to completely lean on and a porch swing with a high backrest is most welcome. I also like the rustic dual color scheme and the unique design on the back.

    THE HIGH-BACK CARVED PORCH SWING

    More details at buildeazy.com

    13. The Tall Folk Porch Swing

    This particular porch swing is great for those who are tall. Moreover, it has a very neat design with the wooden strips being narrow and the same element replicated for the armrests.

    THE TALL FOLK PORCH SWING

    More details at instructables.com

    14. The Old-fashioned Porch Swing

    This neat little porch swing has a lovely backrest and armrests, carved in a more old-fashioned way. It feels right at home in your backyard. It is a lovely option to sit and swing on during the evening and enjoy the mild breeze.

    THE OLD-FASHIONED PORCH SWING

    More details at portercalls.com

    15. The Simple Two Seater Porch Swing

    A very high backrest makes this porch swing a good purchase. Its seating area is compact and gives you a comfortable posture. But, it doesn’t look like something you can make on your own right away if you’re doing it for the first time.

    THE SIMPLE TWO SEATER PORCH SWING

    More details at minwax.ca

    16. The Placid Porch Swing

    Nothing too elaborate and quite simple to make actually, this swing has been hung from a tree and instantly makes you remember old tree swings. I like the simplicity and the ease of making.

    THE PLACID PORCH SWING

    More details at thatsmyletter.blogspot.com

    17. The 100 Dollar Swing

    This porch swing has a beautiful backrest with a neat curvature and the marble white finish looks perfect for your porch. And you know what else is great about this? You can make it for under $100!

    THE 100 DOLLAR SWING plan

    More details at instructables.com

    18. The Retractable Cup Holder Porch Swing

    This particular swing comes with something that is more of a bonus than a standard, but a bonus you really do wish you had sometimes. We don’t just sit on a swing and swing along with it all the time. We might like to have something to drink while doing so. Maybe a soda, a glass of tea, or perhaps a cup of coffee. With this swing, you don’t have to hold it all the time. With a retractable cup holder, this swing just solved your problem.

    THE RETRACTABLE CUP HOLDER PORCH SWING

    More details at myoutdoorplans.com

    19. The Adirondack Porch Swing

    This lovely swing is made in the vein of Adirondack chairs, which provide maximum comfort and look stylish while doing so. This swing has subtly accentuated arms that go well with the overall design. Wouldn’t you love to have it?

    THE ADIRONDACK PORCH SWING

    More details at getredwood.com

    20. The Comfy High Back Porch Swing

    I always prefer high backrests. It can get a little disorienting for me to swing when my upper back and especially my neck have no support for resting. I am one of those paranoid people who fear injuries, so I like the insurance a full backswing provides. It is also better for me to just rest my head and fall into a slumber sometimes. If you want the same, then you should go ahead and build this one.

    THE COMFY HIGH BACK PORCH SWING

    More details at familyhandyman.com

    21. The Garden Porch Swing

    I love gardens. I love their sweet smell and the gentle wafts of air that brush my face and hair. I would love nothing more than rock gently in a swing in the breeze. This simple yet lovely swing is something I’d install in my garden for doing so.

    THE GARDEN PORCH SWING

    More details at diynetwork.com

    22. The A-Frame Porch Swing

    I adore elaborate designs. Be it cars, interior decor, sculptures, paintings, or architecture. And this swing? It is an absolute winner in my book. The amazing A-frame is a refreshing change from the same old simple frames I see for swings. It has a sense of style that appeals to me. Moreover, the swing itself has a two-toned color scheme with a very accentuated border design with beautiful carvings on it. If you think you want this in your home, then you can make this porch swing on your own.

    THE A-FRAME PORCH SWING plans

    More details at motherearthnews.com

    23. The Alaskan Round Logs Porch Swing

    Alaska is a sweet place to be. It is a perfect getaway for any adventurer and romantic. The breathtaking landscape never fails to mesmerize. But, the way people in Alaska use logs to make just about anything fascinates me even more. And an Alaskan-styled porch swing is right up my alley. The lovely rounded logs for arms and for the borders are just so very appealing. And you can make it from scratch!

    THE ALASKAN ROUND LOGS PORCH SWING

    More details at diynetwork.com

    24. The Dandelion High-Back Porch Swing

    This porch swings not only fulfills my high-back criterion, it also has a lovely dandelion color that is so striking to look at. I would love to make this swing and I guess you would too. The plan for making this swing has everything you would need while building it.

    THE DANDELION HIGH-BACK PORCH SWING

    More details at sunset.com

    25. The Redwood Porch Swing

    Redwood is gorgeous and if you want to make a porch swing out of it, you should definitely go for this particular design. It is beautiful and will be a favorite of any visitors.

    THE REDWOOD PORCH SWING

    More details at myoutdoorplans.com

    26. The Build Eazy Porch Swing

    It is not too difficult to make this porch swing. You can build it even if it is your first time making furniture. What helps is the guide gives you detailed instructions on how to make it.

     THE BUILD EAZY PORCH SWING

    More details at buildeazy.com

    27. The Elegant Skil Porch Swing

    If you want to go with a longer and smaller yet high back porch swing design, this one is for you. I love the mud red color of this swing and it definitely stands out, complemented by the curved edges. You can make it too with the detailed list of plans.

    THE ELEGANT SKIL PORCH SWING

    More details at skiltools.com

    28. The Pallet Swing

    I love pallets. I love making things out of them and the one thing they are most useful for is the porch swing. The great thing about pallets is that they are extremely cheap to buy, which is why making a porch swing out of pallets is as cheap as $30.

    THE PALLET SWING

    29. The Royal White Porch Swing

    I am in love with this porch swing. Not only does the gorgeous white appeal to me and the comfortable cushions relax me, but the rope work with the golden chains for this swing is also a piece of art and I want this swing in my house. Wouldn’t you too?

    HE ROYAL WHITE PORCH SWING

    Source Unknown

    30. The Placid Porch Swing

    This porch swing is tailor-made for ultimate relaxation. It is essentially a long, single-person swinging bed with a beautiful combination of blue and green. It’s something I’d definitely love to have in my home.

    THE PLACID PORCH SWING

    Source Unknown

    So, which porch swing plans appealed to you the most? Would you like to come up with a new design inspired by these? Let me know your ideas!

    Related Articles

    30 Portable Chicken Coop Plans You Can Easily Move

    Barndominium 101 | Floor Plans, Pricing Guide & Pictures

    57 DIY Chicken Coop Plans in Easy to Build Tutorials – 100% FREE

    47 Free DIY Swing Set Plans for a Happy Playing Area in Your Backyard

    49 FREE DIY Router Table Plans For an Epic Home Workshop

    43 DIY Duck Houses Plans and Duck Coop Plans to Build Now

    57 DIY Bookshelf Plans and Ideas For Healthy Home Libraries

    163 Free DIY Pole Barn Plans and Designs That You Can Build Easily

    37 Free DIY Tiny House Plans for a Happy & Peaceful Life In Nature

    27 Insanely Cool DIY Rocket Stove Plans for Cooking With Wood

    39 FREE DIY Bat House Plans to Shelter the Natural Pest Control

    19 Adorable Free Cat Tower Plans For Your Furry Friend

    23 Awesome Free Deer Stand Plans You Can Start Right Now

    13 Epic Free Rabbit Hutch Plans You Can Download & Build Today

    101 Simple Free DIY Coffee Table Plans

    53 of the Best GreenHouse Plants for Happy Gardeners and Gardens

    5 Best Weed Barriers and Landscape Fabric for Happy Gardeners

    7 Best Greenhouse Plastic | Buyer's Guide and Reviews

    13 Best Weed Eaters

    13 Best Greenhouse Kits

    Testing your pool is a necessary step to ensure that it remains clean and usable all year round. For this, you can either use a pool test kit, which is more accurate, or pool test strips, which are more affordable and convenient. 

    No matter how much you clean your pool, it can still be full of unwanted chemicals, which can disrupt the balance of the water and make the pool unusable. That’s why it’s important to test your pool water regularly with a pool test kit or strip, which will help you keep it in the right condition.

    But what should you choose between a pool test kit and a strip? Dive in to know!

    Liquid Test Kits

    Liquid Test Kits. Strips for pool test.

    For the unversed, liquid test kits are essentially testing liquids that are quite popular among professionals and homeowners alike. But what makes them so sought-after? To help answer that, we’ve listed its primary advantages. 

    Advantages Of Liquid Test Kits

    1.  Accuracy 

    These liquid test kits use a method called titration to test the chemical markers in your pool water. And the efficacy of this process makes liquid kits more accurate than their strip counterparts. 

    However, the accuracy further depends on the type of liquid test you use. Some examples of these types are OTO, DPD, and FAS - DPD. 

    The tester should add a titrant (testing liquid) to a sample of the pool’s water, observe the change of color, and compare it to the color chart to determine the pH balance or combined chlorine level.

    A test strip is often called a “guess strip” due to their inaccuracy and how easily they can be compromised when in contact with humidity. That’s why liquid pool kits are worth their price as they help the user receive precise results.

    2. Parameters 

    Liquid tests allow you to test different parameters, as you can perform various tests with these kits to get a clearer picture about the water chemistry of your pool. While OTO testing kits can be used to determine pH and chlorine levels, DPD kits can measure free chlorine and total chlorine levels.

    This is in contrast to test strips, which cannot perform more extensive tests like acid demand demands. They are also ineffective when it comes to testing the calcium hardness in your swimming pool water. Considering how important calcium hardness testing is for a pool, test kits should be the go-to choice in such cases. 

    3. Longevity 

    If you purchase a liquid test kit, you will also get a set of reagents necessary for testing the water chemistry of the pool. And these liquid reagents last for a couple of years until they are considered expired or unreliable. 

    Besides, the kit container itself can last for years if you store it in proper conditions as mentioned on the package. Only the reagents will need to be replaced if they are expired or exhausted.

    Pool test strips, however, only last a year at the most maximum. Once expired, they are considered unreliable and should be replaced immediately if you want to continue testing the swimming pool water.

    4. Quality 

    The liquid kit testing method is used by a lot of pool professionals and health departments, as it offers high-quality results. If you are a pool professional, then liquid testing is the most ideal option for you. Or if you’re someone who is worried about what’s in your pool water and need the test results to be accurate, this kit will do the job efficiently. 

    Disadvantages Of Liquid Test Kits 

    As efficient as they are, they do come with their own share of disadvantages, which include:

    1. Cost 

    Liquid pool tests, though quite accurate, are extremely expensive. So, if you plan on testing pool water within a budget, this method might not be the one for you. Besides, you may need to purchase the reagents every 12 or every 24 months depending on the testing frequency. They can can be extremely expensive if you test the pool occasionally, like the pool season 

    Test strips, on the other hand, are pretty cheap, more so if you purchase them in bulk.

    2. Time-Consuming 

    Considering it is a thorough testing process, liquid tests can take pretty long to be done with. Preparation alone can take up half the time that you have allotted for testing your pool water. After that, taking a good pool water sample, cleaning the container and identifying which reagent to use will take up quite an amount of time. 

    Once you have everything in place, you have to also ensure the right number of drops are added. If you’re testing more than one parameter, you would have to go through this entire process for each test. All in all, liquid testing kits can be quite time-consuming.

    3. Complicated Usage

    Liquid tests can be quite complicated to use, especially for a beginner. Although they may seem quite easy when it comes to their usage, they can be quite tricky to get the hang when reagents are introduced. 

    If you fail using the right amount of drops of water required for the test, it will make the result invalid. This will mean you will have to start over and make sure you get the number of drops right, which can be hard to get right on the first try.You may mess up a couple of times, which can be quite frustrating.

    Pool Test Strips

    Pool Test Strips

    Test strips are very common when it comes to pool water testing and are easily available at your local pool store. They have plenty of advantages, and we’ll be taking a look at a few.

    Advantages Of Test Strips

    1.  Affordability 

    Test strips or extremely cheaper, especially when compared to liquid tests. As such, they are the perfect choice for beginner pool owners or people who don’t really need to test their pool very often.

    2. Faster Use

    Using test strips is not as complicated as using a pool test kit. All you have to do is take a step from the bottle, dip it into your pool water, and lay it on a flat surface till it shows the result. This process may take you a minute at the most. Liquid tests, on the other hand, will take you much longer to complete.

    If you would like to test your pool’s water chemistry without spending the whole day doing so, test strips are an ideal choice for you. This is also another reason why they are extremely popular among beginners or new pool owners.

    3. Easy Usage 

    Test strips do not need any extra items to help it function to test the pool water accurately. You can just take one from the bottle and dip it into your pool water. All you have to do is give the strip a few seconds and you have your result in front of you. 

    Since the steps are a lot easier, it prevents the possibility of human error. With liquid tests, the same cannot be said. They are much more prone to errors and would need you to redo the test when you make said error. 

    Disadvantages Of Test Strips 

    As perfect as they sound, they have their fair share of disadvantages as well. Here are a few. 

    1. Inaccurate 

    Test strips, though very easy to use, can be quite inaccurate when it comes to results. They can even produce varying results from one strip to the next one. 

    Moreover, test strips can be influenced by the humidity present in the air. Moreover, it can be difficult to interpret the color on the strip even with the color chart provided. This is because the colors on the strip can change with time. 

    Even though these test strips are quite cheap and easily available, many pool professionals argue that the money spent would be pointless as the tests come out inaccurate. 

    2. Viability 

    Liquid tests allow you to perform various kinds of tests on your pool to help measure the pH scale as well as the free and total chlorine levels. Test strips, on the other hand, do not offer you this feature. They are pretty restricted when it comes to their testing capabilities. For instance, test strips cannot perform acid demand tests, or measure the total hardness of the water.

    Some pool owners need these tests to be done and cannot afford to overlook them. In events like these, test strips are not of much use or may end up not giving the user satisfactory results. Now, you may purchase different test strips meant for different tests. However, it can be quite expensive to purchase test strips for conducting just one test. 

    3. Lack Of Longevity 

    One thing a liquid test kit can guarantee you is longevity. Purchasing one test kit can last you anywhere from a year to two. The only thing that may need constant replacing would be the reagents of the liquid test kits. 

    Test strips, however, generally last for only up to a year at the most. Once they are expired, you cannot rely on them to give accurate results. Hence, the whole pack should be replaced. This ends up overruling their feature of being affordable and you will end up spending every year for a brand new strip test kit. And this isn’t something many pool owners will be ready to do. 

    How To Test Salt Water Pools?

    As surprising as it may seem, not all pool water has chlorine in them. Some of them contain other substances like salt, and these saltwater pools will need to be tested as well. For this, you can find a dedicated pool test kit for saltwater pools, that typically come in a pack of 40.

    Depending on the conditions of the pool, you may have to test your saltwater pool at least once or twice a week. This will help you take the right steps for pool maintenance to keep it in the optimal condition. 

    If you’re someone who uses their pool quite frequently, you must make sure that your pool water is in good condition. And testing kits will be of great help in maintaining the right pool chemistry so that there are no health hazards.

    Also, keep in mind that too many chemicals or the wrong pH level can damage the pool material, which may then take up thousands of dollars in repairs.

    How To Use Pool Test Kits? 

    Now, you may be wondering “how to use pool test kits?” Although the exact testing process will be mentioned on the package, we will quickly walk you through the general steps to give you an idea. 

    • First, detach the tube caps. Make sure you rinse the tubes before use 
    • Proceed to fill the tube with water from the pool till the level mentioned on the tube 
    • Make sure to take water from the end of the pool that is elbow-deep 
    • You can now proceed to drop the provided reagents in the water. 
    • Put on the tube cap and shake the solution gently to mix 
    • Once you get a color, compare it with the color chart that is provided with the kit 

    Pool Test Kits Vs Strips Final Words

    Pool Test Kits Vs Strips Final Words 

    If you’ve recently built a pool for the first time, test strips will be a better option. They are convenient and they give you results within seconds. Besides, they are easy on the pockets so budget wouldn’t be an issue. 

    However, if you are an experienced pool owner and would like something that is a little more accurate, liquid pool water testing is the way to go. These testing options can be used to test different parameters of your pool. They can be considered a good investment as they last much longer than test strips and may also do away with the need for professional testing.

    On that note, we’ve reached the end of today’s guide. Keep a watch on this space for more such reads. 

    Till we meet again!

    If you have a saltwater pool, you need to monitor its salinity with pool test kits. From our testing, we found the AquaChek Salt Test Strip titrators to be the best overall. Likewise, the Easytest saltwater pool test strips and the Taylor Technologies K-2006-SALT test kit are viable options too. 

    A saltwater pool is an excellent alternative to conventional chlorinated pools. Compared to the latter, it is much safer on the skin. But even then, you will need to test its water chemistry with suitable pool test kits before diving in. This will help you maintain the correct salinity at all times and monitor the presence of other chemicals. However, selecting the right pool test kit can be a headache. So, we did the hard work and reviewed some of the best options available today. Dive in! 

    Listed below are the best pool test kits for saltwater pools:

    • AquaChek Salt Test Strip Titrators: The AquaChek strip testing kit delivers remarkable precision, recognizing sodium chloride levels from 400 to 7,000 ppm. It falls short on strip quantity, offering only 10 strips per unit.
    • Easytest Saltwater Pool Test Strips: Easytest saltwater pool test strips are distinguished by their extensive detection range (0 to 8,000 ppm) and color-coded testing. Its superior count of 25 strips per unit gives it an edge over the AquaCheck. It has a low shelf life post-opening.
    • Taylor Technologies K-2006-SALT Test Kit: The Taylor Technologies test kit, unlike the Easytest Strips, covers a broad spectrum of attributes, including chlorine balance, calcium hardness, total alkalinity, and pH level. Its complex process might prove a bit challenging for beginners.
    • Trudirection Salt Water Test Strips: A pool testing solution known for an extended shelf life of 24 months. It has a limited detection range compared to Taylor's test kit.
    • SuperCheck Salt Test Strips: The SuperCheck salt test strips offer accurate sodium chloride detection in various chloride-based salt solutions. The meager 10 strips per bottle, compared to the generous 25 strips offered by Easytest, restricts its comparative advantage.

    1. AquaChek Salt Test Strip Titrators - Best for Accuracy & Convenience

    When it comes to pool and spa testing Kits, AquaChek is a pretty reliable brand. You can find test strips, as well as digital test kits, to ascertain the water quality of your pool. But the saltwater testing strips made by AquaChek are of particular repute, which is why we have reviewed the AquaChek salt test strip titrators here.

    The salt test strips are made with approved medical industry technology, due to which they give highly accurate results. These strips measure the exact level of sodium chloride salt present in the water of your pool. In that context, the lowest range of detection is 400 ppm, and the highest concentration of salt that can be measured is 7,000 ppm.

    With these strips, there is no need to measure the drops of reagent, which reduces the margin of error significantly. The process of measurement is straightforward - all you need to do is dip the strip in the water for a few seconds and pull it out. After that, you can consult the water chemistry guide provided with it to determine how much salt there is. The only issue is that you get just ten strips with the kit, which isn’t sufficient enough.

    But overall, it is ideal for pools with salt generator systems since it allows you to adjust the salt generator to maintain the correct amount of chlorine. You can also input the results into the free mobile app to get personalized water treatment plans for your pool.

    Type: Strip testing kit | Packaging includes: A bottle with 10 testing strips, pool chemistry insert with instructions | Tests for: Sodium chloride concentration

    2. Easytest Saltwater Pool Test Strips - Best Range of Detection

    Here we have reviewed the saltwater pool test strips manufactured by Easytest. The brand makes water testing strips for different fixtures, such as swimming pools, spas, hot tubs, and even aquariums. 

    On that note, this particular product has been specifically designed for testing the sodium chloride content in saltwater pools. Each unit contains 25 testing strips, and each of these strips is made from high-quality PET paper that produces fast and accurate results.

    The strips have a fairly wide range of detection too, which makes them even more effective. From the lowest point of 0 ppm, they can efficiently detect sodium chloride concentrations of up to 8,000 ppm.

    In order to measure the salt content of your pool water, all you need to do is dip the testing portion of the strip in the water for a second. Then, pull it out of the water and hold it horizontally for approximately 5 seconds. Once the immersed portion of the strip changes color, you will have to compare it against the color chart. 

    As you can see, the process is quite simple, which makes it convenient to use. The color-coded testing means that there are no additional calculations necessary. Besides, you can use these strips to test the water of a regular swimming pool, spa, or hot tub as well, which offers good flexibility. Just make sure to use the strips as soon as they are opened for accurate results since they have a low shelf life.

    Type: Strip testing kit | Packaging includes: A bottle with 25 testing strips | Tests for: Sodium chloride concentration

    3. Taylor Technologies K-2006-SALT Test Kit - Best Complete Test Kit

    Taylor Technologies is one of the leading names in the domain of water testing solutions. The brand has a portfolio of over 600 test-kit configurations, ranging from dry and wet chemistry systems to microprocessor-based testing instruments. Because of this reason, we have included the K-2006-SALT testing kit on our list.

    This particular option is a complete test kit for your swimming pool that includes different components. Each of these components tests a particular attribute of the pool water, which gives you a clear idea of your pool’s chemical composition.

    Apart from the salinity and chlorine balance, you can check the calcium hardness, total alkalinity, pH level, and cyanuric acid levels of the water. Most of them are drop test kits, which give fairly accurate results. 

    All the test bottles have a capacity of 0.75 ounces and come packaged in a box, which makes them convenient to use. And since it is a complete kit, you can use it for regular and saltwater pools, spas, hot tubs, and so on. 

    On that note, it tests for the chloride present as a salt, as well as free chlorine. That makes it a suitable option for saltwater pools with salt generator systems. But the test process can be a bit complicated for first-timers so make sure you follow the instructions carefully.

    Type: Drop testing kit | Packaging includes: 0.75 oz testing bottles, testing guide, sample tubes | Tests for: Sodium chloride concentrations, free and combined chloride ions, cyanuric acid content, total alkalinity, pH with acid/base demand, calcium hardness

    4. Trudirection Salt Water Test Strips - Best Shelf Life

    Unless you are a highly knowledgeable and long-time pool owner, you might not have heard about the Trudirection brand since it is a bit obscure. However, it manufactures top-notch pool testing solutions that are on par with the products made by many renowned brands.

    One such solution is the Trudirection salt water test strips, which we have reviewed here. These strips can precisely detect the sodium chloride salt concentration in your pool within the range of 1,500 to 5,000 ppm. The detection range is a bit limited compared to some of the other testing kits on our list.

    But the testing system is relatively easy since you need to simply immerse the strip in the water for a second and then hold it in the air for 5 seconds. Its color will change, which can then be compared to the color chart provided on the bottle. 

    These strips are made from premium quality fiber paper, which ensures that the results you get are accurate and reliable. Moreover, the strips have a non-mixing color block, which prevents the color in the test portion from bleeding throughout the strip.

    Each unit contains 25 testing strips packaged into a well-sealed bottle. Because of that, the strips have an extended shelf life of 24 months. Thus, you don’t need to worry about the strips degrading over time. 

    Type: Strip testing kit | Packaging includes: A bottle with 25 testing strips | Tests for: Chloride ion content

    5. SuperCheck Salt Test Strips - Best Packaged Test Strips

    SuperCheck is a brand that manufactures water testing strips for pools, spas, and hot tubs. Its focus on quality has made it one of the most reliable brands in this domain. And the SuperCheck salt test strips act as a testament to this fact since the kit offers the quality and reliability that this brand is known for.

    The strips are manufactured using medical industry technology and the best quality PET paper. They have a decent range of detection, starting from the lowest level of 0 ppm and going up to a maximum of 6,000 ppm. 

    These strips can accurately measure the chloride ion concentration in most chloride-based salt solutions, such as sodium chloride, calcium chloride, potassium chloride, and others. As such, the kit can help in calibrating saltwater chlorine generators in swimming pools. 

    The testing process is relatively simple and takes around 4 minutes to complete. You need to take a little bit of the pool water in a container and place the strip in it. The color level will gradually rise, and once the test is done, you can compare it with the chart provided on the bottle.

    To enhance the reliability of the test, the colors on the strip are made in a way that they don’t bleed through the strip. Furthermore, the strips packaged inside the bottle come with an extended shelf life. They are sealed inside two individual packages, which protects the strips from getting damaged. 

    In addition to that, there is an individually packed descant for moisture protection. The only downside is that you get just ten strips in the package.

    Type: Strip testing kit | Packaging includes: A bottle with 10 testing strips | Tests for: Chloride ion content

    6. Hofun Pool Salt Tester - Best Digital Test Strip

    Hofun is a brand that specializes in making digital pool test kits. When it comes to user convenience, digital testing kits always have an innate advantage over conventional testing methods. And suffice to say, you get the same advantages with this pool salt tester.

    To use it, all you need to do is turn the meter on and select the “salinity” function. Then you can dip it into your pool, and the digital display on the side will tell you the salt levels accurately. You won’t need to do any manual calculations, as all the details will be shown on the electronic display.

    There are other functions present on this 5-in-1 testing meter, which allows you to test other water properties. Besides salinity, you can conduct pH tests, measure the water temperature, check the electrical conductivity (EC), and determine the total dissolved solids (TDS) present in the water. In short, it gives the digital tester a good idea about the water’s chemical levels and properties, which helps greatly with pool maintenance.

    This digital pool test kit has multiple uses in addition to testing saltwater pools. In other words, you can use it to test the water quality of hot tubs, aquariums, and even seawater. So, it offers a lot more versatility than a standard pool test kit. Likewise, you’d have to spend a little more when purchasing this product.

    Type: Digital testing kit | Packaging includes: A digital test meter, pH calibration powder, user manual | Tests for: Salinity, TDS, pH, EC, temperature

    What is the Best Pool Test Kit for Saltwater Pools?

    If you're on the lookout for the best pool test kit for saltwater pools, listed below is a table that compares the type, what the packaging includes, and the specific elements or properties each kit tests for.

    Product Type Packaging Includes Tests for
    AquaChek Salt Test Strip Titrators Strip testing kit A bottle with 10 testing strips, pool chemistry insert with instructions Sodium chloride concentration
    Easytest Saltwater Pool Test Strips Strip testing kit A bottle with 25 testing strips Sodium chloride concentration
    Taylor Technologies K-2006-SALT Test Kit Drop testing kit 0.75 oz testing bottles, testing guide, sample tubes Sodium chloride concentrations, free and combined chloride ions, cyanuric acid content, total alkalinity, pH with acid/base demand, calcium hardness
    Trudirection Salt Water Test Strips Strip testing kit A bottle with 25 testing strips Chloride ion content
    SuperCheck Salt Test Strips Strip testing kit A bottle with 10 testing strips Chloride ion content
    Hofun Pool Salt Tester Digital testing kit A digital test meter, pH calibration powder, user manual Salinity, TDS, pH, EC, temperature

    Buying Guide for the Best Pool Test Kits for Saltwater Pools

    We know that buying the best pool test kit is not as easy as it sounds. You need to buy a test kit that meets your requirements, or else you’ll just be wasting money. Keeping that in mind, here are some important factors to consider before buying a saltwater pool test kit.

    1. Type

    One of the most important things to check is the type of test kit. Many people get confused about the different types of pool test kits available today. And one of the most common ones is the confusion regarding pool test kits vs strips.

    Contrary to what you might know, a pool test strip is not the same as a test kit. The strips are one of the sub-types of pool testing kits. Apart from strips, there are other types of pool test kits available, such as drop test bottles and digital test meters.

    Pool water test strips are easy enough to use, but they cannot be used to test for multiple water properties. For instance, if you buy a saltwater testing strip, you can only test the amount of salt present in the water and nothing else.

    Drop test kits, on the other hand, are much more versatile. Also known as liquid test kits, they require you to add the liquid reagents dropwise in a testing bottle. Such tests are a bit complicated, but they yield highly precise results in most cases. And you can conduct drop tests for different water properties, such as hardness, alkalinity, salinity, and so on.

    Lastly, you have digital test meters, which are both versatile and easy to use. However, they are much more expensive than the previous two types, which can be a deterrent.

    2. Use Case

    Another key factor that you need to keep in mind is the use case of the test kits. If you intend to use it only for testing the salinity of your saltwater swimming pool, then you can just buy a kit that tests for saltwater or chloride ions. 

    But if you want to measure other properties, such as the water temperature and pH, then you will need to buy a kit that can perform those tests.

    Similarly, to test the water of your hot tub or aquarium, you need to buy a compatible kit. If you don’t use a suitable kit, you might not get the desired results from the test.

    3. Test Time

    When it comes to saltwater pool test kits, you would want to get an option that gives you quick results. Besides being convenient, that will allow you to make timely adjustments to the filtration systems and chlorine generators of the pool. 

    If you buy a kit that takes a long time to produce results, you won’t be able to make these adjustments on time. And if it takes too long, the water quality may change slightly from when you started the test, which will make the results unreliable.

    4. Range and Accuracy

    In order to maintain a saltwater pool’s chemistry, you need to make sure that the test kit has good accuracy and range. An accurate kit will give you a clear idea about the water quality, which will help with pool maintenance. Likewise, a high testing range will allow you to detect a wide range of salt concentrations. 

    Salt levels are mostly measured in parts per million (ppm), but some kits have scales in parts per thousand (ppt). The former unit is used for high-accuracy measurements, while the latter is used mostly in high-range test kits.

    5. Price

    When buying a salt test kit, the price is obviously a crucial factor to consider. You should always look for a kit that is reasonably priced to help you stay within budget. That said, most saltwater test kits come at fairly low prices unless you are going for complete test kits or digital testing meters.

    Is it hard to use a pool test kit for saltwater pools?

    No, it's not typically hard to use a pool test kit for saltwater pools. Kits provide instructions for water sample collection, reagent application, and results interpretation. The process involves using provided chemicals or test strips and comparing the color change to a chart to determine chemical levels. Always follow the instructions offered with the kit.

    How accurate are pool test kits for saltwater pools?

    How accurate a pool test kit is for saltwater pools depends on the kit's quality, correct usage, and test conditions. Reliable results are typically given by high-quality kits used properly and within their expiration date. Factors like temperature, humidity, and kit storage can affect accuracy. For the most accurate results, follow the manufacturer's instructions.

    How often should I test my saltwater pool?

    You should test your saltwater pool at least once a week. During periods of heavy usage or after significant weather events, more frequent testing may be required to maintain optimal water balance. Always follow the manufacturer's guidelines for best results.

    Does temperature affect the testing of saltwater pools?

    Yes, temperature can affect the testing of saltwater pools. Both water temperature and ambient temperature can impact chemical reactions in the test, potentially altering the results. It's recommended to follow the test kit's guidelines to ensure accuracy.

    How long can a pool test kit for saltwater pools last?

    A pool test kit for saltwater pools can typically last one to two years, depending on the frequency of use. Keep in mind that the shelf-life of the reagents can decrease over time or due to improper storage, affecting the kit's accuracy. Always check the kit's expiration date to ensure reliable results.

    Can I use my saltwater pool test kit for freshwater pools?

    Yes, you can use a saltwater pool test kit for freshwater pools to measure common parameters like pH and chlorine. That being said, it won't measure freshwater-specific elements like calcium hardness. Always ensure the testing kit matches the requirements of the water being tested

    There you have it - our list of the top test kits for saltwater pools. We hope that you have been able to come to a decision about which one to get by now.

    Before we wrap up, allow us to mention our personal favorites from the list. The AquaChek salt test strip titrators are one of our top recommendations, owing to their high levels of accuracy and ease of use.

    Although, if you want an option that has a higher range, then you can go for the Easytest saltwater pool test strips. And if you want a complete pool testing kit, then the Taylor Technologies K-2006-SALT test kit should be your pick.

    Glues are an essential ingredient to the recipe for perfect DIY projects.

    And so, if you’ve been on the lookout for glue for all your quick fixes and DIY crafts, polyurethane glue is the perfect choice without burning a hole in your pocket. As such, crafters love polyurethane glue for its unique formula.

    Crafters love polyurethane glues for their versatility and durability. From fixing your wooden cabinets of the living room to mending the fences of your backyard, polyurethane glues work exceptionally well in bonding anything and everything.

    Due to the increasing popularity of polyurethane glues, we decided to give it a shot. And so, having used it for a few months, we decided to pen down this guide just for you. Plus, to make things easy-breezy, we’ve also added a buyer’s guide to help you even further. 

    Without any further ado, let’s dive straight into the deets!

    Polyurethane Glue 

    Joinery work. Apply the adhesive on a wooden surface

    Polyurethane is composed of polymer compounds that are close kin of epoxies. Also known as PU Adhesive, Polyurethane glues are an excellent alternative for PVA glues. 

    Having said that, polyurethane glues form exceptionally strong bonds when exposed to moisture. They feature a water-resistant formula, which makes them highly resistant to all elements. As such, they are ideal for outdoor applications. 

    What we absolutely love about polyurethane glues is their versatility. Unlike wood glues, you can apply this to almost anything you want. From wood, metal to ceramics and foam, you can use polyurethane to create the toughest bonds. For the last 20 years, because of its compatibility with a variety of materials, polyurethane glue has become the go-to glue for contractors. 

    Not only are these glues shrink-free, but are also sandable and paintable. This glue is perfect for filling challenging cracks and gaps as its formula perfectly wicks in the surfaces to create the toughest bonds that will last for years to come. 

    As such, these glues are pretty user-friendly. Much like cyanoacrylates, polyurethane glue is cured by moisture. You just need to dampen the surface slightly before applying the glue to ensure efficient bonding. 

    Moreover, polyurethane glues are available in two varieties, one-part and two-part. The one-part polyurethane adhesive is ready to use as everything is mixed together. Meanwhile, the two-part adhesive requires mixing the formula in precise quantities. 

    Having said that, the one-part polyurethane is perfect for beginners, DIYers, and crafters, while the two-part one is ideal if you’re a constructor or a professional. 

    Also, if you notice a light-colored foam appearing at the glue line; don’t fret, as you can easily scrape it away after the glue dries. All in all, these glues are perfect for all the DIYers, crafters, enthusiasts, and even novices. 

    Features Of Polyurethane Glue

    By now, you have a brief idea of what polyurethane glues are. So now, let us hop on to features that make polyurethane glues worth considering. 

    1. High Versatility

    Polyurethane glues are crafter’s and professional’s favorite because of their high versatility. As such, their unique formula is formulated to get along with a variety of materials. Whether you’ve accidentally dropped a porcelain bowl or somebody broke a wooden stool, polyurethane glue will perfectly mend whatever you throw at it. 

    Not only is it compatible with ceramics and wood, but also versatile enough to fix metals, rubber, wood, and even plastics. Besides, what we particularly love about polyurethane glues is their custom formulations. As such, you can customize them to meet different requirements. 

    1. Extremely Flexible

    When it comes to glues, their flexible nature is of utmost importance. Polyurethane glues are perfect for application on those surfaces or areas which demand flexibility because once cured, they become highly flexible. Therefore, they can withstand thumps and vibrations efficiently. 

    And so, if you’re looking for glues to bond two dissimilar materials, polyurethane glues are an excellent choice because of their high flexibility. 

    1. Incredibly Strong Adhesion

    Whether you have to assemble your DIY project or mend minor cracks and gaps in the furniture, a strong adhesive is the need of the hour. And, an appealing aspect of this glue is its adhesive strength. Unlike other glues, polyurethane glues form a tough bond even before the drying and curing of the glue. 

    Not only that, but it also doesn’t require clamping, thanks to its initial bond. As such, manufacturing processes are made easy-breezy. As such, these robust and durable bonds make polyurethane glues perfectly for challenging applications. Furthermore, it also acts as a sealant to seal porous surfaces excellently. 

    1. Resistant To Elements

    If you have to fix the metal gates or the benches of the backyard, you need glues with excellent resistance. That being said, polyurethane glues are not only great for indoor purposes but also excellent for outdoor uses because of their excellent resistant power. 

    You can use this to mend whatever surface you want. And because they feature a waterproof formula, you can repair all the outdoor surfaces without worrying about the elements damaging the bonds. 

    Therefore, polyurethane glues are excellent for outdoor applications because of their ability to withstand heavy rains and high temperatures. 

    1. Endless Design Freedom

    Looking for a strong adhesive to bond complex materials? Go for polyurethane glues, as they bond anything and everything effortlessly. Whether you have to bond complex objects or join dissimilar materials, polyurethane glues will perfectly bond whatever you throw at them.

    That’s not all, even manufacturers use these glues for their lightweight applications. Plus, the bonds are seamless and smooth, which is what we absolutely love about glues. As such, they preserve the aesthetic appeal of your objects and surfaces, which is impressive. All in all, they are an excellent option for all your DIY craftworks and projects. 



    Pros

    • Highly durable bonds
    • Quick setting time
    • Resistant to water
    • Compatible with a variety of surfaces
    • Sandable and paintable




    Cons

    • Toxic formula
    • Doesn’t cure properly in the absence of moisture



    Uses Of Polyurethane Glue

    For novices, crafters, and enthusiasts, polyurethane glue is an excellent choice for all DIY crafts and projects because of the incredible adhesive strength it offers. Because it doesn’t require clamping, it is used in construction projects, thanks to its strength. 

    That’s not all, these glues adhere excellently to even porous surfaces, thanks to their waterproof formula. As such, these glues are an excellent choice for all your crafts and projects because of their versatility and flexibility. 

    From wood, metal, fiberglass to masonry, ceramics, carpets, polyurethane glue will bond anything you want. Also, no matter what task you have at hand, the diverse variety of polyurethane glues are there to help you out. 

    That’s not all, they are available in both thick and thin viscosities. As such, the thick ones are perfect for all the large projects as they won’t mess up your surface or projects by running all over them. Moreover, it will also allow the novices to work at their own pace. 

    Meanwhile, the thin viscosity glue will be perfect for bonding minor challenges and cracks that call for immediate repairs. That being said, it is ideal for enthusiasts and professionals who can work at a quick pace. 

    Examples Of Application

    The  excellent adhesion of polyurethane glue makes it perfect for automobiles, as well. Because it is used in the automotive industry to bond a variety of materials, you can use it to quick-fix any damage in your car. 

    Looking for ways to fix the broken windshield? Polyurethane glue has got you covered with its excellent bonding strength. 

    Another appealing aspect of this glue is that it can be used to create MDF boards. Too good to be true, isn’t it? Mix wood dust and saw chips with polyurethane adhesive and create an MDF board for your next DIY project. 

    What’s more, you can use this in place of wood glue because it forms a strong bond and can withstand elements. Plus, you can use this glue to fix broken dishware in your home without worrying about a thing as they are rated food safe. 

    Best Polyurethane Glues

    1. Gorilla Original ‎Polyurethane Glue

    When it comes to polyurethane glues, Gorilla Original Polyurethane Glue is an excellent choice because it is incredibly strong and versatile. Moreover, the waterproof formula makes it ideal for both interior and exterior surfaces. Plus, it is highly versatile and can withstand extreme temperatures. 

    Standout Features:

    • Waterproof formula
    • Expands 3 times to bond to materials
    • Usable on both interior and exterior surfaces

    Why Did We Like It?

    Among all the polyurethane glue available on the market, the Gorilla Original Polyurethane Glue sits atop our list because of its excellent adhesive strength. Its waterproof formula makes it perfect for all minor cracks and fractures. 

    The versatility of this glue is almost endless. From ceramics, wood to glass and concrete, this glue excellently bonds anything and everything. What we loved about this glue is its easy application. Plus, it is sandable, and so you can sand off any extra glue peeking out from the cracks. 

    As such, it will withstand anything nature throws at it. Moreover, this 8-ounce glue is long-lasting and will surely last you for years to come. Plus, you need not worry in case of accidental spillings, as this glue is easy to clean. With a dry cloth or paint thinner, you can easily wipe off the wet glue. 

    Putting it bluntly, the Gorilla Original Polyurethane Glue is a dependable option for all your bonding needs. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    All in all, we loved the Gorilla Original Polyurethane Glue for bonding surfaces because of its incredible strength and versatility. Having said that, this glue takes slightly longer to dry. 

    Although it might be a drawback for those looking for a quick fix, it is an excellent option for those working on large-scale projects. Other than that, this performs exceptionally well. 



    Pros

    • Incredibly tough
    • Able to withstand elements
    • Easy application
    • Cleaning is a breeze




    Cons

    • Takes slightly longer to dry



    1. Loctite Premium Polyurethane Construction Adhesive

    If you’ve been on the lookout for fast curing polyurethane glue, then Loctite 1390595 Premium Polyurethane Construction Adhesive is a perfect choice for you to consider. Moreover, it is environmentally-safe and usable on a variety of surfaces. Plus, it is waterproof and even cures in cold temperatures. 

    Standout Features:

    • High-performance adhesive
    • Curable even in cold temperatures
    • Contains no chlorinated solvents or water

    Why Did We Like It?

    There are a lot of things we loved about this glue; however, the thing that hooked us right was the fact that it is curable in even cold temperatures. That being said, you can use this for sub-floor installation without worrying about a thing. 

    Another appealing aspect of this product is its excellent adhesive strength which makes it compatible with even construction materials. Not only that, but it is highly versatile, as it can be used on multiple surfaces and objects. From cement-based products, ceramics, drywall to concrete, treated wood, and metal, this glue bonds almost everything excellently. 

    That’s not all, this polyurethane adhesive can withstand heavy rains, thanks to its waterproof formula. As such, you can use this to fix the cracks of the fences and gates without any worries. Plus, you can also paint this if you wish to. 

    What’s more, the formula of this glue does not contain any chlorinated solvents or water and is VOC compliant, which is pretty impressive. All in all, it is an excellent option for all your bonding needs. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    The Loctite 1390595 Premium Polyurethane Construction Adhesive is an outstanding option, mainly because of its versatile application. However, unlike the previous product, it is messy to apply. 

    We strongly recommend you use a caulk gun to avoid the mess. Apart from that, it is a good choice for all your bonding needs. 



    Pros

    • Compatible with almost everything
    • Can withstand water
    • Sandable and paintable
    • Offers 3x stronger adhesion




    Cons

    • Messy to apply



    1. Titebond ‎Polyurethane Glue

    Here is another polyurethane glue that you can use on any surface you want. This multi-purpose glue is perfect for all your minor repairs and DIY projects. Its long working time, along with short clamping time, is matchless. Plus, it features a waterproof formula which makes it ideal for outdoor applications. 

    Standout Features:

    • Epoxy-like strength
    • No-run no-drip formula
    • 100% waterproof

    Why Did We Like It?

    If you’re a novice looking for a glue that provides ample working time, then this Titebond Polyurethane Glue is your best bet any day. With its long working hours of 20 minutes, you can work at your own pace without worrying. Plus, its clamp time of 45 minutes is a bonus. 

    Moreover, because this polyurethane formula is waterproof, you can use this to mend exterior surfaces without worrying about nature marring the bond. Not only that, but this glue is compatible with several other surfaces and materials, thanks to its versatile nature. 

    Whether you have to mend broken stools or fix a porcelain bowl, this glue is an excellent choice for all your needs. Also, its epoxy-like strength seals porous surfaces without difficulty. 

    What’s particularly impressive is the spout of this glue which makes application smooth and hassle-free. Plus, you can always sand off the excess glue peeking out from the surface. Lastly, such handy features are coupled with an affordable price tag, making it a go-to option for all professionals, DIYers, and crafters.

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    Although this product does stand out in terms of affordability and versatility, we suggest wearing a pair of gloves while working with this glue. This is because many users have complained about the glue bonding to the skin. Apart from this minor issue, it is an excellent choice for all your DIY projects. 



    Pros

    • Provides long working time
    • Compatible with various surfaces
    • Easy application
    • Easy on pockets




    Cons

    • Bonds skin



    Male carpenter hands using wood glue and timber on a wooden table for handmade furniture. Close up. Hobby for man. Wooden table.

    Polyurethane Glue Buying Guide

    Moving on, we’ve curated a buyer’s guide to help you pick the right polyurethane glues for all your tasks. While having a brief idea about polyurethane glue helps to a great degree, choosing the best polyurethane glue is still a daunting task. 

    Not only is the nature of your task important, but you must also consider certain factors before making a decision. Don’t worry, we’ve gone into the ins and outs and compiled a list of factors that you must keep in mind while buying polyurethane glue. 

    1. Adhesive Strength

    To choose the perfect polyurethane glue for your projects, you need to consider its adhesive strength. And so, the nature of your task is of utmost importance to determine the kind of glue you need. For all your heavy-duty tasks, glues offering incredibly strong adhesion would be an excellent choice. 

    Thus, we strongly recommend you choose only those polyurethane glues that offer excellent adhesion to prevent chipping or flaking. As such, they’ll also create strong and durable bonds that will last for years. 

    1. Viscosity 

    While choosing polyurethane glues, you must also consider their viscosity or consistency along with the adhesive strength. For filling minor gaps and challenging cracks, a thin water-like viscosity glue will be excellent. 

    Meanwhile, if you have to bond large pieces together, a thick viscosity glue would be ideal. The thin viscosity glues are runny, so they aren’t suitable for vertical surfaces, while the thick viscosity glues are perfect for all kinds of surfaces because of their no-run no-drip formula. 

    The bonding process does not give you any second chances, so we strongly recommend you go for thick viscosity glues. 

    1. Curing Time

    Not all polyurethane glues are formulated with a short curing time. And so, you must keep the curing time in mind while buying polyurethane glue. The glues with a long curing time will not be a perfect choice for woodworking professionals or constructors. So, a quick curing glue is what they must opt for. 

    Although this might not be a major factor if you’re a novice who loves experimenting, this certainly is important for professional woodworkers and constructors. 

    1. Ease of Use

    Before you pick polyurethane glue for any DIY crafts and projects, you must consider its user-friendly aspect. Of course, this factor might not be a priority for professionals but is certainly crucial for beginners. 

    That being said, we strongly recommend you go for the glues, which are relatively easy to use. As such, they will give you the freedom to work at your own pace. 

    1. Shelf Life

    Not to forget, shelf life is extremely important. As such, before buying polyurethane glue, you must consider the shelf life of the product. Irrespective of your needs, the glues with a longer shelf life are a better bet any day. 

    Plus, we strongly recommend you go for those featuring air-tight lids to prevent the air from sneaking into the bottle. This will ensure your product lasts long.

    Polyurethane Glue

    Summing It Up

    It’s finally time to wrap up our guide.

    To sum it up, polyurethane glues come with a number of perks. From bonding metals to assembling DIY projects, polyurethane glues are essential for all your bonding needs. Not only that, but they are excellent for all your DIY projects and challenging repairs. 

    That being said, they are one of the best options available on the market. And so, you must make sure to invest in good quality polyurethane glue as it will allow you to carry out all bonding and repairing tasks in a breeze. 

    With that, we shall take your leave. Hopefully, you’ll be able to pick the best polyurethane glue for your tasks. If not, you can always consider the buyer’s guide for making an informed decision. 

    That’s all for today, folks. Adios!

    Related Articles

    11 Best Fabric Glue 

    9 Best UV Light Glue for Amateurs & Professionals

    7 Best Glue for Vinyl 

    11 Best Glue For Metal 

    11 Best Glue For Paper & Paper Mache

    11 Best Permanent Fabric Glues

    4 Best Glue for Silicone

    10 Best Glue for Shoes

    10 Best Ceramic and Porcelain Glue

    11 Best Glue For Glass

    11 Best Glue For Rubber

    11 Best Glue for Polypropylene

    7 Best Glue for MDF

    11 Best Glue For Styrofoam

    How to Remove Gorilla Glue From Skin Safely & Easily

    The Difference Between Epoxy & Super Glue

    9 Best Glue for Metal to Wood

    Types Of Glue | Everything You Need To Know

    10 Best Leather Glue on the Market

    9 Best Exterior Polyurethane | Reviews + Buyer’s Guide

    How Many Coats Of Polyurethane | All You Need to Know

    Polyurethane Glue 101 | All You Need to Know + Buyer’s Guide

    Gorilla Glue vs. Super Glue | Strengths, Weakness + Winner?

    7 Best Glue For Aluminum | Reviews + Guide

    9 Best Glue For Hardwood Floors

    8 Best Heat Resistant Glue

    7 Best Glue For Rhinestones

    7 Best Glue For Cork

    5 Best Glue For Marble

    11 Best Glue For Miniatures 

    7 Best Adhesive For Acoustic Foam

    Glue That Works On ABS And PVC

    5 Best Glue For Mirrors 

    "'Plein Air', a French term meaning 'outdoors', signifies a transformative shift in art dating back to the 19th century. This innovative approach was enabled by the advent of tube paints, portable easels, and canvases, allowing artists to step beyond the confines of their studios. In Plein Air painting, artists fully engage with the dynamic interplay of movement, color, and natural light in their chosen setting to capture the subject's intrinsic nature.

    Originating from the French expression en plein air, plein air painting refers to creating artwork outdoors.

    Too often, plein air painting style is confused with sketches made outside; however, that’s not what it is. In en plein air painting, painters capture the essence and spirit of landscapes in real-time.

    Regardless of whether you’re a professional artist or a weekend warrior, this guide will help you get started with plein air painting.

    What Is Plein Air Painting?

    Plein Air, from the French for 'outdoors', marked a pivotal moment in the 19th-century art world. With the invention of tube paints and portable easels, artists left studio confines to capture the world's raw, dynamic beauty.

    In Plein Air painting, artists fully engage with the dynamic interplay of movement, color, and natural light in their chosen setting to capture the subject's intrinsic nature. All that's required is an inspiring outdoor location, a sturdy easel, a quality portable watercolor set, brushes, and premium watercolor paper.

    This method offers a uniquely intimate perspective, embedding the artist in the scene they seek to portray and infusing their work with a vibrant, natural authenticity."

    Many painters sketched out a few plein air drawings before they made their finished painting in a painting studio. Looking at the real thing with so much space helped give the painting much more inspiration and realism than just sitting in an art studio. 

    En Plein Air Brief History

    Diving into the depths of history, plein-air paintings originated from the historical practice of artists sketching outdoors. This indicates that painting outdoors has been a common practice for centuries.

    In art history, the concept of painting en plein air is credited to a well-known French painter Pierre-Henri de Valenciennes. In the Reflections and Advice to a Student on Painting, Particularly on Landscape, he introduced the idea of landscape portrait– painters paint straight onto the canvas while being in the landscape.

    Further, the introduction of pigments in tubes in the late 19th Century contributed to the popularity of en plein air painting. Earlier on, artists had to undertake the messy and laborious task of making their own pigments by crushing and mixing dry pigment particles with a pale yellow oil (linseed). And that is why they were fascinated with modern-day toothpaste-like paint tubes.

    Slowly and steadily, the art world was revolutionized by paint in a tube, which made plein-air painting techniques widely accessible.

    Why Watercolors Are A Great Medium For Plein Air Painting?

    Watercolor paints are the first art mediums that come to anyone’s mind when thinking about plein air painting. This is because the characteristic watercolor effects are able to imitate the picturesque beauty of a variety of landscapes. Whether it’s a sunset or a serene lake, watercolors offer the best techniques to create outdoor scenes. 

    Other artists have also tried plein air acrylic or oil painting. 

    Plein Air Painting Experience Tips and Tricks

    1. Mastering Your Subject: A Deep Dive

    The first thing that you have to do when beginning your En Plein Air artwork is to understand the subject of your painting. Knowing what exactly to paint is the first step to creating a masterpiece.

    Start out by taking a single detail and putting it onto your canvas. Zoom in for understanding the features of an escape. One thing that you should do is give yourself the time to study and analyze these features. You can even take an entire day to do this, as then, you will have a clearer idea about how the elements of shifting shadows and lights work in relation to colors and textures. These will change every hour of the day, hence making it necessary for you to perceive the free play of these effects that compose the scene for the casual eye.

    Doing this will make it easier for you to start out. This will also provide you with a foundation for your art so that you know how exactly to calculate the intricacies of shapes and patterns for your art.

    For making edits to the form, think about what would work best and about adding further details to the painting. Do not put anything to the picture if you’re in doubt as you can’t reverse the changes.

    1. Decoding the Trifecta: Lighting, Time, and Texture

    Time is of utmost importance when it comes to painting en plein air. Also, do track how and when the lights change for you to ascertain the fundamental features of exposures and shades. It is crucial for you to first identify and locate the light source to analyze shadows and determine a “value pattern.”

    These are vital elements that lay the foundation upon which you’ll be creating your art. Values and shapes are essential elements for any kind of painting work.

    Segregate and categorize the basic elements of your subject into three major areas of gray values: light, medium, and dark. Each will have its individual effects. But what is the most important thing for you to understand is that these will work in close relation with each other to actually give the painting its overall individual identity.

    Every color and tonal valuation that you might want to achieve in your art, especially while sitting outdoors will depend on how you manipulate these three dominant values to your favor.

    Concentrate on the subject and decode the patterns of its shapes into these three values. Squint if you have to, for eliminating any extra detail. Carry out a brief value study using the white tone of the canvas to establish a fourth value if you want.

    1. The Art of Time Management in Creative Processes

    Time is an essential aspect of any artwork. And when it comes to painting en plein, it will become doubly important for you to practice tracking the time for your session.

    The shifting time will have a drastic impact on the tonal integrity of your outdoor scene. Shadows and lights will get affected changing your visual perception of the surroundings.

    The changing hours of mornings, evenings, and nights will morph these scenes into different vistas. This could make you lose track of your tonal and textural consistency if you failed to capture the desired effects before the shift in time causing them to change.

    Utilize the benefits of time constraints such as that offered by painting events, contests, and plein air workshops. These help you develop your skills by helping you to take quick decisions. These could also help you develop your very own signature techniques which will further help you complete in an even shorter time frame.

    You could begin using a timer-controlled painting set to a specific time frame. Start off with larger time spans and narrow it down as you increase your speed and your strokes.

    Avoid overthinking your strategies and techniques. Opt for the kind of size dimension and format that will help you finish your work within the allotted time limit.

    1. Materials Matter: Comprehensive Analysis

    Develop your personal techniques when it comes to managing your painting materials and supplies for an outdoor painting spree. A few artists may stretch their canvases for oil paintings which keeps it flat and tightly spread. This also prevents warps of any sort.

    A real problem with watercolors is that they can get all dried up before you know it and if you haven’t checked up on them well before taking them out on an outdoor painting session, then you might just be in for an annoying and disappointing discovery.

    Always check on your supplies before packing them up. Also, you should always ensure that your brushes are in working condition. These should be absolutely clean, and dry and the bristles should be intact in every way.

    Think about what could make your work easier. A blotting material such as tissues, color blotting papers or cotton papers, or a self-cleaning brush pen would be a pretty efficient and handy tool while painting outdoors. Do not forget the pencils and erasers, as they’re the absolute basic and essential tools for any artwork.

    And some may also carry an “all-weather” umbrella for sheltering their work from the rain. This can also protect the painting from the extreme glare of sunlight.

    1. Weather Forecasts: An Artist's Unexpected Ally or Foe

    This is one thing that you cannot just afford to miss out on! Do check the weather conditions before you go for an outdoor painting session. Apart from getting absolutely destroyed by rain, it can get visibly affected by extremely hot, cold, humidity, or snowy situations.

    Although you can’t control inclement weather conditions, you do get the option of safeguarding your painting from it, such as using an isopropyl alcohol solution for keeping the washes from freezing on your palette if it’s very cold. You could also carry canvas and color guards to protect your materials from melting in extremely hot situations.

    Also, fluctuating weather situations can impair the visual perception of the shapes and patterns that constitute the scene. An open scape that may have previously seemed to possess different tonal qualities due to a certain balance of lights and shadows may appear oddly drained off of its natural colors due to weather fluctuations.

    This is especially noticed when there is an upcoming spell of rain or thunder in the distance that cast long shadows over a significant area. You have to be alert of all such situations before you set out to paint.

    Or, best, you could simply cancel your plans if there’s rain or a storm on the bulletin. 

    1. Crafting Composition: Merging Shapes, Patterns, and Textures

    Try connecting and linking various forms and shapes together to create beautiful complex patterns. Start by selecting a center or focal point of interest. After that, try to develop a strategy to direct the viewer’s eye through the entire painting by accentuating and developing the intricacies of the overall work.

    A complex network of shapes and patterns can create a balanced composition in art. Do not hesitate or be scared to eliminate any detail to achieve the desired effect. Always remember that every painting no matter how similar it might look to another piece will always differ in its composition of shape patterns and texture. This is because such a formation in every painting is unique and no two pieces of art can ever be the same.

    The fundamental point of studying your compositions is to develop your techniques to create these intricacies. These will undoubtedly be one of a kind in every way and reflect the special and unique skills of the painter.

    In order to find the center point of interest, do refer to the ways that you could employ to detect and identify complementary shapes in work to begin linking these with one another determining their relations with each other.

    1. Streamlining Your Artistic Toolbox: Assort, Simplify, Organize

    Always try to simplify and organize your art supplies to maintain a clean kit and working area. You actually don’t need all your watercolor supplies and supplies even if you think you do. So, instead of carrying a whole stash of different types of colors or brushes, narrow it down to a lesser quantity, because the chances are that you’ll require even less than what you might want to carry.

    We often tend to go overboard with our supplies when going on an outdoor painting venture. This is understandable as it’s quite psychological to be anxious about what you may be forgetting behind at your place that could be really important for your painting.

    Well, this may not always be the case, and it can simply be that you’re piling on a lot of things that you may not need.

    Do schedule in advance to avoid any last-minute last rush or indecision. Also, decide what kind of media you’d be working with as soon as you conceive a plan. Do not overthink your techniques, procedures, or subject for that matter.

    A neat and clean arrangement will help you work faster and more importantly, better. Whereas, a cluttered scenario will stifle creativity and end up reflecting in your work of art. 

    1. Color Planning: The Rainbow Roadmap

    Handling a color scheme, especially with water-paints media is undeniably one of the most difficult feats to achieve in art. This is because apart from being incredibly finicky to put on paper, watercolors have a shifting tonal feature that makes it incredibly tough for the user to figure out the exact effect that particular shade might have.

    So while getting down to work with watercolors en plein air, you have to be exceptionally careful about what and how a certain hue would behave in the natural lights (compared to indoor situations) and what kind of tonal characteristic it will yield there.

    Creating a color study can go a long way in creating complex shape patterns with regard to the color scheme. When it comes to assigning colors to these shape patterns, do stick to the value structure that you have established.

    Your choice of colors or color scheme can be accurate and authentic to the scene that’s before you, or you could easily choose to interpret them as freely and creatively as you want.

    Always remember that warm colors have the tendency to come ahead and forward, while cooler tones and colors tend to recede.

    Also, warm lights will always create cool shadows, unlike cool lights that may give you warmer shadows. 

    1. Documenting Your Journey: Journaling Art Techniques and Experiments

    Try and maintain a journal for all your methods and experiments regarding your artwork. Not only will this help you to go back to your signature strokes and techniques easily, but this is also a great way of boosting creativity. As you keep entering your techniques, you come up with newer ones.

    This is even a good way of keeping track of your creations and exercising artistic control. A journal will let you know what to and what not to go for or do when creating a watercolor piece. It also reminds you of the effects and reactions that a particular stroke or technique might have had in the past.

    An art journal is especially necessary for en plein air painting as this helps you complete your work within a limited period of time. An outdoor painting session will demand incredible control over all of your techniques and strategies while handling watercolors. A journal will be the ultimate guide that will continuously keep you on the right track with managing your moves on paper.

    Also, a journal is a good way even to help others if they’re starting out with en plein air watercolor art, as you yourself would be experienced enough with your watercolor ways to help others develop their own skills.  

    1. Location, Location, Location: Becoming a Savvy Spotter

    This is one of the vital aspects of painting en plein air. Choose the location for your painting session wisely and carefully.

    The location for your outdoor watercolor paintwork should make you fall in love with the sights and scenes and then further inspire you to capture what you’re loving, onto the canvas.

    If you’re not inspired by what you see, then it is probably not what you should be painting, to begin with. Heighten your senses to take in the impact of the beautiful natural surrounding that you’re in at the moment and feel what it inspires in you. Take your time to know it better. Do not rush. Study the details carefully. Form a mental picture in watercolors that you’d be pursuing. Then begin your work in a calm and relaxed state of mind.

    A smart way of doing this is to walk around a bit in order to get accustomed to the location. Take in the sights and scenes and try to feel the sensations each of them produce to connect to the surroundings better.

    Try and analyze the different aspects of the place and know what these make you feel. All of the different elements of the natural locations such as the light, shadows, views, and colors should come together in stunning form to you which should inspire you to begin your work without delay.

    Here are a few factors to help you choose the best location for plein air painting. 

    1. Crowd/Number Of People

    A beach or a park might seem like a good idea for plein air painting until you actually get there. With children running around and people making awkward small talk, you might find it quite distracting to begin painting. If that is something that would really hinder you, try finding a quiet and peaceful location to start painting en plein air. 

    1. Weather Conditions

    Painting outdoors is an exciting idea, but you also need to think about the weather conditions. A sun hat and sunscreen might save you from the sun but what about rain? What about wind? That could possibly ruin your painting. Try choosing a day with dry weather and no wind for a pleasant plein-air painting experience. 

    Additionally, try finding a sheltered spot away from direct sunlight despite the sunscreen.

    1. Accessibility 

    You will rarely finish a painting in the same sitting. So, you will definitely have to visit the same location multiple times to complete your painting. Additionally, you will have to visit the location around the same time every day to get similar light conditions. So, make sure the location you choose is accessible on a daily basis. After all, you must complete your painting!  

    Examples Of Good Locations For Plein Air Painting

    Some examples of good locations for plein-air painting are local parks, hills, lakes, national parks, beaches, forests, etc. If you can’t think of any good outdoor painting spot near you, you should try joining a plein air painting community group. The group will help you discover new painting spots and will also have access to exclusive painting locations.  

    1. Exploring Watercolor Mediums: Paper, Pads, Sheets, and Blocks

    While working with watercolors, you have to completely make sure that whatever paper you using is watercolor grade. These sketching papers are made to be very thick so that they can hold the water content and paints without getting damaged. The texture on these is made to be pretty different than your regular sketchbooks. Watercolor sketchbooks in particular are especially grainy and coarse to hold the effects of the color saturation.

    So the quality of the watercolor paper is calculated in GSM which is “grams per square meter.” The higher the measure of gsm, the thicker your paper is and the more water it would be able to hold.

    Usually, the preferred gsm for papers for watercolors is 200-300 gsm. However, more is not always correct. Do check out the requirements for the kind of paints you are going to be using. If you’re not going to use a higher content of water in your paintings and keep it mostly a dry-on-dry painting, then you can easily opt for lesser gsm.

    But if you are looking to use a lot of washes and wet-on-wet techniques involving multiple layers and tonal variations, then ensure you have a higher gsm measure on your paper.

    A Closer Look at Watercolor Blocks

    So the papers for your watercolor paintings do come in many forms. You could get sheets, regular framed canvases, rolls, or pads of all kinds for your painting purpose.

    A really nice alternative is watercolor blocks that are readily available in almost every local stationery shop near you. These are ideal for en plein air painting as the edges on these come glue-down and the surface is pre-stretched for easy and hassle-free usage outdoors. This mean that you do not have to worry about masking tapes or having to gum down your paper while setting up. Also, this prevents your paper from flying away if you’re working at a very windy location such as seasides or open fields.

    1. Brushes Uncovered: Your Magic Wand

    So, after selecting the appropriate paper for painting en plein air using watercolors, let’s talk about the kind of brushes for this purpose. You do get a ton of options in brushes to suit every requirement. From traditional to hi-tech, specialized and even self-cleaning brush pens that hack down on the amount of effort you have to put in with conventional supplies- you get it all.

    So, when painting outdoors, you could either opt for these awesome brush-pens, or you could go for your usual brushes and glass jars.

    Brush pens could be pretty easy to work with if you’ve gotten used to their overall mechanism and do not require for you to dip your brush frequently in the water. Some are even designed to regulate color and tonal consistency which would eliminate the need for mixing up or searching the right amount of saturation, time and again, for that matter.

    However, the disadvantage of these is that they come with a particular pen tip that may not hold up under regular use and constant pressure. These are pretty delicate to work with and can in fact cause you to miss certain steps in the basic procedure of paintings if you hold in incorrectly or aren’t accustomed to the techniques.

    On the other hand…

    ...the simple brushes and glass jars can be really comfortable to work with. Although they have no special mechanism to bring to the canvas, they do provide you with the ease of learning and mastering the fundamental strokes and techniques as well as developing your own in the process.

    These could provide you with a steady supply of clean water, which might not be the case with brush pens all the time. Also, the basic glass jars are pretty inexpensive than brush pens. And if you can, pack two while preparing your outdoor paint kit: one for dipping the brushes and the other for rinsing them well.

    However, if you think that all the extra jars are going to weigh you down, then do go for fine brush pens that are easily available at the market or online. 

    1. The Easel: Your En Plein Air Painting Partner

    While hunting for the perfect easel for your outdoor painting session, you will definitely come across a wide variety of the same. Do consider going for something that will be immensely portable, yet very durable, matching up to every standard that ensures its strength.

    You should get something that can really tough out the onslaughts of the weather for a substantial amount of time. One other thing that you should really make sure is that the entire structure is compact and sleek. Avoid getting anything elaborate that needs a ton of effort and procedures to set up.

    The traditional French Ease is an incredible choice for this purpose that gives you all benefit of being an amazingly lightweight and compact easel for outdoor painting.

    This could be folded right up like a briefcase and allows you to sit or stand up while painting comfortably. This makes it especially ideal for all of those planning to paint for hours or over a considerable span of time.

    A French easel also comes with the added benefit of having all the essential compartments such as paint-mixing palette slots, troughs and holders for all your painting tools, and even a slot to fix your umbrella. This dispenses the need for you to pack any separate kit or bag for your requirements.

    But the best part of this is that you can actually store all of these in the easel itself before you head outdoors to paint, with your canvas, or watercolor block right into the canvas holder.

    1. The Sketchbook: An Artist's Best Friend

    Keeping a “handy-dandy notebook” or a sketchbook is a brilliant thing to have by your side while you set out to work in plein air. An art sketchbook or one that’s specially made for watercolor work can efficiently serve two very important functions.

    First, it comes in really handy as a journal for entries regarding tips and techniques. This can be your safe place to test out color schemes and tonal or textural variations. Work out your own techniques or develop an individual style even while painting to see what you can apply to your main work. This is especially helpful as it allows you to make all the mistakes you need to make on it rather than messing up your main artwork.

    This is exceedingly helpful when...

    ...you have to ascertain the tones and textures of your subject as it changes with shifting the time period. You can even come up with your very own way of handling tonal shifts and develop a way to achieve the right balance of the values and elements of painting.

    A sketchbook is a great way to practice and perfect the art of art itself.

    The other advantage of having a sketchbook is that it is a less expensive alternative to costly watercolor papers, watercolor blocks or even a French easel.

    A sketchbook would also be a lot more handy, compact, and portable than every other sketching media.

    You could easily get a beautiful watercolor sketchbook rather than getting a full-size canvas itself. It is just a perfect thing for beginners in every way. You could get yourself one in soft bounds or hardbound or even in an attractive moleskin one.

    These could also help you complete your paintings a lot quicker, especially when you have to do it in a congested place or somewhere with a lot of traffic. 

    1. Capturing Moments: The Role of Photography in Art

    Because, when in doubt, always take pictures! Take quick snaps and several ones for that matter, if you’re doubtful or not very confident about achieving a particular effect for your painting. This works especially well for beginners who might want to study the different aspects of the scape.

    Also, you might need to take several pictures of your subject during the entire course of your painting for studying the shifts of lights, clouds, and shadows at different points of time or hours in the day.

    Since the quality or the basic overall effect of your watercolor painting doesn’t have to be “hyperrealistic” in any way, you need not take a professional camera or a ton of photographic arrangements with yourself to the location.

    However, do ensure that your camera does have proper zooming to a considerable extent and captures reasonably clear details, if not crystal-clear, for you to work on comfortably and confidently.

    1. Perfect Seating: Ensuring Comfort in Creativity

    A seating arrangement for all outdoor artwork, in our opinion, is an absolute must. And it has got nothing to do with your age or fitness!

    Wanting to sit, especially after a considerable amount of time, is a completely normal bodily requirement and impulse. And it is, in fact, important to be absolutely comfortable when you’re outdoors painting and studying and analyzing your surroundings because you’re feeling the environment with all of your senses at the same time. This is something that you can’t do if your body is tensed up all the time and is pressurized without being given the time to rest to function properly.

    This is why a portable stool or compact, lightweight, foldable chair is always good to have around while painting plein air.

    You could get a travel stool for the purpose or even one that is specifically designed for painters and students for school projects. These are very lightweight and are constructed in a way that makes them slide right into most travel-gear bags or backpacks. This makes them perfect for every plein-air art project.

    Tools And Materials Needed For Plein Air Painting

    1. Watercolor Paints

    This is an obvious one. There are many forms of watercolor paints available in the market, like watercolor tubes, watercolor pans, etc. For plein air painting, however, you need convenient paints to carry and hold. So, your best bet would be watercolor pans. 

    Watercolor pans consist of a variety of vibrant colors available in convenient dried blocks of paint. All you need is a little water to activate the dried paint, and you can start painting right away!

    In landscape painting, a variety of colors is required to capture the true essence of the scene on canvas. Rather than carrying each and every pigment to outdoor locations, select a white shade along with a cold and warm shade of every primary color. 

    Note that the French Impressionists didn’t include black in their toolkit because of 2 reasons: 

    1. Black color doesn’t exist in the environment, i.e., nature. 
    2. The effects produced by variations in hue are far more vibrant than those produced by changes in shades. 

    Tip

    Creating black without using black is easy– all you’ll have to do is mix emerald green with magenta to produce a gorgeous black shade. 

    1. Watercolor Paper, Canvas, Panels, And Boards

    Small to medium-sized panels are ideal for plein air painting projects, as they fit the majority of French-style easels. 

    If you are using watercolors, watercolor paper, too, is available in many different forms: watercolor blocks, watercolor painting books or notebooks, watercolor sheets, watercolor sketchbooks, etc. If you are a beginner, a small sketchbook is the best option for you. It is the format you are most familiar with and is also convenient outdoors. But you will see some warping and buckling with this. 

    For an experienced watercolor painter, a watercolor block might be the better option. You don’t have to worry about warping or buckling because the paper is already stretched. Blocks are also usually thick enough to withstand most watercolor techniques so that you can paint away without worry. 

    Please make sure the paper you are getting is 300 GSM or above to ensure it is able to withstand all wet mediums and techniques. 

    But, if you use pochade boxes, you’ll have to make sure the canvas is compatible with it. Keep in mind that quite a few canvas carriers accept canvases up to 70 cm, whereas some require sets of equal-sized canvases to function properly. 

    As a piece of advice, I suggest opting for a small-scale canvas since working on it will be fun. 

    Even ready-to-paint panels offer a nice rigid base, which is why they are excellent for plein-air paintings. The best part about primed panels is that they are compatible with both a French box easel and a pochade setup. And because they don’t occupy much space, you can carry multiple items. 

    In this regard, I suggest going for handmade linen panels. 

    1. Watercolor Brushes

    When selecting a brush set for plein air painting, consider your painting style. You should also take into account the plein air painting techniques you plan to employ to finish your artwork. 

    In my opinion, opting for a set whose brushes are a perfect blend of spring and stiffness will be the best bet. Or you can create your own brush set by adding round, filbert, and flat brushes to use multiple techniques with ease. 

    As an artist, you should always go for high-quality brushes because the bristles of such brushes do not come off while mixing the paint. Alongside brushes, make sure to add a graphite pencil for sketching. 

    You might also want to invest in a quality brush holder to protect your brushes from damage while traveling. 

    1. Water Container

    What else does watercolor painting require? Water, of course! For plein air painting, you can’t expect to get water quickly. So, you will need a handy water container, along with some jars, to make painting a smooth process. I suggest having two jars of water, one for painting and the other for cleaning your brushes. 

    1. Portable Easel 

    This is an optional thing to buy, but it is something that many plein air painters recommend. Some painters prefer to sit while painting, while others prefer to paint standing. An easel will significantly help in the latter case. You can find lightweight, portable easels that will make painting an easy and convenient process for you. 

    If you don’t want to invest too much money in an easel, you can also use an old camera tripod, assuming it is of suitable height. Use an ‘adapter’ so you can fix your sketchbook or block on the top of the tripod. 

    1. Sun Hat And Sunscreen

    One thing you don’t want is a pesky sunburn while you are painting the sun itself. So, a sun hat and sunscreen are important. 

    1. Other Optional Material

    You can also carry painting gloves, paper towels, a watercolor palette, a watercolor drawing board, a folding chair, a folding table, and watercolor pencils in your art bag. You can also bring along a folding picnic table to keep all your supplies on. None of this is technically necessary, but it will surely make your plein-air painting experience easy and pleasant. 

     Prepping For The Painting Session

    Now you can start with prepping for your painting.

    Setting Up Your Materials

    Once you reach the desired location for your plein air painting, start setting up your supplies. Set up the easel and the folding chair if you brought one. Take out your watercolor pans, palette, and paintbrushes. Set up the jars of water on a table. And at the very end, place your watercolor paper on the easel, and you are ready to begin painting. 

    Sketching The Composition

    Before you actually start painting, you might want to sketch out a rough composition. Bring out your graphite pencil and start sketching. The advantage is that if you get something wrong with the pencil, you can easily correct it using an eraser. But you might not be able to erase actual watercolor paint. 

    So, take in the feel of the scenery and make a quick sketch. 

    Mixing Colors

    Your pan colors might not always have the exact color you require to paint your masterpiece. So, mixing colors always comes to the rescue. Watercolors are extremely easy to mix, so you don’t have to face the cons of a limited palette. 

    Just decide the two colors you want to mix to make the third one. Knowledge about the color wheel (and the color theory) can greatly help you in deciding the right colors. Next, put the two colors on a palette using your paintbrush. Now, mix the two colors together using however much water you need. Keep mixing until you reach your desired shade. 

    Plein Air Painting Techniques

    Here are 3 techniques that will help you get started with plein-air painting projects. 

    1. Painting Light: Capturing Light And Atmosphere

    In plein air painting, artists paint by observing the environment around them. Therefore, they come across a variety of light sources, including electric light, candles, window light, overcast skies, and direct sunshine. 

    It’s a well-known fact that all kinds of lights have distinctive qualities, which you, as an artist, need to understand in order to paint them realistically. 

    I. Overcast Light

    Often, sunshine is diffused by cloud layers, wiping out the dramatic contrasts of shadow and light. One significant benefit of overcast light is that you can paint outlines in their true colors minus the need for extreme contrasts of shade and light. 

    II. Direct Sunlight

    The blue sky, the sun, and reflected light from luminous things are 3 distinctive illumination systems that are at play on a bright, sunny day. Of all the 3 light courses, the light from the blue sky and the reflected one should be subordinate to sunlight because they derive from it. 

    III. Streetlights And Night Conditions

    Other than the moonlight, metal halide, arc, sodium, mercury-vapor, neon fluorescent, incandescent, and LED lights make up the modern nightscape. Every single light source has a unique spectral power distribution. 

    I’ve listed a few tips that will help you understand night conditions, so you can capture night-time lights and conditions convincingly. 

    You can experiment with urban night-time painting by illuminating your palette with a portable LED light. Moreover, take a camera and set it to night mode to capture images at night. Make sure you use a modern-day camera because its lens will capture excellent pictures in low lights. 

    Most importantly, observe the variety of exterior lighting hues whenever you fly above a city in an airplane. 

    2. Painting Water: Sketching And Blocking

    Believe me, no other subject is as challenging to paint as water in landscape painting. 

    Lake, pond, river, or ocean– each subject needs to be handled differently, which you’ll understand only when you study them carefully. Here are 3 techniques to handle water bodies:

    A. Coastline

    Both the water and the sky are similar in color, albeit the former is darker in tone. Sketch a solid coastline or horizon and block them simultaneously to ensure the 2 have a consistent color. 

    B. Reflections

    Painting reflections on still water bodies like ponds, lakes, and tranquil rivers is challenging because they often glow in the colors of dawn or dusk. Remember, reflections should be rendered as gestural and loose as possible. 

    Instead of a lot of individual strokes, try depicting it as a huge tonal mass of color. Bear in mind that the objects are lighter than the reflections, so keep them dark. 

    C. Movements

    Plein art painters with little to no knowledge and experience find it challenging to capture the light effects and the movements occurring in ocean waves. A trick I learned from my teacher is to use a palette knife when painting ocean waves. 

    3. Simplifying The Scene And Using A Limited Color Palette

    Though prized for freshness and spontaneity, being deliberate and organized is one of the finest ways to learn the art of plein air.

    Prior to heading outdoors, devise a plan and approach the painting deliberately from the get-go. Many a time, plein air painters, in their eagerness to start painting, begin adding color to the surface even before drawing the composition (visual arts) completely.

    Capturing and painting each and every detail from the scene in en plein air is overwhelming. That’s why I suggest looking for scenes featuring basic shapes and sizes. At the same time, keep the value of 4 or fewer than that to simplify the values. Instead of every minute detail of the scene, like an animal, the texture of a leaf or a plant, flower petal, or fruit, captures small shapes in large groups.

    Simplifying your palette is also important for every individual, starting with plein-air painting. A limited palette or a palette with cool/warm colors will be the best bet.

    Challenges Of Plein Air Painting

    1. Changing Light And Weather Conditions

    One significant challenge plein air artists face is changing lighting and weather conditions. 

    The weather may become cloudy from sunny, rainy or windy in the spur of the moment. Even minor changes in the weather can affect your final painting, adding an element of uncertainty to the painting procedure. 

    But this isn’t the case with studio painting, as they aren’t affected by the changing outdoor weather. An artist creates studio painting in a controlled environment, where they have full control over the lighting conditions. 

    2. Insects, Bugs, And Critters  

    Bugs, critters, and other insects are also a source of distraction in plein-air painting. As insects are attracted to moisture, they tend to flock around watercolor or oil-based pigments you use in your artwork. 

    Pigments comprise animal fats and are usually present in oil-based paints, thereby attracting cockroaches.

    3. Time Constraints

    In the studio, you have plenty of time to work on your artwork, but things are different when it comes to plein-air painting. A painting that is completed within 2 to 3 days in a studio needs to be completed within a few hours outdoors. 

    This time constraint is what makes plein air painting challenging for painters. 

    4 Plein Air Painting Tips For Success

    A. Plan

    Plan ahead by searching for potential locations and checking the weather forecast so that you won’t have to deal with surprises later on. 

    B. Expect The Unexpected

    Lighting and weather conditions change continually, so be prepared. 

    C. Keep Things Simple

    Do not attempt to include every little detail in your painting. Instead, keep things simple by focusing on general and familiar shapes. Also, use a small canvas or paper so that you can complete the painting quickly and easily. 

    D. No Substitute For Practice

    Practice, practice, and practice as much as you can only then will you master plein air painting techniques. 

     Benefits Of Plein Air Painting

    1. Capture Real Scenes

    When you paint outdoors, you can let your creative juices flow in your painting, which isn’t possible in studio painting. That’s because the scenery is right in front of your eyes, and you can read and interpret with your senses. 

    Compositionally, plein air artists’ eyes aren’t constrained by a camera viewfinder. Even observing proportions, depths, and object relations is easy, as you only have to move your eyes and head a little. 

    2. Disconnecting From The Digital World

    For many artists, creating art or painting is a sort of meditative activity. 

    On days when everything feels dark and gloomy, landscape painting can calm your mind and result in healing. The point of landscape painting is to disconnect artists from the digital world. That means you’ll have to leave your phone in your studio to rest your eyes and set your focus on creating stunning scenery via plein-air painting techniques. 

    3. Recognize Colors Accurately

    Painting outdoors is often considered the most effective way to recognize colors and study how they compare to each other. 

    Because of warmth, contrast, and saturation, the camera eye alters the values and colors of the photograph, which isn’t the case with plein air painting. By painting en plein air, you’ll be able to use actual colors in your artwork, including seasons and times of the day. 

    Regardless of what you think, you’ll be able to match the wintery whites and blues of snowfall or the pinks and oranges of spring sunset better in plein air painting. 

    4. Mentally Refreshing

    Plein air painters, as a part of their job, are more physically active than studio painters. This is due to the fact that they explore the locale outdoors to capture scenes on their canvases. 

    While sitting in an open landscape, they soak in a lot of natural light, which is beneficial. Like, exposure to natural light or sunlight improves sleep patterns and the circadian rhythm to help the body produce Vitamin D. 

    Not only are you able to focus better on work, but you also feel happier. And if you’re a social person, painting en plein air in groups will refresh your mind and help you make new friends. 

    5. Step Out Of Your Comfort Zone

    In studio painting, you work at your own pace and whenever you want– be it early morning or late night. 

    But things are different in outdoor painting. Painting en plein air means you only have a few hours to complete your artwork, so painters tend to work differently than they do at a studio. 

    Plein air painting (quite literally) forces painters to get out of their comfort zone. And during the process, you’ll learn new techniques and fresh approaches to complete your work within a certain time frame. 

    You can make marks via gouache, dry brush, wax, flicking water, spritzing, or other techniques. As a plein air painter, you must have the courage to be bold and use thick paints with as large a brush as possible. 

    Taking risks or getting bold in the studio is hard; after all, no one would want to ruin a final painting after spending 160+ hours on it. In essence, painting en plein air is a safe place to take risks and go bold. 

    Plein Air Painting FAQs

  • Are notebook pads good for plein air painting?

    Notebook pads are ideal for sketching but not for plein air painting, so it’s best to avoid them. 

  • Who are some of the well-known artists in present times?

    Gordon MacKenzie is a talented watercolor artist whose landscape paintings are stunning. Cathy Johnson, another artist well-known for illustration, has written numerous books on creating textures in watercolor. 

    A self-proclaimed color theory expert, famous in the art world, is Jenna Rainey, who specializes in watercolor and hand-made drawings. Other artists specializing in visual art, including concept art, are Jean Haines, Ray Hendershot, Matthew Palmer, and Leslie Frontz. 

    Even Nita Engle, who passed away in 2019, was an American watercolorist and illustrator who had painted numerous landscapes from Alaska to Lake Superior. 

  • What are the best locations for plein air painting?

    Some of the best locations for plein air painting are:

    • Bali, Indonesia
    • Oia, Santorini
    • Grand Canyon, Arizona
    • Napa Valley, California
    • Paris, France
  • Can beginners paint en plein air with watercolors, or is it more suited for experienced artists?

    Beginners can absolutely paint in plein air. It is not a matter of skill but a matter of inspiration. While painting en plein air, the big advantage you get is that you have your desired scenery in front of you. 

    Beginners can start by painting easy sceneries like a flower, a tree, an animal, parks, etc., and then move on to more complex landscapes. All you need is a good eye for your concept art.

  • How do I deal with changing light and weather conditions while painting en-plein air?

    When you’re painting outside, quick changes in light and sudden shifts in weather are all part of the game. A good tip is to check your weather app before you head out. It’ll give you a heads-up if it’s going to rain or be too windy, saving you from a wasted trip.

    And about the changing light, always note the exact time you start painting, if you attempt to paint on another day, the time reference will help you find similar conditions. A hack for the shifting light is to make a quick sketch of what you’re about to paint and snap a picture too. That way, even if the light changes, you’ve got a reference to help you finish your watercolor masterpiece.

  • How can plein-air painting improve my overall painting skills?

    Practice makes perfect, right? That goes for watercolor painting too. Any type of practice will boost your skills. But with plein air painting, it’s special. You’re right there, looking at the real scenery, and it makes you feel super connected to your work. Plus, nature doesn’t always make it easy – you might have to paint rushing water, rustling leaves, or a setting sun. Sure, it’s a bit tough, but hey, that’s how you up your game. And believe me, you’ll see your skills sky-rocket!

  • Are there any famous watercolor artists who painted in plein air?

    Yes, there have been several notable watercolor artists who painted en plein air, including Camille Pissarro, Edgar Degas, James McNeil Whistler, Jean Haines, Leslie Frontz, Matthew Palmer, Cathy Johnson, Gordon MacKenzie, Jenna Rainey, and John Singer Sargent. 

  • How do I transport and store my paintings created en plein air?

    Transporting and storing plein air paintings requires careful consideration to prevent damage. To transport wet paintings, consider a wet painting carrier, which keeps the artwork separate and secure. For dry artwork, use acid-free paper or glassine interleaves between each piece, stored flat in a sturdy, waterproof portfolio. Long-term storage should be in a dry, temperature-controlled environment, away from direct sunlight and extreme temperature fluctuations. Always handle with clean hands or use cotton gloves to avoid oils or dirt from damaging the artwork.

  • Final Words

    That was a lot of information on plein-air painting, so take a couple of minutes to collect your thoughts. 

    To sum it up, plein-air painting is all about capturing the essence of a natural environment. As a plein air artist, you need not capture everything in the area, only a few large objects will do the trick. 

    Best of all plein air painting offers numerous benefits, as it relaxes the mind and you can start painting en plein air as a hobby. You can sell your artwork on social media to earn money. 

    Before starting painting, don’t forget to check out a few tutorial videos online, and I’m sure you’ll be good to go! Also, do not be afraid to experiment; in fact, unleash your creativity and draw whatever you want. 

    Photo and Painting Courtesy of RafaCM

     

    Plastic spoon crafts are one of the first things kids can do. It's a great way to challenge kids' creative freedom!

    Not just that, but even adults will have a lot of fun with the different plastic spoon crafts ideas. You'd be surprised how lovely each craft turns out.

    Take a break from the usual DIY bamboo projects. Today, we'll go through some of the best plastic spoon ideas you and your kids can make. Keep reading and start crafting!

    50 Creative Plastic Spoon Crafts and Projects

    Overloading oceans. Colorful dangerous plastic utensils killing animals in the oceans and harming our environment. 50 Creative Plastic Spoon Crafts and Projects

    We always end up with a ton of extra plastic spoons at home. Instead of throwing them out, consider transforming them into beautiful art pieces!

    1. Plastic Spoon Christmas Trees

    Plastic Spoon Christmas Trees

    Make your Christmas memorable by creating small Christmas trees using plastic spoons. This project is easy, and you can use different colored spoons.

    You can use green or red spoon heads in keeping with the Christmas spirit. Alternatively, you can go for a monochromatic look using only white spoons.

    2. Lilac Rose Petals

    Lilac Rose Petals

    via : Purple Hues and Me

    This rose petal vase is one of the most stunning ideas we've come across. It makes good home décor without costing you a fortune!

    You only need plastic spoon heads, an old bowl, and some petals. Glue the petals to the spoon, and shape it along the bowl's curves.

    3. DIY Spoon Roses

    DIY Spoon Roses

    via : Made by Marzipan

    Did you know you can make roses out of plastic spoons? The results look stunning, especially if you use colorful spoons.

    All you need to do is melt the spoon and mold it into a rose. Leave it to harden, and you're done! Just be careful with handling the heat, especially around kids.

    4. Plastic Spoon Vase

    Plastic Spoon Vase

    via : DIYnCrafts

    If you've got an extra plain vase at home, spruce it up with colored plastic spoons. All you need is a glue gun and spoon heads.

    You can create an Ombre-inspired vase to give it a fun and chic look. Add some flowers to it, and you're done!

    5. Plastic Spoon Peacock

    Plastic Spoon Peacock

    via : StyleEnrichDIY

    Peacocks are stunning birds because of their bright and luscious feathers. You can create your very own peacock creation using plastic spoons!

    Color your spoons with bright hues like green, yellow, and blue. Put them all together, and you have a stunning project to be proud of.

    6. Plastic Spoon Puppets

    Plastic Spoon Puppets

    via : Creative Jewish Mom

    Use your old plastic spoons as puppets! This is one of the easiest plastic spoon crafts you can do with your kids.

    They can draw their favorite animals on the back of the spoon heads! They can even add felt and other materials to give it a textured effect.

    7. Soda Plastic Bottle Bird Feeder

    Soda Plastic Bottle Bird Feeder

    via : Kelly Leigh Creates

    Don't throw your old plastic bottle just yet — you can repurpose it as a bird feeder. You hardly have to do anything except cut two parallel holes in the body.

    Insert old wooden spoons in the hole, which will serve as a holder for the bird feeds. This bird feeder project will take you only a short time to do!

    8. Plastic Spoon Wreath

    Plastic Spoon Wreath

    via : Tip Junkie

    Creating a plastic spoon wreath is challenging, and it's something that will test your kids' patience.

    In this DIY plastic spoon craft, they'll learn to bend the spoon into a wreath! Is your kid up for the challenge?

    9. Plastic Spoon Ants

    Plastic Spoon Ants

    via : Surviving a Teacher's Salary

    Other easy spoon crafts are plastic spoon ants. You can use a bright red plastic spoon like fiery red ants!

    Wrap the body with pipe cleaners and add googly eyes to the spoon heads. That's everything you have to do.

    10. Plastic Spoon Pumpkin Craft

    Plastic Spoon Pumpkin Craft

    via : Chica Circle

    One of the most creative plastic spoon projects we love doing is pumpkin decors. It's a perfect project for kids to mark the start of fall.

    All you need are orange plastic spoon heads, and start sticking them to a base. This is one way to get in a festive mood without buying pumpkins.

    11. Salt and Sugar Spoon Heads

    Salt and Sugar Spoon Heads

    via : Smart School House

    Plastic spoon craft ideas don't always have to be grand. Sometimes, the simplest projects can make a significant impact at home.

    Take this salt and sugar spoon project, for example. It's a great way not to waste plastic spoons and have a use for them in your kitchen!

    12. Paper Plate Birds

    Paper Plate Birds

    via : krokotak

    Let your children's creativity unleash with this paper plate bird project. You only need a few crafting supplies — such as a spoon and a paper plate!

    The plastic spoon will be the base, and the paper plate as the body. Stick a few feathers on the plate to make it more realistic.

    13. Plastic Spoon Catapult

    Plastic Spoon Catapult

    via : Devin Collier

    Children love catapulting things at each other, and they can get very creative with what they use. Why not teach them how to make a plastic spoon catapult?

    You only need popsicle sticks, rubber bands, and old plastic spoons. Your kids can use it to catapult marshmallows at each other!

    14. Spoon Toy Doll

    Spoon Toy Doll

    via : Skip To My Lou

    Dolls are one of the most sought-after toys by kids. They can never have too many of them, and their collection grows yearly.

    Teach your kids how to craft a spoon toy doll! They can design the doll however they want it to look.

    15. Holiday Painted Spoon Heads

    Holiday Painted Spoon Heads

    via : Hello Wonderful

    Prepare your children for the holidays by crafting this lovely holiday décor. You can liven up your home without having to spend a fortune!

    You and your kids can paint your favorite Christmas characters on spoon heads. It could be a snowman, a reindeer, or even Santa Claus himself!

    16. Vegetable Garden Spoon

    Vegetable Garden Spoon

    via : Twig and Toad Stool

    Are you always confused about which plant is which in your garden patch? Why not add signage by using wooden spoons?

    You can write the names of the plant on the spoon heads and even draw them! Stick it in your garden patch, and you will no longer have any trouble distinguishing them.

    17. Disney Princess Spoons

    Disney Princess Spoons

    via : iHeartCraftyThings

    Disney princesses are an icon to every child — they know each character by heart. Why not let them craft their favorite princesses with the help of plastic spoons?

    You only need dollar-store materials to end up with a really beautiful project. Your child will surely love this idea.

    18. Family Wooden Spoons

    Family Wooden Spoons

    via : Teach Me Mommy

    An awesome project you can do as a family is this wooden spoon project. Every family member can create their spoon versions to showcase at home.

    It's a great bonding activity you and your kids can do. Fun crafts like this will surely be part of your kids' core memory.

    19. Lion Spoon Head Craft

    Lion Spoon Head Craft

    via : Bible Class Creations

    It's so easy to create a lion out of a spoon head. You only need yarn and a marker for this spoon craft! No need to get more craft supplies.

    You can use colored yarns to make the lion's mane look fun and quirky! Start pasting it on the outer edge, and leave it to dry.

    20. Spoon Flower Napkin Ring

    Spoon Flower Napkin Ring

    via : Purple Hues and Me

    You won't need to buy a napkin ring once you've mastered making this spoon craft.

    All you need are a few plastic spoons to mold into a flower. You can use colorful spoons to match the color of your table napkins.

    21. Thanksgiving Turkey Spoon Crafts

    Thanksgiving Turkey Spoon Crafts

    via : Hub Pages

    Many children look forward to thanksgiving because it's one of the few holidays to bond with their whole family and eat out.

    Make this holiday extra memorable by creating this spoon craft. Cut out a few pieces of art paper to use as turkey feathers. Add eyes and watch the spoon come to life.

    22. Thanksgiving Chalkboard Wreath

    Thanksgiving Chalkboard Wreath

    via : PartyCity

    Another awesome thanksgiving project is this chalkboard wreath. All you need is a chalkboard and some plastic spoons.

    Line the board with your plastic cutlery, and stick it properly. You wouldn't want it to fall over the place before the holiday ends.

    23. Plastic Spoon Centerpiece

    Plastic Spoon Centerpiece

    via : mygrowinghome

    The next time you're looking for an art piece for your home, consider making one instead. This plastic spoon centerpiece looks stunning — you won't believe it only costs a few dollars!

    All you have to do is stick your plastic spoons to a circular Styrofoam and spray paint it with your favorite color.

    24. Small Flower Pots

    Small Flower Pots

    via : Crafts For All Seasons

    Start with this simple flower pot project to teach your kids how to have a green thumb. You need a small pot/vase and a few plastic spoons to stick on the pot!

    Use a sharpie pen to draw on the spoon heads to get more crafty. Remember to place beautiful flowers once you're done!

    25. Clear Vase with Spoon Flowers

    Clear Vase with Spoon Flowers

    via : Purple Hues and Me

    We love a clear vase because it looks chic and modern — it ties well in any room design. Spruce your clear vase with this spoon craft!

    Melt your clear plastic spoons and shape them into a flower! Don't worry, you don't have to perfect it on your first try.

    26. DIY Rose Accessory

    DIY Rose Accessory

    via : Cut Out + Keep

    Who would have thought a plastic spoon could be used as an accessory? Plastic spoon flowers make a good addition to your collection without spending a fortune.

    Paint it with your favorite color, and viola! You have a DIY rose accessory that will be a show-stopper and a good conversation piece.

    27. Plastic Spoon Ladybugs

    Plastic Spoon Ladybugs

    via : DIYnCrafts

    Plastic spoon heads have a perfect shape to make ladybugs. You can use a red spoon and put black dots on the back.

    Alternatively, you can use spray paints if you have trouble finding colored spoons. We're sure your kids will love spray painting for the first time.

    28. Colorful Tulip Flowers

    Colorful Tulip Flowers

    via : Risi Kids Play

    Tulips are so beautiful, and it's a type of flower everyone wants to receive. It marks the start of spring because of its lively and bright colors!

    Craft your very own tulips using plastic spoons! It's so easy to do, and you only need a bunch of colorful spoons to tie them together.

    29. Neon Plastic Spoon Bangles

    Neon Plastic Spoon Bangles

    via : A Matter of Style

    Another plastic spoon accessory on this list is these awesome neon bangles! They make a statement with their bold and bright colors.

    All you have to do is melt the ends and shape them to the size of your wrist. We bet your kids will love showing off these bangles to their friends.

    30. Tea Light Candle Holders

    Tea Light Candle Holders

    via : Purple Hues and Me

    Repurpose your old plastic spoons as candle holders! This is one of the most useful plastic spoon ideas we love to do.

    The only problem, however, is making sure the candle holders don't melt whenever we light up the candles.

    31. Water Lilies Spoon Crafts

    Water Lilies Spoon Crafts

    via : Fab Art DIY

    Crafting water lilies is so fun because of the overall results. There's something about the flower which looks so stunning, even if they're just plastic spoons.

    Cut off the spoon heads, and start sticking them together until you form beautiful flowers. You can also paint the center yellow to make it more realistic.

    32. DIY Chandelier

    DIY Chandelier

    via : icreativeideas

    Wow your friends with this DIY project! They'll be impressed with how awesome this project turned out!

    They probably won't believe you did this project and only used plastic spoons. Now, who thought that was possible?

    Once you've mastered this project, you can try your luck making a DIY wooden lamp!

    33. Plastic Spoon Watch Decorations

    Plastic Spoon Watch Decorations

    via : Healthy Way to Cook

    Liven up your wall clock by adding colorful plastic spoons as the number indicators. You can be as creative as you want for this DIY project.

    Just stick your plastic cutlery properly so it won't fall off your walls.

    34. Frosty the Snow Spoon

    Frosty the Snow Spoon

    via : Blue Dolphin

    Another awesome holiday project is this snowman spoon craft. All you need are plastic spoons, and some felt for fun projects like these.

    Draw a snowman on the spoon, and top it with your kids' favorite accessory! This DIY plastic spoon craft will keep them preoccupied for a while.

    35. Plastic Spoon Pot Decoration

    Plastic Spoon Pot Decoration

    via : Crafts by Amanda

    There's something special about homemade décor, especially during the holidays. It's even more special knowing your children put much effort into making it.

    This plastic spoon snow pot is one of the best DIY projects we love to plan for the winter. Let your kids dress up their plastic spoon to become their favorite snowman!

    36. Bunny Spoon Crafts

    Bunny Spoon Crafts

    via : The Guardian

    Children love Easter because of the many treats they get after an Easter egg hunt. Many surprises await them after a long, challenging day.

    A great way to sneak in some rest is by making bunny spoons. It's just as fun as going on an Easter egg hunt!

    37. Monster Spoon Heads

    Monster Spoon Heads

    via : Home Talk

    Besides princesses, children are all about monsters that spook them out. Help them conquer this fear by making monster spoon heads!

    They can spray paint a wooden spoon their preferred colors, that'll surely give them the spooks! Their imaginations can run wild with the type of monsters they can create.

    38. Colorful Maracas

    Colorful Maracas

    via : Made Everyday with Dana

    We loved playing with maracas as a child because of the different beats and rhythms to explore. Not just that, we were always so curious about where the sounds came from.

    Feed your child's curiosity and craft maracas with them. This DIY project only requires plastic spoons, washi tape, and a few beads!

    39. Wooden Spoon Bug Craft

    Wooden Spoon Bug Craft

    via : Handmade Charlotte

    Help your child understand entomology with this project. Consider crafting bugs instead of plastic spoon flowers!

    This is one of the best plastic spoon craft ideas to teach children about bugs and their significance in the ecosystem.

    40. DIY Spoon Mirror

    DIY Spoon Mirror

    via : Craftaholics Anonymous

    Transform your plain mirror into something spectacular! With the help of plastic spoons, you can spruce your average mirror to become a centerpiece.

    We recommend using your favorite colors or one that matches the interior of your home. Creative plastic spoon projects like this one are always a crowd favorite.

    41. Spoon Skeleton Craft

    Spoon Skeleton Craft

    via : Scrumdillydilly

    One of the most interesting holidays is Día de los Muertos, which celebrates life and death.

    This DIY project is a great way to introduce this tradition to your children! They can get crafty with their design as much as they want.

    42. Plastic Spoon Bugs

    Plastic Spoon Bugs

    via : Paging Fun Mums

    Making bugs out of plastic spoons is so easy. Crafty things such as this one only take a few minutes to do!

    Have your child cut some wings and create eyes to stick on the spoons. Add this to your plastic spoon flower project so your ecosystem is complete.

    43. Plastic Spoon Bugs and Branch

    Plastic Spoon Bugs and Branch

    via : Amanda Formaro

    Take a break from the usual plastic spoon flower project and create this two-in-one masterpiece.

    Have your kids cut felt to the shape of a leaf, and design the spoon head as bugs. Cut a hole in the felt and insert the spoon!

    44. Chrysanthemum Mirror

    Chrysanthemum Mirror

    via : addicted2decorating

    Chrysanthemums are a crowd favorite because of their beautiful and luscious flower petals. You can get lost counting how many petals each flower has.

    So, why not create a chrysanthemum-inspired mirror frame? You can paint the spoon in shades to give it an Ombre effect.

    45. Pineapple Lamp

    Pineapple Lamp

    via : DIY Project for Teens

    This DIY project looks so stunning you'd think it cost a fortune! But it only uses an old plastic bottle as the base and several plastic spoons.

    The challenge with this project is figuring out how to light up the lamp. But in terms of designing plastic bottles, it's very easy.

    46. Chocolate Spoon Heads

    Chocolate Spoon Heads

    via : Bird's Party Blog

    Use your plastic spoons to make lollipops. You can melt some chocolate on the spoon and have your children decorate it with their favorite sprinkles!

    Put it in the freezer to cool, and serve it as a delicious treat to your child. You can even serve it to your friends and family.

    47. Butterfly Spoons

    Butterfly Spoons

    via : krokotak

    One of the first few things children learn how to draw is butterflies. It's a great way for them to master drawing lines and curves.

    Level up their art skills and teach them how to make 3D butterflies! You can use paper plates and pipe cleaners to complete this project.

    48. DIY Chrysanthemum Clock

    DIY Chrysanthemum Clock

    via : That's What Che Said

    Another awesome chrysanthemum project is this clock frame. If it isn't apparent enough, we love chrysanthemum projects because they look stunning.

    You can layer the spoon heads to create a luscious-looking frame. Just be sure to glue them properly, so they don't fall apart.

    49. Plastic Spoon Garden Markers

    Plastic Spoon Garden Markers

    via : Amanda Formaro

    You can never go wrong with making plastic spoon garden markers. There's always a need for it, especially if you love planting herbs.

    No need to play the guessing game of which herb is which! All you need to do is design the spoon and label them accordingly.

    50. DIY Christmas Candle Holders

    DIY Christmas Candle Holders

    via : StyleEnrichDIY

    Mark the start of the Christmas season with these beautiful and festive candle holders. Christmas trees aren't the only thing to help you feel the holiday spirit!

    Layer your spoon heads to make them look like flowers, and paint them with festive colors. Glue them together and make sure they can lay flat on your table.

    Plastic Spoon Crafts Conclusion

    Conclusion

    If you've got a ton of plastic spoons to spare, consider creating all these stunning ideas we've mentioned!

    The projects range from very easy to slightly hard — but we're sure you and your children are ready to take them on.

    We hope you enjoyed this article!

    If you'd like to do more crafts, you can also check out the different DIY wine cork projects, which are very fun and easy to do.

    More and more people today prefer the suburbs to the hustle and bustle of the big cities. 

    If you are working in  New York, you might be tired of the fast-paced life that the city offers. In case you are planning to move to greener pastures, New Jersey is the best place for you to consider. It is great for families as it has excellent public schools and a family-friendly atmosphere. 

    But New Jersey is no small space and is made up of numerous neighborhoods. So, to help you make a great choice, we have rounded up the best options starting from Princeton to Bridgewater. After reading this guide, you will not have difficulty selecting a place to create your next abode. 

    So, without delay, let’s dive right in! 

    Top Places To Live In New Jersey

    Best Places To Live In NJ

     

    1. Madison, New Jersey

    Madison, New Jersey

    Madison is the place to be if you are looking for a location in New Jersey that exudes a charming storybook vibe. People who like city life but not the regular monotony of it would really love this place. 

    Here, you will find a pretty downtown area filled with cozy cafes, restaurants, boutiques, and art galleries. The place is charming throughout the year! 

    However, during summer, it turns extremely beautiful with parks filled with happy kids and the aroma of hamburgers in the air. Other than that, every year during Memorial Day, you will see plenty of antique cars and can dance to the live music performances that take place. 

    This suburban Morris County borough is not idyllic, however. If you are looking to relocate, it would be a great idea to consider this place as there is almost a non-existent crime rate, great schools, and reasonable taxes. 

    All this topped with a small-town vibe is perfect for the ones who love the solitary calm of nature. 

    2. Chatham 

    Chatham

    Chatham is a top-notch school district in New Jersey. Most of the adult population in this area holds a college degree, so you can understand that education in this place is pretty good. 

    In this town, the children get the best of the public school systems and have the top educational tools at their disposal. Because of great education, the per capita income is pretty high and outperforms other places in New Jersey. 

    However, amenities like nightlife are not its USP but the advantages generally negate this problem. The crime rate is also pretty low, and you can engage in a range of outdoor activities of your liking. 

    3. Princeton, New Jersey

    Princeton, New Jersey

    In the last year, home sales in Princeton have gone up pretty high. This is because Princeton’s current influx for people from Brooklyn and Jersey City has driven up the demand and Princeton may soon become the next place to be!

    The population of this place is pretty diverse, with a mix of affluent professionals and some of the brightest minds in the country. Yes, brownie points for guessing we were going to talk about the IVY League university. 

    Students and young professionals from all across the world come to study at Princeton University, making it a melting pot of different cultures. 

    Not just that, the town even has excellent schools, which draw a lot of young families with kids. You will find plenty of restaurants, cafes, and bookstores in the area to spend quality time with your family. It's the best bet if you want to replicate city life but also want to enjoy the solitary calm of a suburban setting. 

    4. Montclair

    Montclair

    One of the most premier locations where you can stay in New Jersey is Montclair. This area is quite popular among affluent city buyers and it will take around 30 minutes to reach Montclair from Penn Station. 

    It is not just true that it is very close to New York City but also flaunts a livability score of 86 out of 100. If you are planning to start a new family or planning to move with your kids, this place is ideal as it has excellent private and public schools. Apart from that, there are big green parks where you can engage in a range of outdoor activities in your free time. 

    Also, if you are an art-lover, you are in for a treat because Montclair has some of the best hip art galleries, poetry clubs, and theaters. You are sure to find something that you like here. And when in Montclair, do not miss out on the yearly film festival that showcases some of the most notable works in the field. 

    The median home value hovers is pretty steep, and unless you have a big budget, owning a property in Montclair can be quite difficult. But if you have the budget, owning a space in this glamorous suburban town will be worth it. Who knows, you may even end up being neighbors with Stephen Colbert!

    Many people are shifting from New York to Montclair and you will see that most of the residents' cars have a New York license plate.

    5. Ridgewood

    Ridgewood

    To fulfill your suburban dream, Ridgewood is the place to be. This place offers a feeling of a tight-knit community to its residents, and that impresses the out-of-towners massively. It is the best neighborhood to arrange weekend family barbeque parties outdoors. 

    Moreover, it is important to note that you can arrange for some of the best education for your children here as there are many excellent schools. What further drives up the livability score is the fact that there are hardly any crimes in the town. 

    The only problem with the area is the fact that nightlife is almost non-existent in this area. Even the restaurants in this area aren’t that many, and you might not have plenty of options when planning dinner with your family. 

    But do not for a moment think that you will get bored here! There are beautiful trails and massive playgrounds to explore or spend time with your pet. You can even decide on dropping by the Schoolhouse Museum for a quick historical tour. There’s plenty of scope for outdoor recreation and it is a good space to raise children!

    6. Manalapan

    Manalapan

    The Jersey shore area has witnessed a large influx of New York City buyers as commuting to New York City has become pretty convenient. In August 2022, the average sales price jumped quite high in Manalapan because of that. 

    Manalapan is located around 45 miles from New York City and 15 miles from New Jersey beaches. So, you can understand why the real estate market exploded in Manalapan once the transport facilities got better! 

    The other reason you should consider moving to Manalapan is that the taxes here are relatively low compared to New Jersey. Even the interest rates on home mortgages are significantly lower. 

    7. Closter Bergen County

    Closter (Bergen County)

    New Jersey Realtors has seen that the closed sales in Closter have gone up pretty high in the last few years. The sale has multiplied in terms of both increased sales prices and volume. If you are wondering why Closter has witnessed this influx of people, let us break it down for you. 

    Over the years, transportation has become better, and this location has become pretty desirable because it is pretty easy to commute from Manhattan. Other than that, Closter has come up with charming downtown areas and now is a shopping district. In short, it has everything that a New Yorker wishes for!

    8. Sparta Sussex County

    Sparta (Sussex County)

    Local real estate agents have seen a recent spike in the influx of people to rural Sussex County. And honestly, we are not at all surprised. To combat the work pressure, more and more people are opting for places to stay where there is a little calm, and they are closer to nature. 

    When in Sussex, you can enjoy and be a part of the 11 private lake communities. Furthermore, there is the historic Lake Mohawk boardwalk and plaza where you can spend quality time with your family away from the hustle-bustle of the city. 

    Sparta is just 45 miles from Manhattan and provides excellent commute options. 

    9. Bridgewater Somerset County

    Bridgewater (Somerset County)

    Coldwell Banker realty noted that many homes in Somerset got sold the moment they entered the market. There has been a considerable increase in the number of under-contract homes in the last few years! 

    A particular real estate company stated that there had been an increase in buyers in Bridgewater. People are moving from northern New Jersey counties and even from New York City. People want to be away from the busy life in New York but also want to stay close enough to take advantage of all the facilities that Bridgewater puts on the table.

    Things To Know When Moving To New Jersey

    If you are on the lookout for properties in New Jersey, there are quite a few exciting things to note! And in this section, we are going to take a look at some of the factors that you should keep in mind before moving to New Jersey. 

    Let’s take a quick look!

    1. The Jersey Shore Is More Than What Is Portrayed On Television

    Unlike how it is portrayed on TV shows, the shore area is much more family-friendly. That said, you will also find some towns that cater to the demands of a much rowdier crowd. But most of the areas are pretty serene, and you can have a pleasant time with your family. 

    Going down the shore during the summer months is almost a mandatory summer tradition for people living in the state. With a 130-mile long beachline and beautiful boardwalks, we are not surprised why!

    2. Cost Of Living Is Considerably High

    Some people complain that everything in New Jersey seems to be a bit expensive. And honestly, they aren’t wrong! 

    Taxes on consumer goods and insurance charges seem to be pretty high in New Jersey. So, we were not really surprised to find out that the cost of living index sits at a whopping 127 when the national average is at 100. 

    Living in New Jersey is by no means cheap, but then again, the state boasts the highest median income in the country. 

    3. Get Familiar With Some Strange Traffic Laws

    In New Jersey, traffic circles are pretty popular, and you need to ensure that you learn to navigate them well before starting to drive here. What’s really interesting is that they have a thing called the Jersey Jughandle. 

    This is basically a ramp that is made on the right-hand side of the road that can be used to make left-hand turns when a route is super busy. This indeed enhances the driving efficiency manifold. But if you are from outside the state, it might take some time before you get familiar with the process. 

    Best Places To Live In NJ

    Final Words

    That’s all we have for you today!

    Hope you had a great time learning about the top 9 places that you can consider when moving to New Jersey. Honestly, New Jersey is pretty enormous, and there are many neighborhoods that you can consider for setting down. 

    While there are some that will provide you with a luxury location and lifestyle, there are others that offer the serene calm of the suburbs. The public school system is well-established all throughout the state, and you can easily find a good school for your kids. 

    If you have any other tips that we have missed out on, feel free to write in the comments section below. 

    Until next time, fare thee well!

    Related Articles 

    What is it like to live in Princeton, NJ?

    20 Most Expensive Houses In The US

    17 US Places Where You Can Find Free Land for Homesteading Today

    Cozy Attic Interiors That You Would Love To Live In

    Are you intrigued by all the noise that the Piper Home Security System has been making of late in the market?

    While going through the customer feedback, we wanted to find out what this security system brings to the table.

    Does it have the potential to be everyone’s go-to security device, or is it meant for specific use? Do the features justify the price tag? These are the questions that popped in our minds, and that’s when we decided to get our hands on it.

    So, sit tight as we bring you a detailed review of the much talked about Piper ‘All-in-One’ Security System.

    Without further ado, let’s begin!

    Piper Home Security System Review

    Piper Home Security System Review

    Piper classic All-in-One Home Security Bundle with Video...
    • Piper is a portable wireless home security and monitoring...
    • Get text/email alerts to your smartphone or tablet when...

    Why Buy This Product?

    The Piper NV Home Security system has grabbed eyeballs and earned a reputation for its efficient sensors and hassle-free installation. But there are a lot of other positives that make this product worth investing in. So, let’s check them out….

    1. Design

    Before we walk you through the software deets, it only makes sense to talk a bit about the overall design. The model that we reviewed comes with three main components: the main IP camera-cum-motion/temperature motion, one window/door sensor, and a smart outlet. You can plug the outlet into a single or series of lights, which will act as a visual alarm if an intrusion is detected.

    The IP camera uses a 3.4 MP, 180-degree fisheye lens that records HD images of your property in a wide-angle view (1080p video recording). Beyond that, the lens is surrounded by multiple Infrared LEDs, which equips the camera with night vision (hence the name ‘NV’’). Long story short, it gives you clear visuals even in low light.

    Complete with pan, tilt, and zoom features, the camera facilitates greater user control so that it doesn’t miss out on any detail during recording.

    We felt that the camera was slightly bigger than some of its competitors, but the wall-mounting kit makes it easy to conceal the unit on a high corner of the foyer. On the other hand, the door monitor came across as a bit small, possibly due to the absence of RFID sensors.

    1. Software And Integrations

    Much of this security system’s efficiency can be attributed to the Piper Home Security App that offers great customization for specific requirements. We tested it out on iOS 10 and were quite impressed!

    For one, you can actuate the alarm’s response upon detecting personal movement. Likewise, there’s the option of adjusting the camera’s sensitivity when it detects pet movement. This way, you don’t get unnecessary notifications if you’re away.

    On that note, you can choose to get the conventional push/SMS notifications, or even get updates via call and email.

    We also liked the timeline feature that gives you a detailed breakdown of motion detection. This, in turn, helps you define different alarming scenarios depending on the varied level of protection that you might need throughout the day.

    For instance, there’s an away mode that sets the alarm to a ‘high-alert’ and a ‘stay secure’ option that minimizes motion sensitivity. While the latter won’t wake up your neighbors at midnight, it’s still loud enough to notify you if the door opens without your authorization.

    Apart from that, there’s this ‘summary view’ in the app’s Home Vital section that displays multiple statistics. Simply put, it will tell you about changes in temperature, sound, humidity, and brightness of the room in which the camera is installed. So, you can keep your mold-related damage worries at bay. Now that’s what we call attention to detail!

    One thing that we’d like to mention is that the brand no longer uses an IFTTT service due to changes in the service’s policies. Instead, all models come with Z-wave compatibility.

    1. Installation

    Piper is known for the convenient installation of its security systems, and this unit is no exception. That being said, the setup did feel a bit different than usual. The door/window sensor has a stick-on design for better convenience. Its strong adhesive ensures that the motions don’t fall off even months after installation.

    Perhaps, the only time-consuming step is finding a suitable location to mount the sensor so that it can pick up the motion of an adult without being taken down by your bored pet. Plus, the wall-mounting kit does well to conceal the otherwise bulky unit.

    Overall, it shouldn’t take you more than 30 minutes to get the system out of the box and initiate operation with your smartphone. But if you reach a dead-end, Piper will be there to help you out with its dedicated customer support team.

    1. Subscription

    Apart from the Home NV Security System that we are talking about, there’s a classic variation that includes almost the same components. The only exception is it uses a no night-vision, 2mp camera.

    No matter which package you opt for, it includes one camera, three sensors, and unlimited app  access for a one-time fee. Moreover, there are no additional installation or activation charges, although you may have to pay for shipping, if applicable.

    1. Performance

    In a nutshell, the Piper Home Security System enables you to keep an eye on multiple parameters. Sure, motion sensing is undeniably important to track a burglary attempt, but changes in temperature or light can also be crucial in detecting any unwanted entry in your house.

    Furthermore, this unit has a two-way communication feature that allows parents to communicate with their children and vice versa at the push of a button. Hence, it also doubles up as a child monitor.

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    Despite showering it with praises, there are a couple of significant drawbacks that can’t be neglected. For starters, the Piper Home Security System is meant to be installed in one room, meaning one camera and three sensors can cover any one of your rooms.

    Although both the variations have a budget-friendly price tag, the system may become expensive if you have a larger area to secure as you will end up buying multiple units.

    This brings us to our primary concern- the lack of a professional monitoring system. As we’ve already mentioned, the system doesn’t require you to pay any additional charges, which correlates to the fact that there is no 24/7 monitoring feature.

    In case the batteries run out of juice or the sensors are disabled, there is no alternative other than manual fixing. And that’s not something you’d want while you’re away. Lastly, without the IFTTT integration, setting up your Trust Circle will become a rather tedious task.



    Pros

    • Loud, 105-decibel siren
    • Lighting and appliance control
    • Two-way audio
    • Environmental data tracking gives precise location
    • No monthly charges




    Cons

    • No 24/7 monitoring system
    • Absence of IFTTT integration can hamper utility



     

    Piper Home Security System Review FAQ

  • What Is The Type Of Power Source Required?

    The Piper Home Security System runs on both batteries and A/C power supply. Each package includes three AA alkaline batteries and a wall adapter for flexible use. While the NV-version has a 6-feet long power cord, the Piper classic comes with an 8-feet long cord. In addition, the entire unit requires a stable Wi-Fi connection.

  • What Is Z-Wave? How Does It Work?

    Z-Wave is nothing but an automated wireless network that has recently replaced the brand’s partnership with the web-based IFTTT service. It utilizes low energy radio waves to connect with other devices.

    If you have any automated device from the Z-wave suit, you can easily sync it up with the Piper Home Security System. This will enable you to control lighting and temperatures remotely, all from the convenience of a single app.

  • Can I Store The Recordings?

    Piper offers cloud storage for its users to store and sort up to 100 small clippings for reference purposes without any extra charge. Both live feed and stored videos are available on the mobile app.

  • How Many Pipers Can Be Added To One User Account?

    Users may add not more than five Piper Security Systems on a single user account. Moreover, all the Z-wave devices can be linked to the Piper Home Security App for easy control.

  • Is The System Pet-Friendly?

    Yes. The motion sensors are efficient enough to pick up human movement, but pet activities won’t make the alarm go off. Hence, there are minimal chances of false-alarm triggers.

  • Is There A Separate Night-Vision Indicator?

    For the NV-version, the camera/motion sensor emits an infrared glow when the said mode is activated. On top of that, the unit automatically detects ambient lighting and switches over to the dark mode for user convenience.

  • Are There Any Terms And Conditions To Be Aware Of?

    If you’re not satisfied with the purchase, Piper offers a 30-day return policy. But in that case, the client has to pay a ‘restocking fee’ during return, which is 10% of the equipment charge. A one-year warranty covers design faults, repairs, and replacement of defective components.

    This system is not meant for professional monitoring, and the Terms Of Use state that the service ‘shouldn’t be relied upon for life safety’. Besides, the Privacy Policy mentions that Piper collects user information through the mobile app, website, and payment gateways.

  • Piper Home Security System Verdict

    Piper Home Security System Verdict

    So, is the Piper Home Security System capable of doing it all?

    If you ask us, we’d say that the system is very suitable for medium-duty monitoring. But as far as serious security is concerned, there are better models in the market. The thing to keep in mind here is that even if its affordable pricing fits tight-budget needs, security is something most homeowners won’t mind spending for.

    So, if you don’t live in a decently populated area where the neighbors will be alarmed immediately with the alarm, we suggest looking elsewhere. That being said, it’s a good choice if you want to keep an eye on your pets, the children, or the house help.

    This brings us to the end of today’s guide. Do let us know your thoughts on our verdict in the comments section below.

    Till next time, stay safe!

    Related Articles

    Piper Home Security System

    Guardian Protection Home Security

    9 Best Shed Alarm Systems for Enhanced Security

    TrackR vs. Tile